Journal of Discourses
                                Journal of Discourses
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1
                               Journal of Discourses,
                                      Volume 1
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, January 16, 1853
                           Brigham Young, January 16, 1853
                                      SALVATION
              A discourse delivered by President Brigham Young, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
                       Great Salt Lake City, January 16, 1853.
          1
          The plan of salvation, or, in other words, the redemption of
          fallen beings, is a subject that should occupy the attention of
          all intelligence that pertains to fallen beings. I do not like
          the term fallen beings, but I will say, subjected intelligence,
          which term suits me better--subjected to law, order, rule, and
          government. All intelligences are deeply engaged in this grand
          object; not, however, having a correct understanding of the true
          principle thereof, they wander to and fro, some to the right, and
          some to the left. There is not a person in this world, who is
          endowed with a common share of intellect, but is laboring with
          all his power for salvation. Men vary in their efforts to obtain
          that object, still their individual conclusions are, that they
          will ultimately secure it. The merchant, for instance, seeks with
          unwearied diligence, by night and by day, facing misfortunes with
          a determined and persevering resistance, enduring losses by sea
          and by land, with an unshaken patience, to amass a sufficient
          amount of wealth to enable him to settle calmly down in the midst
          of plenty in some opulent city, walk in the higher classes of
          society, and perchance receive a worldly title, or worldly honor,
          and enjoy a freedom from all anxiety of business, and constraint
          by poverty, throughout the remainder of his life. He then
          supposes he has obtained salvation.
          2
          Descend from the busy, wealth-seeking middle classes, to the
          humbler grade of society, and follow them in their various
          occupations and pursuits, and each one of them is seeking
          earnestly that which he imagines to be salvation. The poor,
          ragged, trembling mendicant, who is forced by hunger and cold to
          drag his feeble body from under some temporary shelter, to seek a
          bit of bread, or a coin from his more fortunate fellow-mortal, if
          he can only obtain a few crusts of bread to satisfy the
          hunger-worm that gnaws his vitals, and a few coppers to pay his
          lodgings, he has attained to the summit of his expectations, to
          what he sought for salvation, and he is comparatively happy, but
          his happiness vanishes with the shades of night, and his misery
          comes with the morning light. From the match-maker up to the
          tradesman, all have an end in view, which they suppose will bring
          to them salvation. King, courtier, commanders, officers, and
          common soldiers, the commodore, and sailor before the mast, the
          fair-skinned Christian, and the dark-skinned savage, all, in
          their respective grades and spheres of action, have a certain
          point in view, which, if they can obtain, they suppose will put
          them in possession of salvation.
          2
          The Latter-day Saint, who is far from the bosom of the Church,
          whose home is in distant climes, sighs, and earnestly prays each
          day of his life for the Lord to open his way, that he may mingle
          with his brethren in Zion, for he supposes that his happiness
          would then be complete, but in this his expectations will be in a
          measure vain, for happiness that is real and lasting in its
          nature cannot be enjoyed by mortals, for it is altogether out of
          keeping with this transitory state.
          2
          If a man's capacity be limited to the things of this world, if he
          reach no further than he can see with his eyes, feel with his
          hands, and understand with the ability of the natural man, still
          he is as earnestly engaged in securing his salvation, as others
          are, who possess a superior intellect, and are also pursuing the
          path of salvation, in their estimation, though it result in
          nothing more than a good name, or the honors of this world. Each,
          according to his capacity--to the natural organization of the
          human system, which is liable to be operated upon by the
          circumstances and influences by which it is surrounded, is as
          eager to obtain that which he supposes is salvation, as I am to
          obtain salvation in the Eternal world.
          2
          The object of a true salvation, correctly and minutely
          understood, changes the course of mankind. Persons who are taught
          by their teachers, friends, and acquaintances, are traditionated,
          from their youth up, into the belief that there is no God, or
          intelligent beings, other than those that they see with the
          natural eye, or naturally comprehend; that there is no hereafter;
          that at death, all life and intelligence are annihilated. Such
          persons are as firm in their belief, and as strenuous in
          argument, in support of those doctrines, as others are in the
          belief of the existence of an Eternal God. The early customs and
          teachings of parents and friends, to a greater or less degree,
          influence the minds of children, but when they are disposed to
          inquire at the hands of Him who has eternal intelligence to
          impart to them, when their understandings are enlarged, when
          their minds are enlightened by the Spirit of truth, so that they
          can see things that are unseen by the natural eye, they may then
          be corrected in their doctrine and belief, and in their manner of
          life, but not until then.
          3
          How difficult it is to teach the natural man, who comprehends
          nothing more than that which he sees with the natural eye! How
          hard it is for him to believe! How difficult would be the task to
          make the philosopher, who, for many years, has argued himself
          into the belief that his spirit is no more after his body sleeps
          in the grave, believe that his intelligence came from eternity,
          and is as eternal, in its nature, as the elements, or as the
          Gods. Such doctrine by him would be considered vanity and
          foolishness, it would be entirely beyond his comprehension. It is
          difficult, indeed, to remove an opinion or belief into which he
          has argued himself from the mind of the natural man. Talk to him
          about angels, heavens, God, immortality, and eternal lives, and
          it is like sounding brass, or a tinkling cymbal to his ears; it
          has no music to him; there is nothing in it that charms his
          senses, soothes his feelings, attracts his attention, or engages
          his affections, in the least; to him it is all vanity. To say
          that the human family are not seeking salvation, is contrary to
          my experience, and to the experience of every other person with
          whom I have any acquaintance. They are all for salvation, some in
          one way, and some in another; but all is darkness and confusion.
          If the Lord does not speak from heaven, and touch the eyes of
          their understanding by His Spirit, who can instruct, guide them
          to good? who can give them words of eternal life? It is not in
          the power of man to do it; but when the Lord gives His Spirit to
          a person, or to a people, they can then hear, believe, and be
          instructed. An Elder of Israel may preach the principles of the
          Gospel, from first to last, as they were taught to him, to a
          congregation ignorant of them; but if he does not do it under the
          influence of the Spirit of the Lord, he cannot enlighten that
          congregation on those principles, it is impossible. Job said that
          "There is a spirit in man, and the inspiration of the Almighty
          giveth them understanding." Unless we enjoy that understanding in
          this probation, we cannot grow or increase, we cannot be made
          acquainted with the principles of truth and righteousness so as
          to become exalted. Admit that the Spirit of the Lord should give
          us understanding, what would it prove to us? It would prove to
          me, at least, and what I may safely say to this congregation,
          that Zion is here. Whenever we are disposed to give ourselves
          perfectly to righteousness, to yield all the powers and faculties
          of the soul (which is the spirit and the body, and it is there
          where righteousness dwells); when we are swallowed up in the will
          of Him who has called us; when we enjoy the peace and the smiles
          of our Father in Heaven, the things of His Spirit, and all the
          blessings we are capacitated to receive and improve upon, then
          are we in Zion, that is Zion. What will produce the opposite?
          Hearkening and giving way to evil, nothing else will.
          4
          If a community of people are perfectly devoted to the cause of
          righteousness, truth, light, virtue, and every principle and
          attribute of the holy Gospel, we may say of that people's the
          ancient Apostle said to his brethren, "Know ye not your own
          selves, how that Jesus Christ is in you, except ye be
          reprobates;" there is a throne for the Lord Almighty to sit and
          reign upon, there is a resting place for the Holy Ghost, there is
          a habitation of the Father and the Son. We are the temples of
          God, but when we are overcome of evil by yielding to temptation,
          we deprive ourselves of the privilege of the Father, the Son, and
          the Holy Ghost, taking up their abode and dwelling with us. We
          are the people, by our calling and profession, and ought to be by
          our daily works, of whom it should be truly said, "Ye are the
          temples of our God." Let me ask, what is there to prevent any
          person in this congregation from being so blessed, and becoming a
          holy temple fit for the in-dwelling of the Holy Ghost? Has any
          being in heaven or on earth done aught to prevent you from
          becoming so blessed? No, but why the people are not so privileged
          I will leave you to judge. I would to God that every soul who
          professes to be a Latter-day Saint was of that character, a holy
          temple for the in-dwelling of the Father, the Son, and the Holy
          Ghost, but it is not so. Is there any individual within the sound
          of my voice to day, that has received the Holy Ghost through the
          principles of the Gospel, and at the same time has not received a
          love for them? I will answer that question. Wait and see who it
          is that falls out by the way; who it is in whom the seed of truth
          has been sown, but has not taken root; and then you will know the
          individuals who have received the truth, but have never received
          a love of it--they do not love it for itself. What a delightful
          aspect would this community present if all men and women, old and
          young, were disposed to leave off their own sins and follies, and
          overlook those of their neighbors; if they would cease watching
          their neighbors for iniquity, and watch that they themselves
          might be free from it! if they were trying with all their powers
          to sanctify the Lord in their hearts, and would prove, by their
          actions, that they had received the truth and the love of it! if
          all individuals would watch themselves, that they do not speak
          against the Father, the Son, the Holy Ghost, nor in short against
          any being in heaven or on earth. Strange as this may appear,
          there have been men in this Church that have done it, and
          probably will be again! If this people would be careful not to do
          anything to displease the spirits of those who have lived on the
          earth, and have been justified, and have gone to rest, and would
          so conduct themselves, that no reasonable being upon the face of
          the earth could find fault with them, what kind of society should
          we have? Why every man's mouth would be filled with blessings,
          every man's hand would be put forth to do good, and every woman
          and child in all their intercourse would be praising God, and
          blessing each other. Would not Zion be here? It would. What
          hinders you from doing this? What is the Lord or the people doing
          to cause this one and that one to commit sin with a high hand, in
          secret and in the open streets?
          4
          If Elders of Israel use language which is not proper for the lips
          of a Saint, such Elders are under condemnation, and the wrath of
          God abides upon them, those who do it have not the love of truth
          in their hearts, they do not love and honor the truth because it
          is the truth, but because it is powerful, and they wish to join
          with the strongest party. Do they love light because it is light?
          virtue because it is virtue? righteousness because it is
          righteousness? No. But these principles are almighty in their
          influence, and like the tornado in the forest, they sweep all
          before them, no argument can weigh against them, all the
          philosophy, knowledge, and wisdom of men may be set in array
          against them, but they are like chaff before a mighty wind, or
          like the morning dew before the sun in its strength--such Elders
          embrace truth because it is all-powerful. When a man of God
          preaches the principles of the Gospel, all things give way before
          it, and some embrace it because it is so mighty. But by and bye
          those characters will fall out by the way, because the soil has
          not depth to nourish the seeds of truth. They receive it, but not
          the love of it; it dies, and they turn away. If every person who
          has embraced the Gospel would love it as he loves his life, would
          not society wear a different aspect from that of the present?
          5
          I do not intend to enter into a detailed account of the acts of
          the people, they are themselves acquainted with them; people know
          how they themselves talk; and how their neighbors talk; how
          husband and wife agree in their own houses, and with their
          neighbors; and how parents and children dwell together. I need
          not tell these things, but if every heart were set upon doing
          right, we then should have Zion here. I will give you my reason
          for thinking so. It is because I have had it with me ever since I
          was baptized into this kingdom. I have not been without it from
          that day to this. I have therefore a good reason for the
          assertion I have made. I live and walk in Zion every day, and so
          do thousands of others in this Church and kingdom, they carry
          Zion with them, they have one of their own, and it is increasing,
          growing, and spreading continually. Suppose it spreads from heart
          to heart, from neighborhood to neighborhood, from city to city,
          and from nation to nation, how long would it be before the earth
          would become revolutionized, and the wheat gathered from among
          the tares. The wheat and tares, however, must grow together until
          harvest. I am not, therefore, disposed to separate them yet, for
          if we pluck up the tares before the harvest, we may destroy some
          of the good seed, therefore let them grow together, and by and
          bye the harvest will come.
          5
          There is another thing, brethren, which I wish you to keep
          constantly before your minds, that is with regard to your travels
          in life. You have read, in the Scriptures, that the children of
          men will be judged according to their works, whether they be good
          or bad, If a man's days be filled up with good works, he will be
          rewarded accordingly. On the other hand, if his days lie filled
          up with evil actions, he will receive according to those acts.
          This proves that we are in a state of exaltation, it proves that
          we can add to our knowledge, wisdom, and strength, and that we
          can add power to every attribute that God has given us. When will
          the people realize that this is the period of time in which they
          should commence to lay the foundation of their exaltation for
          time and eternity, that this is the time to conceive, and bring
          forth from the heart fruit to the honor and glory of God, as
          Jesus did--grow as he did from the child, become perfect, and be
          prepared to be raised to salvation? You will find that this
          probation is the place to increase upon every little we receive,
          for the Lord gives line upon line to the children of men. When He
          reveals the plan of salvation, then is the time to fill up our
          days with good works.
          5
          Let us fill up our days with usefulness, do good to each other,
          and cease from all evil. Let every evil person forsake his
          wickedness. If he be wicked in his words, or in his dealings, let
          him forsake those practices, and pursue a course of
          righteousness. Let every man and woman do this, and peace and joy
          will be the result.
          5
          A few words more upon the subject of the eternal existence of the
          soul. It is hard for mankind to comprehend that principle. The
          philosophers of the world will concede that the elements of which
          you and I are composed are eternal, yet they believe that there
          was a time when there was no God. They cannot comprehend how it
          is that God can be eternal. Let me ask this congregation, Can you
          realise the eternity of your own existence? Can you realise that
          the intelligence which you receive is eternal? I can comprehend
          this, just as well as I can that I am now in possession of it. It
          is as easy for me to comprehend that it will exist eternally, as
          that anything else will. I wish to impress upon your minds the
          reality that when the body which is organized for intelligence to
          dwell in, dies, and returns to its mother earth, all the
          feelings, sensibilities, faculties, and powers of the spirit are
          still alive, they never die, but in the absence of the body are
          more acute. They are organized for an eternal existence. If this
          congregation could comprehend that the intelligence that is in
          them is eternal in its nature and existence; if they could
          realize that when Saints pass through the vail, they are not
          dead, but have been laying the foundation in these tabernacles
          for exaltation, laying the foundation to become Gods, even the
          sons of God, and for crowns which they will yet receive--they
          would receive the truth in the love of it, live by it, and
          continue in it, until they receive all knowledge and wisdom,
          until they grow into eternity, and have the vail taken from
          before their eyes, to behold the handiworks of God among all
          people, His goings forth among the nations of the earth, and to
          discover the rule and law by which He governs. Then could they
          say of a truth, We acknowledge the hand of God in all things, all
          is right, Zion is here, in our own possession.
          6
          I have thus summed up, in a broken manner, that which I desired
          to speak. We are not able to comprehend all things, but we can
          continue to learn and grow, until all will be perfectly clear to
          our minds, which is a great privilege to enjoy--the blessing of
          an eternal increase. And the man or woman who lives worthily is
          now in a state of salvation.
          6
          Now, brethren, love the truth, and put a stop to every species of
          folly. How many there are who come to me to find fault with, and
          enter complaints against, their brethren, for some trifling
          thing, when I can see, in a moment, that they have received no
          intentional injury! They have no compassion on their brethren,
          but, having passed their judgment, insist that the criminal shall
          be punished. And why? Because he does not exactly come up to
          their standard of right and wrong! They feel to measure him by
          the "Iron Bedstead principle"--"if you are too long, you must be
          cut off; if too short, you must be stretched." Now this is the
          height of folly. I find that I have enough to do to watch myself.
          It is as much as I can do to get right, deal right, and act
          right. If we all should do this, there would be no difficulty,
          but in every man's mouth would lie "May the Lord bless you." I
          feel happy, as I always told you. Brother Kimball has known me
          thirty years, twenty one of which I have been in this Church;
          others have known me twenty years; and there are some here who
          knew me in England; I had Zion with me then, and I brought it
          with me to America again, and I now appeal to every man and woman
          if I have not had Zion with me from first entering into the
          Church, to the present time! Light cleaves to light, and truth to
          truth. May God bless you. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Parley
          P. Pratt, April 7, 1853
                           Parley P. Pratt, April 7, 1853
                              SPIRITUAL COMMUNICATION.
           A Sermon Delivered by Elder P. P. Pratt, before the Conference
                       at Great Salt Lake City, April 7, 1853.
          6
          I was led to reflection on this subject, not only by my
          acquaintance with the present state of the world, and the
          movements and powers which seem new to many, but because this
          text, written by Isaiah so many centuries since, and copied by
          Nephi ages before the birth of Jesus Christ, seemed as
          appropriate, and as directly adapted to the present state of
          things, as if written but yesterday, or a year since.
          6
          "Should not a people seek unto their God, for the living to hear
          from the dead?" is a question by the Prophet, and at a time when
          they shall invite you to seek unto those familiar with spirits,
          and to wizards, &c., or in other words, to magnetizers, rappers,
          clairvoyants, writing mediums &c. When they shall say these
          things unto you, then is the time to consider the question of
          that ancient Prophet--"Should not a people seek unto their God,
          for the living to hear from the dead?"
          7
          We hear much, of late, about visions, trances, clairvoyance,
          mediums of communication with the spirit world, writing mediums,
          &c., by which the world of spirits is said to have found means to
          communicate with spirits in the flesh. They are not working in a
          corner. The world is agitated on these subjects. Religious
          ministers are said to preach, editors to write and print, judges
          to judge, &c., by this kind of inspiration. It is brought into
          requisition to develop the sciences, to detect crime, and in
          short to mingle in all the interests of life.
          7
          In the first place, what are we talking about, when we touch the
          question of the living hearing from the dead? It is a saying,
          that "dead men tell no tales." If this is not in the Bible, it is
          somewhere else; and if it be true, it is just as good as if it
          were in the Bible.
          7
          The Sadducees in the time of Jesus, believed there were no such
          things as angels or spirits, or existence in an other sphere;
          that when an individual was dead, it was the final end of the
          workings of his intellectual being, that the elements were
          dissolved, and mingled with the great fountain from which they
          emanated, which was the end of individuality, or conscious
          existence.
          7
          Jesus, in reply to them, took up the argument from the
          Scriptures, or history of the ancient fathers, venerated by
          reason of antiquity, in hopes, by this means, to influence the
          Sadducees, or at least the Pharisees and others, by means so
          powerful and so well adapted to the end in view.
          7
          Said he, God has declared Himself the God of Abraham, Isaac, and
          Jacob. Now God is not the God of the dead, but the God of the
          living; as much as to say that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were not
          dead, but living; that they had never been dead at all, but had
          always been living; that they never did die, in the sense of the
          word that these Sadducees supposed, but were absolutely alive.
          7
          Now if intelligent beings, who once inhabited flesh, such as our
          fathers, mothers, wives children, &c., have really died, and are
          now dead in the sense of the word, as understood by the ancient
          Sadducees, or modern Atheist, then it is in vain to talk of
          converse with the dead. All controversy, in that case, is at an
          end on the subject of correspondence with the dead, because an
          intelligence must exist before it can communicate. If these
          individuals are dead, in the sense that the human body dies, then
          there is no communication from them. This we know, because of our
          own observation and experience. We have seen many dead bodies,
          but have never known of a single instance of any intelligence
          communicated therefrom.
          7
          Jesus, in his argument with the Sadducees, handled the subject
          according to the strictest principles of ancient and modern
          theology, and true philosophy. He conveyed the idea in the
          clearest terms, that an individual intelligence or identity could
          never die.
          7
          The outward tabernacle, inhabited by a spirit, returns to the
          element from which it emanated. But the thinking being, the
          individual, active agent or identity that inhabited that
          tabernacle, never ceased to exist, to think, act, live, move, or
          have a being; never ceased to exercise those sympathies,
          affections, hopes, and aspirations, which are founded in the very
          nature of intelligences, being the inherent and invaluable
          principles of their eternal existence.
          7
          No, they never cease. They live, move, think, act, converse,
          feel, love, hate, believe, doubt, hope, and desire.
          8
          But what are they, if they are not flesh and bones? What are
          they, if they are not tangible to our gross organs of sense? Of
          what are they composed, that we can neither see, hear, nor handle
          them, except we are quickened, or our organs touched by the
          principles of vision, clairvoyance, or spiritual sight? What are
          they? Why, they are organized intelligences. What are they made
          of? They are made of the element which we call spirit, which is
          as much an element of material existence, as earth, air,
          electricity, or any other tangible substance recognized by man;
          but so subtle, so refined is its nature, that it is not tangible
          to our gross organs. It is invisible to us, unless we are
          quickened by a portion of the same element; and, like
          electricity, and several other substances, it is only known or
          made manifest to our senses by its effects. For instance,
          electricity is not always visible to us, but its existence is
          made manifest by its operations upon the wire, or upon the
          nerves. We cannot see the air, but we feel its effects, and
          without it we cannot breathe.
          8
          If a wire were extended in connection with the equatorial line of
          our globe in one entire circle of 25,000 miles in extent, the
          electric fluid would convey a token from one intelligence to
          another, the length of the entire circle, in a very small portion
          of a second, or, we will say in the twinkling of an eye. This,
          then, proves that the spiritual fluid or element called
          electricity is an actual, physical, and tangible power, and is as
          much a real and tangible substance, as the ponderous rocks which
          were laid on yesterday in the foundation of our contemplated
          Temple.
          8
          It is true that this subtle fluid or spiritual element is endowed
          with the powers of locomotion in a far greater degree than the
          more gross or solid elements of nature; that its refined
          particles penetrate amid the other elements with greater ease,
          and meet with less resistance from the air or other substances,
          than would the more gross elements. Hence its speed, or superior
          powers of motion.
          8
          Now let us apply this philosophy to all the degrees of spiritual
          element, from electricity, which may lie assumed to be one of the
          lowest or more gross elements of spiritual matter, up through all
          the gradations of the invisible fluids, till we arrive at a
          substance so holy, so pure, so endowed with intellectual
          attributes and sympathetic affections, that it may be said to be
          on a par, or level, in its attributes, with man.
          8
          Let a given quantity of this element, thus endowed, or
          capacitated, be organized in the size and form of man, let every
          organ be developed, formed, and endowed, precisely after the
          pattern or model of man's outward or fleshly tabernacle--what
          would we call this individual, organized portion of the spiritual
          element?
          8
          We would call it a spiritual body, an individual intelligence, an
          agent endowed with life, with a degree of independence, or
          inherent will, with the powers of motion, of thought, and with
          the attributes of moral, intellectual, and sympathetic affections
          and emotions.
          8
          We would conceive of it as possessing eyes to see, ears to hear,
          hands to handle; as in possession of the organ of taste, of
          smelling, and of speech.
          8
          Such beings are we, when we have laid off this outward tabernacle
          of flesh. We are in every way interested, in our relationships,
          kindred ties, sympathies, affections, and hopes, as if we had
          continued to live, but had stepped aside, and were experiencing
          the loneliness of absence for a season. Our ancestors, our
          posterity, to the remotest ages of antiquity, or of future time,
          are all brought within the circle of our sphere of joys, sorrows,
          interests, or expectations; each forms a link in the great chain
          of life, and in the science of mutual salvation, improvement, and
          exaltation through the blood of the Lamb.
          9
          Our prospects, hopes, faith, charity, enlightenment, improvement,
          in short, all our interests, are blended, and more or less
          influenced by the acts of each.
          9
          Is this the kind of being that departs from our sight when its
          earthly tabernacle is laid off, and the vail of eternity is
          lowered between us? Yes, verily. Where then does it go?
          9
          To heaven, says one; to the eternal world of glory, says another;
          to the celestial kingdom, to inherit thrones and crowns, in all
          the fulness of the presence of the Father, and of Jesus Christ,
          says a third.
          9
          Now, my dear hearers, these things are not so. Nothing of the
          kind. Thrones, kingdoms, crowns, principalities, and powers, in
          the celestial and eternal worlds, and the fulness of the presence
          of the Father, and of His Son Jesus Christ, are reserved for
          resurrected beings, who dwell in immortal flesh. The world of
          resurrected beings, and the world of spirits, are two distinct
          spheres, as much so as our own sphere is distinct from that of
          the spirit world.
          9
          Where then does the spirit go, on its departure from its earthly
          tabernacle? It passes to the next sphere of human existence,
          called the world of spirits, a vail being drawn between us in the
          flesh, and that world of spirits. Well, says one, is there no
          more than one place in the spirit world? Yes, there are many
          places and degrees in that world, as in this. Jesus Christ, when
          absent from his flesh, did not ascend to the Father, to be
          crowned, and enthroned in power. Why? Because he had not yet a
          resurrected body, and had therefore a mission to perform in
          another sphere. Where then did he go? To the world of spirits, to
          wicked, sinful spirits, who died in their sins, being swept off
          by the flood of Noah. The thief on the cross, who died at the
          same time, also went to the same world, and to the same
          particular place in the same world, for he was a sinner, and
          would of course go to the prison of the condemned, there to await
          the ministry of that Gospel which had failed to reach his case
          while on the earth.
          9
          How many other places Jesus might have visited while in the
          spirit world is not for me to say, but there was a moment in
          which the poor, uncultivated, ignorant thief was with him in that
          world. And as he commenced, though late, to repent while on the
          earth, we have reason to hope that that moment was improved by
          our Saviour, in ministering to him that Gospel which he had no
          opportunity to teach to him, while expiring on the cross. "This
          day shalt thou be with me in Paradise," said Jesus, or, in other
          words, this day shalt thou be with me in the next sphere of
          existence--the world of spirits.
          9
          Now mark the difference. Jesus was there, as a preacher of
          righteousness, as one holding the keys of Apostleship, or
          Priesthood, anointed to preach glad tidings to the meek, to bind
          up the broken hearted, to preach liberty to the captive, and the
          opening of the prison to them that were bound. What did the thief
          go there for? He went there in a state of ignorance, and sin,
          being uncultivated, unimproved, and unprepared for salvation. He
          went there to be taught, and to complete that repentance, which
          in a dying moment he commenced on the earth.
          10
          He had beheld Jesus expire on the cross, and he had implored him
          to remember him when he should come into possession of his
          kingdom. The Saviour under these extreme circumstances, did not
          then teach him the Gospel, but referred him to the next
          opportunity, when they should meet in the spirit world. If the
          thief thus favoured continued to improve, he is no doubt waiting
          in hope for the signal to be given, at the sound of the next
          trump, for him to leave the spirit world, and to re-enter the
          fleshly tabernacle, and to ascend to a higher degree of felicity.
          Jesus Christ, on the other hand, departed from the spirit world
          on the third day, and re-entered his fleshly tabernacle, in which
          he ascended, and was crowned at the right hand of the Father.
          Jesus Christ then, and the thief on the cross, have not dwelt
          together in the same kingdom or place, for this eighteen hundred
          years, nor have we proof that they have seen each other during
          that time.
          10
          To say that Jesus Christ dwells in the world of spirits, with
          those whose bodies are dead, would not be the truth. He is not
          there. He only staid there till the third day. He then returned
          to his tabernacle, and ministered among the sons of earth for
          forty days, where he ate, drank, talked, preached, reasoned out
          of the Scriptures, commissioned, commanded, blessed, etc. Why did
          he do this? Because he had ascended on high, and been crowned
          with all power in heaven and on earth, therefore he had authority
          to do all these things.
          10
          So much then for that wonderful question that has been asked by
          our Christian neighbors, so many thousand times, in the abundance
          of their charity for those who, like the thief on the cross, die
          in their sins, or without baptism, and the other Gospel
          ordinances.
          10
          The question naturally arises--Do all the people who die without
          the Gospel hear it as soon as they arrive in the world of
          spirits? To illustrate this, let us look at the dealings of God
          with the people of this world. "What can we reason but from what
          we know?" We know and under stand the things of this world, in
          some degree, because they are visible, and we are daily
          conversant with them. Do all the people in this world hear the
          Gospel as soon as they are capable of understanding? No, indeed,
          but very few in comparison have heard it at all.
          10
          Ask the poor Lamanites who have, with their fathers before them,
          inhabited these mountains for a thousand years, whether they have
          ever heard the Gospel, and they will tell you nay. But why not?
          Is it not preached on the earth? Yea, verily, but the earth is
          wide, and circumstances differ very greatly among its different
          inhabitants. The Jews once had the Gospel, with its Apostleship,
          powers, and blessings offered unto them, but they rejected it as
          a people, and for this reason it was taken from them, and thus
          many generations of them have been born, and have lived and died
          without it. So with the Gentiles, and so with the Lamanites. God
          has seen proper to offer the Gospel, with its Priesthood and
          powers, in different ages and countries, but it has been as often
          rejected, and therefore withdrawn from the earth. The consequence
          is that the generations of men have, for many ages, come and gone
          in ignorance of its principles, and the glorious hopes they
          inspire.
          10
          Now these blessings would have continued on the earth, and would
          have been enjoyed in all the ages and nations of man, but for the
          agency of the people. They chose their own forms of government,
          laws, institutions, religions, rulers, and priests, instead of
          yielding to the influence and guidance of the chosen vessels of
          the Lord, who were appointed to instruct and govern them.
          11
          Now, how are they situated in the spirit world? If we reason from
          analogy, we should at once conclude that things exist there after
          the same pattern. I have not the least doubt but there are
          spirits there who have dwelt there a thousand years, who, if we
          could converse with them face to face, would be found as ignorant
          of the truths, the ordinances, powers, keys, Priesthood,
          resurrection, and eternal life of the body, in short, as ignorant
          of the fulness of the Gospel, with its hopes and consolations, as
          is the Pope of Rome, or the Bishop of Canterbury, or as are the
          Chiefs of the Indian tribes of Utah.
          11
          And why this ignorance in the spirit world? Because a portion of
          the inhabitants thereof are found unworthy of the consolations of
          the Gospel, until the fulness of time, until they have suffered
          in hell, in the dungeons of darkness, or the prisons of the
          condemned, amid the buffetings of fiends, and malicious and lying
          spirits.
          11
          As in earth, so in the spirit world. No person can enter into the
          privileges of the Gospel, until the keys are turned, and the
          Gospel opened by those in authority, for all which there is a
          time, according to the wise dispensations of justice and mercy.
          11
          It was many, many centuries before Christ lived in the flesh,
          that a whole generation, eight souls excepted, were cut off by
          the flood. What became of them? I do not know exactly all their
          history in the spirit world. But this much I know--they have
          heard the Gospel from the lips of a crucified Redeemer, and have
          the privilege of being judged according to men in the flesh. As
          these persons were ministered to by Jesus Christ, after he had
          been put to death, it is reasonable to suppose that they had
          waited all that time, without the knowledge or privileges of the
          Gospel.
          11
          How long did they wait? You may reckon for yourselves. The long
          ages, centuries, thousands of years which intervened between the
          flood of Noah and the death of Christ. Oh! the weariness, the
          tardy movement of time! the lingering ages for a people to dwell
          in condemnation, darkness, ignorance, and despondency, as a
          punishment for their sins. For they had been filled with violence
          while on the earth in the flesh, and had rejected the preaching
          of Noah, and the Prophets which were before him.
          11
          Between these two dispensations, so distant from each other in
          point of time, they were left to linger without hope, and without
          God, in the spirit world; and similar has been the fate of the
          poor Jew, the miserable Lamanite, and many others in the flesh.
          Between the commission and ministry of the Former and Latter Day
          Saints, and Apostles, there has been a long and dreary night of
          darkness. Some fifteen to seventeen centuries have passed away,
          in which the generations of man have lived without the keys of
          the Gospel.
          11
          Whether in the flesh, or in the spirit world, is this not hell
          enough? Who can imagine a greater hell than that before our eyes,
          in the circumstances of the poor, miserable, degraded Indian and
          his ancestors, since the keys of the Gospel were taken from them
          some fifteen hundred years ago? Those who had the Gospel in the
          former dispensations, and were made partakers of its spirit, its
          knowledge, and its powers, and then turned away, and became the
          enemies of God, and of His Saints, the malicious and wilful
          opposers of that which they knew to be true, have no forgiveness
          in this world, neither in the spirit world, which is the world
          next to come.
          11
          Such apostates seek, in all dispensations to bring destruction on
          the innocent, and to shed innocent blood, or consent thereto. For
          such, I again repeat, I know no forgiveness. Their children, who,
          by the conduct of such fathers, have been plunged into ignorance
          and misery for so many ages, and have lived without the
          privileges of the Gospel, will look down upon such a parentage
          with mingled feelings of horror, contempt, reproach, and pity, as
          the agents who plunged their posterity into the depths of misery
          and woe.
          12
          Think of those swept away by the flood in the days of Noah. Did
          they wait a long time in prison? Forty years! O what a time to be
          imprisoned What do you say to a hundred, a thousand, two
          thousand, three or four thousand years to wait? Without what?
          Without even a clear idea or hope of a resurrection from the
          dead, without the broken heart being bound up, the captive
          delivered, or the door of the prison opened. Did not they wait?
          Yes they did, until Christ was put to death in the flesh.
          12
          Now what would have been the result, if they had repented while
          in the flesh at the preaching of Noah? Why, they would have died
          in hope of a glorious resurrection, and would have enjoyed the
          society of the redeemed, and lived in happiness in the spirit
          world, till the resurrection of the Son of God. Then they would
          have received their bodies, and would have ascended with him,
          amid thrones, principalities, and powers in heavenly places.
          12
          I will suppose, in the spirit world, a grade of spirits of the
          lowest order, composed of murderers, robbers, thieves,
          adulterers, drunkards, and persons ignorant, uncultivated, &c.,
          who are in prison, or in hell, without hope, without God, and
          unworthy as yet of Gospel instruction. Such spirits, if they
          could communicate, would not tell you of the resurrection or of
          any of the Gospel truths, for they know nothing about them. They
          would not tell you about heaven, or Priesthood, for in all their
          meanderings in the world of spirits, they have never been
          privileged with the ministry of a holy Priest. If they should
          tell all the truth they possess, they could not tell much.
          12
          Take another class of spirits--pious, well-disposed men; for
          instance, the honest Quaker, Presbyterian, or other sectarian,
          who, although honest, and well disposed, had not, while in the
          flesh, the privilege of the Priesthood and Gospel. They believed
          in Jesus Christ, but died in ignorance of his ordinances, and had
          not clear conceptions of his doctrine, and of the resurrection.
          They expected to go to that place called heaven, as soon as they
          were dead, and that their doom would then and there be fixed,
          without any further alteration or preparation. Suppose they
          should come back, with liberty to tell all they know? How much
          light could we get from them? They could only tell you about the
          nature of things in the world in which they live. And even that
          world you could not comprehend, by their description thereof, any
          more than you can describe colours to a man born blind, or sounds
          to those who have never heard.
          12
          What, then, could you get from them? Why, common chit chat, in
          which there would be a mixture of truth, and of error and
          mistakes, in mingled confusion: all their communications would
          betray the same want of clear and logical conceptions, and sound
          sense and philosophy, as would characterize the same class of
          spirits in the flesh.
          12
          Who, then, is prepared, among the spirits in the spirit world, to
          communicate the truth on the subject of salvation, to guide the
          people, to give advice, to confer consolation, to heal the sick,
          to administer joy, and gladness, and hope of immortality and
          eternal life, founded on manifest truth?
          12
          All that have been raised from the dead, and clothed with
          immortality, all that have ascended to yonder heavens, and been
          crowned as Kings and Priests, all such are our fellow servants,
          and of our brethren the Prophets, who have the testimony of
          Jesus; all such are waiting for the work of God among their
          posterity on the earth.
          13
          They could declare glad tidings if we were only prepared to
          commune with them. What else? Peter, James, Joseph, Hyrum, Father
          Smith, any, or all of those ancient or modern Saints, who have
          departed this life who are clothed upon with the power of the
          eternal Apostleship or Priesthood, who have gone to the world
          spirits, not to sorrow, but as joyful messengers, bearing glad
          tidings of eternal truth to the spirits in prison--could not
          these teach us good things? Yes, if they were permitted so to do.
          13
          But suppose all spirits were honest, and aimed at truth, yet each
          one could only converse of the things he is privileged to know,
          or comprehend, or which have been revealed to his understanding,
          or brought within the range of his intellect.
          13
          If this be the case, what then do we wish, in communicating with
          the eternal world, by visions, angels, or ministering spirits?
          Why, if a person is sick they would like to be visited,
          comforted, or healed by an angel or spirit! If a man is in
          prison, he would like an angel or spirit to visit him, and
          comfort or deliver him. A man shipwrecked would like to be
          instructed in the way of escape for himself and fellows from a
          watery grave. In case of extreme hunger a loaf of bread brought
          by an angel would not be unacceptable.
          13
          If a man were journeying, and murderers were lying in wait for
          him in a certain road, an angel would be useful to him in telling
          him of the circumstance, and to take another road.
          13
          If a man were journeying to preach the Gospel, an angel would be
          useful to tell the neighbors of his high and holy calling, as in
          case of Peter and Cornelius. Or would you not like to have angels
          all around you, to guard, guide, and advise you in every
          emergency?
          13
          The Saints would like to enter a holy temple, and have their
          President and his assistants administer for their dead. They love
          their fathers, although they have once almost forgotten them. Our
          fathers have forgotten to hand down to us their genealogy. They
          have not felt sufficient interest to transmit to us their names,
          and the time and place of birth, and in many instances they have
          not taught us when and where ourselves were born, or who were our
          grandparents, and their ancestry. Why is all this? It is because
          of that veil of blindness which is cast over the earth, because
          there has been no true Church, Priesthood, or Patriarchal order,
          no holy place for the deposit or preservation of the sacred
          archives of antiquity, no knowledge of the eternal kindred ties,
          relationship, or mutual interests of eternity. The hearts of the
          children had become estranged from the fathers, and the hearts of
          the fathers from the children, until one came in the spirit and
          power of Elijah, to turn the keys of these things, to open
          communication between worlds, and to kindle in our bosoms that
          glow of eternal affection which lay dormant.
          13
          Suppose our temple was ready, and we should enter there to act
          for the dead, we could only act for those whose names are known
          to us. And these are few with the most of us Americans. And why
          is this? We have never had time to look to the heavens, or to the
          past or future, so busy have we been with the things of the
          earth. We have hardly had time to think of ourselves, to say
          nothing of our fathers.
          14
          It is time that all this stupidity and indifference should come
          to an end, and that our hearts were opened, and our charities
          extended, and that our bosoms expanded, to reach forth after
          whom? Those whom we consider dead! God has condescended so far to
          our capacity, as to speak of our fathers as if they were dead,
          although they are all living spirits, and will live for ever. We
          have no dead! Only think of it! Our fathers are all living,
          thinking, active agents; we have only been taught that they are
          dead!
          14
          Shall I speak my feelings, that I had on yesterday, while we were
          laying those Corner Stones of the Temple? Yes, I will utter them,
          if I can.
          14
          It was not with my eyes, not with the power of actual vision, but
          by my intellect, by the natural faculties inherent in man, by the
          exercise of my reason, upon known principles, or by the power of
          the Spirit, that it appeared to me that Joseph Smith, and his
          associate spirits, the Latter-day Saints, hovered about us on the
          brink of that foundation, and with them all the angels and
          spirits from the other world, that might be permitted, or that
          they were not too busy elsewhere.
          14
          Why should I think so? In the first place, what else on this
          earth have they to be interested about? Where would their eyes be
          turned, in the wide earth, if not centered here? Where would
          their hearts and affections be, if they cast a look or a thought
          towards the dark speck in the heavens which we inhabit, unless to
          the people of these valleys and mountains? Are there others who
          have the keys for the redemption of the dead? Is any one else
          preparing a sanctuary for the holy conversation and ministrations
          pertaining to their exaltation? No, verily. No other people have
          opened their hearts to conceive ideas so grand. No other people
          have their sympathies drawn out to such an extent towards the
          fathers.
          14
          No. If you go from this people, to hear the doctrines of others,
          you will hear the doleful sayings--"As the tree falls, so it
          lyeth. As death leaves you, so judgment will find you. There is
          no work, nor device, nor knowledge in the grave, &c., &c. There
          is no change after death, but you are fixed, irretrievably fixed,
          for all eternity. The moment the breath leaves the body, you must
          go to an extreme of heaven or of hell, there to rejoice with
          Peter on thrones of power in the presence of Jesus Christ in the
          third heavens, or, on the other hand, to roll in the flames of
          hell with murderers and devils." Such are the doctrines of our
          sectarian brethren, who profess to believe in Christ, but who
          know not the mysteries of godliness, and the boundless resources
          of eternal charity, and of that mercy which endureth forever.
          14
          It is here, that the spirit world would look with an intense
          interest, it is here that the nations of the dead, if I may so
          call them, would concentrate their hopes of ministration on the
          earth in their behalf. It is here that the countless millions of
          the spirit world would look for the ordinances of redemption, so
          far as they have been enlightened by the preaching of the Gospel,
          since the keys of the former dispensation were taken away from
          the earth.
          14
          Why? If they looked upon the earth at all, it would be upon those
          Corner Stones which we laid yesterday; if they listened at all,
          it would be to hear the sounds of voices and instruments, and the
          blending of sacred and martial music in honour of the
          commencement of a temple for the redemption of the dead. With
          what intensity of interest did they listen to the songs of Zion,
          and witness the feelings of their friends. They were glad to
          behold the glittering bayonets of the guards around the temple
          ground, and they longed for the day when there would be a
          thousand where there is now but one. They wish to see a strong
          people, gathered and united, in sufficient power to maintain a
          spot on earth where a baptismal font might be erected for the
          baptism for the dead.
          15
          It was here that all their expectations were centered. What cared
          they for all the golden palaces, marble pavements, or gilded
          halls of state on earth? What cared they for all the splendor,
          equipage, titles, and empty sounds of the self-styled great of
          this world, which all pass away as the dew of the morning before
          the rising sun? What cared they for the struggles, the battles,
          the victories, and numerous other worldly interests that vibrate
          the bosoms of men on either side? None of these things would
          interest them. Their interests were centered here, and thence
          extended to the work of God among the nations of the earth.
          15
          Did Joseph, in the spirit world, think of any thing else,
          yesterday, but the doings of his brethren on the earth? He might
          have been necessarily employed, and so busy as to be obliged to
          think of other things. But if I were to judge from the
          acquaintance I had with him in his life, and from my knowledge of
          the spirit of Priesthood, I would suppose him to be so hurried as
          to have little or no time to cast an eye or a thought after his
          friends on the earth. He was always busy while here, and so are
          we. The spirit of our holy ordination and anointing will not let
          us rest. The spirit of his calling will never suffer him to rest,
          while satan, sin, death, or darkness, possesses a foot of ground
          on this earth. While the spirit world contains the spirit of one
          of his friends, or the grave holds captive one of their bodies,
          he will never rest, or slacken his labours.
          15
          You might as well talk of Saul, king of Israel, resting while
          Israel was oppressed by the Canaanites or Philistines, after
          Samuel had anointed him to be king. At first he was like another
          man, but when occasion called into action the energies of a king,
          the spirit of his anointing came upon him. He slew an ox, divided
          it into twelve parts, and sent a part to each of the tribes of
          Israel, with this proclamation--"So shall it be done to the ox of
          the man who will not come up to the help of the Lord of hosts."
          15
          Ye Elders of Israel! you will find that there is a spirit upon
          you which will urge you to continued exertion, and will never
          suffer you to feel at ease in Zion while a work remains
          unfinished in the great plan of redemption of our race. It will
          inspire the Saints to build, plant, improve, cultivate, make the
          desert fruitful, in short, to use the elements, send missions
          abroad, build up states and kingdoms and temples at home, and
          send abroad the light of a never-ending day to every people and
          nation of the globe.
          15
          You have been baptized, you have had the laying on of hands, and
          some have been ordained, and some anointed with a holy anointing.
          A spirit has been given you. And you will find, if you undertake
          to rest, it will be the hardest work you ever performed. I came
          home here from a foreign mission. I presented myself to our
          President, and inquired what I should do next. "Rest," said he.
          15
          If I had been set to turn the world over, to dig down a mountain,
          to go to the ends of the earth, or traverse the deserts of
          Arabia, it would have been easier than to have undertaken to
          rest, while the Priesthood was upon me. I have received the holy
          anointing, and I can never rest till the last enemy is conquered,
          death destroyed, and truth reigns triumphant.
          15
          May God bless you all. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / John
          Taylor, August 22, 1852
                            John Taylor, August 22, 1852
                 ELDER JOHN TAYLOR'S MISSION TO EUROPE IN 1849-1852.
           His report, delivered in the Tabernacle, Great Salt Lake City,
                                  August 22, 1852.
          16
          Brethren and Sisters--I feel happy in having the privilege of
          meeting you once more in the Valley of the mountains. It is now
          about three years since I left this place. Since then I have
          travelled a great distance, enough, if in a straight line, to
          have gone round the world. Had I only had that to do, I should
          have been back some time ago. Before I enter upon anything else,
          I will tell you some of my feelings, and speak of other things
          afterwards.
          16
          I feel glad to see you, brethren, sisters, and friends, and
          permit me to say that I feel just at home, for Zion is my home;
          wherever the people of God are, I feel perfectly at home, and can
          rejoice with them. It seems as though I want to look at you. I
          have been gazing around at this, that, and the other one, while
          brother Wallace was preaching; I have been trying to think where
          I had seen them, and the various scenes we have passed through
          together, in different places--in journeying, in perils, in
          mobbing, in difficulties and dangers of various kinds. But out of
          all we have been delivered, the hand of God has been manifested
          towards us in a remarkable manner. And then I see people here
          from different nations, with whom I have associated--from
          England, Ireland, Scotland, Wales, and from other nations of the
          earth; from the Eastern, Western, Northern, and Southern States;
          from Canada, and from almost all parts of the world. I think of
          the various changes, annoyances, and tribulations that we have
          passed through, the deliverances we have obtained, and the hand
          of God which has been manifested to us in all these things; and I
          rejoice, and praise God my Saviour. I feel perfectly at home, in
          fact I feel at home wherever I meet with the Saints of God--in
          this country, or in other countries, but this is the grand home,
          this is the home for the gathering of the Saints of the Most High
          God, the place where the oracles of God dwell, and where the
          spirit of God is pre-eminently poured out, where we have come to
          learn, of the great Jehovah, the sacred things pertaining to, and
          associated with His kingdom.
          16
          I am not going to preach, I wish to tell my feelings, and look at
          you, and think about what we have done, and what we are going to
          do, for it is not all done yet--we have only commenced the great
          work of the Lord, and are laying the foundation of that kingdom
          which is destined to stand forever; what we shall do, is yet in
          the future; we have commenced at the little end of the horn, and
          by and bye we will come out at the big end.
          17
          I was talking about troubles, but I don't know that we need talk
          or care about them. We have had some little amusements and
          frolics among the Gentiles, some few difficulties, but we have
          struggled through them all, and we are all here safe and sound.
          True, some of our friends have dropped by the way, they have
          fallen asleep, but what of that? and who cares? It is as well to
          live as to die, or to die as to live, to sleep as to lie awake,
          or to be awake as to sleep--it is all one, they have only gone a
          little before us. For example, we have left other parts and come
          here, and we think we have got to Zion; they have gone to the
          world of spirits, and they think they have got to heaven; it is
          all right. We have left some of our friends behind in various
          places; when they arrive here, they will shake hands with us, and
          be glad they have got to Zion; and when we go to where our
          departed friends are gone, we shall strike hands with them, and
          be glad we have got to heaven; so it is all one. Although our
          friends were sorry when we left them, yet they rejoiced as well
          as we, that we were going to Zion; and so we shall rejoice with
          those who have died in the Lord, for they rest from their labors.
          17
          We have the principles of eternal life in us, we have begun to
          live, and we shall continue to live, as the Methodists very
          properly express it, "while life, and thought, and being last, or
          immortality endures;" and this is the beginning of it,
          consequently other little circumstances in this world, or even
          life or death have very little to do with it. Some people have
          said to me, sometimes, Are you not afraid to cross over the seas,
          and deserts, where there are wolves and bears, and other
          ferocious animals, as well as the savage Indians? Are you not
          afraid that you will drop by the way, and leave your body on the
          desert track, or beneath the ocean's wave? No. Who cares anything
          about it? What of it, if we should happen to drop by the way? We
          expect the Lord and His angels can do as much as brother Benson
          has done in gathering up the people--he has brought a great host
          from Pottawatomie--and the Lord can surely as easily "send His
          angels, and gather together His elect from the four quarters of
          the earth," and, as old Daniel says, we shall all come up and
          stand in our "lot in the end of the days." These things don't
          trouble me, but I have felt to rejoice all the day long, that God
          has revealed the principle of eternal life, that I am put in
          possession of that truth, and that I am counted worthy to engage
          in the work of the Lord, and be a messenger to the nations of the
          earth. I rejoice in proclaiming this glorious Gospel, because it
          takes root in the hearts of the children of men, and they rejoice
          with me to be connected with, and participate in, the blessings
          of the kingdom of God. I rejoice in afflictions, for they are
          necessary to humble and prove us, that we may comprehend
          ourselves, become acquainted with our weakness and infirmities;
          and I rejoice when I triumph over them, because God answers my
          prayers, therefore I feel to rejoice all the day long.
          17
          I feel as though I am among the honorable of the earth when I am
          here; and when I get mixed up with the people abroad, and mingle
          with the great people in the world, I feel otherwise. I have seen
          and deplored the weakness of men--their folly, selfishness, and
          corruption. I do not know how they feel, but I have witnessed a
          great deal of ignorance and folly, I think there is a great deal
          of great littleness about them. There is very little power among
          them, their institutions are shattered, cracked, and laid open to
          the foundation. It is no matter what principle you refer to--if
          to their religion, it is a pack of nonsense; if to their
          philosophy and politics, they are a mass of dark confusion; their
          governments, churches, philosophy, and religion, are all
          darkness, misery, corruption, and folly. I see nothing but
          Babylon wherever I go--but darkness and confusion, with not a ray
          of light to cheer the sinking spirits of the nations of the
          earth, nor any hope that they will be delivered in this world, or
          in the world to come.
          18
          I have been with my brethren here who went with me some years ago
          to foreign nations--brother Erastus Snow, who is here; brother
          Lorenzo Snow, who has not got back yet; brother F. D. Richards,
          who has been over in England; and brother Pratt. There has been a
          great work done in all of these places, but I will leave these
          brethren to relate their own affairs themselves. I rejoice to
          associate with them, I rejoice to hear of their prosperity, and
          to see the wisdom, intelligence, and prudence that have been
          manifested in all their deportment and transactions. I could not
          have bettered it, and I do not know that anybody else could.
          Everything has been going on well, and prospering, the hand of
          God has been with us, and His angels have been on our path, and
          we are led to rejoice exceedingly before Him as the God of our
          salvation.
          18
          It gave me great joy, on my way home, to find the Saints leaving
          Kanesville. It seemed as though they were swept out with a besom
          almost. When I was there, I rode out in my carriage one day to a
          place called Council Point. I thought I would go and visit some
          of the folks there, but, when I got there, behold, there were no
          folks to see. I hunted round, and finally found a place with
          something like "grocery" written upon it. I alighted, and went
          into the house, and asked a person who presented himself at the
          door, if he was a stranger there. Yes, says he, I have only just
          come. And the people have all left, have they? Yes, was the
          answer. I next saw a few goods standing at the side of a house,
          but the house was empty, these were waiting to be taken away. I
          went into another house, and there were two or three waiting for
          a boat to take them down the river, and these were all the
          inhabitants I saw there!
          18
          When I first reflected upon this removal, my heart felt pained. I
          well knew the disposition of many of the men on those frontier
          countries, and I thought that some miserable wretches might come
          upon them after the main body of the Saints had removed, and
          abuse, rob, and plunder the widow, the orphan, the lame, halt,
          blind, and destitute, who might be left, as they did in Nauvoo;
          and thus the old, decrepit, and infirm would be abused, insulted,
          and preyed upon by wretches in human shape, who never have
          courage to meet men, but are cruel and relentless with the old,
          infirm, the widow, orphan, and destitute. But, thank God, they
          are coming, nearly all, old and young, rich and poor.
          18
          When I see my brethren and sisters here, I cannot help but to
          rejoice with them, and especially with those who have been
          engaged in these various labours.
          18
          The reports that have reached me from time to time, of your
          prosperity--accounts of the great work of the Lord that was going
          on here, have caused me much joy. I have heard of your progress
          in the city, and out of it; of your various settlements and
          explorations; and of the many organizations made by the
          Presidency, This has been joyful to me while abroad in foreign
          nations.
          19
          Some people think that preaching is the greatest part of the
          business in building up the kingdom of God. This is a mistake.
          You may pick out our most inferior Elders, in point of talent and
          ability, and send them to England to preach and preside, and they
          think they are great men there. Their religion teaches them so
          much more than the Gentiles know, that they are received as the
          great men of the earth. Anybody can preach, he is a poor
          simpleton that cannot, it is the easiest thing in the world. But,
          as President Young says, it takes a man to practise. A great many
          preach first-rate when they get abroad; you there meet with most
          eloquent men, they will almost make the stones under your feet
          tremble, and the walls of the building to quake; but the moment
          they get into a little difficulty, they immediately dwindle down
          into nothing, and they have not got as much force as would draw a
          mosquito off its nest.
          19
          But the things that are going on here, require talent, force,
          energy, a knowledge of human nature and of the laws of God. The
          sacrifices that are being made, in leaving home, and travelling
          from place to place, combating and overcoming the many
          difficulties that we have had to cope with, and standing in a
          distinguished position in the eyes of the nations of the earth,
          are no small affair. They gaze with astonishment at the stand
          that this people take at the present time in their territorial
          capacity; to that all the nations and courts of Europe are
          looking. Talk about preaching; this is a matter of another
          importance entirely. I do not care how eloquent men are--these
          are all good in their place--but it is the organization in this
          place; the wise policy of the Governor who presides here, in the
          extension of this infant state, by building up new colonies, &c.;
          making such extensive improvements that preach louder among the
          courts of Europe, at the present time.
          19
          It is one of the most remarkable things that has ever taken place
          in any age; and kings, and philosophers are obliged to
          acknowledge it. I remember noticing an article in the London
          Times, not long ago, (and it is one of the leading papers of the
          day). In speaking about the "Mormons," giving an account of some
          affairs associated with the Church, and with the establishment of
          a Territorial Government here, the editor remarks nearly as
          follows--"We have let this people alone for some time, and said
          nothing about them; we have been led to believe that they were a
          society of fanatics and fools, &c.; but let this be as it may,
          their position in the world, in a national capacity, demands at
          our hands, as public journalists, to report their progress,
          improvements, and position." I sent the Epistle of the First
          Presidency to the Journal Des Debats, which is one of the
          principal papers in Paris. They published the Epistle, and the
          chief editor made some excellent remarks upon it, and signed his
          name to them. It was taken from that paper, and translated and
          published in Switzerland, Italy, Denmark, and Germany, and thus,
          in their various languages, it was spread before the nations of
          Europe. Our place and people are becoming well known abroad.
          While in the city of Paris, I had to do with some of the leading
          government men. In seeking to obtain authority to preach, all I
          had to do, generally, was to send my card--John Taylor, du (from)
          Deseret.
          19
          We are becoming notorious in the eyes of the nations; and the
          time is not far distant when the kings of the earth will be glad
          to come to our Elders to ask counsel to help them out of their
          difficulties; for their troubles are coming upon them like a
          flood, and they do not know how to extricate themselves.
          20
          I will here give a short history of some of my proceedings. I was
          appointed to go to France some years ago, in company with some of
          the Twelve, who were appointed to go to other places. The First
          Presidency asked us if we would go. Yes, was the reply; we can go
          anywhere, for if we cannot do little things like these, I don't
          know what else we can do. Some people talk about doing great
          things; but it is not a great thing to travel a little, or to
          preach a little. I hear some of our Elders saying, sometimes,
          that they are going to do great things--to be rulers in the
          kingdom of God, Kings and Priests to the Most High, and are again
          to exalt thousands of others to thrones, principalities, and
          powers, in the eternal worlds; but we cannot get them out of
          their nests, to travel a few miles here. If they cannot do this,
          how will they ever learn to go from world to world?
          20
          We went, and were blessed in our journeying, We had a pretty hard
          time in crossing the plains, and I should not recommend people to
          go so late in the season as we did. We should have lost all our
          horses, but the hand of God was over us for our good; He
          delivered us out of all our dangers, and took us through safely.
          When we got to the Missouri river, the ice was running very
          strong, so that it was impossible to ferry; but in one night the
          river froze over, and we passed over as on a bridge, in perfect
          safety; but as soon as the last team was over, the ice again
          removed. Thus the Lord favoured us in our extremities.
          20
          You may inquire, how did you get along preaching? The best way
          that we could, the same as we always do. We went to work (at
          least I did) to try to learn the language a little. I went into
          the city of Boulogne, and I obtained permission there from the
          mayor to preach; this I was under the necessity of doing. At that
          time, I had not been very particular in seeking recommends as I
          went along; but I had a recommend from Governor Young: he told
          the folks I was an honorable man, and signed his name to it as
          the Governor of the Territory of Utah, and Willard Richards as
          Secretary. I told the mayor, in relation to these matters, I had
          not many papers with me, but I had one that I obtained from the
          Governor of the state I came from. O, says he, "Mr. Taylor, this
          is very good indeed, won't you leave it with me, and if anybody
          finds any fault, I shall have it to refer to."
          20
          Several Protestant priests from England commenced to annoy us,
          and wanted to create a disturbance in the meeting, but I would
          not allow it, besides I was in a strange city, and was received
          courteously by the mayor, and wished my meeting to be orderly.
          These insolent men came to create disturbance in our meetings,
          but seeing they could not get a chance of speaking inside the
          doors, they followed me in the streets, asking me questions as I
          walked along. Among the questions, they said something about "Joe
          Smith." Says I, Who are you talking about? I was well acquainted
          with Mr. Joseph Smith; he was a gentleman, and would not treat a
          stranger as you do me. They still, however, dogged after me,
          asking me more questions. I told them, I did not wish to talk
          with men of their caste. They finally sent me a challenge, and we
          had a discussion; the result of it you may have read as
          published. The Methodist preacher denied his calling, and was to
          be removed from his place, in consequence; and the others sunk
          into forgetfulness--I could obtain no information of them when
          last there. I decreed, then, I would let the English alone, and
          turn to the French.
          21
          I went from there right into the city of Paris, and commenced
          translating the Book of Mormon, with brother Bolton to assist me.
          We baptized a few; some of them men of intelligence and
          education, and capable of assisting us in the work. Brother Pack
          went to Calais, and raised a small Church there. We afterwards
          united some English Branches, Boulogne en France, to it, called
          the Jersey Islands. There the people speak half English, half
          French; and brother Pack went to preside over them. Brother
          Bolton and I remained principally in Paris, and in that
          neighborhood; we there organized a Church. Before I came away, we
          held a Conference, at which four hundred members were
          represented, including those Branches that were added to the
          Branch in Calais.
          21
          We have got a translation of the Book of Mormon, as good a one as
          it is possible for anybody to make. I fear no contradiction to
          this statement from any man, learned or illiterate. I had it
          examined and tested by some of the best educated men in France. I
          have got a specimen with me. [The Book was produced, which was
          beautifully bound.] This is the Book of Mormon, translated into
          the French language, and it is got up in as good a style as any
          book that was ever published, whether in the Church or out of it.
          The translation is good, the printing is good, and the paper is
          good. I have made some little alterations, that is, I have marked
          the paragraphs, and numbered them, so as to tell where to refer
          to, when you wish to do so; and in some instances where the
          paragraphs are very long, I have divided them. The original
          simplicity of the book is retained, and it is as literal as the
          genius and idiom of the French language would admit of.
          21
          This book is stereotyped, and I have arranged it so that when
          copies of this work are sold, a certain amount of money is put
          away, that when another edition is called for, the money is
          there; and thus it can be continued from time to time, as
          necessity shall require, until 200,000 copies are printed without
          any additional expense. We also publish there a paper called
          "L'Etoile du Deseret," (The Star of Deseret.) It is got up in
          good style, and printed in new type. It is also stereotyped, and
          most of it is new matter. I have given an account of the
          organization of the Church, and a brief history of it; of the
          coming forth of the Book of Mormon, and the evidences of it; of
          the doctrines of the Church, and the position of things in this
          country, &c. &c. These are some of the leading items of this
          publication. Instead of filling it with the news of the day, we
          have filled it with all that is good for the people to read, that
          it may be a standing work for years to come. It contains articles
          written on baptism, the Gift of the Holy Ghost, the necessity of
          gathering together, and all the leading points associated with
          the religion we believe in, that there may be evidence forth
          coming at any time and place, in the hands of the inquirer. If
          men should be there, not acquainted with the language, and
          individuals should make inquiries of them relating to the
          doctrines of their religion, they have nothing to do but hand
          them this Number or that Number of the "Star of Deseret,"
          containing the information they wish. This will save them a great
          deal of trouble in talking.
          21
          We found many difficulties to combat, for it is not an easy thing
          to go into France and learn to talk French well; but at the same
          time, if a man sets to work in good earnest, he can do it. I have
          scratched the word "can't" out of my vocabulary long since, and I
          have not got it in my French one.
          21
          The Spirit of the Lord was with us, and with the people, and He
          prospered us in our undertakings, and we were enabled to
          accomplish the thing we set about. We had difficulties to cope
          with in regard to the government. If it had not been for the
          position of things there in relation to the late revolution, that
          was then brewing, I believe we should have obtained the privilege
          from the government to preach throughout all France, and also
          protection for the Elders.
          22
          I petitioned the Cabinet for that privilege. While talking to
          some of them, they told me there would be no difficulty in
          obtaining permission. But we were unable to obtain the liberty we
          wished. And I believe it originated from the position of things
          just before the revolution broke out; it was through that, or
          through difficulties in Denmark, wherein a mob was raised against
          the Saints. They were then banishing strangers out of Paris, and
          would not allow them a place there unless they were wealthy
          persons, and had money in the bank, as security for their
          conduct.
          22
          "Liberty, Equality, Fraternity, and Brotherhood," was written
          almost up on every door. You had liberty to speak, but might be
          put in prison for doing so. You had liberty to print, but they
          might burn what you had printed, and put you into confinement for
          it. The nations of Europe know nothing about liberty, except
          England, and there it is much the same as here, that is, liberty
          to do right.
          22
          When you get into France, Germany, or any of the foreign nations,
          where the language is different from ours, the spirit of the
          people is different, and it appears to me that a different spirit
          is carried along with these languages, which is peculiar to them.
          22
          I might tell you about their political state, but I will preserve
          that for some political speech or other; we will let that go for
          the present. At the same time, there are thousands of as good
          spirited, honest hearted men as I ever met with in any part of
          the world; they are quiet, calm, peaceable, and desirous to know
          the truth, and be governed by it; and if we only had liberty to
          preach to them the principles of truth, thousands would flock to
          the standard of truth.
          22
          Infidelity prevails there to a great extent, and at the same time
          a great deal of a certain kind of religion, a sort of
          Catholicism; not the Catholicism that was, but which is. Men have
          got sick of it, and look upon it as moonshine and folly. You may
          divide the people into three classes--the most religious class
          are the women; from observation you would judge that they attend
          to the affairs of the souls of their husbands, as well as their
          own. The fact is, the men care little about it themselves. You
          will find nothing but women in the places of worship there, while
          on the other hand, if you go out to the public promenades, and
          theatres, and public amusements on Sunday, you will see men by
          thousands; and if you judge of their religion by their actions,
          you would consider that the theatre and public amusements are
          their places of worship; at the same time, that the Church is the
          place to do penance, and that the women do it.
          22
          I am not surprised that infidelity should prevail in such
          countries. I declare, personally, if I could see nothing better
          than what is called Christianity there, I would be an infidel
          too; and I say the same also in regard to Protestantism. The
          Protestants talk a great deal about Catholic priests, but I
          believe they are much more honest in the sight of man, and will
          do more for their pay, than any Protestant minister you can find.
          You will find them up at five o'clock in the morning, saying
          mass, and attending to what they consider are their religious
          duties--visiting the sick, and going among fevers and plagues,
          where Protestant ministers dare not go. This is my notion of
          that. (A voice in the stand--The children are always lazier than
          their daddy.) The idea of taking Protestantism among the French
          people is nonsense, for one Catholic priest could prevail over
          fifty Protestants. The Catholic priests are more intelligent,
          they know the basis upon which their church is founded, and they
          can reason upon principles the Protestants cannot enter into.
          Protestants can do very well when they have got a mass of their
          own people around them.
          23
          When I was in Boulogne, some Protestant ministers were afraid
          lest I should make a division among them; were fearful lest I
          should show up some of their follies, and the Catholics should
          laugh at them. One of these Jesuit priests came to me; he was a
          well educated man. In speaking on those discussions, says he,
          when they ask about the character of your founders, just examine
          into theirs, and I will furnish you all the testimony you want. I
          told him I was much obliged to him, but I could attend to my own
          business. I thought if I could not get along, and defend
          "Mormonism " without the help of a Jesuit priest, it was a poor
          case.
          23
          I was speaking, a while ago, about the people there being divided
          into three classes. One of them you may call infidel, under the
          head of Socialism, Fourierism, and several other isms. Communism
          is a specimen of the same thing, and they call it religion! These
          are generally known under the head of what is called Rouges, or
          Red Republicans. There is one class that think it is necessary to
          sustain religions as a national policy, to subdue the minds of
          the people, and make them easier to govern. The third class is in
          the minority a long way; it is those who are actually sincere in
          their religion.
          23
          I will give you a specimen of Protestantism as I witnessed it in
          a grand anniversary Bible Society meeting in Paris. There were
          some of the most notable men in Paris going to preach there, and
          that attracted the attention of the public. The meeting was held
          in one of the principal Protestant churches. The late Prime
          Minister of Louis Philippe, Monsieur Guizot, presided, and many
          other eminent men were present. M. Guizot is a man of great
          ability, and quite an orator, so that all parties respected him
          on account of his talent. As he was going to be there, and
          deliver a speech, it attracted quite an audience. I went to hear
          them, in company with a French minister that was baptized there.
          The place was pretty well crowded, not so full as this hall is
          this morning; but in that country it was considered a first rate
          congregation. When M. Guizot finished his discourse, about
          one-third of the congregation left. I thought this a curious
          proceeding; they don't act so in Protestant countries. Another
          got up to speak, and when he had made a speech, another third of
          what was left, left the house and went away; and when four or
          five of them had made speeches, there were about as many left in
          the house as you would see at a Catholic chapel at mass. I was
          really surprised at the indifference and carelessness manifested.
          23
          This was at the anniversary of a Bible Society in the city of
          Paris, where some of the most notable men gathered together. I
          speak of this to represent to you the position of things there,
          and the spirit of the people in relation to these matters. In a
          theatre, or in any public spectacle, all would have stayed till
          the last.
          23
          It is among this people we have got to introduce the Gospel. When
          they come to see it, they rejoice in it, but we do not preach
          religion much to them, for a great many of them are philosophers,
          and, of course, we must be philosophers too, and make it appear
          that our philosophy is better than theirs, and then show them
          that religion is at the bottom of it. It would be nonsense to
          talk about justification by faith: they would say it was
          moonshine, or something else. You have got to talk common sense,
          you have got to affect their bodies as well as their souls, for
          they believe they are possessed of both. When they once get
          interested in the work of God, and get the Spirit of God, they
          rejoice exceedingly in the blessings of the Gospel. I have seen
          Saints in that country who rejoiced and thanked God, for the
          blessings of the new and everlasting covenant, as much as ever I
          saw Saints in any country.
          24
               I had thought, after having completed the translation of the
          Book of Mormon into the French language, in which I was assisted
          by brother Bolton, of returning home last year, but I met with
          the Epistle of the First Presidency, from which I could learn
          their desire that we should stay another year. I, therefore,
          thought I would alter my course immediately, and follow the
          directions of the Spirit of God--for I wished all the time, as
          Paul says, to be obedient to the heavenly calling; I wished at
          all times to pursue the course the Spirit of the Lord should
          dictate. I knew it would dictate them right, though I did not see
          at that time that it would be of much benefit for me to stay long
          there, as it was no place for preaching in. The government, after
          studying about these things some time, denied us the privilege of
          preaching; and all the place we had to meet in was a private
          room; and, according to a law of the government, if more than
          twenty persons were known to meet together they were in danger of
          being put in prison. The officers were continually on the alert,
          and when we would meet, lest there should be more than twenty
          people, they would be counting how many there were in the room,
          and thus the Saints were continually under the spirit of fear of
          the authorities. It is under these circumstances we have had to
          labour.
          24
          As it stated in the Epistle, that it was better for the brethren
          to extend their labours to other nations, it immediately occurred
          to my mind to go to Germany, so I made a plan before I got up in
          the morning, for thought flows quickly, you know. The plan
          was--to publish the Book of Mormon there. I wrote to brother Hyde
          to send me out some brother that was acquainted with the German
          language, and my letter got there about the time he left for the
          Valley, and he did not get it. I said to brother Bolton, and
          brother De La Mere, who was from the island of Jersey, that there
          was one man in the Valley I wished was here, and that was brother
          Carn. There was one brother in France, who was a German, and was
          well acquainted with the languages, both German and French: I
          engaged him to go with me to Germany, that is, to translate.
          However, I went over to England, and thought we would hunt in
          England to find some person qualified to go and preach in
          Germany. I found many Germans. but none with sufficient
          experience in the Church. Finally, I thought I would start by
          myself. When I got to London, I met with brother Dykes; he had
          said something about going to Germany, but he concluded he had
          better be with brother Snow, as he was acquainted with the Danish
          language; he had got his discharge from that engagement, and was
          on his way home when I met him. This placed things in another
          position. He said he would like to go if his family could be
          provided for, but I could not say anything particular about his
          family.
          24
          I finally had him go for a month or two, for I did not wish to
          put a thing upon him I would not do myself. He felt a desire to
          go, and said he would do as I said, so I told him to go for two
          months. I made an appointment to meet him in Germany, as I had to
          go through France.
          25
          When we arrived there, we started the translation of the Book of
          Mormon, and it was half completed before I came away. We also
          started to publish a paper in Germany, called Zions Panier,
          (Zion's Banner.) I wished to be perfectly satisfied that the
          translation was right; brother Richards and I heard some of it
          read in Boulogne, and we thought it was very good, but still it
          had to be altered. I, therefore, got some of the best professors
          in the city of Hamburg to look over it: some few alterations were
          necessary, but not many. Also, with regard to the paper, one of
          the professors said he would not have known it was written in
          English and translated; he should, if not told to the contrary,
          have supposed it written originally in German.
          25
          I have often heard men in this country splutter a great deal
          about the meaning of odd words in the Bible, but this only
          exhibits their folly: it is the spirit and intention of the
          language that are to be looked at, and if the translator does not
          know this it is impossible for him to translate correctly, and
          this is the reason why there are so many blunders in the Bible. I
          believe the English Bible is translated as well as any book could
          be by uninspired men. The German translation of the Bible, I
          believe, is tolerably correct, but some of the French editions
          are miserable.
          25
          A Protestant minister in Germany refused to discuss the doctrine
          of Baptism, because their Bible is so plain upon that subject
          that the doctrine of sprinkling could not be maintained. Among
          the German people, we find a great deal of infidelity, but at the
          same time we find very much sterling integrity, and there will be
          thousands and tens of thousands of people in that country who
          will embrace the faith, and rejoice in the blessings of the
          Gospel. We have sent our French papers to Switzerland, Denmark,
          and to Lower Canada, and some of our German papers to France, and
          vice versa.
          25
          The languages in these countries are mixed up: it is a profession
          more general than it is in this country; they think a man is very
          ignorant if he professes to be a teacher and does not know two or
          three languages, but with all their knowledge of languages, there
          is a great amount of ignorance. There are men there acquainted
          with two or three languages, and that is all they do know; if you
          except that, there is not an ounce of common sense remains. What
          if you can read French, or German, or Hebrew, or anything
          else--what good would it do you unless you read to understand the
          works written in those languages? Simply none at all. A man is a
          fool if he boast about anything of that kind.
          25
          The Book of Mormon by this time is printed and stereotyped in the
          German language. I left brother Carn there, to attend to this
          business: everything was going on smoothly, so I thought I could
          leave it as well as not. When I got to Liverpool, and was about
          coming away, the very man I wanted to come from the Valley
          arrived there. I was glad to meet him in Liverpool.
          25
          I shall want to get some folks to go to France, and to Germany. I
          would not ask anybody to do that which I would not do myself.
          25
          There are books, thousands of them, if you cannot talk to the
          people, you can give them the books to read. But you can learn
          the language, or you are poor concerns. Any sane person can.
          26
          I do not know that it is necessary for me to say anything more. O
          yes, I organized a society to make sugar, and a woollen
          manufactory. The sugar factory will be here soon. If you will
          only provide us with beets and wood, we will make you sugar
          enough to preserve yourselves in. We can have as good sugar in
          this country as anywhere else; we have as good machinery as is in
          the world. I have seen the best specimens of it in the World's
          Fair, but there was none better than this; there is not any
          better on the earth, nor better men to make sugar than those who
          are coming. I found this affair as difficult to arrange as
          anything I have had to do. We could not bring the other machinery
          on this year, for we had as much on hand with the sugar machinery
          as we could get along with, so we had to leave it, that is, the
          woollen and worsted machinery, to another year. I can say also of
          this, that it is as good machinery as there is in the world. It
          is the same kind of machinery that is made use of in the west of
          England to make the best kind of broad cloth; also a worsted
          manufactory to manufacture cloth for ladies' wear, such as
          merinoes, and alpacas, and other sorts of paccas, I don't know
          the names of them all; and various kinds of shawls, blankets,
          carpets, &c., &c., if we can only command the wool.
          26
          After having gone through these things, I will say again, I am
          glad that I have got back to this place. Some people have asked
          me if I was not pretty near being taken up and put in prison by
          the authorities of France. I might have been, but I did not know
          it.
          26
          A gentleman in Paris would make me promise to call on him when I
          came back to Paris, and make his house my home. I agreed to
          return, and stay a few days in that city, and hold a conference
          there. This was a few days after the revolution. I saw the place
          where the houses had been battered down, and the people killed by
          wholesale; where were shot down promiscuously, both big and
          little, old and young, men, women, and children. I was there soon
          after this occurrence; and at the very time the people were
          voting in their President, we were holding a Conference on the
          same day, for I thought they would have something else to do than
          to attend to us. Some of the Elders, however, were afraid to come
          to Paris, lest there should be difficulty.
          26
          There were about 400 represented at this Conference; Elders,
          Priests, and Teachers were ordained; and a Conference was
          regularly organized. The Spirit of the Lord was with us, and many
          were ordained to the Priesthood, with a Presidency over the
          nation.
          26
          After I had left Paris, on my arrival in England, I found a
          letter from brother Bolton, who is president in France; he
          informed me that the haut (high) police had been inquiring for me
          at my lodgings, but that the gentleman of the house had kept him
          talking for two hours, defending my character, &c. They came to
          the house ten minutes after I had left in a cab for the railroad,
          but I had then finished my work, and when they would have put
          their fingers on me, I was not there. But at the very time they
          were voting for their president, we were voting for our
          president, and building up the Kingdom of God; and I prophesied
          then, and prophesy now, that our cause will stand when their's is
          crushed to pieces; and the kingdom of God will roll on and spread
          from nation to nation, and from kingdom to kingdom. And from
          these nations we have been preaching the Gospel of Christ to, you
          will see thousands and tens of thousands yet flocking to Zion,
          and singing Hallelujahs to the God of Israel.
          26
          Did we not talk about England in the same way when the Gospel was
          first introduced into that country? Brother Kimball prophesied
          the same things of that country, and they have all come to pass,
          and this will come to pass by and bye, for there is "a good time
          coming, Saints, wait a little longer;" and we will rise up like
          servants of the living God, and accomplish the work He has given
          us to do; and when we have done our work here, we will then join
          our friends in the eternal worlds, and engage in acts more vast,
          more mighty, and that will require more energy than the works we
          are now engaged in.
          26
          I rejoice that I am happy to meet with you and my family: you are
          my friends, and you are the friends of God, and we are building
          up the kingdom of God, and by and bye the kings and princes of
          the earth will come, and gaze upon the glory of Zion.
          27
               I used to think there was a good deal of intelligence among
          the world, but I have sought for it so long I have given up all
          hopes of ever finding it there. Some philosophers came to visit
          me in France, and while conversing, I had to laugh a little at
          them, for the word philosophy is about every tenth word they
          speak. One of them, a Jesuit priest, who had come in the Church,
          a well educated man, was a little annoyed in his feelings at some
          of my remarks, on their philosophy. I asked them if any of them
          had ever asked me one question that I could not answer. They
          answered in the negative. But, said I, I can ask you fifty that
          you cannot answer.
          27
          Speaking of philosophy, I must tell another little story, for I
          was almost buried up in it while I was in Paris. I was walking
          about one day in the Jardin des Plantes--a splendid garden. There
          they had a sort of exceedingly light cake; it was so thin and
          light that you could blow it away, and you could eat all day of
          it, and never be satisfied. Somebody asked me what the name of
          that was. I said, I don't know the proper name, but in the
          absence of one, I can give it a name--I will call it philosophy,
          or fried froth, which you like. It is so light you can blow it
          away, eat it all day, and at night be as far from being satisfied
          as when you began.
          27
          There are a great many false principles in the world, and as I
          said before, whether you examine their religion, their
          philosophy, their politics, or their national policy, you will
          find it a mess of complete baby work, there is nothing
          substantial about it, nothing to take hold of. There is no place
          that I have found under the whole heavens where there is true
          intelligence, but in the land of Zion.
          27
          I will risk our Elders among the world, if they will only brush
          up their ideas a little. I will take any of you rough looking
          fellows, put you in a tailor's shop a little, and start you out
          like gentlemen, as large as life. I tell you there is a great
          difference between our people and others. Many others have a nice
          little finish on them; they may be compared to scrimped up
          dandies; but everything is on the outside, and nothing in the
          inside.
          27
          Our folks who are operating round here in the kanyons, and on the
          land, are listening to the servants of God, and studying
          principles of eternal truth; they are like young rough colts,
          with plenty of bone, sinew, and nerve in them; all they want is
          rubbing down a little, and they will come out first rate. I
          believe in the polish, and a little of every thing else, you know
          I am a Frenchman now.
          27
          I have found that all intelligence is good, and there is a good
          deal in the world, mixed up with all their follies, It is good
          for the Elders to become acquainted with the languages, for they
          may have to go abroad, and should be able to talk to the people,
          and not look like fools. I care not how much intelligence you
          have got, if you cannot exhibit it you look like an ignoramus.
          Suppose a Frenchman should come upon this stand to deliver a
          lecture upon Botany, Astronomy, or any other science, and could
          not speak a word of English, how much wiser would you be? You may
          say, I thought the Lord would give us the gift of tongues. He
          won't if we are too indolent to study them. I never ask the Lord
          to do a thing I could do for myself. We should be acquainted with
          all things, should obtain intelligence both by faith and by
          study. We are instructed to gather it out of the best books, and
          become acquainted with governments, nations, and laws. The Elders
          of this Church have need to study these things, that when they go
          to the nations, they may not wish to return home before they have
          accomplished a good work.
          28
          When I was in Hamburg, there were 30,000 soldiers quartered in
          the city, and that is called a free city. If you ask any of the
          inhabitants what they are doing there, they will answer--Ich
          weise nicht, (I don't know,) but we have to keep them. They are
          there because the Emperor of Austria placed them there, and he
          had power to have them there.
          28
          In Paris, you would suppose you were in an armed city, for you
          could not step anywhere without meeting soldiers at every step.
          28
          When I was in Hamburg, I had to go and get a permit to authorize
          me to stay one month, and when that was done, I had to get
          another to authorize me to stay another month. The only thing we
          can do in that country at present is to baptize some of the
          citizens, and set them to preaching, as they have more rights and
          privileges than a stranger. No man has a right to receive his own
          son into his own house, if not a citizen, without a card; or a
          permit from the Government; and that is a free city, so called.
          We cannot know anything about the blessings and privileges we
          have as Americans, without becoming acquainted with the condition
          of other nations, this is one of the greatest countries in the
          world, but they (the Americans) do not appreciate their
          privileges.
          28
          I am glad to see things moving on so well here; I observe great
          improvements and changes: you have done a great work, and God
          will bless you for it. I am glad to see and hear that you are
          more diligent in paying tithing, and attending to your duties
          than before I left. It is not hard to do the will of God, and if
          some of you would go out into the world for two or three years,
          you would not find it hard to pay tithing when you came back
          again. I am glad to hear of these things--of the building up of
          the kingdom of God; and union is strength, and to fulfil the will
          of God brings down blessings upon our heads. I now expect to rest
          a little, and visit a little, and we will talk and preach, and do
          all the good we can in this world, and then go into the next to
          do more good.
          28
          I feel obliged to the brethren here for putting me up a house;
          and brother Brigham, I am much obliged to you for it; God bless
          you for it. And I pray that the blessings of God may rest down
          upon all the Saints, worlds without end. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, March 4, 1852
                            Brigham Young, March 4, 1852
                        RECREATION, AND THE PROPER USE OF IT.
          A speech delivered by President Brigham Young at the Legislative
            Festival held in the Territorial House, Great Salt Lake City,
                                   March 4, 1852.
          29
          With joy and delight I look upon you, brethren and sisters. I
          feel to render all praise, thanks, and adoration to our Father
          and God, that my heart is capable of rendering; and with all the
          afflictions, together with all the talent bestowed upon me, I
          feel to serve, praise, adore, and acknowledge the Lord our God.
          29
          Let me ask a question. Finding ourselves in our present position
          in the world of sin and darkness, of ignorance, unbelief,
          superstition, and tradition, which have been woven and interwoven
          with our lives; thrown around us like a mantle, which is used to
          shield the body from the cold and from the storm; considering
          ourselves as we are, then ask ourselves the question, if on earth
          we have any idea of anything like a kingdom or community of
          people being celestial; then ask ourselves again, if we have,
          does not the presentation this evening border very nigh to it? I
          can say for one, as far as we do know and understand, as far as
          our capacities can expand, and grasp life and happiness, just so
          far this community which is present this evening, is advanced in
          the celestial path.
          29
          If there is a heart here this evening, that does not chime in
          with every sentiment of righteousness, that heart has no power in
          this assembly. This company are controllable, like the ship by
          the rudder, in a gentle breeze, that can be turned hither and
          thither at the will and pleasure of him who commands; so with all
          here present; at the sound of the voice, all is hushed, and every
          heart throbs in unison in response to the words of praise and
          thanksgiving to our Father and our God. This proves that the
          majority, at least, are right; and I have no reason to believe
          that there is a heart in this house, but chimes in with my own.
          Every countenance is cheerful; every face is lit up with a lively
          glow of joy, peace, and tranquillity.
          29
          We are now enjoying our pastimes. We often meet together and
          worship the Lord by singing, praying, and preaching, fasting, and
          communing with each other in the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper.
          Now we are met in the capacity of a social community--for what?
          That our minds may rest, and our bodies receive that recreation
          which is proper and necessary to keep up an equilibrium, to
          promote healthy action to the whole system.
          29
          Let our minds sing for joy, and let life diffuse itself into
          every avenue of the body; for the object of our meeting is for
          its exercise, for its good.
          29
          This party was gotten up by the members of the Legislature, to
          rest their minds, to convene in a social capacity, and enjoy the
          society of each other, with their families, and to give renewed
          activity and energy, which will invigorate and strengthen them in
          the discharge of the arduous duties devolving upon them.
          29
          With regard to these feelings prevailing in our midst this
          evening, as well as the correctness of these principles, all men
          and women must be their own judge. I judge for myself, and not
          for another, although I have that privilege, and can do it with
          safety and propriety. Why is this? Because when I look upon the
          faces of my brethren, I know their hearts; let the roots of
          bitterness be there, and their countenances meet mine, and I know
          it in a moment. Do you not know it also? Can you not feel it? Can
          you not see it? You can. This is why I say that I have the
          privilege of judging others. You have the same privilege. Having
          this privilege to judge for others as well as myself, I feel to
          say, that every heart of the company present this afternoon and
          evening, feels to sing praises to the Lord, and shout hallelujah
          to His holy name. I am in the best place I ever was during my
          life, and with the best society. I never saw a community that
          enjoyed the tranquillity and peace that are enjoyed by this
          people in these valleys of the mountains. Is it not so? Judge for
          yourselves, ye are my witnesses.
          30
          A few words, perhaps, will suffice the company. I was requested
          to make a few remarks at the opening of the meeting, but I chose
          to delay speaking until a more suitable time; for when any of my
          brethren or myself speak to the people, I wish all to hear that
          conveniently can, because when we are in this capacity, and call
          our minds together, it is to reflect for a few moments, and look
          at each other, and think of the Lord; view over the past times of
          our lives, and contrast their history with the present festive
          moments. It is good to look upon each other, because the faces of
          our friends, and the gladness of their countenances, cheer our
          hearts, furnishing food for future reflection. Under all
          circumstances, in every situation of our past lives, in every
          transaction of business and of social enjoyment, remember it is
          good to reflect and consider upon it now in the days of peace and
          prosperity, while we have the privilege.
          30
          Our present situation, and the enjoyments of this evening, will
          become subjects of pleasant and agreeable reflection, when we
          shall be separated from each other. Some of these, my brethren,
          may be absent in foreign lands; our sisters may be separated from
          this community, and go to the right and to the left; then these
          moments of festive joy will be remembered with pleasing emotions,
          and cherished in fond memory in after years.
          30
          Again, when we meet in this capacity, it is good for our minds to
          be refreshed on this wise a little, for the reason, as you are
          all aware, that we are naturally forgetful, and it is according
          to the frailties of human nature to decline and falter in our
          feelings at the varied, besetting, enticing, and almost
          overwhelming temptations that are abroad in the world, and with
          which the people, especially those of the household of faith,
          have to contend. Our former life, its anxieties and enjoyments,
          are apt to be forgotten. This is our experience. If we should
          suffer ourselves to spend our time day after day, and week after
          week, as we are to-day, how long would it be, before we would
          forget the Lord? It would not be long. If we continued in the
          exercising of the body without reflection, this company would
          soon think--it is no matter about praying, or asking the Lord
          about anything; we have enjoyed ourselves heretofore, and all has
          been peace, quietness, and good order. But how long would it
          remain so? How long would it be before we would become careless,
          if we remembered not the Lord? For this reason, I say, on every
          such occasion, it is right, reasonable, and necessary, that every
          heart be directed to the Lord. When we have had sufficient
          recreation for our good, let that suffice. It is all right; then
          let our minds labor instead of our bodies; and in all our
          exercises of body and mind, it is good to remember the Lord. If
          it cannot be so, but otherwise, I do not wish to see another
          party while I live. If I could not enjoy the Spirit of the Lord
          in this capacity with you this evening, and feel the power of God
          to rest upon me, I should cease from all such indulgence. From
          this time, never let us permit ourselves to go one step beyond
          that which the Lord will own and bless.
          31
          But I pause here, and for this reason--I want it distinctly
          understood, that fiddling and dancing are no part of our worship.
          The question may be asked, What are they for, then? I answer,
          that my body may keep pace with my mind. My mind labors like a
          man logging, all the time; and this is the reason why I am fond
          of these pastimes--they give me a privilege to throw every thing
          off, and shake myself, that my body may exercise, and my mind
          rest. What for? To get strength, and be renewed and quickened,
          and enlivened, and animated, so that my mind may not wear out.
          Experience tells us that the most of the inhabitants of the earth
          wear out their bodies without wearing their minds at all, through
          the sufferings they endure from hard labor, with distress,
          poverty, and want. While on the other hand, a great portion of
          mankind wear out their bodies with out laboring, only in anxiety.
          But when men are brought to labor entirely in the field of
          intelligence, there are few minds to be found possessing strength
          enough to bear all things; the mind becomes overcharged, and when
          this is the case, it begins to wear upon the body, which will
          sink for want of the proper exercises. This is the reason why I
          believe in and practice what I do. The question might be asked,
          Why not go into the kanyons and get out wood, which would be good
          exercise enough? If you would know, come up to my house, you will
          soon find out. Were I to go to the kanyons, the whole camp of
          Israel would follow me there; and they would not be there long
          before they would say, Come, brother Brigham, I want to talk with
          you; come, I will chop this wood. How many scores of times I have
          undertaken to work, since I came into this ministry! Scores and
          hundreds of times when my calling in the kingdom of God was less
          than it is now, have I endeavored to set myself to work, but
          seldom could have a chance to do so more than five minutes; some
          one would come along, "Give me the hoe, brother Brigham, I want
          to talk with you;" and so stop me, and no sooner stop me than he
          stops also. I have given it up, I do not intend to work any more
          at manual labor. I do not wrestle, or play the ball; all the
          exercise I do get is to dance a little, while my council room is
          from my office to this room, and from this room to my house
          again, into my sitting room, dining room, &c.
          31
          You will see the time, you will know what my labor is. I wish
          this community to consider that I have feelings of a very acute
          nature. There is not a man or a woman, Saint or sinner, it
          mattereth not, that feels injured, and lays his or her complaints
          before me; but what it rests upon my feelings; but my faith is
          unyielding, and I intend to keep it so, as much as I can; my
          feelings sympathize so with the injured, that I am grieved and
          distressed, and my head aches, and large drops of cold sweat sit
          upon my brow and no man or woman knows anything about my
          feelings, and I do not want them to know, for I calculate to kick
          off from my heels all that I cannot carry. I will carry all I
          should, but there is not a person in this community that can
          bring to mind or mention the time whenever I exhibited one
          particle of sorrow or trouble to them. I calculate to carry my
          own sorrows just as long as I live upon this earth; and when I go
          to the grave, I expect them all to go there, and sleep with me in
          eternal silence.
          32
          But to return to our party. I would just say, it was gotten up by
          the Legislature to enjoy ourselves. I have enjoyed myself
          first-rate: my heart is cheerful and full of gladness. I am in
          the midst of the Saints of the Most High, and my desire is, and I
          will say with all my heart, may God grant that the blessings,
          favors, and mercies, and kindness of our Father in Heaven, may
          bring us to a sense of the obligations we owe to Him; and cheer,
          and cause joy and tranquillity to reign in, this community, that
          every heart may be bound up in the Gospel of the Lord Jesus
          Christ, without having to feel the rod again. What is the use of
          it, when mercy and kindness are lavished upon the people of God,
          and to see them falter in their faith, see them grow cold towards
          the Lord their God, see them slacken their pace? Is it not
          grievous? Just look at it. Suppose you had all the good gifts to
          bestow upon your children that heart could wish, and you lavish
          them out, but the more you give, the more slothful they
          become--how would you feel? Just apply this to yourselves: I know
          how I should feel. When I bring my mind to bear upon this
          subject, and see what the Lord has done for me, and for this
          people, and think that I should become remiss in my duty, so that
          the Lord should have need to chasten me again, it seems, on the
          first reflection, that I ought to be damned. When I look at
          myself before the Lord, and see what He has called me to, and
          what He has called my brethren and sisters to; how He has
          bestowed blessings upon us, and heaped them up until there is not
          room to receive them, and I should want to go to the gold mines,
          and return again here to speculate upon the Saints, and should be
          guilty of complaining all the time, it seems, if I were to do
          this, the Lord would damn me.
          32
          I know you feel as I do upon this subject. When you take this
          into consideration, your serious reflections having place in your
          heart, you feel as I do. For heaven's sake, for your own sake,
          and for the sake of Him who died for us, never let us falter in
          our duty. While we live, it is our duty to love the Lord with all
          our might, and with all our strength, and with all our souls.
          This is our duty first and foremost: we ought to love Him better
          than our wives, children, and brethren and sisters, and all
          things besides. Is this our duty? Verily yes. Let the heart love
          God, and serve Him, without any division of feeling: never suffer
          it to wander to the right or to the left for one moment.
          32
          If these were the feelings of this people, the Lord would lift up
          our hands, exalt our hearts, and cause us to walk in His almighty
          strength, so that the devil and his imps would never have power
          to bring another affliction upon us, never, no, never. Therefore,
          love the Lord, keep His commandments, cleave to the Israel of
          God; this is my exhortation all the time. And what is the next
          duty? Love your neighbor as yourself, do unto others as you would
          that others should do unto you, cease your contention and bad
          feelings, your evil speaking and evil doing.
          33
          As I observed here not long since, I consider it is a disgrace to
          the community, and in the eyes of the Lord, and of Angels, and in
          the eyes of all the Prophets and Revelators that have ever lived
          upon the earth, when a community will descend to the low,
          degraded state of contention with each other; this little
          bickering, jarring, fault-finding, somebody's abused me; why do
          you not say, if you have a mind to abuse, abuse away? Suppose
          every heart should say, if my neighbor does wrong to me, I will
          not complain, the Lord will take care of him. Let every heart be
          firm, and every one say, I will never contend any more with a man
          for property, I will not be cruel to my fellow-creature, but I
          will do all the good I can, and as little evil as possible. Now,
          where would be the wrong of taking this course? This is the way
          to approximate toward a celestial state. A community cannot be
          produced upon all the face of the earth that presents a celestial
          aspect like this. If we continue to be faithful and prayerful,
          and strive continually to resist every evil, we shall approximate
          more and more towards that celestial kingdom, where there is an
          eternal inheritance, and an unsullied glory And if we should look
          back upon ourselves, when we were doing evil to each other,
          should we not do so with regret and shame? Should we not look
          upon our past mortal lives with anguish and disgust? I wish men
          would look upon that eternity which is before them. In the great
          morning of the resurrection, with what grief would they look upon
          their little trifling affairs of this probation; they would say,
          O! do not mention it, for it is a source of mortification to me
          to think that I ever should be guilty of doing wrong, or of
          neglecting to do good to my fellow men, even if they have abused
          me. O! how would it appear if you understood the heart of the
          Lord, and understood the heart and faithfulness of those in the
          celestial kingdom. As good as we are, we shall not want to look
          upon our past actions; we shall say, O! do not mention it, but
          let it sleep; I never want that to be resurrected, but let it die
          in the grave, and sleep an eternal sleep. Brethren and sisters, I
          hope and pray that our evils may never rise with us. I can say to
          you, with all my heart, and with all my soul, and not only to
          this company, but to all the Saints throughout the world--may the
          heavens bless you; the Lord Almighty blesses you, my soul blesses
          you, how my soul loves you, may angels bless you, guard and
          preserve you; and may all the heavenly hosts, arrayed in all
          their panoply of power, be engaged for your exaltation.
          33
          One thing more. You will perceive all the time, this one thing in
          me, viz., by my conduct, there is no lack of confidence--not a
          particle of jealousy arises in my bosom towards this people. I
          never felt for one moment a shadow of doubt upon that subject. I
          have never seen one moment but this people loved me; although I
          may get up here and cuff them about, chastising them for their
          forgetfulness, their weaknesses and follies, yet I have not seen
          a moment when they did not love me. The reason is, because I love
          them so well. Do you not know that spirits beget spirits, and
          likeness begets likeness. I love this people so well that I know
          they love me; they have confidence in me, because I have
          confidence in them. You may scan the history of the whole Church,
          and look over the whole surface of the matter, and did you ever
          see this people, when they had the same confidence as they have
          in each other at this day? No, never. And it is on the increase;
          and this is what will make a community powerful. But if we lack
          confidence in each other, and be jealous of each other, our peace
          will be destroyed. If we cultivate the principle of unshaken
          confidence in each other, our joy will be full. What does it
          prove? It proves that we are fast advancing and approximating
          towards that degree of light, knowledge, and glory, and all the
          principles that pertain to the everlasting Gospel, and that we
          are actually in the favor of the Lord. We need not bring any
          proofs of that, for that devils never kick and cuff their own is
          certain. As I used to say, fifteen years ago, when I was out
          preaching, and the people would get alarmed, when the devil would
          get mad, and would say to me, "Oh! dear, sir, what is the matter,
          I am afraid we are all going to be killed, for all hell is
          boiling over"--my answer was, "Thank God, the devil has not
          forsaken us yet." Will he not sustain his own kingdom? When you
          see all the powers of the evil one combined against a community,
          you may know that is Christ's kingdom. Everything has proved that
          this is God's kingdom, and I need not say anything more about
          these two powers.
          34
          The Lord Almighty is for us, and the devil is against us.
          However, I will tell you what I think of the whole of the devil's
          company on this earth--if they will just keep out of my path, I
          shall be glad, for I never want to see one of them. My soul is
          satisfied with looking upon this wicked world. If I never see
          another wicked person while I live, I am perfectly satisfied with
          the Saints; these are my feelings. True, it is my duty to preach
          to them; but I am willing, if the Lord is satisfied, that I
          should never see another wicked person upon this earth. I would
          be satisfied to live with the Saints and Angels from this time
          henceforth. May heaven bless you, brethren and sisters. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Heber
          C. Kimball, July 11, 1852
                           Heber C. Kimball, July 11, 1852
            BELIEVING THE BIBLE--THE GOSPEL--PERSECUTION--SPIRIT-RAPPING,
                                        ETC.
               An address delivered by President H. C. Kimball, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, July 11, 1852.
          34
          I have been much interested with the principles that have been
          laid before us by brother Daniel Tyler. He is a man with whom I
          have been acquainted for many years, and I know him to be a good
          man. I can say truly that I have heard the Gospel presented
          before us this morning, as it is recorded in the New Testament.
          34
          You know that it is generally understood, and perhaps by many of
          the strangers who are present to-day, that we do not believe the
          Bible. That is a great mistake: we do believe it. I can say, as
          one of the Apostles of old said, and it is my advice and
          instruction to you--prove all things, and try all things, and
          hold fast to that which is good. As he exhorted you to prove
          these things, to investigate them, and reflect upon them, and
          prove the truth of that which is called "Mormonism," let me tell
          you, gentlemen, the day will come, if you don't do it, you will
          be sorry. Why? Because there is a future day that will determine
          these things.
          34
          It will be but a few years, perhaps not to exceed fifty, that not
          a person here this day will then be upon the earth. You will go
          into the world of spirits, to try the realities of another state
          of existence. What we have to do we must do in this state of
          existence, while in our tabernacles of flesh; and if we make good
          use of our lives, and of our bodies, and of our talents, it will
          be well with us; but if we do not, we have to give an account of
          the deeds done in the body. These bodies are given to you by the
          same Being that gave to me my body, and they are committed to you
          as a stewardship by that God who placed us here; and you have got
          to give an account of your stewardship, and the course you take.
          If you permit that tabernacle to become polluted, and if your
          spirit suffers your body to be contaminated with sin and
          corruption, you will have to make an atonement for it before you
          can get your redemption worked out. Gentlemen, mark it, for it is
          even so.
          35
          This is the Gospel which has been taught to us to-day, in a plain
          and simple manner, and in that simplicity that it was taught by
          Jesus Christ and his Apostles, and by many others who were
          ordained by them. The people profess to believe the Bible; the
          whole Christian world profess to believe that book--to believe
          that it is the Bible, but do they believe what is in that Bible?
          If they do, they don't practise it. How many of you, my brethren
          and fellow travellers to eternity, how many times have you said
          in your day, and in your generation, and in your family circles,
          "If I could see one man practise that religion that was taught by
          Jesus and his Apostles, I would be a Saint." I said it many times
          before I ever heard of "Mormonism," and sought for these things,
          and wished for them, and prayed for them according to the
          knowledge I then had. But what did I know about God, or about the
          Gospel, by what I heard from the pulpits of the day?
          35
          I have been at the Methodists' meeting many a time, and have
          followed up their protracted meetings, and sought for religion;
          and when people were converted to the faith of Methodism, I have
          seen the priest go to the water because some wished to be
          baptized in the water, but not because it was at all necessary.
          One would say, I want to be sprinkled; another, I want to have
          the water poured upon me; and another, I want to be plunged. All
          right, says the minister, either of these is just as necessary as
          the other, for none of them are essential to salvation; we only
          attend to them to satisfy the candidate. Suppose the laws of the
          United States were made upon this principle, just to suit
          everybody's fancy and notions, making laws for every one to do
          just as he pleased--what kind of laws would they be? What would
          you think of such a law-making department? Would you sustain it?
          Would you send to it a man, as a delegate, to represent your
          case, to make wholesome laws that would give every man his rights
          and privileges? I would not have such a law, but I would cast it
          out with those who made it.
          35
          God has one mode of saving men and women, and you cannot be saved
          upon any other principle than that which Jesus Christ taught, and
          I know it. I can say to this congregation, and to every other,
          which thing I have said in the United States and in Great
          Britain--except you receive the words of Jesus Christ, and those
          that are ordained and sent forth by him, you are just as sure of
          damnation as you are sure of dying, and I know it. These things
          are plain, and the Gospel that brother Daniel has spoken has been
          revealed in these last times. That light that was once
          extinguished by wickedness has been lit up again. The ancient
          Gospel is again revealed, and the Priesthood of the Son of God,
          and the Latter-day Saints have this power, and you cannot help
          yourselves. That is why we are here to-day, that is the reason
          why I am here to-day, in a land of peace and plenty, and a
          healthy location, with my brethren who have come here to find a
          good home. Don't you find the people here peaceable, and kind,
          and affectionate, attending to their own business? Did you ever
          find a more peaceable place in your life, in the United States,
          or in England, or in any part of the world, than this? No, I defy
          you to find any more peaceable place than this. The reason we are
          here in these silent valleys is, because we could not have the
          privilege of worshipping God according to His requirements in our
          native country. Some of you may say, "I can scarcely believe
          that;" but, as sure as you live, I have been robbed and broken up
          six times before I came here, and was forced to leave my
          habitation, and my substance. It is there now, and they are
          welcome to it. I am not the only person who has suffered so, by a
          great many; and all because of my religion. We are looked upon as
          the worst kind of beings on the earth. Did you ever think of a
          wicked thing but what it was placed upon us.
          36
          Joseph Smith and his brother were killed in Carthage jail. Joseph
          Smith was a Prophet of God, and I know it. I am not testifying to
          this because I have believed it so long, but I knew it twenty
          years ago, just as well as I do now, and have testified of it to
          the nations of the earth. And what will be the consequences of
          this testimony? They that believe and are baptized shall be
          saved, and they shall receive the Holy Ghost under the hands of
          those who have due authority to confer that blessing; and if they
          go forward and are baptized with full purpose of heart, believing
          with all their soul, obeying the Gospel, being buried with Christ
          by baptism, they shall obtain the Holy Ghost.
          36
          On the day of Pentecost, when Peter proclaimed the Gospel, about
          3000 souls were added to the Church that day. How long did it
          take them to repent? No longer than they were willing to believe,
          and put away their sins, with a determination to forsake them,
          and not sin again.
          36
          I rejoice that I live in this day and age of the world; I rejoice
          that I have passed through what I have for the Gospel's sake; but
          will it compare with what men passed through in the days of
          Jesus, who was hung upon a cross for his religion? He expired
          upon Calvary for his religion; they killed him as a false
          prophet, and even those of his own household did not believe in
          him; they also slew his Apostles, and those who believed in them.
          Don't you suppose it was as degrading to them to believe in Jesus
          Christ, as for us to believe that Joseph Smith was a Prophet? He
          was a Prophet, and Jesus was the Son of God; and Hyrum Smith was
          a Patriarch, and a son of God, and I bear witness of it unto all
          men. Many feel to damn the "Mormons," and call them everything
          that is evil--does it harm us? Does it affect our salvation in
          the least? No! The more patiently we bear it, the greater will be
          our glory and exaltation. It is because of our religion that the
          people are in trouble.
          37
          In the United States they are troubled about it; in Great
          Britain, France, and Denmark, they are troubled about it. The
          priests of the day are stoutly crying, false Prophet, and
          delusion; and the invisible world are rapping, muttering, and
          peeping, and they are finding fault. They are at a loss to know
          what can be the matter. The invisible world are in trouble; they
          are knocking, and rapping, and muttering; and the people are
          inquiring of them to know concerning the things of God, and there
          is not a soul of them can tell them anything about the end of the
          world. They are in a dreadful situation; and in the city of
          Rochester, near where I used to live, the last information I
          received from there, there were 135 spiritual writers in that
          city. I have a brother-in-law there, who is a Presbyterian
          priest: he couldn't inquire of God about future things, so he
          inquired of the spirits; but they could not tell him anything
          about the dead nor the living. They are just about as intelligent
          in their revelations as this world are in theirs. They are all in
          commotion--what is going to be done? I will tell you--God is
          going to make a short work upon the earth, and the invisible
          world are troubled about it. You do not doubt that, gentlemen;
          you who come from the United States can see that it is so; and
          the people are troubled in New York, and in many of the other
          States, so that they cannot rest, no not a day. They are in
          confusion, and so dis-spirited they know not what to do. The idea
          strikes me that the day of the Lord is approaching, and nearer
          than you think it is. You are here in quest of gold, but there is
          something here worth more than the glittering jewels of the
          earth. I say, let me serve God, and keep His commandments, and
          you may have the gold, and all the riches and wealth of the earth
          in welcome; I care nothing about it; for all you can take with
          you, when you leave this earth, is not much.
          37
          A dream that my own daughter had lately, comes forcibly to my
          mind. I will relate it. She dreamed that she was driven, and
          those that were with her, but they had a great many fine things
          in the earth, in the shape of furniture, gold and silver, and
          every thing else; and she suffered in her feelings, because she
          was under the necessity of leaving all, and could not take
          anything out of the world with her. Finally she was permitted to
          take a white dress. I said to her, that is all we can take, in
          our shroud we shall lie laid in the silent tomb. Naked we came
          into the world, and naked we shall go out of it, for dust we are,
          and unto dust we shall return. Can you help yourselves? If you
          can, you have more power than I have. I expect to be laid low,
          with all the human family, as was the Son of God, and I cannot
          help myself. I know your feelings; I have seen the day when I
          loved gold, and silver, and fine carriages, and fine horses, and
          the good things of this world; but I have lost those feelings,
          and may God ever continue to separate them from me, as far as the
          east is from the west; and let my affections be upon Him, and His
          kingdom, until I breathe my last breath. I know if I never go to
          the United States again, or to Great Britain, my skirts are clear
          from the blood of this generation. I have received nothing but
          ill wages for my labor from them; and if ever a man did his duty,
          I have done it to this generation. I have told you the truth, and
          whether you are in hell or in heaven you shall know that
          "Mormonism" is true, and what I and my brethren have told you
          this day is the Gospel of salvation. So may God have mercy upon
          you, and save you in His kingdom. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, July 11, 1852
                            Brigham Young, July 11, 1852
           KNOWLEDGE OF THE DOCTRINE OF CHRIST--THE RELIGIONS OF MEN, AND
                                         THE
                  RELIGION OF GOD--JOSEPH SMITH--PERSECUTIONS, ETC.
               An address delivered by President Brigham Young, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, July 11, 1852.
          37
          There are a few minutes more of time allotted to us for worship
          this morning, which I will occupy for the consolation of my
          hearers, and for my own.
          37
          I can bear testimony that the Gospel of Jesus Christ is true; and
          the word of the Lord, whether written or spoken, is true.
          38
          Permit me to ask a question. Who are the individuals upon the
          face of the earth, that can make this statement in truth? Who are
          the individuals that can say that the Gospel of Jesus Christ is
          true, and that he lives? Can the Christian world? They cannot.
          They may say that they believe, and have all confidence that
          Jesus lives; they may have all confidence in declaring that the
          Gospel of Jesus Christ is true; they may firmly declare that the
          Bible (referring particularly to the New Testament) is true; that
          therein contained is the plan of salvation, and is true. This
          they may declare in all good conscience, and with all soberness.
          But let me ask, where are the individuals that can say that they
          know that Jesus lives? And who are the individuals that can say
          that his Gospel is true, and is the plan of salvation to man? I
          will let Christendom answer this question for themselves; but to
          me it is certain, that no man lives on the face of the earth--no
          woman lives, that can say this, except those to whom Christ has
          revealed himself.
          38
          Though others may say in all good conscience they believe he
          lives--who knows the doctrine of the Lord Jesus Christ to be
          true? There is one class of people, and one only, that live upon
          the face of the earth, who so know it; and that class of men and
          women are those that keep his commandments, and do his will; none
          others can say it. None others can declare with boldness, and
          emphatically, that Jesus lives, and that his Gospel is true. Upon
          the plain and simple principle of logical and philosophical
          deduction, we learn this from his own words, as written by one of
          his disciples--"They that do my will, shall know of my doctrine,
          and they that love me will keep my commandments;" and I will add,
          "they that know and love me," says Jesus, "will keep my sayings."
          38
          This is my testimony. We have had the first principles of the
          Gospel laid before us this morning, and we have heard the
          testimony of one of the Apostles of the last days to confirm it.
          I am also a witness to the truth of these sayings contained in
          the New Testament.
          38
          Permit me, my hearers, brethren and strangers, to say to you,
          there is not that man that hears the sound of my voice this day,
          that can say that Jesus lives, whether he professes to be his
          disciple or not; and can say at the same time, that Joseph Smith
          was not a Prophet of the Lord.
          38
          There is not that being that ever had the privilege of hearing
          the way of life and salvation set before him as it is written in
          the New Testament, and in the Book of Mormon, and in the Book of
          Doctrine and Covenants, by a Latter-day Saint, that can say that
          Jesus lives, that his Gospel is true; and at the same time say
          that Joseph Smith was not a Prophet of God. That is strong
          testimony, but it is true. No man can say that this book (laying
          his hand on the Bible) is true, is the word of the Lord, is the
          way, is the guide-board in the path, and a charter by which we
          may learn the will of God; and at the same time say, that the
          Book of Mormon is untrue; if he has had the privilege of reading
          it, or of hearing it read, and learning its doctrines. There is
          not that person on the face of the earth who has had the
          privilege of learning the Gospel of Jesus Christ from these two
          books, that can say that one is true, and the other is false. No
          Latter-day Saint, no man or woman, can say the Book of Mormon is
          true, and at the same time say that the Bible is untrue. If one
          be true, both are; and if one be false, both are false. If Jesus
          lives, and is the Saviour of the world, Joseph Smith is a Prophet
          of God, and lives in the bosom of his father Abraham. Though they
          have killed his body, yet he lives and beholds the face of his
          Father in heaven; and his garments are pure as the angels that
          surround the throne of God; and no man on the earth can say that
          Jesus lives, and deny at the same time my assertion about the
          Prophet Joseph. This is my testimony, and it is strong.
          39
               Permit me to say, that I am proud of my religion. It is the
          only thing I pride myself in, on the earth. I may heap up gold
          and silver like the mountains; I may gather around me property,
          goods, and chattels, but I could have no glory in that, compared
          with my religion; it is the fountain of light and intelligence;
          it swallows up the truth contained in all the philosophy of the
          world, both heathen and Christian; it circumscribes the wisdom of
          man; it circumscribes all the wisdom and power of the world; it
          reaches to that within the veil. Its bounds, its circumference,
          its end, its height, and depth, are beyond the comprehension of
          mortals, for it has none.
          39
          Permit me to remark, my hearers, as for the intelligence of the
          day, and the knowledge that they have had in Christendom--how
          long will it take a man of reflection, of deep thought, and of a
          sound mind, to circumscribe every particle of it? It can be
          weighed and measured, as easy as the gold dust. For instance, go
          to the "Mother Church," from whence all the religions of
          Christendom have sprung; go back to the time when she flourished
          in her glory; and how long would it take us to circumscribe the
          religion of the "Mother Church," the "Holy Catholic Church?"
          Cannot we learn the principles of that church in a very few
          years? We can study her theology until we get all the knowledge
          and wisdom to be had upon every point of doctrine contained in
          her from first to last. Go then to the Church of England, and
          from that to the latest and last reformer that lives upon the
          earth--and how long would it take to circumscribe every particle
          of their religion from first to last? Not long.
          39
          Why do I make these remarks and assertions? It is because I have
          an experience. All the religion of the world, I have learned
          already. The best and greatest divines that lived in my boyhood,
          I may say almost in my childhood, children not as old as I was at
          the time, almost babes and sucklings, would drown them in their
          own arguments, and confuse them. Question them, and they cannot
          answer the simplest question concerning the character of the
          Deity, heaven, or hell, this or that, or the other; a sucking
          child would comparatively confuse and confound them upon these
          subjects; and they would wind up all by saying, "Great is the
          mystery of Godliness, God manifest in the flesh." I would say,
          great is their foolery; they are profound in their ignorance.
          39
          But I am proud to say of my religion, I have studied it
          faithfully for twenty-two years, day and night, at home and
          abroad, upon the rivers, and upon the lakes, when travelling by
          sea and by land; have studied it in the pulpit; from morning till
          night; whatsoever might be my pursuit, I have studied it with as
          close an application as any college student ever did any subject
          he wished to commit to memory; and I can say I have only just got
          into the A B C of it; it leads the vision of my mind into
          eternity.
          39
          Suppose the Almighty should unfold the future destiny of the
          nations to you, and wrap you in a sea of vision, and show you the
          eternity of knowledge, with the history of worlds on worlds, and
          their destiny--you can then have a faint idea of what it is like;
          and any other man, or any other woman, who ever has received the
          promise of the Gospel, knows that the Lord Almighty is in the
          midst of all His creatures that are scattered abroad among the
          nations of the earth, and does His pleasure among them. His
          scrutinizing eye will not suffer a hair of your head to fall to
          the ground unnoticed; His attention is at once so minute and so
          extensive.
          40
          He presides over the worlds on worlds that illuminate this little
          planet, and millions on millions of worlds that we cannot see;
          and yet He looks upon the minutest object of His creations; not
          one of these creatures escapes His notice; and there is not one
          of them but His wisdom and power has produced. But that is no
          matter to me, I speak with regard to you. Is there a man who
          believes, or professes to believe in what Jesus says, where he
          declares by one of his Apostles, or by more than one pointedly,
          there is no half way work in this matter? Now if you can believe
          it, it is directly to the point; says he, "If you love me, you
          will keep my commandments;" and if you do not love me, you will
          not keep my commandments--this follows as a matter of course; and
          that will show to my Father, and to my brethren that follow me,
          that you do love me; and so say I, they that love the Lord Jesus,
          will keep his commandments.
          40
          Why should I not be proud of my religion? if a man be permitted
          to have pride at all; or if this people be permitted to indulge
          in it in the least degree, why not be proud of their religion?
          for God loves it, angels adore it, all the heavenly hosts delight
          in it; it is in the midst of an eternity of intelligence, and
          forms a part of it; while, on the other hand, all hell is opposed
          to it, all wickedness is opposed to it, all men and women who
          desire to make sin their refuge, hate it; and all hell, and all
          its votaries hate it, and the Lord Almighty, with all His
          subjects, loves it; and He will yet rule triumphantly over this
          earth. What shall we say, will not Jesus reign and subdue the
          world? Is he not the Saviour of the world, and the only begotten
          Son of the Father, and will he not accomplish the work he came to
          accomplish? Is not the earth the Lord's, the wheat, the fine
          flour, the gold, the silver, the earth and all its fullness? Can
          you imagine to yourselves anything that pertains to this earth
          that does not belong to its Redeemer? He is my master, my elder
          brother. He is the character I look to, and the one I try to
          serve to the best of my ability. Should I not be proud of my
          religion? I think if pride can at all be indulged in, the
          Latter-day Saints should be proud.
          40
          I know there are a great many people who are not acquainted with
          the history of this people; I am personally and most intimately
          acquainted with the history of Joseph Smith and this people, for
          twenty-two years. There are a great many people that are not; and
          they have thought we have been persecuted from state to state,
          and from place to place, because of our wickedness and lawless
          acts among the people. I need not say it to my Father in heaven,
          to Jesus Christ His Son, or to the holy angels, or the Prophets
          and Apostles, who have lived in former, or in latter days; for
          they know it; but I can say to those who do not understand and
          know our history, that we have been persecuted because we believe
          in the Lord Jesus Christ, and do just as he has told us, and not
          because of the evil acts of Joseph Smith.
          41
          Joseph Smith was not killed because he was deserving of it, nor
          because he was a wicked man; but because he was a virtuous man. I
          know that to be so, as well as I know that the sun now shines.
          Every man and woman who does the will of the Father, and will
          keep the commandments of Jesus Christ, may also know, as well as
          myself--it is their privilege. I know for myself that Joseph
          Smith was the subject of forty-eight law-suits, and the most of
          them I witnessed with my own eyes; but not one action could ever
          be made to bear against him. No law or constitutional right did
          he ever violate. He was innocent and virtuous; he kept the law of
          his country, and lived above it; out of forty-eight law suits,
          (and I was with him in the most of them), not one charge could be
          substantiated against him. He was pure, just, and holy, as to the
          keeping of the law. Now this I state for the satisfaction of
          those who do not know our history; but the Lord and the angels
          know all about it.
          41
          Let me ask another question; do the people know what we were
          driven from Missouri for? An old friend of mine, called upon me
          the day before yesterday. He said he had been watching my course,
          had looked and inquired after me, and had endeavored to find out
          my history, for we were friends. I asked him if he knew anything
          about the Latter-day Saints, or not? I found he had been looking
          after me, and had learned I had become a follower of Joseph
          Smith. I said, Do you know anything about our history? By his
          reply, I found he knew nothing at all of it, in comparison.
          41
          A great many are in the like situation. Now let me relate one
          item of it, not for those who are wise, and pretend to be filled
          with knowledge, and at the same time know nothing, but I relate
          it for the information of those who know nothing about it. To my
          certain knowledge, men and women left the counties of Davies and
          Caldwell, in the upper part of the state of Missouri, set fire to
          their own buildings, drove off their cattle killed and slayed, (I
          know, and could name the people), and then swore the "Mormons"
          had done it. Now this circumstance came under my certain
          knowledge. Says I, can it be possible that men can become so
          corrupt, and so sunken in wickedness? I say this for the
          information of those who do not understand and know this people
          from the beginning. From the first day I knew brother Joseph to
          the day of his death, a better man never lived upon the face of
          this earth.
          41
          From the days of my youth, and I will say from the day that I
          came upon the stage of action to act for myself, there never was
          a boy, a man, either old or middle aged, that ever tried to live
          a life more pure and refined than your humble servant. As I told
          my friend, says I, Brother Brown, I have tried to make myself a
          better man from the day of our first acquaintance to this. I have
          not infringed upon any law, or trod upon the rights of my
          neighbors; but I have tried to walk in the paths of
          righteousness, and live an humble life, that I might gain eternal
          happiness. I make bold to speak thus, though in the eastern world
          it is quite unpopular to speak in one's own praise; but since I
          have become a western man, I can make stump speeches. Why am I
          driven from my possessions? Why am I persecuted, and forced to
          leave thousands and thousands of dollars worth of property in
          Ohio, Missouri, and Illinois? though I have never looked back
          upon it, it {s as ashes under my feet. I am in the hands of God,
          He gave it, and He took it away; and blessed be the name of the
          Lord.
          41
          I am in His hands; all men are in His hands; and He has turned
          the enemy in his way. and held him by His power. It is not I, it
          is not Joseph, it is not this people, nor the wisdom they
          possess, that has delivered them from their enemies; but it is
          the Lord. He is our captain, our pilot, and our master, and in
          Him do we glory, and will glory. Let the world say what they
          please, we will glory in our holy religion, and God will we
          serve. And furthermore let me remark, I am not afraid nor ashamed
          to expose and oppose the iniquity of men, though they may stand
          in high places; neither was Joseph Smith. Let death come, no
          matter for that; who cares for it?
          42
          I am aware, as well as brother Kimball, if my body fall into the
          dust, I am laying it down to abide the penalty of the law broken
          in the fall of man; for dust I am, and unto dust I must return.
          It is all right to me; I have seen a great many times that I
          would like to have this body lie down, but as long as the spirit
          and body hold together, my tongue shall be swift against evil,
          the Lord Almighty being my helper. Though it may be in "Mormon"
          Elders, among the people in or out of the Church, if they come in
          my path, where I can chastise them, the Lord Almighty being my
          helper, my tongue shall be swift against evil; and if evil come,
          let it come. If for this my body shall fall, let it fall; when
          they have destroyed the body, then they can do no more that they
          can do; that is the end of their power, and of the power of the
          devil on this earth; but Jesus Christ has power to destroy both
          soul and body in hell. I thank you for your attention. May the
          Lord bless you. Amen.
                
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / George
          Albert Smith, July 24, 1852
                         George Albert Smith, July 24, 1852
            LIBERTY AND PERSECUTION--CONDUCT OF THE U.S. GOVERNMENT, ETC.
          An oration delivered by Hon. George A. Smith, in the Tabernacle,
                       Great Salt Lake Valley, July 24, 1852.
          42
          My Friends--It is with a heart lifted up in gratitude to Him who
          reigns above, for the privilege of rising before you to express
          my feelings, and of beholding so many persons happily situated in
          the enjoyment of civil and religious liberty, that I have the
          privilege this day, in the company of the thousands that surround
          me, of rejoicing in the celebration of the 24th of July, it being
          the first day for seventeen years since the organization of the
          Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, that they could lie
          down to rest in perfect peace--without being disturbed by the
          cruel hand of persecution. Yes, my friends, after seventeen years
          of cruel, bloody persecution, inflicted in the most ruthless and
          savage manner upon the people of the Church of Latter-day Saints,
          they--a few pioneers, 143 in number, had at last the privilege,
          on the 24th of July, 1847, of lying down in this secluded valley,
          in this desolate and mountain country; of establishing
          institutions that insure freedom to all, liberty to every
          person--the liberty of conscience, as well as every privilege
          which can be desired by any citizens of this earth.
          43
          As I walked with the procession from the habitation of the
          President to this place, with heart and eyes filled with weeping,
          I saw the beauty and the glory of the liberty and the happiness
          that surrounded us: my mind was caught back in an instant to the
          days of bloody persecution. Joseph was not there; Hiram was not
          there; David (Patten) was not there in the procession. Where are
          they? Sleeping in the silent tomb. They were murdered, cruelly
          murdered, in violation of all law, and every principle of
          justice; cruelly murdered for their religion, and we survive
          their ashes that are mingling with the dust, after being
          sacrificed; after, as martyrs, sealing their testimony, we are
          even permitted to live, and enjoy five years of our lives where
          no man has power to murder, or to rob, or to burn our houses, or
          destroy our property, or ravish our women, or kill our children;
          no man has the power to do it without justice overtaking him.
          43
          The history of our persecutions is unparalleled in the history of
          past ages. To be sure, persecutions have existed in countries
          where religion was established by law, and where any other
          religion than the one established, was decreed by law to be
          heretical, and its votaries doomed to persecution and the flames.
          But in the countries where we suffered our persecution, there is
          a good government; there are good institutions that are
          calculated to protect every person in the enjoyment of every
          right that is dear to man.
          43
          The persecutions we have suffered were in violation of every good
          institution, of every wholesome law, of every institution and
          constitution which exist in the countries where they have been
          inflicted. And what is more singular, out of the hundreds of
          murders which have been committed upon men, women, and children,
          in the most barbarous, ruthless, and reckless manner--not one
          murderer has ever been brought to justice; not a single man who
          has shed the blood of a Latter-day Saint has ever been punished
          or brought to justice; but they are permitted to run at large, in
          the face and eyes of every officer of government, who are
          directly concerned to preserve the laws, and see them faithfully
          executed. The history of no country on the earth affords a
          parallel to this; it cannot be found; that is, such a wholesale
          murder, robbery, house-burning, butchering of men, women, and
          children, and, finally, the wholesale banishment of tens of
          thousands of souls from their homes and country; this has
          actually been effected in violation of the laws and regulations
          of the country where it occurred, and not one person has ever
          been punished for these crimes. I challenge the world to produce
          the record upon the face of the earth, that shows, in all these
          murders, cold-blooded butcheries, house-burnings, and wholesale
          robberies, that a single person has suffered the just penalty of
          the law; that a solitary criminal was punished; that any of the
          unprincipled savages who were guilty of these high handed
          depredations, were ever brought to justice. Ought we not, then,
          to rejoice, that there is a spot upon the footstool of God, where
          law is respected; where the Constitution for which our fathers
          bled is revered; where the people who dwell here can enjoy
          liberty, and worship God in three or in twenty different ways,
          and no man be permitted to plague his head about it? I rejoice
          that this is the case; and when I reflect upon the scenes we have
          passed through, and realize our present prosperity, my heart is
          filled with joy.
          44
          I have looked upon scenes that are calculated to stir up the
          stoutest heart, without shedding a tear; but I cannot look upon
          the procession of this day, and consider the blessings that now
          surround this people, without shedding tears of gratitude, that
          God has so kindly delivered us out of all our distresses, and
          given to us our liberty. To be sure, after working our way into
          these valleys, making the roads through mountains, seeking out
          the route, and coming here, our persecutions did not cease; our
          enemies were like the good old quaker when he turned the dog out
          of doors: said he, "I won't kill thee, thou hast got out of my
          reach; I cannot kill thee, but I will give thee a bad name;" and
          he hallooed out "bad dog," and somebody, supposing the dog to be
          mad, shot him. So with us; after robbing us of millions of
          property, and driving us cruelly from the land of our birth;
          after violating every solitary law of the government, in which
          many of the officers were partakers; expelling us into the
          wilderness, where they thought we would actually perish, (and
          there is not to be found in the history of the world, a parallel
          case of suffering that this people endured;) while in the midst
          of this, the cry of mad dog was raised, to finish, as they
          thought, the work of destruction and murder. Without a guide,
          without a knowledge of the country, without reading even the
          notes of any traveller upon this earth, or seeing the face of a
          being who ever set foot upon this land, we were led by the hand
          of God, through His servant Brigham, threading the difficult
          passes of these mountains, until we set our foot upon this place,
          which was, at that time, a desert, containing nothing but a few
          bunches of dead grass, and crickets enough to fence the land. We
          were more than one thousand miles from where provisions could be
          obtained, and found not game enough to support an Indian
          population. We set down here, and we called upon God to bless our
          undertakings. We formed a government here; and a government has
          been in existence in this Territory of Utah for five years.
          44
          I now want to ask a few grave questions upon this subject. It is
          customary for the General Government to extend a fostering hand
          and parental care to all new territories. When we first settled
          here, this was Mexican territory; but it was soon after acquired
          by treaty, and became U.S. territory. Four years and a half, a
          government has been supported here, governmental laws and
          regulations have been kept up.
          44
          I inquire, has the Government of the U.S. ever expended one
          dollar to support that government? No! with the exception of the
          U.S. officers in the Territory a little over one year; 20,000
          dols. for the erection of public buildings; and 5,000 dols. for a
          library.
          44
          Has the Legislative Department ever received one dollar? No! And
          why? Because they are "Mormons;" and fugitive officers could run
          home to see their mammy, and cry out "Bad dog, bad dog," "They
          are Mormons, they are Mormons."
          44
          What is the reason that a citizen of this Territory cannot get a
          foot of land to call his own? for there is in reality no such
          thing. Why has not the Indian title been extinguished, and the
          people here been permitted to hold titles to land? Let the people
          answer.
          44
          Why is it that the inhabitants of this Territory have never had
          one dime expended to defray the expenses of their Legislature?
          Four or five winters they have held their session, and not one
          solitary dime has been expended by the General Government, as has
          been done in all other Territories. What is the reason?
          44
          What is the reason that the Oregon land law was not extended over
          Utah, which gives to the citizens who broke up the new ground, a
          home free, for themselves, as was the case in other Territories?
          Why are these hard-working pioneers, who dug down the mountains,
          not permitted a title to their homes?
          44
          Let me ask again. The people here have sustained three Indian
          wars at their own expense. Who pays for the Indian wars of
          Oregon? the Indian wars in California? or in New Mexico? for the
          difficulties in Minnesota? and other sundry wars and difficulties
          that have occurred or may occur in the Territories? Whose duty I
          ask, is it to pay for them? It is the duty of the Government of
          the United States.
          45
          Why has not Utah the same privilege, the same treatment? Why is
          it that these three wars have to be totally and entirely
          sustained by those citizens, without a dollar of aid from the
          parental Government?
          45
          I need not follow up this train of reflection, but I will add one
          question more. Why was it that the judges and the secretary
          returned home last year without performing one particle of their
          duty? You can read it in their own report; say they, "When we got
          there, we found that the people were all Mormons;" as if we were
          horses, or elephants, or Cyclops, whose business it was to get up
          into these mountains and forge thunderbolts. "Oh! we will run
          home again, because when we got there, we found the people all
          Mormons."
          45
          I will say, with all reverence to the constituted authority that
          exists in the General Government, that I do believe that the same
          spirit of tradition, and the same spirit of persecution, that
          have ever followed the people of God, have more or less influence
          with them; and that if we would actually go to work, and alter
          our name, we might possibly be treated as other men. Be this as
          it may, I feel, while I stand upon the face of the earth,
          determined to defend my right, and the rights of my friends and
          brethren. I know that there is no "Mormonism " known in the
          constitution of the U.S., but all men are there considered equal,
          and free to worship God according to the dictates of their own
          consciences, and enjoy equal rights and privileges.
          45
          There is one item of history which I have observed among this
          people. The very men who were the murderers of our fathers, and
          our brothers, the burners of our houses, have come here among
          this people since that time, where they have received protection;
          they have been fed when they were hungry. The very man who burned
          the house of Elder Moses Clawson, at Lima, came to him and said,
          Mr. Clawson, I want to get some provisions from you." Now, these
          very persecutors knew that our religion was true, and that we
          were men of sterling integrity, or else they never would have
          thrown themselves in our way, and called upon us for aid
          afterwards: and I am proud to say, that kind aid and assistance
          on their journey to the gold mines, have been extended to
          hundreds of these robbers, and thus coals of fire have been
          heaped upon their heads; but their skulls were so thick, it never
          burned many of them a bit.
          45
          I have but a few more remarks to make, which will be directed to
          the twenty-four young men, and the braves and warriors of these
          mountains. Young men, braves and warriors, who sit before you
          this day, let me admonish you, never to let the hand of tyranny
          or oppression rise in these mountains, but stand unflinchingly
          true by the constitution of the United States, which our fathers
          sealed with their blood; never suffer its provisions to be
          infringed upon; and if any man, or set of men form themselves
          into a mob in these mountains, to violate that sacred document,
          by taking away the civil or religious rights of any man, if he
          should be one of the most inferior beings that exist upon the
          face of the earth, be sure you crush it, or spend the last drop
          of blood in your veins with the words of--Truth and Liberty,
          Liberty and Truth, for ever!
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, April 9, 1852
                            Brigham Young, April 9, 1852
                SELF-GOVERNMENT--MYSTERIES--RECREATION AND AMUSEMENT,
           NOT IN THEMSELVES SINFUL--TITHING--ADAM, OUR FATHER AND OUR GOD
          A sermon delivered by President Brigham Young, in the Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, April 9, 1852.
          46
          It is my intention to preach several discourses this evening, but
          how many I do not know.
          46
          I will in the first place bear testimony to the truth of many
          remarks made by brother Hunter, and especially his exhortation to
          the Seventies and Elders, and those men who wish to go on
          missions. I wish also to urge the necessity of your proceeding on
          your missions immediately, and of going to the place of your
          destination full of the Holy Ghost, preaching righteousness to
          the people; and while you do this, live up to the principles you
          preach, that you may teach also by your example, as well as by
          precept. Go, ye Elders, and now consider yourselves from this
          time forth missionaries. If the Gospel is in you like a flaming
          fire, to be poured upon the people, gather your neighbors
          together, and give your brethren an invitation to your house, and
          set before them the duties of man; and preach, if you can speak
          but for five minutes, occupying that time to the best advantage.
          Continue to preach, study, and learn, by faith and prayer, until
          your minds and mouths are opened, and you understand most
          perfectly the love of Christ.
          47
          It is not uncommon for Elders to say, "If I could have a mission,
          and be sent among strangers, I could speak to them, because they
          have not been instructed in the way of life and salvation: I
          could lay before them the principles of the Gospel, which have
          been taught to me, without that difference of feeling, and fear,
          which I experience while speaking to my brethren." It is very
          true that the first principles of the Gospel taught by the Elders
          of this Church are easy to be understood, compared with what it
          is to preach them to our families, or to our neighborhood, and to
          govern and control ourselves by the principles of righteousness
          which the Gospel inculcates. Again, to gather the Saints, to
          preach the Gospel to the world, and convince them of the truth,
          are much easier tasks than to convince men that you can master
          yourself, and practise the moral principles inculcated by your
          religion. That is a small portion of the duty required of you in
          order to obtain crowns of glory, immortality, and eternal lives.
          I will here remark, that it is natural for the people to desire
          to know a great deal of the MYSTERIES; this, however, is not
          universally the case, though it is so with a great many of the
          Elders of Israel. I do not suppose it will apply to those who
          compose this congregation; your object in being here this evening
          is not to hear some great mystery of the Kingdom, which you never
          understood before. The greatest mystery a man ever learned, is to
          know how to control the human mind, and bring every faculty and
          power of the same in subjection to Jesus Christ; this is the
          greatest mystery we have to learn while in these tabernacles of
          clay. It is more necessary for the Elders to learn and practise
          upon this lesson in the midst of the Saints at head quarters than
          in the world; for their facilities for learning are much greater,
          and I will tell you wherein. Let a Bishop, a High Priest, a
          President of any Stake or Quorum, any who are Elders in Israel,
          or any individual Saint from the first to the last of them, fall
          into error, and it is at once made manifest; he cannot pursue
          that course any further, for he is where lie can learn his
          duties, and know how to walk straight in the paths of
          righteousness. Here is the place for you to teach great mysteries
          to your brethren, because here are those who can correct you.
          This fault the Elders of Israel do not fall into in this
          Tabernacle, although they may in private houses and
          neighborhoods. When a man is capable of correcting you, and of
          giving you light, and true doctrine, do not get up an
          altercation, but submit to be taught like little children, and
          strive with all your might to understand. The privileges of those
          who dwell here are greater than the privileges of those who are
          abroad. When your duties call you into foreign lands, and you
          there exhaust your stock of knowledge and wisdom, and you are not
          in possession of the keys to obtain that instruction which you
          desire, it is because you are far from the right fountain--far
          from the body, where all the members are in lively
          operation--where the eye can see, the ear hear, the nose smell,
          and the mouth speak, and so forth. When your face is turned from
          the body, let mysteries alone, for this is the only place for you
          to be corrected if wrong. Preach the simple, unadorned truth;
          work out your salvation with diligence, and do that which will
          guarantee you a warranted deed, an undeniable title to eternal
          lives.
          47
          If you feel prayer in you, pray; and if you feel the spirit of
          preaching in you, preach; call in your brethren, and read the
          Bible, the Book of Mormon, the Book of Covenants, and the other
          revelations of God to them; and talk over the things contained in
          those books, and deal them out to your brethren and neighbors;
          pray with them, and teach them how to control themselves; and let
          your teachings be sustained by your own example. Teach your
          families how to control themselves; teach them good and wholesome
          doctrine, and practise the same in your own lives. This is the
          place for you to become polished shafts in the quiver of the
          Almighty. This will answer for one sermon.
          47
          I feel much inclined to talk to the brethren: I have not had the
          privilege of preaching much for some time, because of the
          inconvenience of our former meeting place. Now, as we have a
          good, convenient place to meet in, and my health will serve me, I
          expect to improve the time. I love to preach at home with the
          Saints. I love to meet with them, and look up on their happy
          countenances, lit up with the joys of eternity. In short. I love
          the society of all good men, and to preach salvation to them.
          48
          You may consider what I shall now lay before you a small matter;
          but I think it of some importance. When the Elders of Israel
          leave this place, and go forth among the wicked, it is not their
          privilege to mingle with them in any of their worldly exercises;
          for if they do, the devil will obtain an advantage over them, and
          succeed in drawing them away from the path of their duty. For
          instance--suppose you and I, with many more of the brethren, meet
          together in a convenient place in the Valley, and dance to the
          sweet strains of the violin; we could do so with a perfect good
          will: but if we should be called to England, and there have an
          invitation to join with the wicked in their pastimes and
          recreations, and we in our feelings bow down to this, and suffer
          our spirits to be subject to their commandments, we suffer
          ourselves to be ruled over by them, and at once become their
          servants. While I am here, I am in the midst of the Priesthood of
          heaven, and in the centre of the kingdom of God. We are before
          the Lord, where every hand I shake is the hand of a Saint, and
          every face I see, when I look upon the assembled thousands, is
          the countenance of a Saint. I am the controller and master of
          affairs here, under Heaven's direction; though there are those
          who do not believe this. I invite those who are not subject to me
          as their President, not to contaminate my friends; for were I and
          my friends to become subject to those who object to us, we are
          then on the ground of the devil, and subject ourselves to him
          they serve.
          48
          Never suffer yourselves to mingle in any of those recreations
          that tend to sin and iniquity, while you are away from the body
          of the Church, where you cannot so fully control yourselves. Let
          the Elders who are going out from this place carry this
          instruction with them into the other portions of the earth.
          Whatever a man does, let him do it in the name of the Lord--let
          him work in the name of the Lord, let all his acts through life
          be in the name of the Lord; and if he wants light and knowledge,
          let him ask in that name.
          48
          You are well aware that the wickedness of the world, or the
          apostacy of the Church, is so great, that those who now profess
          religion cannot enjoy their own natural privileges in the world.
          In many places their folly and superstition are so great that
          they would consider they had committed the sin of blasphemy if
          they happened to hear a violin. The whole world could not hire a
          good, honest, sound Presbyterian, of the old fashion and cut, to
          look into a room where a company of young men and women were
          dancing, lest they should sin against the Holy Ghost. This
          over-righteous notion is imbibed by the generality of professors
          of religion, but it is because they themselves have made it a
          sin. Let us look at the root of the matter. In the first place,
          some wise being organized my system, and gave me my capacity, put
          into my heart and brain something that delights, charms, and
          fills me with rapture at the sound of sweet music. I did not put
          it there; it was some other being. As one of the modern writers
          has said, "Music hath charms to soothe the savage breast." It has
          been proved that sweet music will actually tame the most
          malicious and venomous beasts, even when they have been stirred
          up to violent wrath, and make them docile and harmless as lambs.
          Who gave the lower animals a love for those sweet sounds, which
          with magic power fill the air with harmony, and cheer and comfort
          the hearts of men and so wonderfully affect the brute creation?
          It was the Lord, our heavenly Father, who gave the capacity to
          enjoy these sounds, and which we ought to do in His name, and to
          His glory. But the greater portion of the sectarian world
          consider it sacrilege to give way to any such pleasure as even to
          listen to sweet music, much more to dance to its delightful
          strains. This is another short sermon.
          49
          I wish now to say a few words to the brethren upon the subject of
          tithing. It is well known to the majority of this Conference what
          transpired, last Conference, upon the stand in the old Bowery. At
          that Conference I had good cause to find fault with the Bishops,
          and I took the liberty to brush them down a little. From that day
          to this there has been more accomplished by our Bishops in the
          short space of seven months, than was accomplished by them for
          the space of years previously. This gives me great satisfaction.
          The Bishops have done as well as men could do: their conduct in
          fulfilling the duties of their calling has truly been
          praiseworthy, and I feel to bless them, and pray the Lord to
          bless them all the day long, for they have done first rate. When
          we consider the ignorance of the world, their unbelief in God,
          and realize that the vail of the covering is over the face of all
          nations, and remember the ignorance we were once in ourselves,
          having to commence like babes at the rudiments of learning,
          knowing also how faltering men are in their faith, and then look
          at what this people have accomplished, we are led to exclaim, "It
          is marvellous in our eyes!" Were I to say, "Elders of Israel, you
          that feel to put your all upon the altar, rise upon your feet,"
          who would be left? [All present rose up simultaneously.] Where is
          there another people upon the earth who would have done this? I
          have no tithing, but all--all I have is the Lord's. You know the
          word sacrifice: as brother Banks said to-day, it is a mere
          burlesque--a nonsensical term. No man ever heard me say I had
          made a sacrifice. I possess nothing but what my heavenly Father
          has been pleased to give me, or, in other words, He has loaned it
          to me while I remain here in this mortal flesh.
          49
          Is it not marvellous, considering the weakness of man, to see the
          willingness of this whole people to die if necessary for the
          truth? How do you suppose it makes me feel? Though I may
          sometimes chastise my brethren, and speak to them in the language
          of reproof, there is not a father who feels more tenderly towards
          his offspring, and loves them better than I love this people; and
          my Father in Heaven loves them; my heart yearns over them with
          all the emotions of tenderness, so that I could weep like a
          child; but I am careful to keep my tears to myself. If you do
          wrong, it grieves my heart, and it also grieves the heart of my
          heavenly Father. I feel continually to urge my brethren to cease
          from all evil, and learn to do well.
          49
          The fulness of the heavens and the earth is the Lord's--the gold
          and the silver, the wheat, the fine flour, and the cattle upon a
          thousand hills; and when we fully understand His works, we shall
          know that He is in all the earth, and fulfills His will among the
          children of men, exalting and debasing them according to His
          pleasure; for the systems, creeds, thrones, and kingdoms of the
          world are all under His control. "Shall there be evil in a city,
          and the Lord hath not done it"--or that He doth not control? The
          Lord controls the whole; and in the end, you will find He has
          regulated all things right, for all will be consummated to His
          glory.
          49
          The children of men are made as independent in their sphere as
          the Lord is in His, to prove themselves, pursue which path they
          please, and choose the evil or the good. For those who love the
          Lord, and do His will, all is right, and they shall be crowned,
          but those who hate His ways shall be damned, for they choose to
          be damned.
          50
          As I was meditating on the philosophy of the day, it occurred to
          my mind how visible it must appear to all eyes that the Lord does
          indeed work, that it is He who blesses this people; and yet it
          seems as though they cannot see His hand. The Lord fills the
          immensity of space. What saith the Psalmist? "Whither shall I go
          from thy Spirit? or whither shall I flee from thy presence? If I
          ascent up into heaven, thou art there; if I make my bed in hell,
          behold thou art there; if I take the wings of the morning, and
          dwell in the uttermost parts of the sea, even there shall thy
          hand lead me." I was trying to think of the place where God is
          not, but it is impossible, unless you can find empty space; and
          there I believe He is not. If you can find such a place, it will
          become useful for a hiding place to those who wish to hide
          themselves from the presence of the Lord, in the great day of
          accounts. I will close this sermon, as I intend to preach another
          before I present the subject I more particularly wish to speak
          upon.
          50
          My next sermon will be to both Saint and sinner. One thing has
          remained a mystery in this kingdom up to this day. It is in
          regard to the character of the well-beloved Son of God, upon
          which subject the Elders of Israel have conflicting views. Our
          God and Father in heaven, is a being of tabernacle, or, in other
          words, He has a body, with parts the same as you and I have; and
          is capable of showing forth His works to organized beings, as,
          for instance, in the world in which we live, it is the result of
          the knowledge and infinite wisdom that dwell in His organized
          body. His son Jesus Christ has become a personage of tabernacle,
          and has a body like his father. The Holy Ghost is the Spirit of
          the Lord, and issues forth from Himself, and may properly be
          called God's minister to execute His will in immensity; being
          called to govern by His influence and power; but He is not a
          person of tabernacle as we are, and as our Father in Heaven and
          Jesus Christ are. The question has been, and is often, asked, who
          it was that begat the Son of the Virgin Mary. The infidel world
          have concluded that if what the Apostles wrote about his father
          and mother be true, and the present marriage discipline
          acknowledged by Christendom be correct, then Christians must
          believe that God is the father of an illegitimate son, in the
          person of Jesus Christ! The infidel fraternity teach that to
          their disciples. I will tell you how it is. Our Father in Heaven
          begat all the spirits that ever were, or ever will be, upon this
          earth; and they were born spirits in the eternal world. Then the
          Lord by His power and wisdom organized the mortal tabernacle of
          man. We were made first spiritual, and afterwards temporal.
                
          51
          Now hear it, O inhabitants of the earth, Jew and Gentile, Saint
          and sinner! When our father Adam came into the garden of Eden, he
          came into it with a celestial body, and brought Eve, one of his
          wives, with him. He helped to make and organize this world. He is
          MICHAEL, the Archangel, the ANCIENT OF DAYS! about whom holy men
          have written and spoken--HE is our FATHER and our GOD, and the
          only God with whom WE have to do. Every man upon the earth,
          professing Christians or non-professing, must hear it, and will
          know it sooner or later. They came here, organized the raw
          material, and arranged in their order the herbs of the field, the
          trees, the apple, the peach, the plum, the pear, and every other
          fruit that is desirable and good for man; the seed was brought
          from another sphere, and planted in this earth. The thistle, and
          thorn, the brier, and the obnoxious weed did not appear until
          after the earth was cursed. When Adam and Eve had eaten of the
          forbidden fruit, their bodies became mortal from its effects, and
          therefore their offspring were mortal. When the Virgin Mary
          conceived the child Jesus, the Father had begotten him in his own
          likeness. He was not begotten by the Holy Ghost. And who is the
          Father? He is the first of the human family; and when he took a
          tabernacle, it was begotten by his Father in heaven, after the
          same manner as the tabernacles of Cain, Abel, and the rest of the
          sons and daughters of Adam and Eve; from the fruits of the earth,
          the first earthly tabernacles were originated by the Father, and
          so on in succession. I could tell you much more about this; but
          were I to tell you the whole truth, blasphemy would be nothing to
          it, in the estimation of the superstitious and over-righteous of
          mankind. However, I have told you the truth as far as I have
          gone. I have heard men preach upon the divinity of Christ, and
          exhaust all the wisdom they possessed. All Scripturalists, and
          approved theologians who were considered exemplary for piety and
          education, have undertaken to expound on this subject, in every
          obliged to conclude by exclaiming "great is the mystery of
          godliness," and tell nothing.
          51
          It is true that the earth was organized by three distinct
          characters, namely, Eloheim, Yahovah, and Michael, these three
          forming a quorum, as in all heavenly bodies, and in organizing
          element, perfectly represented in the Deity, as Father, Son, and
          Holy Ghost.
          51
          Again, they will try to tell how the divinity of Jesus is joined
          to his humanity, and exhaust all their mental faculties, and wind
          up with this profound language, as describing the soul of man,
          "it is an immaterial substance!" What a learned idea! Jesus, our
          elder brother, was begotten in the flesh by the same character
          that was in the garden of Eden, and who is our Father in Heaven.
          Now, let all who may hear these doctrines, pause before they make
          light of them, or treat them with indifference, for they will
          prove their salvation or damnation.
          51
          I have given you a few leading items upon this subject, but a
          great deal more remains to be told. Now remember from this time
          forth, and forever, that Jesus Christ was not begotten by the
          Holy Ghost. I will repeat a little anecdote. I was in
          conversation with a certain learned professor upon this subject,
          when I replied, to this idea--"if the Son was begotten by the
          Holy Ghost, it would be very dangerous to baptize and confirm
          females, and give the Holy Ghost to them, lest he should beget
          children, to be palmed upon the Elders by the people, bringing
          the Elders into great difficulties."
          51
          Treasure up these things in your hearts. In the Bible, you have
          read the things I have told you to-night; but you have not known
          what you did read. I have told you no more than you are
          conversant with; but what do the people in Christendom, with the
          Bible in their hands, know about this subject? Comparatively
          nothing.
          52
          I will now again take up the subject of tithing. The brethren
          have done well. They have been willing and obedient, no people
          could have been more so; for this I thank my Father in Heaven. I
          could not wish a people to work more kindly in the yoke of Jesus
          than this people do; the yoke grows more and more easy to them.
          It seems that every man will not only pay his tithing, but give
          all he has, if the Lord requires it: still I see wherein they may
          do better. I asked the people to day to assist to pay our Church
          liabilities. The offer of three or four yoke of oxen only, we do
          not want; but I will lay before you what we wish you to do. By
          the manifesto which has been read, you have learned the precise
          situation of the property of the Church. What has incurred this
          debt? Why does it exist in the shape in which it now appears? And
          wherein could we have obviated the difficulty, and done better? A
          fourth part of the money already paid out, did not come in upon
          tithing. This money we have had to borrow in order to keep the
          public works in progress. You may say, wherein could we have done
          better, for we have paid our tithing punctually? But has that
          brother, who sent $100 back to the East for merchandize, paid $10
          of it into the tithing office? Or did the brother who has sent
          $500 back, let us have $50? No; these have used it themselves,
          and thereby involved those who bear the responsibilities of the
          Trust. Again, those who have not possessed sufficient money to
          send back for merchandize, have been necessitated to pay out what
          they had. Thousands of dollars have been paid here for
          merchandize. Has one-tenth of all that money been paid into the
          tithing office? It has not. And where is the tithing that should
          have come in from England and California. Instead of tithing
          their money, they have used it for other purposes, and paid it in
          property, with which we could not pay our debts. This is wherein
          we have failed to liquidate our debts. The people go to these
          Gentile stores, on the Saturday, in crowds, to purchase goods. I
          think we shall not over-rate the amount, if we say that $500,000
          has been paid, in these valleys, to the merchants. But suppose
          they have received no more than $50,000 from this community,
          $5,000 of that money ought to have been first paid into the
          tithing office and we could have sent it to the States, and
          purchased goods ourselves for one-third or one-half less than we
          have to pay the merchants here. And $25,000 more should have come
          into the tithing office from the Church in the United States. The
          brethren in California have made no less than $100,000, the tenth
          of which is due this tithing office. For want of this money, we
          are brought into bondage; and we must now apply our faith and
          works to raise means to liquidate our indebtedness, which has
          accumulated by purchasing goods at high and extortionate prices.
          I find no fault with the merchants, for they came here to gather
          gold by the hundred weight.
          52
          Now, brethren, and Bishops, look over this matter, and try to
          think what your feelings would be if you were laid under the same
          responsibility that I and my brethren have upon our shoulders. We
          are required to see the Gospel preached to the nations afar off,
          to build council houses and temples, to cope with the united
          wisdom and craft of legislative assemblies, and with the powers
          of darkness in high places; and then place yourselves in the
          circumstances we are now placed in! Besides all this, see the
          hundreds who come to us every day to be administered to in
          various ways: some want fruit, some sugar, others tea, and all
          want clothing, &c. Then step into our private rooms, where we
          commune with the people, and you will see and hear all this, and
          a great deal more. Instead of every man bringing his picayune, or
          his six pence, or his $5, &c., as tithing on the money in his
          possession, it is all used for something else, and the storehouse
          of the Lord is left empty. Suppose nothing had been put in there
          but what the people have put in, the workmen would have been
          naked. Walk into the storehouse, and examine for yourselves. To
          be sure there has been a little clothing put in lately; for
          instance, there was an old silk dress put in for $40, that had
          been lying for years rotting in the chest: this is a specimen of
          the rest. What are such things worth to our workmen? Why, nothing
          at all. We wish you to put in strong and substantial clothing.
          Good, strong, homemade stuffs make the most suitable clothing for
          those who are building up the public works.
          53
          Will you help us out of this thraldom, and have it credited to
          your future tithing? There is already a great deal more due than
          would liquidate all our debts, but we cannot command it now. Do
          you feel willing to put your shoulder to the wheel, and continue
          to roll it forward, and still continue, you that have faith to
          continue, to increase in faith? for the business of this kingdom
          will increase, and the responsibility also; the labor will and
          must grow, and continue to increase, until the kingdoms of this
          world become the kingdom of our God and His Christ. So much on
          tithing; you see where the failure is; it is in that point, and
          nowhere else.
          53
          It is not for any man to think he is a cipher--that what he can
          do will not tell in this matter, and say, "They will get along
          well enough without me;" but it is every man's duty to lay it to
          heart, and help what he can with his earthly substance; though I
          wish you to understand distinctly that it is no commandment--you
          are left to act freely.
          53
          Let all the sheep stay in the Valley; also the cows; for they
          will give milk and butter, and replenish the stock. But when we
          speak of the horses, mules, and oxen, let every man look up his
          spare stock of this description, and with them help to liquidate
          these debts. Stock will now pay debts. I will use my stock for
          this purpose, and my brethren will do the same, until we have
          enough. I do not enjoin this upon you, as you have already paid
          the tithing which is required of you; except in some instances in
          the money tithing. Had we received the money due to us, we should
          have had no debts; but this failure has been, and is now, in
          existence. I will take every kind of spare stock I have, except
          my cows and sheep, and wipe off these debts until they are
          cancelled; and now every man who will do the same, let him rise
          upon his feet. [The whole congregation of two thousand men rose
          up to a man.] Do you suppose we want to deprive you of your
          teams? It is not so, but we wished to know the state of your
          faith, so that when we are ready to call upon you, we can be sure
          our call will be responded to. I would not cripple any man, I
          would rather give him five yoke of oxen, than destroy his team,
          and you know it. [Some of the brethren in the stand, not
          believing their own eyes, that the whole congregation rose, it
          was tried over again, to satisfy them, when the congregation all
          rose again to a man.] Brother Hunter now knows what to do. Many
          of the brethren are killing their calves; don't do this; if you
          cannot raise them, it will be better to give them away to those
          who can.
          53
          I bless you, and may the Lord bless you, in the name of Jesus
          Christ. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Orson
          Pratt, August 29, 1852
                            Orson Pratt, August 29, 1852
                                 CELESTIAL MARRIAGE.
           A discourse delivered by Elder Orson Pratt, in the Tabernacle,
                       Great Salt Lake City, August 29, 1852.
          53
          It is quite unexpected to me, brethren and sisters, to be called
          upon to address you this forenoon; and still more so, to address
          you upon the principle which has been named, namely, a plurality
          of wives.
          54
          It is rather new ground for me; that is, I have not been in the
          habit of publicly speaking upon this subject; and it is rather
          new ground to the inhabitants of the United States, and not only
          to them, but to a portion of the inhabitants of Europe; a portion
          of them have not been in the habit of preaching a doctrine of
          this description; consequently, we shall have to break up new
          ground.
          54
          It is well know, however, to the congregation before me, that the
          Latter-day Saints have embraced the doctrine of a plurality of
          wives, as a part of their religious faith. It is not, as many
          have supposed, a doctrine embraced by them to gratify the carnal
          lusts and feelings of man; that is not the object of the
          doctrine.
          54
          We shall endeavour to set forth before this enlightened assembly
          some of the causes why the Almighty has revealed such a doctrine,
          and why it is considered a part and portion of our religious
          faith. And I believe that they will not, under our present form
          of government, (I mean the government of the United States,) try
          us for treason for believing and practising our religious notions
          and ideas. I think, if I am not mistaken, that the constitution
          gives the privilege to all the inhabitants of this country, of
          the free exercise of their religious notions, and the freedom of
          their faith, and the practice of it. Then, if it can be proven to
          a demonstration, that the Latter-day Saints have actually
          embraced, as a part and portion of their religion, the doctrine
          of a plurality of wives, it is constitutional. And should there
          ever be laws enacted by this government to restrict them from the
          free exercise of this part of their religion, such laws must be
          unconstitutional.
          54
          But, says the objector, we cannot see how this doctrine can be
          embraced as a matter of religion and faith; we can hardly
          conceive how it can be embraced only as a kind of domestic
          concern, something that pertains to domestic pleasures, in no way
          connected with religion. In reply we will show you that it is
          incorporated as a part of our religion, and necessary for our
          exaltation to the fulness of the Lord's glory in the eternal
          world. Would you like to know the reasons? Before we get through,
          we will endeavour to tell you why we consider it an essential
          doctrine to glory and exaltation, to our fulness of happiness in
          the world to come.
          54
          We will first make a few preliminary remarks in regard to the
          existence of man, to his first existence in his first estate; and
          then say something in relation to his present state, and the
          bearing which it has upon his next or future state.
          54
          The "Mormons " have a peculiar doctrine in regard to our
          pre-existence, different from the views of the Christian world,
          so called, who do not believe that man had a pre-existence. It is
          believed, by the religious world, that man, both body and spirit,
          begins to live about the time that he is born into this world, or
          a little before; that then is the beginning of life. They
          believe, that the Lord, by a direct act of creation, formed, in
          the first place, man out of the dust of the ground; and they
          believe that man is possessed of both body and spirit, by the
          union of which he became a living creature. Suppose we admit this
          doctrine concerning the formation of the body from the dust; then
          how was the spirit formed? Why, says one, we suppose it was made
          by a direct act of creation, by the Almighty Himself; that He
          moulded the spirit of man, formed and finished it in a proper
          likeness to inhabit the tabernacle He had made out of the dust.
          55
          Have you any account of this in the Bible? Do the Scriptures
          declare that the spirit was formed at the time the tabernacle was
          made? No. All the tabernacles of the children of men that were
          ever formed, from remote generations, from the days of Adam to
          this time, have been formed out of the earth. We are of the earth
          earthy. The tabernacle has been organized according to certain
          principles, and laws of organization, with bones, and flesh, and
          sinews, and skin. Now, where do you suppose all these tabernacles
          got their spirits? Does the Lord make a new spirit every time a
          tabernacle is made? if so, the work of creation, according to the
          belief of Christendom, did not cease on the seventh day. If we
          admit their views, the Lord must be continually making spirits to
          inhabit all the tabernacles of the children of men; he must make
          something like one thousand millions of spirits every century; he
          must be working at it every day, for there are many hundreds of
          individuals being born into the world every day. Does the Lord
          create a new spirit every time a new tabernacle comes into the
          world? That does not look reasonable, nor God-like.
          55
          But how is it, you inquire? Why the fact is, that being that
          animates this body, that gives life and energy, and power to
          move, to act, and to think: that being that dwells within this
          tabernacle is much older than what the tabernacle is. That spirit
          that now dwells within each man, and each woman, of this vast
          assembly of people, is more than a thousand years old, and I
          would venture to say, that it is more than five thousand years
          old.
          55
          But how was it made? when was it made? and by whom was it made?
          If our spirits existed thousands of years ago--if they began to
          exist--if there were a beginning to their organization, by what
          process was this organization carried on? Through what medium,
          and by what system of laws? Was it by a direct creation of the
          Almighty? Or were we framed according to a certain system of
          laws, in the same manner as our tabernacles? If we were to reason
          from analogy--if we admit analogical reasoning in the question,
          what would we say? We should say, that our spirits were formed by
          generation, the same as the body or tabernacle of flesh and
          bones. But what says revelation upon the subject? We will see
          whether revelation and analogy will agree.
          55
          We read of a certain time when the corner stones of the earth
          were laid, and the foundations thereof were made sure--of a
          certain time when the Lord began to erect this beautiful and
          glorious habitation, the earth; then they had a time of joy. I do
          not know whether they had instruments of music, or whether they
          were engaged in the dance; but one thing is certain, they had
          great joy, and the heavens resounded with their shouts; yea, the
          Lord told Job, that all the sons of God shouted for joy, and the
          morning stars sang together, when the foundations of this globe
          were laid.
          56
          The SONS of God, recollect, shouted for joy, because there was a
          beautiful habitation being built, so that they could get
          tabernacles, and dwell thereon; they expected the time--they
          looked forward to the period; and it was joyful to them to
          reflect, that the creation was about being formed, the corner
          stone of it was laid, on which they might, in their times, and in
          their seasons, and in their generations, go forth and receive
          tabernacles for their spirits to dwell in. Do you bring it home
          to yourselves, brethren and sisters? Do you realize that you and
          I were there? Can you bring it to your minds that you and I were
          among that happy number that shouted for joy when this creation
          was made? Says one, I don't recollect it. No wonder! for your
          recollection is taken from you, because you are in a tabernacle
          that is earthly; and all this is right and necessary. The same is
          written of Jesus Christ himself, who had to descend below all
          things. Though he had wisdom to assist in the organization of
          this world; though it was through him, as the great leader of all
          these sons of God, the earth was framed, and framed too, by the
          assistance of all his younger brethren--yet we find, with all
          that great and mighty power he possessed, and the great and
          superior wisdom that was in his bosom, that after all, his
          judgment had to be taken away; in his humiliation, his reason,
          his intelligence, his knowledge, and the power that he was
          formerly in possession of, vanished from him as he entered into
          the infant tabernacle. He was obliged to begin down at the lowest
          principles of knowledge, and ascend upward by degrees, receiving
          grace for grace, truth for truth, knowledge for knowledge, until
          he was filled with all the fulness of the Father, and was capable
          of ruling, governing, and controlling all things, having ascended
          above all things. Just so with us; we that once lifted up our
          united voices as sons and daughters of God, and shouted for joy
          at the laying of the foundation of this earth, have come here and
          taken tabernacles, after the pattern of our elder brother; and in
          our humiliation--for it is humiliation to be deprived of
          knowledge we once had, and the power we once enjoyed--in our
          humiliation, just like our elder brother, our judgment is taken
          away. Do we not read also in the bible, that God is the Father of
          our spirits?
          56
          We have ascertained that we have had a previous existence. We
          find that Solomon, that wise man, says that when the body
          returned to the dust, the spirit returns to God who gave it. Now
          all of this congregation very well know, that if we never existed
          there, we could not return there. I could not return to
          California. Why? Because I have never been there. If you never
          were with the Father, the same as Jesus was before the foundation
          of the world, you never could return there, any more than I could
          to the West Indies, where I have never been. But if we have once
          been there, then we can see the force of the saying of the wise
          man, that the spirit returns to God who gave it--it goes back
          where it once was.
          56
          Much more evidence might be derived in relation to this subject,
          even from the English translation of the Bible; but I do not feel
          disposed to dwell too long upon any particular testimony; suffice
          it to say, that the Prophet Joseph Smith's translation of the
          fore part of the book of Genesis is in print, and is exceedingly
          plain upon this matter. In this inspired translation we find the
          pre-existence of man clearly laid down, and that the spirits of
          all men, male and female, did have an existence, before man was
          formed out of the dust of the ground. But who was their Father? I
          have already quoted a saying that God is the Father of our
          spirits.
          57
          In one sense of the word, there are more Gods than one; and in
          another sense there is but one God. The Scriptures speak of more
          Gods than one. Moses was called a God to Aaron, in plain terms;
          and our Saviour, when speaking upon this subject, says, "If the
          Scriptures called them Gods unto whom the word of God came, why
          is it that you should seek to persecute me, and kill me, because
          I testify that I am the Son of God?" This in substance was the
          word of our Saviour; those to whom the word of God came, are
          called Gods, according to his testimony. All these beings of
          course are one, the same as the Father and the Son are one. The
          Son is called God, and so is the Father, and in some places the
          Holy Ghost is called God. They are one in power, in wisdom, in
          knowledge, and in the inheritance of celestial glory; they are
          one in their works; they possess all things, and all things are
          subject to them; they act in unison; and if one has power to
          become the Father of spirits, so has another; if one God can
          propagate his species, and raise up spirits after his own image
          and likeness, and call them his sons and daughters, so can all
          other Gods that become like him, do the same thing; consequently,
          there will be many Fathers, and there will be many families, and
          many sons and daughters; and they will be the children of those
          glorified, celestial beings that are counted worthy to be Gods.
          57
          Here let me bring for the satisfaction of the Saints, the
          testimony of the vision given to our Prophet and Revelator Joseph
          Smith, and Sidney Rigdon, on the 16th day of February, 1832. They
          were engaged in translating the New Testament, by inspiration;
          and while engaged in this great work, they came to the 29th verse
          of the 5th chapter of John, which was given to them in these
          words--"they who have done good, in the resurrection of the just;
          and they who have done evil in the resurrection of the unjust."
          This being given in different words from the English translation,
          caused them to marvel and wonder; and they lifted up their hearts
          in prayer to God, that He would show them why it was that this
          should be given to them in different manner; and behold, the
          visions of heaven opened before them. They gazed up on the
          eternal worlds, and saw things before this world was made. They
          saw the spiritual creation who were to come forth and take upon
          themselves bodies; and they saw things as they are to be in the
          future; and they saw celestial, terrestrial, and telestial
          worlds, as well as the sufferings of the ungodly; all passed
          before them in this great and glorious vision. And while they
          were yet gazing upon things as they were before the world was
          made, they were commanded to write, saying, "this is the
          testimony, last of all, which we give of him, that he lives; for
          we saw him, even on the right hand of God: and we heard the voice
          bearing record that he is the Only Begotten of the Father; that
          by him, and through him, and of him, the worlds are and were
          created; and the inhabitants thereof are begotten sons and
          daughters unto God." Notice this last expression, "the
          inhabitants thereof are begotten sons and daughters unto God,"
          (meaning the different worlds that have been created and made.)
          Notice, this does not say, that God, whom we serve and worship,
          was actually the Father Himself, in His own person, of all these
          sons and daughters of the different worlds; but they "are
          begotten sons and daughters unto God;" that is, begotten by those
          who are made like Him, after His image, and in His likeness; they
          begat sons and daughters, and begat them unto God, to inhabit
          these different worlds we have been speaking of. But more of
          this, if we have time, before we get through.
          57
          We now come to the second division of our subject, or the
          entrance of these spirits upon their second estate, or their
          birth and existence in mortal tabernacles. We are told that among
          this great family of spirits, some were more noble and great than
          others, having more intelligence.
          58
          Where do you read that? says one. Out of the Book of Abraham,
          translated from the Egyptian papyrus by the Prophet Joseph Smith.
          Among the great and numerous family of spirits--"the begotten
          sons and daughters of God"--there are some more intelligent than
          others; and the Lord showed unto Abraham "the intelligences that
          were organized before the world was; and among all these there
          were many of the noble and great ones." And God said to Abraham,
          "thou art one of them, thou wast chosen before thou wast born."
          Abraham was chosen before he was born. Here then, is knowledge,
          if we had time to notice it, upon the doctrine of election.
          However, I may just remark, it does not mean unconditional
          election to eternal life of a certain class, and the rest doomed
          to eternal damnation. Suffice it to say, that Abraham and many
          others of the great and noble ones in the family of spirits, were
          chosen before they were born, for certain purposes, to bring
          about certain works, to have the privilege of coming upon the
          stage of action, among the host of men, in favorable
          circumstances. Some came through good and holy parentages, to
          fulfil certain things the Lord decreed should come to pass, from
          before the foundations of the world.
          58
          The Lord has ordained that these spirits should come here and
          take tabernacles by a certain law, through a certain channel; and
          that law is the law of marriage. There are a great many things
          that I will pass by; I perceive that if I were to touch upon all
          these principles, the time allotted for this discourse would be
          too short, therefore I am under the necessity of passing by many
          things in relation to these spirits in their first estate, and
          the laws that governed them there, and come to their second
          estate.
          58
          The Lord ordained marriage between male and female as a law
          through which spirits should come here and take tabernacles, and
          enter into the second state of existence. The Lord Himself
          solemnized the first marriage pertaining to this globe, and
          pertaining to flesh and bones here upon this earth. I do not say
          pertaining to mortality; for when the first marriage was
          celebrated, no mortality was there. The first marriage that we
          have any account of, was between two immortal beings--old father
          Adam and old mother Eve; they were immortal beings; death had no
          dominion, no power over them; they were capable of enduring for
          ever and ever, in their organization. Had they fulfilled the law,
          and kept within certain conditions and bounds, their tabernacles
          would never have been seized by death; death entered entirely by
          sin, and sin alone. This marriage was celebrated between two
          immortal beings. For how long? Until death? No. That was entirely
          out of the question; there could have been no such thing in the
          ceremony.
          58
          What would you consider, my hearers, if a marriage was to be
          celebrated between two beings not subject to death? Would you
          consider them joined together for a certain number of years, and
          that then all their covenants were to cease for ever, and the
          marriage contract be dissolved? Would it look reasonable and
          consistent? No. Every heart would say that the work of God is
          perfect in and of itself, and inasmuch as sin had not brought
          imperfection upon the globe, what God joined together could not
          be dissolved, and destroyed, and torn asunder by any power
          beneath the celestial world, consequently it was eternal; the
          ordinance of union was eternal; the sealing of the great Jehovah
          upon Adam and Eve was eternal in its nature, and was never
          instituted for the purpose of being overthrown and brought to an
          end. It is known that the "Mormons" are a peculiar people about
          marriage; we believe in marrying, not only for time, but for all
          eternity. This is a curious idea, says one, to be married for all
          eternity. It is not curious at all; for when we come to examine
          the Scriptures, we find that the very first example set for the
          whole human family, as a pattern instituted for us to follow, was
          not instituted until death, for death had no dominion at that
          time; but it was an eternal blessing pronounced upon our first
          parents. I have not time to explain further the marriage of Adam
          and Eve, but will pass on to their posterity.
          59
          It is true, that they became fallen, but there is a redemption.
          But some may consider that the redemption only redeemed us in
          part, that is, merely from some of the effects of the fall. But
          this is not the case; every man and woman must see at once that a
          redemption must include a complete restoration of all privileges
          lost by the fall.
          59
          Suppose, then, that the fall was of such a nature as to dissolve
          the marriage covenant, by death--which is not necessary to admit,
          for the covenant was sealed previous to the fall, and we have no
          account that it was dissolved--but suppose this was the case,
          would not the redemption be equally as broad as the fall, to
          restore the posterity of Adam back to that which they lost? And
          if Adam and Eve were married for all eternity, the ceremony was
          an everlasting ordinance, that they twain should be one flesh for
          ever. If you and I should ever be accounted worthy to be restored
          back from our fallen and degraded condition to the privileges
          enjoyed before the fall, should we not have an everlasting
          marriage seal, as it was with our first progenitors? If we had no
          other reasons in all the Bible, this would be sufficient to
          settle the case at once in the mind of every reflecting man and
          woman, that inasmuch as the fall of man has taken away any
          privileges in regard to the union of male and female, these
          privileges must be restored in the redemption of man, or else it
          is not complete.
          59
          What is the object of this union? is the next question. We are
          told the object of it; it is clearly expressed; for, says the
          Lord unto the male and female, I command you to multiply and
          replenish the earth. And, inasmuch as we have proved that the
          marriage ordinance was eternal in its nature, previous to the
          fall, if we are restored back to what was lost by the fall, we
          are restored for the purpose of carrying out the commandment
          given before the fall, namely, to multiply and replenish the
          earth. Does it say, continue to multiply for a few years, and
          then the marriage contract must cease, and there shall be no
          further opportunity of carrying out this command, but it shall
          have an end? No, there is nothing specified of this kind; but the
          fall has brought in disunion through death; it is not a part of
          the original plan; consequently, when male and female are
          restored from the fall, by virtue of the everlasting and eternal
          covenant of marriage, they will continue to increase and multiply
          to all ages of eternity, to raise up beings after their own
          order, and in their own likeness and image, germs of
          intelligence, that are destined, in their times and seasons, to
          become not only sons of God, but Gods themselves.
          59
          This accounts for the many worlds we heard Elder Grant speaking
          about yesterday afternoon. The peopling of worlds, or an endless
          increase, even of one family, would require an endless increase
          of worlds; and if one family were to be united in the eternal
          covenant of marriage, to fulfil that great commandment, to
          multiply his species, and propagate them, and if there be no end
          to the increase of his posterity, it would call for an endless
          increase of new worlds. And if one family calls for this, what
          would innumerable millions of families call for? They would call
          for as many worlds as have already been discovered by the
          telescope; yea, the number must be multiplied to infinity in
          order that there may be room for the inheritance of the sons and
          daughters of the Gods.
          59
          Do you begin to understand how these worlds get their
          inhabitants? Have you learned that the sons and daughters of God
          before me this day, are His offspring--made after His own image;
          that they are to multiply their species until they become
          innumerable?
          60
          Let us say a few words, before we leave this part of the subject,
          on the promises made to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. The promises
          were, Lift up your eyes, and behold the stars; so thy seed shall
          be, as numberless as the stars. What else did He promise? Go to
          the sea-shore, and look at the ocean of sand, and behold the
          smallness of the particles thereof, and then realize that your
          seed shall be as numberless as the sands. Now let us take this
          into consideration. How large a bulk of sand would it take to
          make as many inhabitants as there are now upon the earth? In
          about one cubic foot of sand, reckoning the grains of a certain
          size, there would be a thousand million particles. Now that is
          about the estimated population of our globe. If our earth were to
          continue 8,000 years, or eighty centuries, with an average
          population of one thousand millions per century, then three cubic
          yards of sand would contain a greater number of particles than
          the whole population of the globe, from the beginning, until the
          measure of the inhabitants of this creation is complete. If men
          then cease to multiply, where is the promise made to Abraham? Is
          it fulfilled? No. If that is the end of his increase, behold, the
          Lord's promise is not fulfilled. For the amount of sand
          representing his seed, might all be drawn in a one-horse cart;
          and yet the Lord said to Abraham, thy seed shall be as numerous
          as the sand upon the sea-shore; that is, to carry out the idea in
          full, it was to be endless; and therefore, there must be an
          infinity of worlds for their residence. We cannot comprehend
          infinity. But suffice it to say, if all the sands on the
          sea-shore were numbered, says the Prophet Enoch, and then all the
          particles of the earth besides, and then the particles of
          millions of earths like this, it would not be a beginning to all
          thy creations; and yet thou art there, and thy bosom is there;
          and thy curtains are stretched out still. This gives plenty of
          room for the fulfilment of the promise made to Abraham, and
          enough to spare for the fulfilment of similar promises to all his
          seed.
          60
          We read that those who do the works of Abraham, are to be blessed
          with the blessing of Abraham. Have you not, in the ordinances of
          this last dispensation, had the blessings of Abraham pronounced
          upon your heads? O yes, you say, I well recollect, since God has
          restored the everlasting Priesthood, that by a certain ordinance
          these blessings were placed upon our heads--the blessings of
          Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. Why, says one, I never thought of it
          in this light before. Why did you not think of it? Why not look
          upon Abraham's blessings as your own, for the Lord blessed him
          with a promise of seed as numerous as the sand upon the
          sea-shore; so will you be blessed, or else you will not inherit
          the blessings of Abraham.
          60
          How did Abraham manage to get a foundation laid for this mighty
          kingdom? Was he to accomplish it all through one wife? No. Sarah
          gave a certain woman to him whose name was Hagar, and by her a
          seed was to be raised up unto him. Is this all? No. We read of
          his wife Keturah, and also of a plurality of wives and
          concubines, which he had, from whom he raised up many sons. Here
          then, was a foundation laid for the fulfilment of the great and
          grand promise concerning the multiplicity of his seed. It would
          have been rather a slow process, if Abraham had been confined to
          one wife, like some of those narrow, contracted nations of modern
          Christianity.
          61
          I think there is only about one-fifth of the population of the
          globe, that believe in the one-wife system; the other four-fifths
          believe in the doctrine of a plurality of wives. They have had it
          handed down from time immemorial, and are not half so narrow and
          contracted in their minds as some of the nations of Europe and
          America, who have done away with the promises, and deprived
          themselves of the blessings of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. The
          nations do not know anything about the blessings of Abraham; and
          even those who have only one wife, cannot get rid of their
          covetousness, and get their little hearts large enough to share
          their property with a numerous family; they are so penurious, and
          so narrow and contracted in their feelings, that they take every
          possible care not to have their families large; they do not know
          what is in the future, nor what blessings they are depriving
          themselves of, because of the traditions of their fathers; they
          do not know what a man's posterity, in the eternal worlds, are to
          constitute his glory, his kingdom, and dominion.
          61
          Here, then, we perceive, just from this one principle, reasoning
          from the blessings of Abraham alone, the necessity--if we would
          partake of the blessings of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob--of doing
          their works; and he that will not do the works of Abraham, and
          walk in his footsteps, will be deprived of his blessings.
          61
          Again, let us look at Sarah's peculiar position in regard to
          Abraham. She understood the whole matter; she knew that, unless
          seed was raised up to Abraham, he would come short of his glory;
          and she understood the promise of the Lord, and longed for
          Abraham to have seed. And when she saw that she was old, and
          fearing that she should not have the privilege of raising up
          seed, she gave to Abraham, Hagar. Would Gentile Christendom do
          such things now-a-days? O no; they would consider it enough to
          send a man to an endless hell of fire and brimstone. Why? Because
          tradition has instilled this in their minds as a dreadful, awful
          thing.
          61
          It matters not to them how corrupt they are in female
          prostitution, if they are lawfully married to only one wife; but
          it would be considered an awful thing by them to raise up a
          posterity from more than one wife; this would be wrong indeed;
          but to go into a brothel, and there debauch themselves in the
          lowest haunts of degradation all the days of their lives, they
          consider only a trifling thing; nay, they can even license such
          institutions in Christian nations, and it all passes off very
          well.
          61
          That is tradition; and their posterity have been fostered and
          brought up in the footsteps of wickedness. This is death, as it
          stalks abroad among the great and popular cities of Europe and
          America.
          61
          Do you find such haunts of prostitution, degradation, and misery
          here, in the cities of the mountains? No. Were such things in our
          midst, we should feel indignant enough to see that such persons
          be blotted out of the page of existence. These would be the
          feelings of this community.
          61
          Look upon those who committed such iniquity in Israel, in ancient
          days; every man and woman who committed adultery were put to
          death. I do not say that this people are going to do this; but I
          will tell you what we believe--we believe it ought to be done.
          62
          Whoredom, adultery, and fornication, have cursed the nations of
          the earth for many generations, and are increasing fearfully upon
          the community; but they must be entirely done away from those who
          call themselves the people of God; if they are not, woe! woe! be
          unto them, also; for "thus saith the Lord God Almighty," in the
          Book of Mormon, "Woe unto them that commit whoredoms, for they
          shall be thrust down to hell!" There is no getting away from it.
          Such things will not be allowed in this community; and such
          characters will find, that the time will come, that God, whose
          eyes are upon all the children of men, and who discerneth the
          things that are done in secret, will bring their acts to light;
          and they will be made an example before the people; and shame and
          infamy will cleave to their posterity after them, unto the third
          and fourth generation of them that repent not.
          62
          How is this to be prevented? for we have got a fallen nature to
          grapple with. It is to be prevented in the way the Lord devised
          in ancient times; that is, by giving to His faithful servants a
          plurality of wives, by which a numerous and faithful posterity
          can be raised up, and taught in the principles of righteousness
          and truth: and then, after they fully understand those principles
          that were given to the ancient Patriarchs, if they keep not the
          law of God, but commit adultery, and transgressions of this kind,
          let their names be blotted out from under heaven, that they may
          have no place among the people of God.
          63
          But again, there is another reason why this plurality should
          exist among the Latter-day Saints. I have already given you one
          reason, and that is, that you might inherit the blessings and
          promises made to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, and receive a
          continuation of your posterity, that they may become as numerous
          as the sand upon the sea-shore. There is another reason, and a
          good one, too. What do you suppose it is? I will tell you; and it
          will appear reasonable to every man and woman of a reflecting
          mind. Do we not believe, as the Scriptures have told us, that the
          wicked nations of the earth are doomed to destruction? Yes, we
          believe it. Do we not also believe, as the Prophets have
          foretold, concerning the last days, as well as what the new
          revelations have said upon the subject, that darkness prevails
          upon the earth, and gross darkness upon the minds of the people;
          and not only this, but that all flesh has corrupted its way upon
          the face of the earth; that is, that all nations, speaking of
          them as nations, have corrupted themselves before the Most High
          God, by their wickedness, whoredoms, idolatries, abominations,
          adulteries, and all other kinds of wickedness? And we furthermore
          believe, that according to the Jewish Prophets, as well as the
          Book of Mormon, and modern revelations given in the Book of
          Doctrine and Covenants, that the sword of the vengeance of the
          Almighty is already unsheathed, and stretched out, and will no
          more be put back into the scabbard until it falls upon the head
          of the nations until they are destroyed, except they repent. What
          else do we believe? We believe that God is gathering out from
          among these nations those who will hearken to His voice, and
          receive the proclamation of the Gospel, to establish them as a
          people alone by themselves, where they can be instructed in the
          right way, and brought to the knowledge of the truth. Very well;
          if this be the case, that the righteous are gathering out, and
          are still being gathered from among the nations, and being
          planted by themselves, one thing is certain--that that people are
          better calculated to bring up children in the right way, than any
          other under the whole heavens. O yes, says one, if that is the
          case--if you are the people the ancient Prophets have spoken of,
          if you are the people that are guided by the Lord, if you are
          under the influence, power, and guidance of the Almighty, you
          must be the best people under heaven, to dictate the young mind:
          but what has that to do with the plurality of wives? I will tell
          you. I have already told you that the spirits of men and women,
          all had a previous existence, thousands of years ago, in the
          heavens, in the presence of God; and I have already told you that
          among them are many spirits that are more noble, more intelligent
          than others, that were called the great and mighty ones, reserved
          until the dispensation of the fulness of times, to come forth
          upon the face of the earth, through a noble parentage that shall
          train their young and tender minds in the truths of eternity,
          that they may grow up in the Lord, and be strong in the power of
          His might, be clothed upon with His glory, be filled with
          exceeding great faith; that the visions of eternity may be opened
          to their minds; that they may be Prophets, Priests, and Kings to
          the Most High God. Do you believe, says one, that they are
          reserved until the last dispensation, for such a noble purpose?
          Yes; and among the Saints is the most likely place for these
          spirits to take their tabernacles, through a just and righteous
          parentage. They are to be sent to that people that are the most
          righteous of any other people upon the earth; there to be trained
          up properly, according to their nobility and intelligence, and
          according to the laws which the Lord ordained before they were
          born. This is the reason why the Lord is sending them here,
          brethren and sisters; they are appointed to come and take their
          bodies here, that in their generations they may be raised up
          among the righteous. The Lord has not kept them in store for five
          or six thousand years past, and kept them waiting for their
          bodies all this time to send them among the Hottentots, the
          African negroes, the idolatrous Hindoos, or any other of the
          fallen nations that dwell upon the face of this earth. They are
          not kept in reserve in order to come forth to receive such a
          degraded parentage upon the earth; no, the Lord is not such a
          being; His justice, goodness, and mercy will be magnified towards
          those who were chosen before they were born; and they long to
          come, and they will come among the Saints of the living God; this
          would be their highest pleasure and joy, to know that they could
          have the privilege of being born of such noble parentage.
          63
          Then is it not reasonable, and consistent that the Lord should
          say unto His faithful and chosen servants, that had proved
          themselves before Him all the day long; that had been ready and
          willing to do whatsoever His will required them to perform--take
          unto yourselves more wives, like unto the Patriarchs, Abraham,
          Isaac, and Jacob of old--like those who lived in ancient times,
          who walked in my footsteps, and kept my commands? Why should they
          not do this? Suppose the Lord should answer this question, would
          He not say, I have here in reserve, noble spirits, that have been
          waiting for thousands of years, to come forth in the fulness of
          times, and which I designed should come forth through these my
          faithful and chosen servants, for I know they will do my will,
          and they will teach their children after them to do it. Would not
          this be the substance of the language, if the Lord should give us
          an answer upon this subject?
          63
          But then another question will arise; how are these things to be
          conducted? Are they to be left at random? Is every servant of God
          at liberty to run here and there, seeking out the daughters of
          men as wives unto themselves without any restriction, law, or
          condition? No. We find these things were restricted in ancient
          times. Do you not recollect the circumstance of the Prophet
          Nathan's coming to David? He came to reprove him for certain
          disobedience, and told him about the wives he had lost through
          it; that the Lord would give them to another; and he told him, if
          he had been faithful, that the Lord would have given him still
          more, if he had only asked for them. Nathan the Prophet, in
          relation to David, was the man that held the keys concerning this
          matter in ancient days; and it was governed by the strictest
          laws.
          64
          So in these days; let me announce to this congregation, that
          there is but one man in all the world, at the same time, who can
          hold the keys of this matter; but one man has power to turn the
          key to inquire of the Lord, and to say whether I, or these my
          brethren, or any of the rest of this congregation, or the Saints
          upon the face of the whole earth, may have this blessing of
          Abraham conferred upon them; he holds the keys of these matters
          now, the same as Nathan, in his day.
          64
          But, says one, how have you obtained this information? By new
          revelation. When was it given, and to whom? It was given to our
          Prophet, Seer, and Revelator, Joseph Smith, on the 12th day of
          July, 1843; only about eleven months before he was martyred for
          the testimony of Jesus.
          64
          He held the keys of these matters; he had the right to inquire of
          the Lord; and the Lord has set bounds and restrictions to these
          things; He has told us in that revelation, that only one man can
          hold these keys upon the earth at the same time; and they belong
          to that man who stands at the head to preside over all the
          affairs of the Church and kingdom of God in the last days. They
          are the sealing keys of power, or in other words, of Elijah,
          having been committed and restored to the earth by Elijah, the
          Prophet, who held many keys, among which were the keys of
          sealing, to bind the hearts of the fathers to the children, and
          the children to the fathers; together with all the other sealing
          keys and powers, pertaining to the last dispensation. They were
          committed by that Angel who administered in the Kirtland Temple,
          and spoke unto Joseph the Prophet, at the time of the endowments
          in that house.
          64
          Now, let us enquire, what will become of those individuals who
          have this law taught unto them in plainness, if they reject it?
          [A voice in the stand, "they will be damned."] I will tell you:
          they will be damned, saith the Lord God Almighty, in the
          revelation He has given. Why? Because where much is given, much
          is required; where there is great knowledge unfolded for the
          exaltation, glory, and happiness of the sons and daughters of
          God, if they close up their hearts, if they reject the testimony
          of His word, and will not give heed to the principles He has
          ordained for their good, they are worthy of damnation, and the
          Lord has said they shall be damned. This was the word of the Lord
          to His servant Joseph the Prophet himself. With all the knowledge
          and light he had, he must comply with it, or, says the Lord unto
          him, you shall be damned; and the same is true in regard to all
          those who reject these things.
          65
          What else have we heard from our President? He has related to us
          that there are some damnations that are eternal in their nature;
          while others are but for a certain period, they will have an end,
          they will not receive a restoration to their former privileges,
          but a deliverance from certain punishments; and instead of being
          restored to all the privileges pertaining to man previous to the
          fall, they will only be permitted to enjoy a certain grade of
          happiness, not a full restoration. Let us inquire after those who
          are to be damned, admitting they will be redeemed, which they
          will be, unless they have sinned against the Holy Ghost. They
          will be redeemed, but what will it be to? Will it be to
          exaltation, and to a fulness of glory? Will it be to become the
          sons of God, or Gods to reign upon thrones, and multiply their
          posterity, and reign over them as kings? No, it will not. They
          have lost that exalted privilege for ever; though they have after
          having been punished for long periods, escape by the skin of
          their teeth; but no kingdom will be conferred up on them. What
          will be their condition? I will tell you what revelation says,
          not only concerning them that reject these things, but concerning
          those that through their carelessness, or want of faith, or
          something else, have failed to have their marriages sealed for
          time and for all eternity; those that do not do these things, so
          as to have the same ordinances sealed upon their heads by divine
          authority, as was upon the head of old Father Adam--if they fail
          to do it through wickedness, through their ungodliness, behold,
          they also will never have the privilege of possessing that which
          is possessed by the Gods that hold the keys of power, of coming
          up to the thrones of their exaltation, and receiving their
          kingdoms. Why? Because, said the Lord, all oaths, all covenants,
          and all agreements, &c., that have been made by man, and not by
          me, and by the authority I have established, shall cease when
          death shall separate the parties; that is the end; that is the
          cessation; they go no further; and such a person cannot come up
          in the morning of the resurrection, and say, Behold, I claim you
          as my wife; you are mine; I married you in the other world before
          death; therefore you are mine: he cannot say this. Why? Because
          he never married that person for eternity.
          65
          Suppose they should enter into covenant and agreement, and
          conclude between themselves to live together to all eternity, and
          never have it sealed by the Lord's sealing power, by the Holy
          Priesthood, would they have any claim on each other in the
          morning of the resurrection? No; it would not be valid nor legal,
          and the Lord would say, It was not by me; your covenants were not
          sealed on the earth, and therefore they are not sealed in the
          heavens; they are not recorded on my book; they are not to be
          found in the records that are in the archives of eternity;
          therefore the blessings you might have had, are not for you to
          enjoy. What will be their condition? The Lord has told us. He
          says these are angels; because they keep not this law, they shall
          be ministering servants unto those who are worthy of obtaining a
          more exceeding and eternal weight of glory; wherefore, saith the
          Lord, they shall remain singly and separately in their saved
          condition, and shall not have power to enlarge themselves, and
          thus shall they remain forever and ever.
          65
          Here, then, you can read their history; they are not Gods, but
          they are angels or servants to the Gods. There is a difference
          between the two classes; the God are exalted; they hold keys of
          power; are made Kings and Priests; and this power is conferred
          upon them in time, by the everlasting Priesthood, to hold a
          kingdom in eternity that shall never be taken from them worlds
          without end; and they will propagate their species. They are not
          servants; for one God is not to be a servant to another God; they
          are not angels; and this is the reason why Paul said, Know ye
          not, brethren, that we shall judge angels? Angels are inferior to
          the Saints who are exalted as Kings. These angels who are to be
          judged, and to become servants to the Gods, did not keep the law,
          therefore, though they are saved, they are to be servants to
          those who are in a higher condition.
          65
          What does the Lord intend to do with this people? He intends to
          make them a kingdom of Kings and Priests, a kingdom unto Himself,
          or in other words, a kingdom of Gods, if they will hearken to His
          law. There will be many who will not hearken; there will be the
          foolish among the wise, who will not receive the new and
          everlasting covenant in its fulness; and they never will attain
          to their exaltation; they never will be counted worthy to hold
          the sceptre of power over a numerous progeny, that shall multiply
          themselves without end, like the sand upon the sea shore.
          66
          We can only touch here and there upon this great subject, we can
          only offer a few words with regard to this great, sublime,
          beautiful, and glorious doctrine, which has been revealed by the
          Prophet, Seer, and Revelator, Joseph Smith, who sealed his
          testimony with his blood, and thus revealed to the nations,
          things that were in ancient times, as well as things that are to
          come.
          66
          But while I talk, the vision of my mind is opened; the subject
          spreads forth and branches out like the branches of a thrifty
          tree; and as for the glory of God, how great it is! I feel to
          say, Hallelujah to His great and holy name; for He reigns in the
          heavens, and He will exalt His people to sit with Him upon
          thrones of power, to reign for ever and ever.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, April 8th, 1852
                           Brigham Young, April 8th, 1852
                                     EDUCATION.
              A discourse delivered by President Brigham Young, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
                       Great Salt Lake City, April 8th, 1852.
          67
          It does not exactly please me at this time to make the remarks I
          wish upon the subject of education, as the greater part of the
          morning has been devoted to laying before the congregation, the
          necessity of improving ourselves in the knowledge of the
          sciences. The subject which has been aimed at by the speakers
          this morning, bearing particularly upon the necessity of
          instructing the human family, has been laid before us in the
          light in which it is generally held by the world. When we speak
          upon education, it is not to be understood that it alone consists
          in a man's learning the letters of the alphabet, in being trained
          in every branch of scholastic lore, in becoming a proficient in
          the knowledge of the sciences, and a classical scholar, but also
          in learning to classify himself and others. It has been hinted
          that education commences with the first dawn of knowledge upon
          the mental faculties of the child, and continues with it till
          death. But I will trace it a little further back still, and say
          that education commences with the mother, and the child in
          connection. I will state the facts in the case, as you will find
          them to be hereafter, in the education of your children. It
          depends in a great degree upon the mother, as to what children
          receive, in early age, of principle of every description,
          pertaining to all that can be learned by the human family. When
          will mothers understand this? Knowing that this is the case, I am
          perplexed with grief when I see such a wanton diversion from the
          real design of life, it causes me to mourn for my poor, ignorant,
          fellow mortals, and sometimes almost goads me to anger. I can see
          mothers pay attention to everything under heaven, but the
          training up of their children in the way they should go, and they
          will even make it appear obligatory on the father to take care of
          the child at a year old. How often is it the case that mothers
          will say--"Why, Pa, this child is growing up in ignorance, he is
          going to ruin. Really, dear husband, what shall we do with him?"
          I will tell you the truth as you will find it in eternity. If
          your children do not receive impressions of true piety, virtue,
          tenderness, and every principle of the holy Gospel, you may be
          assured that their sins will not be required at the hands of the
          father, but of the mother. Lay it to heart, ye mothers, for it
          will unavoidably be so. The duty of the mother is to watch over
          her children, and give them their early education, for
          impressions received in infancy are lasting. You know,
          yourselves, by experience, that the impressions you have received
          in the dawn of your mortal existence, bear, to this day, with the
          greatest weight upon your mind. It is the experience of people
          generally, that what they imbibe from their mothers in infancy,
          is the most lasting upon the mind through life. This is natural,
          it is reasonable, it is right. I do not suppose you can find one
          person among five hundred, who does not think his mother to be
          the best woman that ever lived. This is right, it is planted in
          the human heart. The child reposes implicit confidence in the
          mother, you behold in him a natural attachment, no matter what
          her appearance may be, that makes him think his mother is the
          best and handsomest mother in the world. I speak for myself.
          Children have all confidence in their mothers; and if mothers
          would take proper pains, they can instil into the hearts of their
          children what they please. You will, no doubt, recollect reading,
          in the Book of Mormon, of two thousand young men, who were
          brought up to believe that, if they put their whole trust in God,
          and served Him, no power would overcome them. You also recollect
          reading of them going out to fight, and so bold were they, and so
          mighty their faith, that it was impossible for their enemies to
          slay them. This power and faith they obtained through the
          teachings of their mothers.
          67
          The character of a person is formed through life, to a greater or
          less degree, by the teachings of the mother. The traits of early
          impressions that she gives the child, will be characteristic
          points in his character through every avenue of his mortal
          existence.
          68
          This is the education I wish you to establish in this Church,
          that mothers may not suppose they are not required to watch over
          the early education and impressions of their children, but over
          their husbands to know where they are every moment of their
          lives, taking special care to order them thus and so, so as to
          keep them advised and properly instructed all the time, instead
          of doing that which they ought in their houses with their
          children. I am not quite so strenuous as some of the ancients
          were, who taught that if the women wanted to learn anything, to
          learn it at home from their husbands. I am willing they should
          come to the meetings and learn, but some of the ancients
          proscribed them in this privilege, and would confine them at home
          to learn through their husbands. I am a little more liberal than
          they were, but this is not liberal enough for many of the women,
          they must also be watching their husbands, while at the same time
          their children are running abroad in the streets, naked and
          barefooted, cursing and swearing. What time have I got to watch
          my children to-day? Does not my duty demand my presence here?
          Where are my children? Some are here. Where are the rest of them?
          Perhaps in the streets, with other children, playing, or doing
          that which is wrong, entirely unnoticed by their mothers. This
          applies to the community. And the their mother will say "Husband,
          our children will certainly be ruined." Mothers, what do you
          want? Do you wish your husband to sit all the time in the parlor
          with you? Yes, and I should suppose, by the conduct of some, you
          want to be seated over the head of God Almighty, to rule over
          Him, and all His kingdoms. If I mention my own family, and use
          them as an example, I do it that other people cannot complain. Do
          you suppose that I cannot see faults in my own family, as well as
          in my neighbors'? I am not so prejudiced in their favour, as not
          to discover faults in them, neither can I close my eyes upon the
          faults of my neighbors'.
          68
          What faults do I discover in my neighbors' families? I can see
          their women go off visiting, riding on horseback, attending
          parties, while their little ones are neglected, and left to run
          at large in the streets, exposed to the pernicious examples of
          vile company. Hear it again! The blood of these wicked children
          will be required at the hands of their mothers! Should your
          husbands be called out to fight the Indians, or go to the islands
          of the sea to gather the poor, it is none of your business, when
          it is their calling to be away from home.
          68
          I want education to commence here. I wish you strictly to follow
          out this principle, and when children are old enough to labor in
          the field, then the father will take them in charge. If children
          are not taught by their mothers, in the days of their youth, to
          revere and follow the counsels of their fathers, it will be hard
          indeed for the father ever to control them. I know it is so, for
          it is too true. Mothers will let their children go to the Devil
          in their childhood, and when they are old enough to come under
          the immediate guidance of their fathers, to be sent out to preach
          the Gospel in the world, or to learn some kind of mechanism, they
          are as uncontrollable as the winds that now revel in the
          mountains.
          68
          It is not for the mother to rise up and encourage her children to
          fight against their father. You know my feelings on this
          point--they are pointed, resolute, and strong. And when I
          undertake to conquer a child who wants to conquer me, it shall be
          death to him before I yield. I would rather see every child I
          have, go into the grave this day, than suffer them to rise up and
          have control over me.
          68
          Mothers, if you suffer your children to grow up wild, and
          uncorrected, when they come into the hands of their fathers, and
          will not follow their counsels, let them be disowned, and have no
          portion in the inheritance; let them be disfranchised, be
          banished from Israel, and not be numbered in the books of the
          offspring of Abraham. This shall be the fate of my disobedient
          children, if I have any; and if there are any of my children here
          to-day, let them hear it! for if they will not keep my
          commandments, they shall have no part or lot in the household of
          faith.
          68
          Let education commence at this point, you mothers! and then with
          brother Spencer and the board of Regents. Let mothers commence to
          teach their children while in their laps, there do you learn them
          to love the Lord, and keep His commandments. Teach them to keep
          your commandments, and you will learn them to keep the
          commandments of your husbands. It is not the prerogative of a
          child to dictate to his mother, or his father; and it is not the
          prerogative of the father to rise up and dictate to his God whom
          he serves. Is it right that my wife should dictate to me? It is
          just as reasonable, and as right, as it is for your children to
          rise up and dictate to their mother. It is not their business to
          dictate to you, their duty is to obey, and not to dictate.
          68
          The Lecture which you have heard from Chancellor Spencer, is so
          far in advance of us, that it does not touch the case of this
          people, at present, with regard to education, until they have
          learned the rudiments, that is, according to my view of the
          subject.
          69
          It is true the Lord has revealed great and precious revelations
          to us through our language, and I believe it is as good a
          language as any now in use; but when we scan it narrowly, we find
          it to be fraught with imperfections and ridiculous vagaries. I am
          as far from believing that it is meet for us to adopt it in
          preference to any other tongue, as I am that it is to adopt
          Presbyterianism, or the Baptist's religion, in preference to any
          other of the same order of anti-christian churches, for they are
          all imperfect. The Lord can reveal Himself to these Indians, He
          can talk to any nation, it makes no difference to Him, as He can
          connect the ideas He wishes to convey by means of their language,
          as imperfect as it is.
          69
          I wish to impress my lecture more particularly upon the minds of
          mothers. Am I not continually exhorting the brethren to be kind
          to their families, and never to ill use a human being on the
          earth? I exhort you, masters, fathers, and husbands, to be
          affectionate and kind to those you preside over. And let them be
          obedient, let the wife be subject to her husband, and the
          children to their parents. Mothers, let your minds be sanctified
          before the Lord, for this is the commencement, the true
          foundation of a proper education in your children, the beginning
          point to form a disposition in your offspring, that will bring
          honor, glory, comfort, and satisfaction to you all your life
          time. To the mothers who may be here to-day, who have not the
          experience they will have, and young women who are perhaps just
          entering upon the stage of life, let me say, (and I wish you
          always to keep it in remembrance, even you younger females who
          have newly entered into the sacred state of matrimony,) fulfil
          the commandments of Eloheim, fill up the measure of your
          creation, that the joy of your hearts may be full in the day of
          the resurrection, in that you have done all you could to fulfil
          His law, and bring to pass the purposes of the Lord. Always keep
          your minds pure before the Lord. You may say it is impossible,
          because of your temptations, but let me inquire, Do you pray? Did
          you pray this morning, before you left your houses? Did you pray
          last evening, before you laid your bodies down to rest? Did you
          pray that the Holy Spirit might rest upon you, so that your sleep
          might be sweet and refreshing? Some of you may reply, that you
          have children, and have not time to pay attention to this duty in
          the morning. Some of you may have sick families, and others of
          you may be afflicted in other ways, and you will offer these
          facts as reasons for similar neglect. In these circumstances the
          mind must be centred upon the Lord, and upon His work,
          continually. When you embark to fill up the end of your creation,
          never cease to seek to have the Spirit of the Lord rest upon you,
          that your minds may be peaceable, and as smooth as the summer
          breezes of heaven. Never cease a day of your life to have the
          Holy Ghost resting upon you. Fathers, never cease to pray that
          your wives may enjoy this blessing, that their infants may be
          endowed with the Holy Ghost, from their mother's womb. If you
          want to see a nation rise up full of the Holy Ghost, and of
          power, this is the way to bring it about. Every other duty that
          is obligatory upon man, woman, or child, will come in its place,
          and in its time and season. Remember it, brethren. Let your
          hearts be pure before the Lord, and never cease to do anything
          you can for the satisfaction and comfort of your family, that all
          may enjoy the comforts of the Spirit of the Lord continually. If
          you do not come to this, your literary attainments will not
          exceed those of the world.
          70
          We have but few collegians among us, but I know that a thoroughly
          educated man knows no more than you do, when his literature is
          displayed, though he spreads himself like the green bay tree.
          Brother Spencer has given us a display of the learning of the
          day, he has erected a beautiful building, but where is the
          foundation? In his discourse, he referred to Joseph. Joseph built
          on the sure foundation, and, when I build up my superstructure,
          it shall be upon the same foundation. Brother Spencer has used
          language quite beyond your reach. Well, I have the foundation,
          and he can make the building. When he commences the building, I
          have asked the Board of Regents to cast out from their system of
          education, the present orthography and written form of our
          language, that when my children are taught the graphic sign for
          A, it may always represent that individual sound only. But as it
          now is, the child is perplexed that the sign A should have one
          sound in mate, a second sound in father, a third sound in fall, a
          fourth sound in man, and a fifth sound in many, and, in other
          combinations, soundings different from these, while, in others, A
          is not sounded at all. I say, let it have one sound all the time.
          And when P is introduced into a word, let it not be silent as in
          Phthisic, or sound like F in Physic, and let two not be placed
          instead of one in apple.
          70
          I ask, have the great and learned men completed their education?
          No, they are ever learning, and never able to come to the
          knowledge of the truth. Let the Board of Regents commence on the
          proper foundation, that when we have learned a great while, we
          may find to our satisfaction, we have at last come to the
          knowledge of the truth.
          70
          The English language, in its written and printed form, is one of
          the most prominent now in use for absurdity, yet as a vehicle in
          which to convey our ideas verbally, it is one of the best, for
          extent and variety it goes before, and far beyond, any other. Its
          variety is what I dislike. The schools in the Southern, New
          England, and Eastern States, all teach the English language, yet
          the same ideas are conveyed with entirely different classes of
          words, by these separate communities. If there were one set of
          words to convey one set of ideas, it would put an end to the
          ambiguity which often mystifies the ideas given in the languages
          now spoken. Then when a great man delivered a learned lecture
          upon any subject, we could understand his words, for there would
          be only one word with the same meaning, instead of a multiplicity
          of words all meaning the same thing, as is the case now. For
          instance, there are men in this house so technical in their
          feelings with regard to their choice of words, that when their
          ideas are formed, and they commence to convey them, they will
          stop in the middle of a sentence, and introduce another set of
          words to convey the same idea. If I can speak so that you can get
          my meaning, I care not so much what words I use to convey that
          meaning.
          71
          I long for the time that a point of the finger, or motion of the
          hand, will express every idea without utterance. When a man is
          full of the light of eternity, then the eye is not the only
          medium through which he sees, his ear is not the only medium by
          which he hears, nor the brain the only means by which he
          understands. When the whole body is full of the Holy Ghost, he
          can see behind him with as much ease, without turning his head,
          as he can see before him. If you have not that experience, you
          ought to have. It is not the optic nerve alone that gives the
          knowledge of surrounding objects to the mind, but it is that
          which God has placed in man--a system of intelligence that
          attracts knowledge, as light cleaves to light, intelligence to
          intelligence, and truth to truth. It is this which lays in man a
          proper foundation for all education. I shall yet see the time
          that I can converse with this people, and not speak to them, but
          the expression of my countenance will tell the congregation what
          I wish to convey, without opening my mouth. We are at present
          low, weak, and grovelling in the dark, but we are planted here in
          weakness for the purpose of exaltation. It is at the time of the
          formation of the tabernacle of flesh, that the education of human
          life commences. Now, mothers, train up your children in the way
          they should go. Fathers and husbands, instruct your wives and
          children in the ways of the Lord, and love, joy, and prosperity
          will attend you from this time, henceforth and for ever, which
          may God grant for Jesus' sake. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Orson
          Hyde, April 9, 1853
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Orson
          Hyde, October 6, 1853
              THE MAN TO LEAD GOD'S PEOPLE--OVERCOMING--A PILLAR IN THE
                      TEMPLE OF GOD--ANGELS' VISITS--THE EARTH.
            A discourse delivered by President Orson Hyde, at the General
                                     Conference
           held in the Tabernacle, Great Salt Lake City, October 6, 1853.
          121
          At the commencement of our Conference, it has fallen to my lot to
          make a few remarks.
          121
          If you will indulge me with your prayerful attention, I will try
          to communicate to you a few words, which I hope and trust may
          prove, not only edifying to you now, but a source of comfort and
          consolation in time to come.
          121
          Be it as the Lord will, I shall use my best endeavors for this;
          and if I fail in it, it will be for want of ability, and not for
          want of a disposition.
          121
          I discover before me many strange faces; I presume they are our
          friends from the different settlements, South, North, East, and
          West, who have no doubt assembled here for the purpose of
          obtaining instructions and information respecting the prosperity
          of the Church, the duty of its officers, and what is to be done
          in the important period in which we now live.
          121
          It is a peculiar and interesting time with us. In the first
          place, our brethren from abroad, who are unaccustomed to a
          mountain life, or a life in this Valley, are emigrating to this
          place; and when they arrive here, they do not find every thing,
          perhaps, as they anticipated, or they find things different from
          what they have been accustomed to in the places from which they
          came. Everything seems new and strange, and it takes a little
          time, as we say in a familiar phrase, "to get broken into the
          harness."
          121
          Not only so, but we have had some little disturbance with the red
          men this season, and this is a cause of some digression from the
          common path of duty we are accustomed to move in.
          121
          Under all these circumstances, as we have business of importance
          to transact during this Conference, it becomes necessary that our
          minds should become united in one, as far as possible, that we
          may act in accordance with the mind and will of our Father which
          is in heaven. Let me here observe, that the people of God can be
          united only upon that principle that vibrates from the very bosom
          of heaven. If we are united, if we can touch one point or
          principle upon which all can strike hands, by that union we may
          know that our will is the mind and will of God; and what we, in
          that state, bind on earth, is bound in heaven, for the action is
          reciprocal, it is the same.
          122
          Hence, after so long a separation, we have come together again,
          under circumstances somewhat peculiar. It is necessary that we
          seek to be united. How shall we be united? Around what standard
          shall we rally? Where is the beacon light to which our eyes shall
          be directed, in order that our actions may tend to the
          accomplishment of the same purpose and design? The beacon light
          is he whom our heavenly Father has ordained and appointed to lead
          His people, and give them counsel, and guide their destiny. That
          is the light to which the eye should be directed. And when that
          voice is heard, let every bosom respond, yea and amen.
          122
          But, says one, "If this be correct, it is giving to one man
          almighty power. It is giving to one man supreme power to rule."
          Admit it. What are we all aiming for? Are we not aiming for
          supreme power? Are we not aiming to obtain the promise that has
          been made to all believers? What is it? "He that overcometh shall
          inherit all things, and I will be his God, and he shall be my
          son." Are we not all seeking for this, that we may overcome, that
          we may inherit all things? For says Paul, "Therefore let no man
          glory in men. For all things are yours; Whether Paul, or Apollos,
          or Cephas, or the world, or life, or death, or things present, or
          things to come; all are yours; And ye are Christ's, and Christ is
          God's." Well, then, if all things are ours, we should be very
          insensible to our best interests if we did not seek diligently
          for that which Heaven promises as a legacy to the faithful. It is
          our right, then. Do we not all expect to be armed with almighty
          power? Is there a Latter-day Saint under the sound of my voice,
          whose heart is fired with celestial light, but that seeks to be
          in possession of supreme power (I had like to have said) both in
          heaven and on earth? It is said, we are "heirs of God, and joint
          heirs with Jesus Christ." Does Jesus Christ possess all power in
          heaven and on earth? He said, when he rose from the dead, "All
          power is given unto me in heaven and in earth." Are we heirs of
          God, and joint heirs with that illustrious character? He has so
          declared! If we are, do we not, in common with him, possess the
          power that is in heaven and on earth! If one individual, then, is
          a little ahead of us in obtaining this power, let us not be
          envious, for it will be our time by and bye. We ought to be the
          more thankful, and glorify God that He has armed one individual
          with this power, and opened a way that we may follow him, and
          obtain the same power. Instead of it being a cause of envy, it
          ought to be, on the contrary, a matter to call forth our warmest
          thanksgiving and praise to God, that He has brought back that
          power again to the earth in our day, by which we may be led step
          by step to the point we hope to attain.
          122
          After reflecting a little this morning, a passage of Scripture
          occurred to my mind--the words of John the Revelator, or the
          promise made to him. It says, "Him that overcometh will I make a
          pillar in the temple of my God, and he shall go no more out; and
          I will write upon him the name of my God, and the name of the
          city of my God, which is new Jerusalem, which cometh down out of
          heaven from my God; and I will write upon him my new name."
          122
          In the course of my travels in preaching the Gospel to different
          nations, I have often heard it remarked by the people, in days
          gone by, "We have heard your testimony; we have heard your
          preaching; but really, why does not Joseph Smith, your Prophet,
          come to us and bear testimony? Why does he not come to us and
          show us the plates from which the Book of Mormon was translated?
          If we could see the Prophet and the plates, then we should be
          satisfied that the work is genuine, that it is of God; but if we
          cannot see him and the ancient records, we are still in doubt
          with regard to the genuineness of the work."
          123
          My reply to them was something like the following--"Joseph Smith
          cannot be everywhere, and the plates cannot be presented to every
          eye. The voice of Joseph Smith cannot be heard by every ear." And
          I have said to them, " You that have seen me have seen Joseph
          Smith, for the same spirit and the same sentiments that are in
          him are in me, and I bear testimony to you that these things are
          verily true."
          123
          It is generally the case, and I think I may say it is invariably
          the case, that when an individual is ordained and appointed to
          lead the people, he has passed through tribulations and trials,
          and has proven himself before God, and before His people, that he
          is worthy of the situation which he holds. And let this be the
          motto and safeguard in all future time, that when a person that
          has not been tried, that has not proved himself before God, and
          before His people, and before the councils of the Most High, to
          be worthy, he is not going to step in to lead the Church and
          people of God. It never has been so, but from the beginning some
          one that understands the Spirit and counsel of the Almighty, that
          knows the Church, and is known of her, is the character that will
          lead the Church.
          123
          How does he become thus acquainted? How does he gain this
          influence, this confidence in the estimation of the people? He
          earns it by his upright course and conduct, by the justness of
          his counsels, and the correctness of his prophecies, and the
          straightforward spirit he manifests to the people. And he has to
          do this step by step; he gains influence, and his spirit, like an
          anchor, is fastened in the hearts of the people; and he is
          sustained and supported by the love, confidence, and good-will of
          the Saints, and of Him that dwelt in the bush. This is the kind
          of character that ought to lead God's people, after he has
          obtained this good will and this confidence.
          123
          What then is he to do? Is he to go abroad to the nations of the
          earth and preach the Gospel; to leave his home and the people of
          his charge? May we not count him as first and foremost in the
          ranks of them that overcome? I think so! Well then, "Him that
          overcometh will I make a pillar in the temple of my God, and he
          shall go no more out." All those who approach the nearest to that
          standard, we expect will remain in the temple of God at home, and
          not go abroad to the nations of the earth.
          123
          Says one, "If an angel from heaven would descend and bear
          testimony that this work was of God, I would believe it. Why may
          I not receive the testimony of angels, as well as Joseph Smith or
          any other person? for God is no respecter of persons! If I could
          receive it, I would be satisfied then that the work is true." But
          let me here remark again--suppose the Omnipotent Jehovah, that
          sits upon His throne of glory and power, was to descend and bear
          testimony, what further credence would you then want? You would
          want some one to tell you that it was really God Himself that had
          visited you, that you might be satisfied it was not an angel of
          darkness in the similitude of a heavenly personage.
          124
          Remember that God, our heavenly Father, was perhaps once a child,
          and mortal like we ourselves, and rose step by step in the scale
          of progress, in the school of advancement; has moved forward and
          overcome, until He has arrived at the point where He now is. "Is
          this really possible?" Why, my dear friends, how would you like
          to be governed by a ruler who had not been through all the
          vicissitudes of life that are common to mortals? If he had not
          suffered, how could he sympathise with the distress of others? If
          he himself had not endured the same, how could he sympathise and
          be touched with the feelings of our infirmities? He could not,
          unless he himself had passed through the same ordeal, and
          overcome step by step. If this is the case, it accounts for the
          reason why we do not see Him--He is too pure a being to show
          himself to the eyes of mortals; He has overcome, and goes no more
          out, but He is the temple of my God, and is a pillar there.
          124
          What is a pillar? It is that power which supports the
          superstructure--which bears up the edifice; and if that should be
          removed from its place, the edifice is in danger of falling.
          Hence, our heavenly Father ascended to a throne of power; He has
          passed through scenes of tribulation, as the Saints in all ages
          have, and are still passing through; and having overcome, and
          ascended His throne, He can look down upon those who are
          following in the same track, and can realize the nature of their
          infirmities, troubles, and difficulties, like the aged father who
          looks upon his race, upon the smallest child; and when he sees
          them grappling with difficulties, his heart is touched with
          compassion. Why? Because he has felt the same, been in the same
          situation, and he knows how to administer just chastisement,
          mingled with the kindest feelings of a father's heart. So with
          our heavenly Father; when He sees we are going astray, He
          stretches forth His chastening hand, at the same time He realizes
          the difficulties with which we have to contend, because he has
          felt the same; but having overcome, He goes no more out.
          124
          When the world was lost in wretchedness and woe, what did He do?
          Did He come here Himself? No. But, says he, I will send my son to
          be my agent, the one who is the nearest to my person, that is
          bone of my bone, and flesh of my flesh; I will send my son, and I
          will say, he that heareth him, heareth me. Go, then, my son. He
          came, and how did he look? He looked just like his Father, and
          just as they treated him, they treated his Father in heaven. For
          inasmuch as they did it unto him they did it unto his Father. He
          was the agent, the representative, chosen and sent of God for the
          purpose. When it was necessary that the Saviour of the world
          should have help and strength, should lie sustained in the
          darkest hour, did God Himself in person come to his aid? No, but
          He sent His angel to succor him. When the Saviour was born, the
          spirits around the throne of God were ready to fly to his
          protection, when the kings and rulers of this lower world sought
          his destruction. What did they say to the wise men of Israel on
          that eventful occasion? "Glory to God in the highest, and on
          earth peace, good will toward men."
          124
          When he fasted forty days and forty nights, the angels appeared
          and strengthened him. His heavenly Father did not come Himself,
          but, says the Saviour, he that hath seen me hath seen the Father
          also; I am just like him, the brightness of his glory, and the
          express image of his person. The same spirit that is in the bosom
          of the Father is in me. I came not to do my own will, but the
          will of Him that sent me. Then the character that looked upon the
          Saviour, looked upon the Father, for he was a facsimile of Him;
          and if they would not believe the Son, they would not believe the
          Father.
          124
          The Saviour, in the performance of his mission, laid down his
          life for the world, rose from the dead, and ascended up on high.
          And few and blessed are the eyes that have seen him since! It is
          sometimes the case that the veil of mortality has been rent, and
          the eye of the spirit has gazed upon the Saviour, like as did
          Stephen of old, when he was stoned to death. In his expiring
          moments, in the agonies of death, what did he say? He said, "I
          see the heavens opened, and the Son of man standing on the right
          hand of God." Stephen saw him in that trying hour.
          125
               True it is, that in the most trying hour, the servants of
          God may then be permitted to see their Father, and elder brother.
          "But," says one, "I wish to see the Father, and the Saviour, and
          an angel now." Before you can see the Father, the Saviour, or an
          angel, you have to be brought into close places in order to enjoy
          this manifestation. The fact is, your very life must be suspended
          on a thread, as it were. If you want to see your Saviour, be
          willing to come to that point where no mortal arm can rescue, no
          earthly power save! When all other things fail, when everything
          else proves futile and fruitless, then perhaps your Saviour and
          your Redeemer may appear; his arm is not shortened that he cannot
          save, nor his ear heavy that he cannot hear; and when help on all
          sides appears to fail, my arm shall save, my power shall rescue,
          and you shall hear my voice, saith the Lord.
          125
          "Him that overcometh will I make a pillar in the temple of my
          God," &c. The Father has overcome, the Saviour has overcome, and
          the angels are overcoming like we are. But let me here observe,
          it is a good deal with the angels, in my opinion, as it is with
          us.
          125
          We who have been in the Valley some length of time, feel that we
          are at home, and in a goodly place, chosen of God, a secret
          habitation surrounded by mountains, walled in by natural
          barriers, where we are secluded from the world, and inhabiting a
          little world by ourselves. We know the world is opposed to our
          doctrine. Now if one of us were required to go abroad among the
          nations, a spirit of patriotic devotion to the interests of God's
          kingdom, would stimulate us to forego all the pleasures of
          domestic life, to earn a crown of glory, and shine as stars in
          the firmament for ever and ever; when, if we consulted our own
          individual feelings and interest only, we would say, "O that we
          might remain at home, and not go out and be buffeted by a cold
          and heartless world!" We would rather remain with our friends,
          and bask in the sunshine of their good will and favor, and enjoy
          life as we pass along; but to go out into the world, and meet its
          scoffing sneers, it is alone for the cause and kingdom of God's
          sake; and for the sake of this, we not only long to go abroad to
          the nations of the earth, but to do every thing that is laid upon
          us to do.
          126
          Look at the angels of heaven. If there are so many millions of
          them, and they manifest such an interest for the welfare of
          mortals, why do they not come, and visit us more? They may have
          the same feeling in relation to coming to this earth, that we
          would have in going to the nations of the world. If they are
          sent, they will go; but if not sent, it is very likely they will
          stay at home, as we will. If we are sent, we will go; if we are
          not sent, we are glad to stay at home. This, then, I presume, is
          their feeling; hence it has become proverbial in the world, that
          angels' visits are few and far between. And let me here observe,
          that when a servant of God, clothed with the spirit of his
          calling, enters a house, a town, or a country, he feels the
          spirit in a moment that prevails in that house, country, or
          people among whom he comes. For instance, if he lands upon the
          shores of a foreign country, the moment his feet press their
          soil, their spirit presses his heart! he senses it; and if the
          spirit that reigns in the country is diverse to the Spirit of
          God, he feels it painful to his heart; and it is upon this
          principle that the Saviour said to the disciples, "And into
          whatsoever house ye enter, first say, Peace be to this house. And
          if the son of peace be there, your peace shall rest upon it: if
          not, it shall turn to you again." Then when a servant of God
          enters a strange place, and he feels the son of peace there, let
          his peace come upon that people, house, and city. If he feels
          there is an adverse power that holds the sway there, his peace
          must return to him, and he must go his way after he has
          faithfully discharged his duty.
          126
          I recollect once in a certain place in England, when travelling
          along with brother Kimball, it was in a country town called
          Chatburn, where the people were humble, simple, and honest; they
          loved the truth, and were seeking for it--when we went there,
          their hearts and doors were opened to receive us, and our
          message. What were our feelings? We felt that the ground upon
          which we stood was most sacred, and brother Kimball took off his
          hat, and walked the streets, and blessed the country and the
          people, and let his peace come upon it. These were our feelings.
          Why? Because the people were ready to receive the word of our
          testimony, and us for Christ's sake.
          126
          We had been to other places, where the very moment our names were
          sounded, and it was known we were in a house, there was a similar
          spirit manifested as there was in the days of Lot, when the Angel
          came to his house to warn him to flee from Sodom; for a mob was
          raised at once, and demanded the strangers to be given up to
          them. We have been in places where the mob demanded us to be
          given up to them; but we were shielded by friends, and God always
          opened a way of escape for us. Wherever there is a spirit
          congenial with the Spirit of God, and a loyalty to the kingdom of
          the Most High, you will find a hearty welcome, and you are glad
          to go there.
          126
          If we, whose sensibilities are benumbed by this veil of flesh
          which is around us, have discernment to discriminate where the
          son of peace is, the angels, who are not clogged as we are, whose
          sensibilities are keener than ours, do you not think when they
          approach the world, they know where the son of peace is? In the
          last days, I will take peace from the earth, saith the Lord by
          one of the ancient writers, and they shall kill one another. And
          there was given a great sword unto him that sat on the red horse.
          And the nations will be armed against each other. The angels are
          not fond to descend to this world, because of the coldness of the
          spirit that reigns in it; they would rather remain in heaven
          around the throne of God, among the higher order of
          intelligences, where they can enjoy life, and peace, and the
          communion of the Holy One. When they are sent, they will come;
          but they are tolerably well advanced among them that overcome.
          126
          These are some of the reasons why they do not mingle with us, why
          we cannot see them. But let me tell you, brethren and sisters, if
          we will be united as the heart of one man, and that general union
          of spirit, of mind, be fastened upon the Lord Jesus Christ, we
          shall draw down celestial intelligence by the Spirit of God, or
          by angels who surround the throne of the Most High. It is an
          electric wire through which and by which intelligence comes from
          heaven to mortals; it is only necessary for the word to be
          spoken, and the power of it is at once felt in every heart.
          127
          "Him that overcometh will I make a pillar in the temple of my
          God," &c. Do we ever wish to see the time when we can retire from
          the scenes of every day life, to the temple of God, and go no
          more out? Are we looking for a period of this kind? Yes, when we
          shall be made pillars in the temple of our God. We know when a
          pillar is placed in a building, it is placed there to remain,
          pillars are not often removed. All pillars are considered
          permanent; they are not to be taken away, because the removing of
          them endangers the safety of the building. In order to be made
          pillars in the temple of our God, what are we to do? WE MUST
          OVERCOME.
          127
          Let it be remarked, that the disposition so prevalent in the
          hearts of many, not to abide the counsel of their superiors, has
          to be overcome; it must be slain, and laid prostrate at our feet;
          and we must say we came not to do our own will, but the will of
          him that sent us. We came to do the will of him to whom we have
          plighted our faith, to uphold him as our leader, lawgiver, and
          Seer. We have got to overcome the inclination to revolt at the
          idea, and be brought into complete submission, and union of
          spirit.
          127
          "O," says one, "how does this look, to be slaves, to have no mind
          or will of our own, but lie swallowed up in the will of another,
          and thus become tools, machines, slaves, and not free men, and
          independent like other people!" Well, my dear friends, I will
          tell you how it was in heaven. There was a disposition once in
          heaven that preferred to be independent enough to chalk out its
          own course. The rebellious angels undertook it, and what became
          of them? They fought against the throne of God, and were cast
          down, to be reserved in chains of darkness, unto the judgment of
          the great day. Yes, they are reserved there, and that is their
          glory, and the honor that is attached to them for being
          independent, and declaring in the presence of God their
          independence--instead of deriving any advantage from this course,
          down they went to their reward.
          127
          I will advance a sentiment by Paul the Apostle, showing that we
          were there at the time that notable controversy was going on, and
          no doubt we took an active part with them who sustained the
          throne of God, and we were therefore permitted to come to this
          world and take upon us bodies. The devils that fell were not
          permitted to enjoy this privilege; they cannot increase their
          generation; glory to God, they cannot do it, but we have the
          power of multiplying lives; this is what they are angry about.
          Says Paul, "Do ye not know that the Saints shall judge the world?
          And if the world shall be judged by you, are ye unworthy to judge
          the smallest matters?" Is it possible that these Elders and
          servants of the Most High, who are going abroad among the
          nations, will have power to judge the nations of the earth? Says
          one, "God will do it, and not man." Now, for instance, I am
          building a house, and it is said Solomon built a temple, but do
          you suppose Solomon quarried the rock, laid it up, &c.? No, but
          he gave directions to others; and it is said Solomon built a
          temple; so God will judge the world. The Almighty Ruler will
          instruct His servants to do it, and the Saints will give the
          grand decision, and the nations that have slain them will have to
          bow to their word.
          128
          What says the good Book again? "And he that overcometh, and
          keepeth my works unto the end, to him will I give power over the
          nations; And he shall rule them with a rod of iron; as the
          vessels of a potter shall they be broken to shivers; even as I
          received of my Father." Do we not expect to overcome and have
          power over the nations? Yes. Says Paul, the Saints shall judge
          the world; not only this, but they shall judge angels. "Why,"
          says one, "I thought that angels were greater in might and power
          than we, and is it possible that we, the servants of God, are
          going to judge angels? You are surely exalting yourselves above
          all that is called God; for God shall judge the world." How is it
          that we do not recollect anything now that took place before we
          took upon us these bodies? When we lay them off we shall remember
          every thing, the scenes of those early times will be as fresh in
          our view as the sun was this morning when he rose over the
          mountains. The Saints will say to their fallen brethren, You were
          arrayed under the command of Lucifer, and fought against us; we
          prevailed, and it now becomes our duty to pass sentence against
          you, fallen spirits. You have been reserved to this condemnation,
          and bound with a chain. With what chain? That you could not
          multiply your race. There were limits put to you that you could
          not increase. It was never said to you, Go forth into hell and
          multiply; but it was said to man, Go forth and increase on the
          earth. Here were stakes set they could not go beyond, and this is
          what they are angry about, this makes a hell to them, because
          they "can't do it." They see the superiority of the Saints who
          have kept their first estate, and they are envious, and now it
          becomes the Saints' duty to pass sentence upon them. The Saints
          shall judge angels, even those spirits who kept not their first
          estate, and have been a long time in chains like criminals who
          are kept in bondage to await their sentence. It will be the
          prerogative of the servants of God to pass a decision upon them,
          and not only upon them, but upon the world, among whom they have
          been associated, and having combined in them the judicial power,
          and power of witness, they will have power to judge and
          determine, for the Saints shall judge the world.
          128
          How will the wicked feel when they come up at the last day, (or
          at some day, be it last or middle,) how will they feel when they
          see, perhaps one whom they have persecuted, one whom they have
          killed as an impostor, or because they said he was an impostor,
          when they see that person exalted upon the judgment seat, and
          they themselves arraigned before him, and compelled to hear from
          his lips their sentence? Sadly will they be mistaken. Says the
          Saviour, "If they have persecuted me they will also persecute
          you." They knew him not, neither did they know his disciples.
          Well did the Saviour say at one time, "Father forgive them, for
          they know not what they do." They did not understand the power
          that was lodged in the breast of their victim; but when the day
          of his wrath will come, they will say to the mountains and rocks,
          "Fall on us, and hide us from the face of him that sitteth on the
          throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb; for the great day of his
          wrath is come, and who shall be able to stand?" It will not only
          be the Lamb that will come in the clouds of heaven with power and
          great glory, but his angels and Saints that have gone before him;
          these are they that will come with him; myriads of spirits will
          come, wafted as it were through the air to earth's cold regions
          to call the sons of men to an account for their doings.
          129
          Now, "him that overcometh will I make a pillar in the temple of
          my God," and "he that overcometh to him will I give power over
          the nations." Do you want to overcome this worldly ambitious
          spirit that is ever burning to be independent, that is, self
          sufficient and proud? Overcome this, and bring every power and
          faculty of the soul into subjection to the power of the Most
          High, and you are safe. What have you to overcome next? You have
          to overcome that untiring disposition to do wrong, to overreach
          your neighbor, that thereby you may acquire for yourselves a
          paradise or heaven in this world, while in its fallen state.
          Remember this one thing, if you want to be free from the curse.
          You know it is said, "It is easier for a camel to go through the
          eye of a needle, than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of
          God." Who then can be saved? Again, says the Saviour, "With men
          this is impossible, but with God all things are possible." Let me
          show you the philosophy of this, why it is impossible for a rich
          man to enter into the kingdom of God. God said in the beginning,
          "Cursed be the ground for thy sake;" that is, earth and earthly
          things are cursed. Now the man who has the most of it has the
          greatest amount of the curse; therefore if a man acquire a great
          deal of earthly things, he acquires a great deal of this curse.
          For they that will be rich are made to pass through many sorrows,
          and they have to harden their heads and their faces, and oppress
          the poor to acquire it; and when they have acquired it, what have
          they got? It is to them something like a red hot ball in the
          hands of a child, it burns; they have acquired it, and have got a
          great curse along with it. It is hard for such to enter into the
          Kingdom of God. The gate is narrow, and the curse is wide, so if
          they wish to go in at that gate, they must be stripped, and
          become destitute of the love of this world's goods. I recollect a
          beautiful illustration of this in the case of the rich man, and
          Lazarus that was poor, and full of sores, and who lay at the rich
          man's gate. There was the rich man clothed in fine linen, and
          fared sumptuously every day. By and by he died, and went to hell,
          and saw Abraham afar off with the same poor Lazarus in his bosom.
          Says the rich man, "Father Abraham, have mercy on me, and send
          Lazarus, that he may dip the tip of his finger in water, and cool
          my tongue; for I am tormented in this flame." He was so humbled
          as to accept one drop of water from Lazarus, who while he lay at
          the rich man's gate was ready to eat the crumbs that fell from
          his table. How reverse the scene. Abraham, with the kind feelings
          of a father, at the same time with that justness and dignity
          which is ever the characteristic of the upright, said, "Son,
          remember that thou in thy life time receivedst thy good things,
          and likewise Lazarus evil things; but now he is comforted, and
          thou art tormented." His arm was too short to reach that one drop
          of water to him, for there was "a great gulf fixed: so that they
          which would pass from hence to you cannot; neither can they pass
          to us, that would come from thence." The scene was changed. This
          is enough to admonish us, and to make us adopt the advice of the
          Saviour, "Seek ye first the kingdom of God, and his
          righteousness; and all these things shall be added unto you."
          130
          When should we want to be rich? When the curse is taken from the
          earth. We do not want the earth while it is cursed, for "cursed
          be the ground for thy sake," &c. Let the world that love darkness
          rather than light, be heirs of the curse if they will; but do not
          let us seek after it with too greedy hearts, until the curse is
          taken away; and when the curse is rebuked, and the earth
          undergoes such a change that it will shine forever and ever, and
          there is no night there, then we may have it, and it will do us
          good. It is like this--We say that wheat and barley are excellent
          when we use them in their native state; but when we extract the
          spirit from these grains, and drink it, it intoxicates; when they
          are used in their native state, they make bread which gives life
          to the body, while in the other state, they destroy. So the
          earth, when the curse is taken away, will sustain an endless
          life. Though the figure is not altogether correct, still it
          serves to illustrate the principle. The Saviour did not say the
          Saints should inherit the earth while the curse was upon it, but
          he said, "Blessed are the meek: for they shall inherit the
          earth." He will not give them something to destroy them, but they
          have got to stay until the earth has fulfilled the measure of its
          creation; and then the angel will raise his hand to heaven, and
          swear that time shall be no longer. What becomes of the earth
          then? Why, says the prophet, it shall "reel to and fro like a
          drunkard, and shall be removed like a cottage; and the
          transgression thereof shall be heavy upon it, and it shall fall,
          and not rise again." If the earth falls, which way will it go, up
          or down? Tell me, ye wise men, ye philosophers. Will not the
          greatest and most powerful planet attract it whether it goes up
          or down? for the greater bodies attract the lesser. If the earth
          falls, and is not to rise again, it will be removed out of its
          present orbit. Where will it go to? God says He will gather all
          things into one; then He will gather the earth likewise, and all
          that is in it, in one. The gathering will be upon a larger scale
          in time to come; for by and by the stars of Heaven will fall.
          Which way will they go? They will rally to a grand centre, and
          there will be one grand constellation of worlds. I pray that we
          may be there, and shine among those millions of worlds that will
          be stars in the Almighty's crown.
          130
          The earth will have to be removed from its place, and reel to and
          fro like a drunkard. The fact is, it has got to leave the old
          track in which it has roamed in time passed, and beat a new
          track; and saith the Lord, "come up here." What is He going to do
          with it? Why, take it where the sun will shine upon it
          continually, and there shall be no more night there; and the hand
          of God will wipe away the tears from all faces. "Come up here, O
          earth! for I want the Saints who have passed through much
          tribulation to be glorified with you, and then I will give the
          earth to the meek. For I will take the curse from it, and rebuke
          the destroyer for your sakes, and bring all things in subjection
          to you, and you shall dwell in everlasting light." Now it is half
          day and half night, but I tell you it is not going to be half and
          half, but there will be no night there. We have but one sun to
          shine upon us, but when the earth is taken out of this orbit, it
          will come in contact with the rays of other suns that illuminate
          other spheres; their rays will dazzle our earth, and make the
          glory of God rest upon it, so that there will be no more night
          there.
          130
          Is it possible, then, that there are worlds reserved in eternal
          night, in an eternal eclipse, rolling in the shade? What is their
          use? They are the homes of them that love darkness rather than
          light; and it shall be said unto them, Depart, ye cursed, into
          outer darkness. There are planets that revolve in eternal
          darkness, that you who love darkness rather than light may go and
          find your own home. There is a place prepared for every body, no
          matter what their character. Says the Saviour, "I go to prepare a
          place for you." There is a place for every person. There is a
          place for every body that comes into this Valley, if they can
          only find it. So there is a place in yonder world for every
          person; but to him that overcometh will I give power over the
          nations, and he shall be a pillar in the Temple of my God, and go
          no more out.
          130
          If there is any thing in this world my soul desires the most, it
          is that I may overcome, and be made a pillar in the Temple of my
          God, and remain at home in the society that is continually
          warming my spirit, encouraging my feeling, with that which is
          congenial with every principle of my nature; let me bask in their
          goodly presence, live in their affections, dwell forever in the
          midst of their society, and go no more out. And may God in His
          mercy help us all to overcome every obstacle, and endure
          hardships like good soldiers of the Lamb, and dwell eternally in
          the mansions of light; which may God grant for Christ's sake.
          Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, April 6, 1853
                            Brigham Young, April 6, 1853
               
                   THE TEMPLE CORNER STONES--THE APOSTLESHIP, &c.
            A sermon delivered by President B. Young, in the Tabernacle,
           Great Salt Lake City, April 6, 1853, at the General Conference.
          131
          We have assembled together this afternoon to continue the
          business of the Conference, a portion of which I feel should be
          devoted to instruction, teachings, traversing the experience of
          the Church, or in any way the Spirit of the Lord shall manifest.
          131
          The special business that has to be transacted in a Conference
          like this, can be done very quickly--perhaps we might do all that
          is necessary in half a day, or in a day at the furthest.
          131
          We came together for the purpose of worshipping the Lord, and
          many have come from a distance, who wished to come up here and
          join with their brethren in contemplating the work of the last
          days, and in speaking to each other comforting words, for it is a
          very agreeable exercise, on occasions like this, as well as in
          other meetings, to rehearse over to each other the scenes of
          life, the feelings of the heart, the tragedies that have passed
          among us, the difficulties we have surmounted, and the days,
          months, and years we have been brought through.
          131
          I will say, for one, so far as it concerns my own feelings, my
          brethren are at liberty to talk about that that is in their
          hearts. This is my privilege, and I wish it to be understood that
          it is the privilege of those who shall address this Conference.
          If they want to preach us a discourse on doctrine--on the
          gathering of Israel, for instance, they are at liberty so to do.
          If any one wishes to preach the first principles of the
          Gospel--repentance and baptism, with the gifts, he is at liberty.
          131
          Were it not that our bodies have to be fed and clothed, I would
          propose that we tarry here a few months, to give all a chance to
          speak, to exhort, to pray, to prophesy, to sing, to speak in
          tongues, or to do whatsoever the Spirit should manifest unto
          them. But our work is a work of the present. The salvation we are
          seeking is for the present, and, sought correctly, it can be
          obtained, and be continually enjoyed. If it continues to-day, it
          is upon the same principle that it will continue to-morrow, the
          next day, the next week, or the next year, and, we might say, the
          next eternity.
          131
          If we are saved, we are happy, we are filled with light, glory,
          intelligence, and we pursue a course to enjoy the blessings that
          the Lord has in store for us. If we continue to pursue that
          course, it produces just the thing we want, that is, to be saved
          at this present moment. And this will lay the foundation to be
          saved for ever and for ever, which will amount to an eternal
          salvation.
          132
          Brethren, we have accomplished the design of our hearts, that we
          listed to accomplish. And really, this thought inadvertently
          rushes upon my mind--Wherein have we not accomplished all we have
          listed to do? not only in excavating the earth, and laying down
          the Corner Stones in the centre of the main body of the building
          we shall rear for the Temple, but wherein we have contemplated
          doing one thing we have not done, to build up the Kingdom of God?
          If there has been a failure, it does not occur to my mind at
          present. I cannot now recall to my mind one circumstance of that
          kind, with all the mobbing, driving, and afflictions that this
          people have passed through.
          132
          Through the enemy had power to kill our Prophet, that is, kill
          his body, did he not accomplish all that was in his heart to
          accomplish in his day? He did, to my certain knowledge, and I
          have many witnesses here that heard him declare that he had done
          everything he could do--he had revealed everything that could be
          revealed at present, he had prepared the way for the people to
          walk in, and no man or woman should be deprived of going into the
          presence of the Father and the Son, and enjoying an eternal
          exaltation, if they would walk in the path he had pointed out.
          132
          From the day that he fell, until this day, if there is one item
          of business, if there is one thing that should have been done by
          this people, that has not been done, I cannot call it to mind,
          though it looked gloomy for a month or six weeks past, the
          weather being so unfavorable with regard to being ready to lay
          those Corner Stones, to-day.
          132
          I am happy to say that there has been a great deal of faith
          manifested by the Saints, and, through that faith, the Lord has
          granted unto us the desire of our hearts, or else the devil has
          been sent on an errand another way, and has forgotten himself. I
          do not think, however, he need trouble himself much about the
          world, for he has them secure enough. Perhaps he may have slept a
          little too long, as he has not been here on this notable day. I
          attribute it to our Father in heaven, for giving us this
          beautiful weather to-day.
          132
          The congregation was not accommodated as we desired. We should
          have been pleased if they could have been so situated that all
          could have heard the orations and prayers that were made upon
          those four stones; but they will be in print, so you can read
          them at your leisure.
          132
          I do not like to prophesy much, I never do, but I will venture a
          guess, that this day, and the work we have performed on it, will
          long be remembered by this people, and be sounded as with a
          trumpet's voice throughout the world, as far, as loud, and as
          long as steam, wind, and the electric current can carry it. It is
          a day in which all the faithful will rejoice in all time to come.
          132
          Some will inquire, "Do you suppose we shall finish this Temple,
          brother Brigham?" I have had such questions put to me already. My
          answer is, I do not know, and I do not care any more about it
          than I should if my body was dead and in the grave, and my spirit
          in Paradise. I never have cared but for one thing, and that is,
          simply to know that I am now right before my Father in Heaven. If
          I am this moment, this day, doing the things God requires of my
          hands, and precisely where my Father in Heaven wants me to be, I
          care no more about to-morrow than though it never would come. I
          do not know where I shall be to-morrow, nor when this Temple will
          be done--I know no more about it than you do. If God reveals
          anything for you, I will tell you of it as freely as to say, go
          to City Creek, and drink until you are satisfied.
          133
          This I do know--there should be a Temple built here. I do know it
          is the duty of this people to commence to build a Temple. Now,
          some will want to know what kind of a building it will be. Wait
          patiently, brethren, until it is done, and put forth your hands
          willingly to finish it. I know what it will be. I am not a
          visionary man, neither am I given much to prophesying. When I
          want any of that done I call on brother Heber--he is my Prophet,
          he loves to prophesy, and I love to hear him. I scarcely ever say
          much about revelations, or visions, but suffice it to say, five
          years ago last July I was here, and saw in the Spirit the Temple
          not ten feet from where we have laid the Chief Corner Stone. I
          have not inquired what kind of a Temple we should build. Why?
          Because it was represented before me. I have never looked upon
          that ground, but the vision of it was there. I see it as plainly
          as if it was in reality before me. Wait until it is done. I will
          say, however, that it will have six towers, to begin with,
          instead of one. Now do not any of you apostatize because it will
          have six towers, and Joseph only built one. It is easier for us
          to build sixteen, than it was for him to build one. The time will
          come when there will be one in the centre of Temples we shall
          build, and, on the top, groves and fish ponds. But we shall not
          see them here, at present.
          133
          The First Presidency proceeded to the south-east corner, to lay
          the first stone, though it is customary to commence at the
          north-east corner--that is the beginning point most generally, I
          believe, in the world. At this side of the equator we commence at
          the south-east corner. We sometimes look for light, you know,
          brethren. You old men that have been through the mill pretty
          well, have been inquiring after light--which way do you go? You
          will tell me you go to the east for light? So we commence by
          laying the stone on the south-east corner, because there is the
          most light.
          133
          Just as quick as the minutes of this day's proceedings are out,
          there will be Elders, High Priests, and Seventies, inquiring
          whether the same order has been carried out to-day, as was
          observed in laying the Corner Stones of the other Temples. I want
          to give you a little history of it, that you may know.
          133
          When the corner stones were laid in Kirtland, they had to pick up
          boys of fifteen and sixteen years of age, and ordain them Elders,
          to get officers enough to lay the Corner Stones. The Quorum of
          the Twelve, and the High Council, and many other authorities that
          now exist, were not then in existence. Joseph presided over the
          Church, by the voice of the Church.
          133
          Perhaps it may make some of you stumble, were I to ask you a
          question--Does a man's being a Prophet in this Church prove that
          he shall be the President of it? I answer, no! A man may be a
          Prophet, Seer, and Revelator, and it may have nothing to do with
          his being the President of the Church. Suffice it to say, that
          Joseph was the President of the Church, as long as he lived: the
          people chose to have it so. He always filled that responsible
          station, by the voice of the people. Can you find any revelation
          appointing him the President of the Church? The keys of the
          Priesthood were committed to Joseph, to build up the Kingdom of
          God on the earth, and were not to be taken from him in time or in
          eternity; but when he was called to preside over the Church, it
          was by the voice of the people; though he held the keys of the
          Priesthood, independent of their voice.
          133
          I want the Elders of Israel to reflect upon this subject. I would
          be glad to teach you something, that you may not get into such
          snarls as heretofore. You make me think of a child that is trying
          to make rope of a parcel of old thrums, until he gets the whole
          into snarls. It is so with the Elders of Israel as touching their
          ideas of the Priesthood.
          134
          Now hear me, and I will try to talk so that you can understand. I
          will presume to go a little further than I did, with regard to
          the President of the Church, and say to this people, a man might
          have visions, the angels of God might administer to him, he might
          have revelations, and see as many visions as you could count; he
          might have the heavens opened to him, and see the finger of the
          Lord, and all this would not make him the President of the
          Church, or an Elder, a High Priest, an Apostle; neither would it
          prove that he was even a Saint: something else is wanted to prove
          it. Why I mention this, is because of the frailty, weakness, and
          short-sightedness of the people. If a man should come and tell
          you he had had a vision, and could appear to substantiate his
          testimony that he had had the heavens opened to him, you would be
          ready to bow down and worship him; and he might be, at the same
          time, perfectly calculated to destroy the people--one of the
          biggest devils on earth. He would appear to be one of the finest
          of men, to be honest and unassuming, and come with all the grace
          and generalship of the devil, which is so well calculated to
          deceive the people. Admit this to be the case.
          134
          If you ask me what will prove a man or woman to be a Saint, I
          will answer the question. "If you love me," says Jesus, "you will
          keep my sayings." That is the touchstone. If you love the Lord
          Jesus Christ, and the Father, you will keep the commandments of
          the Son--you will do his will. If you neglect to do this, you may
          have all the visions and revelations that could be bestowed upon
          a mortal being, and yet be nothing but a devil. Why I use this
          expression is because when a man's mind is enlightened, and he
          turns from that light to darkness, it prepares him to be a devil.
          A man never knew how to be wicked, until light and truth were
          first made manifest to him. Then is the time for men to make
          their decision, and if they turn away from the Lord, it prepares
          them to become devils.
          134
          Now, I want to go back, for I have wandered on a little with
          regard to laying the Corner Stones, and take up the Apostleship,
          in connexion with this. Let me ask the High Priests' Quorum a
          question, in order to bring out the thing I wish to lay before
          you. I ask the High Priests, from whence does the Apostleship
          grow? Does it grow out of the High Priesthood? I will venture to
          say, if I was not here to-day, and this question was proposed for
          debate, you would find the Elders in this congregation, perhaps,
          nearly equally divided on the point. There would be as many High
          Priests to say the Apostleship grows out of the High Priesthood,
          as there would to say it does not. Let me answer the question.
          Now recollect that the High Priesthood, and the Lesser
          Priesthood, and all the Priesthood there is, are combined,
          centered in, composed of, and circumscribed by, the Apostleship.
          Brethren, did you ever know that before? If you had read that
          book attentively, [pointing to the Book of Covenants,] it would
          have told you the story as I am now telling it to you, yet the
          High Priests did not know it.
          134
          I speak thus to show you the order of the Priesthood. We will now
          commence with the Apostleship, where Joseph commenced. Joseph was
          ordained an Apostle--that you can read and understand. After he
          was ordained to this office, then he had the right to organize
          and build up the kingdom of God, for he had committed unto him
          the keys of the Priesthood, which is after the order of
          Melchizedek--the High Priesthood, which is after the order of the
          Son of God. And this, remember, by being ordained an Apostle.
          135
          Could he have built up the Kingdom of God, without first being an
          Apostle? No, he never could. The keys of the eternal Priesthood,
          which is after the order of the Son of God, are comprehended by
          being an Apostle. All the Priesthood, all the keys, all the
          gifts, all the endowments, and everything preparatory to entering
          into the presence of the Father and of the Son, are in, composed
          of, circumscribed by, or I might say incorporated within the
          circumference of, the Apostleship.
          135
          Now who do we set, in the first place, to lay the Chief, the
          South East, Corner Stone--the corner from whence light emanates
          to illuminate the whole fabric that is to be lighted? We begin
          with the First Presidency, with the Apostleship, for Joseph
          commenced, always, with the keys of the Apostleship, and he, by
          the voice of the people, presiding over the whole community of
          Latter-day Saints, officiated in the Apostleship, as the first
          president.
          135
          What comes next in the Church? I will now refer you directly to
          the building up of the Kingdom of God in the last days. What do
          we see next? Joseph as an Apostle of the Lamb, with the keys of
          the eternal Priesthood committed unto him by Peter, James, and
          John. What for? To build up the Kingdom of God on the earth. Next
          grows out an office pertaining to the temporal affairs of this
          Kingdom, the keys of which are committed to man on the earth,
          preparatory to its establishment, preparatory to its spreading,
          growing, increasing, and prospering among the nations. The next
          step we see taken by the Lord, is to provide for the body,
          therefore some person must be appointed to fill this office, to
          stand side by side with this Apostle, this first President. Who
          was it? It was not brother Hunter. Who was it? It was brother
          Partridge. We see brother Partridge was called to fill that place
          before there was an Elders' Quorum, or a High Priests' Quorum, in
          existence, yea, before the thing was talked of, and also before
          the Twelve Apostles were chosen, not, however, before the
          revelation was given to signify there would be such a Quorum.
          135
          We see this Apostle with the keys of the Priesthood to build up
          the Kingdom, to give light to those who were in darkness, to
          succor those who were feeble, to sustain the trembling, to
          administer salvation to the penitent, and to be a stay and a
          staff to those who were ready to fall. We see this gigantic
          Apostle thus standing forth, clothed with the authority of
          heaven, to build up His cause on the earth. Him the Lord told to
          call a Bishop. So the Bishop was the next standing authority in
          the Kingdom of God; therefore we set the Bishop at the second
          corner of the building. The Melchizedek Priesthood, with the
          altar, fixtures, and furniture belonging thereunto, is situated
          on the East, and the Aaronic Priesthood belongs in the West;
          consequently the Presiding Bishop laid the second stone.
          135
          Do you ask, was it so in the other buildings? I do not know,
          neither do I care.
          135
          The High Priests' Quorum--do they come next in order, do they
          next step into the field? No, not particularly, any more than the
          Elders, nor the Elders any more than the High Council, nor the
          High Council any more than the Teachers, Deacons, or Priests. The
          High Priests' Quorum is a standing Quorum, abiding at home. So is
          the Elders' Quorum; but the place of the Bishop is in the
          temporal affairs in the Church; so then what shall we say? Why,
          out of due respect to the High Priesthood, which is nothing more
          than what is right and reasonable, that we should honor the
          Priesthood that God has bequeathed to us, we say to the High
          Priests, lay the third corner stone.
          136
          We started at the South East Corner, with the Apostleship; then
          the Lesser Priesthood laid the second stone; we bring them in our
          ranks to the third stone, which the High Priests and Elders laid;
          we take them under our wing to the North East Corner Stone, which
          the Twelve and Seventies laid, and there again join the
          Apostleship. It circumscribes every other Priesthood, for it is
          the Priesthood of Melchizedek, which is after the order of the
          Son of God.
          136
          To say a man is an Apostle, is equal to saying that a man is
          ordained to build up the Kingdom of God from first to last; but
          it is not so by saying he is ordained a High Priest. The
          Bishopric by right belongs to the literal descendants of Aaron,
          but we shall have to ordain from the other tribes, men who hold
          the High Priesthood, to act in the Lesser, until we can find a
          literal descendant of Aaron, who is prepared to receive it.
          136
          The Lesser Priesthood then, you perceive, comes within the
          purview of the Apostleship, because a man that holds it has a
          right to act or officiate as a High Priest, as one of the High
          Council, as a Patriarch, as a Bishop, Elder, Priest, Teacher, and
          Deacon, and in every other office and calling that is in the
          Church, from first to last, when duty demands it.
          136
          This is the order of the Priesthood, brethren. I felt as though I
          wished to make some remarks upon this subject on the Temple
          ground; but dismissing the congregation hurt me much. I wanted to
          make some remarks at the same time, but I despaired of making you
          hear, so I thought I would omit speaking in the open air, and say
          what I had to say in the Tabernacle.
          136
          I know what was done at Nauvoo; it was all right. Everything is
          right with me. There the Twelve were called to lay the North West
          Corner Stones, if I mistake not. However, it is no matter, they
          were just as well there, as anywhere else. But to take up the
          Priesthood in its perfect order and form, you perceive that the
          Apostleship circumscribes everything in the Church of God on
          earth. This is the order, and I have endeavored to carry it out
          before you, that you all might know hereafter, what is the true
          order, as far as it can be exhibited in the laying of Corner
          Stones. So far as simply laying a corner stone is concerned, one
          corner is just as good to me as another.
          136
          I will give you the explanation why we proceeded as we have. It
          was suggested to me, that perhaps the Twelve would feel better to
          lay the second stone. When I told them the fourth stone was the
          stone they should lay, it struck my mind that I was ordained an
          Apostle; and I still belong to the Apostleship; did you ever cut
          me off, brethren? [Voices in the stand, No.] It struck my mind if
          you wanted to lay the second stone, you did not feel that you had
          the Apostleship in you, or you did not feel like as I did; for it
          is the beginning and the end, the height, depth, length, and
          breadth of all that is, that was, and ever can be to all
          eternity. I have not heard that there were any feelings about the
          matter, only somebody suggested the thing. It was three of the
          Twelve, then, that laid the first stone, and then the Quorum of
          the Twelve laid the fourth.
          137
          Now will it cause some of you to marvel that I was not ordained a
          High Priest before I was ordained an Apostle? Brother Kimball and
          myself were never ordained High Priests. How wonderful! I was
          going to say how little some of the brethren understood the
          Priesthood, after the Twelve were called. In our early career in
          this Church, on one occasion, in one of our Councils, we were
          telling about some of the Twelve wanting to ordain us High
          Priests, and what I said to brother Patten when he wanted to
          ordain me in York State: said I, brother Patten, wait until I can
          lift my hand to heaven and say, I have magnified the office of an
          Elder. After our conversation was over in the Council, some of
          the brethren began to query, and said we ought to be ordained
          High Priests; at the same time I did not consider that an Apostle
          needed to be ordained a High Priest, an Elder, or a Teacher. I
          did not express my views on the subject, at that time, but
          thought I would hear what brother Joseph would say about it. It
          was William E. McLellin who told Joseph, that I and Heber were
          not ordained High Priests, and wanted to know if it should not be
          done. Said Joseph, "Will you insult the Priesthood? Is that all
          the knowledge you have of the office of an Apostle? Do you not
          know that the man who receive the Apostleship, receives all the
          keys that ever were, or that can be, conferred upon mortal man?
          What are you talking about? I am astonished!" Nothing more was
          said about it.
          137
          I know that Joseph received his Apostleship from Peter, James,
          and John, before a revelation on the subject was printed, and he
          never had a right to organize a Church before he was an Apostle.
          137
          I have tried to shew you, brethren, as briefly as possible, the
          order of the Priesthood. When a man is ordained to be an Apostle,
          his Priesthood is without beginning of days, or end of life, like
          the Priesthood of Melchizedek; for it was his Priesthood that was
          spoken of in this language, and not the man.
          137
          When I arose to address you, I wanted to talk to you a little of
          my experience in practical "Mormonism," but I have not had time,
          and have talked long enough already. I have been round about it,
          you know, for it is all inside of what I have been telling you.
          137
          May the Lord bless you forever in the name of Jesus Christ. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Parley
          P. Pratt, July 1776
                             Parley P. Pratt, July 1776
          DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE--CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED
          STATES--DISCOVERY,
                   COLONIZATION, AND PROGRESS OF AMERICA--DESPOTIC
                                 NATIONS--INFLUENCE
                 OF AMERICA FOR THE UNIVERSAL PREVALENCE OF LIBERTY.
            An oration delivered by P. P. Pratt, at Great Salt Lake City,
                                        1853,
                    on the anniversary of the 4th of July, 1776.
          138
          Friends and Fellow Citizens--We have been edified and instructed
          today, our hearts have been warmed, an our minds entertained with
          a variety. Shall I say interspersed with music? No, for it has
          all been music, whether flowing from the hearts of our fellow
          citizens, or produced by the skill of our bands in the use of
          musical instruments. All has been music--music to the ear, and
          poetry to the heart. We have had a variety, all tending, however,
          to one point, all chiming in one common harmony, without a
          jarring string. We have had the gushing eloquence of youth,
          kindled as it were with liquid fire, portraying the glories of
          our country, and touching upon some portion of its history.
          138
          Our sympathies, and feelings of patriotism, have been moved in
          listening to the items relating to the "Mormon Battalion"--their
          sufferings upon the plains of Sonora, and the variety of scenes
          of joy, and sorrow, and patriotism; and the results in their
          march. We have had portrayed before us at one moment the opening
          of the treasures of the western mines, and the cause that led to
          it, pouring into the treasuries of nations, as it were, a stream
          of gold. At another moment we have been entertained with a view
          of the results of the actions of our fathers, and the causes that
          led to the great Declaration of Independence, and to the
          statement of the principles contained in that instrument, which
          was read to day; contemplating, not only the direct bearing of
          those actions of our fathers in setting a nation free, but the
          indirect bearing and influences of such movements upon the whole
          world of mankind--upon the destiny of the race of which we form a
          part.
          138
          At another moment we have listened to the grave eloquence of
          official gentlemen, portraying the history of our fathers in the
          anxious movements that finally resulted in the establishment and
          in the maintenance of those great principles and truths put forth
          in the Declaration. In short, we have had a variety, and we have
          had entertainment that has been profitable to the mind, and that
          has caused us to reflect. And as to the display of eloquence,
          poetry, music, and above all of patriotic feeling, good
          sentiment, and wholesome doctrine, what is there left?
          138
          I, for one, feel, in rising under these circumstances, as though
          I would rather sit and contemplate, and reflect upon the history
          of the past, and the glorious prospect of the future. But on the
          other hand, I feel willing as a fellow citizen to contribute my
          mite, realizing at the same time my own weakness, and not having
          had time to prepare anything in writing.
          138
          I will express my ideas, or rather a few of them, in regard to
          the Constitution of our own country, and its political
          principles, of their effects, and of the results of the movements
          which gave rise to that Constitution. The longer I live, and the
          more acquainted I am with men and things, the more I realize that
          these movements, and particularly that instrument called the
          Constitution of American Liberty, was certainly dictated by the
          spirit of wisdom, by a spirit of unparalleled liberality, and by
          a spirit of political utility. And if that Constitution be
          carried out by a just and wise administration, it is calculated
          to benefit not only all the people that are born under its
          particular jurisdiction, but all the people of the earth, of
          whatever nation, kindred, tongue, religion, or tradition, that
          may seek to take a shelter under its banner. It seems broad
          enough, and large enough, to receive and protect all that may be
          in any way deprived of the common rights of man. It was doubtless
          dictated by the spirit of eternal wisdom, and has thus far proved
          itself adequate to the wants of the nation, and to the wants of
          all mankind that have seen fit to attach themselves to it, to
          come under its protection, and share in its blessings.
          139
          The great question, as has been before observed to-day more than
          once, is, not the operations of the instruments, the beauty of
          the writing, the formation of the language, or the principle of
          liberty guaranteed therein, but the administration of those
          principles. For instance, paper itself cannot enforce its own
          precepts; and unhallowed principles in the people, or in the
          rulers which they choose, may pervert any form of government,
          however sacred, true, and liberal. They may overthrow and destroy
          the practical working of those very principles, which are so
          true, and so dear to us, and in which we so rejoice. It is the
          living administration, after all, that is the government,
          although a good form opens the way for good results, if carried
          out; but if not carried out, the form becomes a dead letter. Much
          depends on the feeling and action of the people in their choice
          of men and measures, and much depends on the administration of
          those they may choose.
          139
          In the principles of the Constitution formed by our fathers, and
          handed down to their children, and those who should see fit to
          adopt this country as theirs, there is no difficulty, that is, in
          the laws and instruments themselves. They embrace eternal truths,
          principles of eternal liberty, not the principles of one peculiar
          country, or the sectional interest of any particular people, but
          the great, fundamental, eternal principles of liberty to rational
          beings--liberty of conscience, liberty to do business, liberty to
          increase in intelligence and in improvement, in the comforts,
          conveniences, and elegances of this life, and in the intellectual
          principles that tend to progress in all lives.
          140
          The more I contemplate our country, the providences which have
          attended it, the principles upon which it is governed, the
          principles upon which the Constitution is founded, and the
          practical working of it when properly carried out; the more I
          look at the spirit of our institutions; and the more I
          contemplate the circumstances of mankind in general; the more I
          realize that which before I had scarcely thought of, that which
          even the largest capacity had failed to grasp--the greatness of
          the destiny of those principles. One thing is certain, in the
          minds of all Christians who admit the truth of the Bible, and who
          have perused its pages, and that is, there is a day coming when
          all mankind upon this earth will be free. When they will no
          longer be shackled, either by ignorance, by religious or
          political bondage, by tyranny, by oppression, by priestcraft,
          kingcraft, or any other kind of craft, but when all will
          positively have the knowledge of the truth, and freely enjoy it
          with their neighbors. However they may do in other points, these
          points are clearly developed in that good Book which Christendom
          acknowledges. This is the destiny that the Prophets of old have
          predicted in regard to the race of mortals upon the earth.
          Whatever principles of darkness have united to obscure ages and
          generations; whatever of wrong and blood-shed might prevail;
          whatever of corruption, deception, or superstition might enslave
          the mind of man, and chain down his body; however the earth might
          be drenched in the blood of millions; however many might be the
          futile struggles of nations or individuals for liberty; yet, in
          the final result, the darkness which has covered the earth will
          be chased away, light will prevail, liberty triumph, mankind be
          free, the nations be brethren, and none have need to say to his
          neighbor, "Know ye the Lord," or the truth, which is just the
          same thing; for all will know Him, from the least to the
          greatest. If such is to be the final result, how natural it is
          for men to look at the workings of the causes that will bring it
          about, and to contemplate the great things that are growing out
          of so little, comparatively speaking. When a single individual
          conceived a big thought, and formed a grand design of taking an
          unbeaten track, and penetrating the unexplored seas of the West,
          who could have contemplated the result that has grown out of it
          in about 300 and odd years?
          140
          On the other hand, when a few colonies, weak and feeble, settled
          on these western shores, called New England, when all the grain
          they had in their possession, in a little while after they
          landed, might have been measured in a pint cup, who then could
          have contemplated the result? Or when a few small colonies, weak
          and far separated from each other by dreary miles, without the
          aid of steam cars, or steam boats, or the convenience of the
          telegraph to convey news from place to place with lightning
          speed, were united, and by their representatives made this
          Declaration we have heard to-day, and pledged themselves, though
          few in number--only between two and three millions, to defend and
          carry it out, who could have contemplated the result even of
          that? And when these few colonies were once set free to manage
          their own affairs, and, having achieved that which they so
          bravely undertook to accomplish, and establish liberty, they came
          together to establish a capital that should be central and
          convenient for the colonies that were then strewed along the
          shores--at that time who could have contemplated a nation that
          would stretch its dominions and settlements from Maine to
          Florida, and from the north east, washed by the Atlantic, to the
          very interior of the continent then unknown to civilised man? and
          that the shores of the Pacific would have formed our western
          limits, its seas been whitened with our sails, and the unnumbered
          millions of Asia influenced by our institutions?
          140
          Our hearts beat high for liberty. The valleys of the mountains,
          the back bone of the American Continent, are peopled with 20 or
          30 millions of free people scattered over the land, and dwelling
          securely under the same banner, and now are we assembled to
          celebrate the day on which freedom dawned.
          140
          Who can realize the present and future bearing of this? Mine eyes
          have beheld the down trodden people of our ancient mother
          country--England. I have contemplated the working of European
          nations, not after the hearing of the ear only, but mine eyes
          have beheld it. I have also beheld a portion of the great
          Pacific, and seen our brethren of mankind at war with each other
          in Spanish America, for I have crossed the equator, and been far
          along the western shores of the Pacific. I have also seen
          thousands of people of Asia, from the most despotic government on
          the earth, swarming upon our western shores, dwelling under the
          common banner of freedom--I mean the Chinese.
          140
          We have heard something to day about the prospects of annexation,
          or enlargement of the dominions of the Constitution of America.
          The principle of annexation of large countries is not important,
          but the influence of our institutions, the pattern we set, the
          working of these institutions, and their influence abroad will
          bring about the same results precisely, whether it is
          particularly by annexation or not. The Spanish American, who is
          he? He possesses a country and resources almost unbounded. Put
          that country and its resources with the United States, with the
          Canadas, and I will guarantee that every man that now stands upon
          the earth could be sustained by these resources, if the rest of
          the world were to sink.
          141
          The natural elements of the American continent, that are not
          developed, would sustain the world. The Spanish American
          possesses a country that is rich in every thing that is
          desirable, as a climate in all its varieties. It is rich in
          mineral wealth and agricultural resources, in timber, and in all
          the elements of wealth and greatness, and is comparatively
          undeveloped and unoccupied. But who are these Spanish Americans?
          They are in a great measure aboriginal inhabitants of this
          country, mingled with European people, from the pure white of old
          Spain, and in all its shades until you come to the full blooded
          Indian, or Redman.
          141
          What institutions are they under? They are said to have liberty,
          something after the pattern of the United States, but in many
          instances, I am sorry to say, only in part, not in spirit, nor in
          truth; for while they profess liberty, they themselves are in
          bondage to a religion established by law. While their
          institutions may be nominally free in many respects, they have
          this awful clause specifying a certain religion, that shall be
          the religion of the State, to the prohibition of all other
          religions, or public exercise of other religions. Hence the
          people are trammelled by priestcraft, by a yoke of bondage, first
          enforced upon them by the sword in the days of Cortes and
          Pizarro, and afterwards rivetted by the traditions of three
          centuries. They know not how to appreciate liberty, they know not
          how to throw off the yoke that goads their neck.
          141
          As it has been observed to-day by one of the orators, mankind are
          progressive beings, and there are no obstacles that might be
          thrown in the way of their progress, that could not be overcome.
          This will apply to our brethren of every shade on this continent,
          and to mankind in general. It is hardly possible for one dwelling
          at home to realize the influence that American and English
          institutions, which are the best, exert over the nations, and
          among them. They look to America for instruction and example in
          the first place, and they next look to England; they look to
          these countries for everything that is yet undeveloped, of
          liberty, art, science, education, and improvement. You may say
          they are Catholics, but who blames them for this? The law of
          their country made them so, and tradition has fastened the bands,
          and makes them so yet. But when they speak to Americans, they
          speak with those whom they suppose can teach them. When they
          contemplate the United States, they contemplate a country that
          they suppose is setting them an example worthy to be patterned
          after. They delight to sit for hours and learn of our
          institutions, of our railroads, of our telegraph, of the speed by
          which we can convey ourselves and goods from place to place, and
          of our wonderful quickness of conveying news. They love to hear
          of our improvements in steam, of our navigation, of our schools,
          of our newspaper liberty, or the liberty of the press, of our
          liberty of conscience, of our universal adaptation of education,
          and of our system of paying for education out of the public
          funds, leaving the people to contribute freely according to their
          own judgment and desires for the support of religion. These
          things have a bearing upon their minds; they are ready to
          converse upon them, and when they have heard the description, say
          they, "It is good, far better than our own institutions," and
          they are ready to condemn the priestcraft among them, but they
          have to follow it because they have nothing else. Their organs of
          thought are not accustomed to much exercise, they want the
          information to liberate themselves.
          142
          When we contemplate the designs of the country, and its
          influence, we contemplate not merely our own liberty, happiness,
          and progress, nationally and individually, but we contemplate the
          emancipation of the world, the flowing of the nations to this
          fountain, and to the occupation of these elements, blending
          together in one common brotherhood. They will thus seek
          deliverance from oppression, not in the style of revolution, but
          by voluntarily emerging into freedom, and the free occupation of
          the free elements of life. In contemplating the fulfilment of
          things so clearly developed by the Prophets, I do not view it as
          do many, who suppose a revolution should take place in France, in
          Austria, in Germany, and the other nations, and that one
          revolution following another, would gradually emancipate mankind
          in every nation, and give progress to the principles of freedom,
          to liberty of thought and action, and to the free circulation of
          intelligence. We have seen it tried, and tried in vain. The
          people are not able to throw off those fetters of bondage, and
          that heavy yoke. Circumstances are against them. But Providence
          opens the way whereby they may liberate themselves--I mean the
          first and best spirits from all countries under the heavens. They
          may leave the old constitutions to crumble down in their own
          rottenness, and emerge from them, and come out where they may
          enjoy sufficient of the elements upon free, good, and equitable
          principles; operate upon these elements, and increase their
          numbers and powers by the union of the best spirits of all
          nations of the earth.
          142
          On the one hand the Chinese emerges from the institutions of ages
          almost immemorial, from the antiquated creeds and regulations
          that he thought every man in the world had been governed by for
          thousands of years. He emerges from that superstitious
          government, and lands upon these shores, and learns principles of
          freedom faster than he does the English language--his old
          traditions are swept away, and he is a man. But take that whole
          nation, and they could not be brought to think of liberty as we
          do; take from ten to a thousand individuals and put them where
          they may think, and they will think; and as they think, their old
          traditions will vanish one by one. At the same time the Spanish
          American follows, and all the other nations in the train; the
          barriers will be broken, and they will begin to emerge into
          freedom. In short, all the people of the earth, though they
          cannot master their tyrants at home at one fell swoop, and burst
          asunder their chains and the fetters of priestcraft that have
          bound them down, and trammelled the free circulation of thought,
          yet one by one, family by family, can flow out from those
          countries, to where they have a right to the elements to sustain
          them. What is to be the result in the end? They will step on the
          other side of the big ship called the world, or in other words
          the Eastern Hemisphere, and take their stand together, at least
          upon general principles, if not upon particular items, and begin
          to think. It will be a long time, of course, before all things
          will settle into a state of harmony; it will be a long time
          before many will begin to think at all. They will ultimately
          begin to think, and think until they form habits of thinking, and
          perhaps after a while they will learn to think truly. Men who are
          not in the habit of thinking are as apt to think wrong as to
          think right, but when the habit is once formed they will begin to
          discriminate, and use faculties with which they are naturally
          endowed. When they emigrate to this land, the first thing they
          think of is to improve the elements, and provide for themselves
          the means of subsistence.
          142
          But the stepping of the people on this side of the ship, or on
          the land shadowing with wings, in such numbers, would, to use a
          figure, almost turn the world over; they would, in other words,
          overbalance it, the same as a ship would be overbalanced by the
          shifting of the cargo from one side of the vessel to the other.
          143
          You take the people from the Eastern Hemisphere, and put them on
          the western, far away from tyranny and oppression, and let them
          use their individual exertions to improve themselves, mentally
          and nationally, and their influence will ultimately overbalance
          the world, they will overturn those institutions which they could
          not conquer in their own country.
          143
          Hence we contemplate that small beginning made by the American
          pioneers, by Columbus as the first pioneer, and by our fathers
          the pioneers of religion and liberty; we contemplate how that
          influence has spread and increased in the earth, influencing the
          feelings of individuals as well as national institutions, until
          among all the nations of the earth, a sufficient number are
          gathered together, and the elements sufficiently developed that
          now be unoccupied, and sufficient light is infused for them to
          comprehend, to contemplate, to investigate, and interchange with
          each other the blessings of Providence, until by and by the rest
          of the world is overwhelmed, that it is obliged to bow to their
          superior greatness. "Do you mean that we shall return again to
          our fathers' land, and compel them to be American citizens?" No.
          But to two hundred millions of people on the American continent,
          dignified by the principles of American freedom, Europe must bow,
          by the indirect influence which must necessarily be exercised on
          those despotic nations.
          143
          Suffice it to say the continent is discovered, the elements for
          life and happiness are known to exist, and are partly developed,
          and constitutions and governments formed, and principles
          beginning to be instituted and developed, and influences are at
          work of such magnitude and greatness, that language is inadequate
          to express the probable result; we can only borrow the language
          of the Prophets, which is also insufficient to convey the idea
          properly, that is, The earth shall be full of knowledge, light,
          liberty, brotherly kindness and friendship; none will have need
          to teach his neighbor to know the Lord, but all will know Him
          from the least to the greatest; darkness will flee away,
          oppression will be known no more, and men will employ blacksmiths
          to beat up their old weapons of war into ploughshares and
          pruninghooks. Their occupation will be to develop the
          inexhaustible resources of nature, improve the intellect, and lay
          hold of the Spirit of the Lord, and live by it. The world will be
          renovated both politically and religiously.
          143
          These are but partial ideas. To view the subject in its true
          light, would lead the mind to contemplate all the practical
          truths in the universe, that are within the grasp of mortal man;
          indeed it may reach into immortality. We will acknowledge the
          hand of God in the movements of men, and in the development of
          minds, the result of which will be the fulfillment of what the
          Prophet has spoken--the renovation of our race, and the
          establishment of a universal Kingdom of God, in which His will
          will be done on earth as it is done in heaven.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, July, 1847
                              Brigham Young, July, 1847
                THE PIONEERS--CAPABILITIES AND SETTLEMENT OF THE GREAT
                         BASIN--EXHORTATION TO FAITHFULNESS.
          A speech delivered by President Brigham Young in the Tabernacle,
            Great Salt Lake City, 1852, at the anniversary of the 24th of
                                     July, 1847.
          144
          I wish to make a few remarks only to this congregation, as the
          time allotted to us this morning, is far spent. The remarks which
          have been made previous to my rising are very good, as they are
          also true. They are things not fresh to the majority of this
          assembly, though there may be some present who are perhaps
          ignorant of them.
          144
          Suffice it to say, that five years ago this day, the Pioneers
          approached this valley, with their implements of husbandry, &c.,
          which were represented by them in the procession to-day. We came
          for the purpose of finding a place to set our feet, where we
          could dwell in peace. That place we have found. If the Saints
          cannot enjoy that peace which is so dear to them here, I would
          say that I am ignorant of the spot on the earth where they can.
          Where could a place have been found where we might enjoy freedom
          of thought, freedom of speech, and freedom of worship? If not in
          these mountains, I am ignorant of the place.
          144
          We have enjoyed perfect peace here for five years; and I trust we
          shall for many years to come. If the Saints are persecuted, it is
          for their good; if they are driven, it is for their good;
          consequently, when I reflect, I have nothing to fear in all the
          persecutions or hardships I may pass through in connection with
          this people, but the one thing, and that is, to stray from the
          religion I have embraced, and be forsaken of my God. If you or I
          should see that day, we shall see at once that the world will
          love its own; and affliction, persecutions, death, fire, and the
          sword, will cease to follow us.
          144
          If the Latter-day Saints magnify their calling, walk humbly
          before their God, do the things that are pleasing to their Father
          in heaven, and walk up to their duty in every respect, I am bold
          to say that not five years only, but scores of years, will pass
          away without the Saints ever being interrupted, or driven again
          from their possessions: thus far it is for our good.
          145
          I did not rise for the purpose of delivering an oration on this
          occasion, but to remind you of the blessings we now are
          privileged to enjoy. When we first approached this valley, there
          was not a man upon the face of the earth who ever had beheld
          these valleys of the mountains, or knew anything of the Great
          Basin, who knew that corn, or any other kind of grain could be
          raised here. Can you find the man who had any knowledge of the
          Great Basin, as it is called, that believed there could be an ear
          of corn ripened in it? There is not that man on the earth, when
          you have excepted the people called the Latter-day Saints. We
          came here and planted our garden-seeds of various kinds, five
          years ago this day; they grew, but they did not ripen, though the
          buck-wheat would have ripened, perhaps, had it been properly
          taken care of; some other grains also would have come to
          maturity, so as to have assisted a small colony to live here;
          they, however, lived; how? Shall I say by faith? Yes, partially
          so; for had they not had faith, they certainly never would have
          come to this place: it is the faith of the Latter-day Saints that
          brought them here.
          145
          There is a very mysterious principle that abides with this
          people; it is a mystery, and one of the greatest mysteries to the
          inhabitants of the earth that have been made acquainted by
          history, or by personal knowledge, with this people. And what
          makes it more singular, say they, by all our calculations we
          cannot conceive of it; it is so mysterious that it absolutely
          amounts to a miracle. What is this great mystery? It is that
          these Latter-day Saints are of one heart, and of one mind.
          145
          To Saint and sinner, believer and unbeliever, I wish here to
          offer one word of advice and counsel, by revealing the mystery
          that abides with this people called Latter-day Saints; it is the
          Spirit of the living God that leads them; it is the Spirit of the
          Almighty that binds them together; it is the influence of the
          Holy Ghost that makes them love each other like little children;
          it is the spirit of Jesus Christ that makes them willing to lay
          down their lives for the cause of Truth; and it was that same
          Spirit that caused Joseph our martyred Prophet to lay down his
          life for the testimony of what the Lord revealed to him. This
          mystery, the great mystery of "Mormonism," is, that the Spirit of
          the Lord binds the hearts of the people together. Let the world
          look at it. This I say by way of exhortation, if you please. Let
          the inhabitants of the earth gaze upon this people, this wondrous
          people, for a magic power attends them; something mysterious
          hangs around them. What is it? It is not magnetism; it is
          something more wonderful; those that are present this day may
          truly say it is wonderful in the extreme. Who gives me power,
          that "at the pointing of my finger," the hosts of Israel move,
          and at my request the inhabitants of this great Territory are
          displaced; at my command they are here? Who gives me that power?
          Let the world inquire. It is the God of heaven; it is the Spirit
          of the Holy Gospel; it is not of myself; it is the Lord Jesus
          Christ, trying to save the inhabitants of the earth.
          146
          The people are here; they endure. Did they bring their bread with
          them? No. Did they bring their meat with them? No. Did they bring
          that that sustained them until they raised it from the earth?
          They could not do it, for they were obliged to bring tools,
          ploughs, drag-chains, &c.; they were obliged to bring their wives
          and children in their wagons; five, and six, and eight, and in
          some wagons ten, people would get huddled together, to drive a
          thousand miles from all sustenance, and there plant themselves in
          the wilderness, where nothing met the eye but snowy peaks, and
          parched vales; and trust in the God of Israel to sustain them.
          Let the world ask the question--would the Methodists thus run the
          hazard of losing their lives for their religion? Would the
          Presbyterians, the Baptists, the Quakers, or their old mother,
          the Roman Catholic church, run the same risk? Would she venture
          thus in the wilderness? No. It is not very common to find a whole
          people on the earth, as in the case of the Latter-day Saints, who
          would do it; though single individuals might be found so
          enthusiastic as to sacrifice their lives, and run into a lion's
          den, in proof of their faith in their religion. But where are the
          tens of thousands, and the scores of thousands, and the hundreds
          of thousands, who would lay down every principle of life and
          happiness, and everything that is desirable, pertaining to this
          world, for the principles of eternal life; and would go forth
          into the wilderness, having no other stay but the hand of God to
          lead them? They are not to be found!
          146
          We meet here and celebrate the day; five years we have been in
          this valley; and I will say to the new comers, our brethren, or
          those who are not our brethren, three years ago last October, the
          first house was reared in this place. There was not a rod of
          fence, nor a house, except the old fort, and a little log cabin.
          Here we are now, spread out from the east to the west, measurably
          so, but more extensively to the north and south. Travel through
          the valleys, and scan the houses, and the farms, and see the
          improvements that have been made; take the back track of the
          "Mormons;" follow them from here to Nauvoo; from Nauvoo to Far
          West; then to Kirtland; and back to Missouri again to Jackson
          county; and all people will acknowledge that the "Mormons" have
          had enough to do to mind their own business, and make the
          improvements that have been performed by them! they have done
          nothing but mind their own business. Look at the improvements
          that have followed this people, in all their travels up to this
          place, for a testimony of their endurance, and unflinching
          industry.
          146
          I say to this community, be humble, be faithful to your God, true
          to His Church, benevolent to the strangers that may pass through
          our territory, and kind to all people; serving the Lord with all
          your might, trusting in him; but never fear the frowns of an
          enemy, nor be moved by the flatteries of friends or of enemies
          from the path of right. Serve your God; believe in Him, and never
          be ashamed of Him, and sustain your character before Him, for
          very soon we will meet in a larger congregation than this, and
          have a celebration far superior; we will celebrate our perfect
          and absolute deliverance from the power of the devil; we only
          celebrate now our deliverance from the good brick houses we have
          left, from our farms and lands, and from the graves of our
          fathers; we celebrate our perfect deliverance from these.
          146
          Our lives have been spared, and we are yet upon this planet; and
          by and by we will celebrate a perfect deliverance from all the
          powers of earth; and we will keep our eyes set upon the mark, and
          go forward to victory.
          146
          I say to the aged, to the middle-aged, and to the young--all be
          true to your God, true to your brethren, and kind to all, serving
          God with all your heart. And may He bless you for Jesus' sake.
          Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / John
          Taylor, June 12, 1853
                             John Taylor, June 12, 1853
            MOTIVES AND FEELINGS OF THE SAINTS--EXPERIENCE NECESSARY--THE
                                      STATE OF
            THE WORLD--INFIDELS--RELIGIONS AND THE WORKS OF MEN, AND THE
                                      RELIGION
                       AND WORKS OF GOD--TRUTH AND SALVATION.
           A discourse delivered by Elder John Taylor, in the Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, June 12, 1853.
          147
          In rising to address you this morning, I do it with feelings of
          peculiar pleasure, for I always love to meet with the Saints of
          the Most High; I always loved to speak or to hear of the things
          associated with the kingdom of God; and consequently, as we are
          all engaged in the worship of the Almighty, and meet together
          from time to time, to sing, to pray, to speak, to edify, and be
          edified, it is of little importance to me what part I take in the
          drama, I am pleased at all times to hear my brethren speak, and
          it likewise gives me pleasure to address the Saints for their
          edification.
          147
          As men and women of intelligence, as those who profess to be the
          servants of the Most High, we all have more or less reflection
          pertaining to the kingdom of God. The ideas that we have
          entertained, relative to this kingdom, have brought us here;
          these feelings and principles have caused us to leave our native
          homes, our former habitations and associations, and to mingle
          with the Saints of the Most High in the valleys of these
          mountains. If we have suffered afflictions and privations, if we
          have passed through troubles or sorrows, if we have had to do
          with the chequered scenes of this life, more particularly as it
          is associated with the kingdom of God, it is because we have been
          stimulated by thoughts, feelings, hopes, and desires, pertaining
          to the eternal world, and those things associated with our
          everlasting welfare.
          148
          If these are not our feelings, what are we doing here? Why are we
          found in this distant land? Why have we left the land of our
          birth, and dwelling place? Why have we quitted our former
          associations and friends, in different nations, countries,
          tongues, and peoples, and thus become amalgamated? Why do we
          together worship the Most High in the valleys of the mountains,
          if these have not been our feelings? We have come here expressly
          for this purpose. This has been our only object, our only hope,
          our chief desire, and may account for our singular gathering, and
          our peculiar location here. And notwithstanding we may have a few
          trials and difficulties, and various things that frequently
          perplex and annoy our minds, and disturb our feelings, yet the
          polar star of our minds, the strong and deep feeling of
          affection, and the principle of truth within us, still point to
          the same thing for which we started at the commencement of our
          career; and when we bow down before our God, when we enter into
          our closet and call upon the Lord, when associated with our
          families to supplicate the Most High, when we mingle with the
          Saints in public worship, or whenever we are led seriously to
          reflect upon the true position of this kingdom, our rejoicing is,
          that our face is Zion ward, that our hopes are placed upon God,
          and we know that He is our Father and Friend. We contemplate with
          joy that the heavens have been opened, that truth has been
          revealed, and the power of God developed; that angels have
          manifested themselves, that the glory of the eternal world has
          been made known, and that we have been made participators in that
          light, glory, and intelligence which God has been pleased to
          reveal for the blessing, salvation, and exaltation of the human
          family in this time and throughout all eternity. These are our
          feelings.
          148
          We believe that God has set His hand in these last days to
          accomplish His purposes, to gather together His elect from the
          four winds, even to fulfill the words which He has spoken by all
          the holy Prophets, to redeem the earth from the power of the
          curse, to save the human family from the ruins of the fall, and
          to place mankind in that position which God designed them to
          occupy before this world came into existence, or the morning
          stars sang together for joy. We believe in and realise these
          things; we feel them, we appreciate them, and therefore are we
          thus assembled together.
          148
          I know that, as other men, we have our trials, afflictions,
          sorrows, and privations; we meet with difficulties; we have to
          contend with the world, with the powers of darkness, with the
          corruptions of men, and a variety of evils; yet at the same time
          through these things we have to be made perfect. It is necessary
          that we should have a knowledge of ourselves, of our true
          position and standing before God, and comprehend our strength,
          our weakness, our ignorance and intelligence, our wisdom and our
          folly, that we may know how to appreciate true principles, and
          comprehend, and put a proper value upon, all things as they
          present themselves before our minds. It is necessary that we
          should know our own weaknesses, and the weaknesses of our
          fellow-men; our own strength, as well as the strength of others;
          and comprehend our true position before God, angels, and men;
          that we may be inclined to treat all with due respect, and not to
          over-value our own wisdom or strength, nor depreciate it, nor
          that of others, but put our trust in the living God, and follow
          after Him, and realise that we are His children, and that He is
          our Father, and that our dependence is upon Him, and that every
          blessing we receive flows from His beneficent hand.
          148
          It is necessary, then, that we pass through the school of
          suffering, trial, affliction, and privation, to know ourselves,
          to know others, and to know our God. Therefore it was necessary,
          when the Saviour was upon the earth, that he should be tempted in
          all points, like unto us, and "be touched with the feeling of our
          infirmities," to comprehend the weaknesses and strength, the
          perfections and imperfections of poor fallen human nature. And
          having accomplished the thing he came into the world to do;
          having had to grapple with the hypocrisy, corruption, weakness,
          and imbecility of man; having met with temptation and trial in
          all its various forms, and overcome, he has become a "faithful
          High Priest" to intercede for us in the everlasting kingdom of
          His Father. He knows how to estimate and put a proper value upon
          human nature, for he having been placed in the same position as
          we are, knows how to bear with our weaknesses and infirmities,
          and can fully comprehend the depth, power, and strength of the
          afflictions and trials that men have to cope with in this world,
          and thus understandingly and by experience, he can bear with them
          as a father and an elder brother.
          149
          It is necessary, also, inasmuch as we profess that we are aiming
          at the same glory, exaltation, power, and blessings in the
          eternal world, that we should pass through the same afflictions,
          endure the same privations, conquer as he conquered, and overcome
          as he did, and thus by integrity, truth, virtue, purity, and a
          high-minded and honorable course before God, angels, and men
          secure for ourselves an eternal exaltation in the eternal world,
          as he did.
          149
          The world, at the present time, is all confused, and it seems to
          me, sometimes, that even we have made very little improvement
          indeed, according to the light and intelligence God has
          communicated to us. But what has the world done? Whether you look
          at it morally, religiously, philosophically, or politically, or
          in what way you please, you will find it is all a chaotic mass.
          Confusion, disorder, weakness, corruption, and vice of every kind
          are abounding, and the whole world seems to be confused and
          retrograding. The human family have departed from the principles
          which God has laid down for their guidance, direction, and
          support; they have forsaken Him the fountain of living waters,
          and hewn out to themselves cisterns, broken cisterns, that can
          hold no water.
          150
          I shall not, at the present, examine particularly their
          philosophy or politics; these things you are already acquainted
          with, for you have had more or less to do with them; you have
          seen their weakness, and incompetency to accomplish anything they
          desired in times past. There is no project they have put on foot,
          to the present time, if carried out to the furthest extent,
          according to the most sanguine desires of its advocates, that
          would be capable of producing happiness to the human family. I
          shall not enter into a detail of these things at the present, but
          merely make this statement. Suffice it to say that we have been
          satisfied of these things years ago, and therefore have come
          here. Have we come here because we expect to become more rich?
          No. Have we united with this Church because we expect to become
          more honorable in the eyes of the world? No. I think this work
          would have been the last ship we should have boarded, if that had
          been what we sought. This reminds me of a minister that I once
          conversed with in England. He wanted a little private
          conversation, after having had some public debate with me. Said
          he, "Elder Taylor, is there any way you know of that I can be
          saved without uniting with your Church?" These were the feeling
          most of us had when we first heard the Gospel. "Mormonism" is the
          first impression, and the " Mormons" are looked upon as being
          deluded fanatics and fools, the offscouring of the earth. This is
          the way we have been looked upon, and in this light we looked
          upon "Mormonism," ourselves, at the first. When I first read
          about the Gospel preached by the Latter-day Saints, I thought it
          was nothing akin to religion; and I presume now that the people
          in England, and in the United States, particularly since they
          have heard some of the late doctrines which have been proclaimed,
          think it is nothing like religion. I know what their feelings
          are, and I know that nothing but a sterling desire to do the will
          of God will cause men to endure the contumely and reproach of
          their fellow men, and associate themselves with the people
          denominated Latter-day Saints or "Mormons." We had similar
          feelings to these ourselves; and we united with this people
          because we considered there was truth associated with their
          religion, otherwise we never should have become converts to it,
          we should never have been here, but we should have been with the
          world, and following in their path. But we are here; the world
          have their ideas, and we have ours. I was going to say, they
          think they are right; but on reflecting a moment, I am led to
          think they do not think so, but they are at a loss to know how to
          mend themselves. The difference between them and us is, they
          think they do not know a better way than that they are pursuing;
          we think we do, and some of us know we do. I confess, myself,
          that if I knew no other religion, than the religions that are
          propagated abroad, I would not be a religious man at all, but I
          would lay it all aside, as something beneath my notice, and
          worship God as the great Supreme of the Universe, according to my
          own judgment, independent of the opinions of man, and without
          having any regard to the ridiculous dogmas taught in the world.
          150
          Many find fault with and blame the infidel community, and say
          that none but scoundrels would be associated with them, &c. The
          most intelligent men in the world are found among the Infidel
          class of society. They see a variety of sects and parties
          contending for all kinds of conflicting dogmas. They know that
          persecution and wrong have prevailed, under the cloak of
          religion, causing many to be imprisoned and put to death. In fact
          there has been no inhumanity, barbarity, or cruelty equal to that
          practised by the professors of religion. Humanity shudders at the
          thought, and yet the hypocrites tell us, it is all for the love
          of God. And they do it for the benefit of the human family. The
          Catholics have killed Protestants by thousands, and vice versa,
          and yet we must believe it is for the love of God, and for the
          welfare of souls. Can I think that God has any thing to do with
          influencing such a course of conduct? No. What can there be more
          ridiculous, for instance, at the present day, than two Christian
          nations fighting with each other, and both worshipping the same
          God, and whose ministers call upon God, as they say, in
          sincerity. What for? For God to destroy their enemies, their
          brother Christians, who are going to the same heaven. The other
          party pray for the same thing, and when both have been praying,
          then comes the clang of arms, the deadly strife, the groans of
          the dying, blood, carnage, and desolation. And after they have
          got through, the victorious party thank God that He has given
          them the victory over their enemies.
          150
          These kinds of christian feelings do exist. I speak of this as
          one circumstance. What can I think of such priests, and of such
          prayers? I think just as much of the one as I do of the other.
          But what would you think of the gullibility of the people who
          would listen to such things? Would I be gulled by such
          inconsistencies? Not if I had my reason. At the present time,
          take Christians in general, which, you know, we all suppose to be
          the best people in the world, and one half of their time is spent
          in polemical essays and strife; and I think sometimes our Elders
          engage too much in that matter. But I am not surprised at it,
          because they have come from that school, and have been trained in
          that element. They seem to have the bump of combativeness well
          developed, for almost the very first thing that men do when they
          go out to preach, is to run against these Christians, and their
          principles. We are not among them here, but gathered out from
          them, and if we refer to their inconsistencies, it is that we may
          comprehend our own, and the position of others.
          151
          There are Catholicism, Presbyterianism, and all other isms, the
          advocates of which worship the same God, though their doctrine,
          precepts, and belief are not the same; they think differently,
          and worship differently, and each party sends to hell, in a
          wholesale manner, all who differ from them! and if God was no
          more merciful than they are, we should find ourselves all there
          together. This is the way things exist down in the world. If it
          was not for the religion I profess, which gives me to know
          something about the matter, by revelation for myself, I would not
          have anything to do with religion at all. I would worship God the
          best way I knew how, and act justly and honorably with my
          neighbor; which I believe thousands of that class of men called
          Infidels do at the present day. But I never would submit to be
          gulled with the nonsense that exists in the world, under the name
          of religion.
          151
          What is it, then, that we believe in? We believe in the
          restoration of all things. We believe that God has spoken from
          the heavens. If I did not believe He had, I would not be here. We
          believe that angels have appeared, that the heavens have been
          opened. We believe in eternal principles, in an eternal Gospel,
          an eternal Priesthood, in eternal communications and
          associations. Every thing associated with the Gospel that we
          believe in is eternal. If it were not so, I would want nothing to
          do with it. I do not want to make a profession, and worship a God
          because this one, that one, or the other one does it, and I not
          know whether I am right, and those whom I imitate not know, any
          more than myself, whether they are right or wrong.
          151
          I profess to know for myself, and if I did not know for myself, I
          would have nothing to do with it. Acting upon this principle, I
          associated myself with the Latter-day Saints. I preach that
          doctrine which I verily believe with my whole soul. I believe in
          its principles, because there is something intelligent about it.
          For instance--if I am an eternal being, I want something that is
          calculated to satisfy the capacious desires of that eternal mind.
          If I am a being that came into the world yesterday, and leaves it
          again to-morrow, I might as well have one religion as another, or
          none at all; "let us eat and drink; for to-morrow we die." If I
          am an eternal being, I want to know something about that eternity
          with which I am associated. I want to know something about God,
          the devil, heaven, and hell. If hell is a place of misery, and
          heaven a place of happiness, I want to know how to escape the
          one, and obtain the other. If I cannot know something about these
          things which are to come in the eternal world, I have no
          religion, I would not have any, I would not give a straw for it.
          It would be too low and grovelling a consideration for a man of
          intelligence, in the absence of this knowledge. If there is a
          God, I want a religion that supplies some means of certain and
          tangible communication with Him. If there is a heaven, I want to
          know what sort of a place it is. If there are angels, I want to
          know their nature, and their occupation, and of what they are
          composed. If I am an eternal being, I want to know what I am to
          do when I get through with time; whether I shall plant corn and
          hoe it, or be engaged in some other employment. I do not want any
          person to tell me about a heaven that is "beyond the bounds of
          time and space," a place that no person can possibly know any
          thing about, or ever reach, if they did. I do not wish any person
          to frighten me nearly to death, by telling me about a hell where
          sinners are roasted upon gridirons, and tossed up by devils upon
          pitchforks, and other sharp pointed instruments. These notions
          are traditionary, and have come from the old mother church.
          152
          I have a Catholic book containing pictures of devils roasting
          sinners on gridirons, tossing them about with pitchforks; of
          snakes and dragons devouring them, &c.; which I have brought with
          me from the old country. The Protestants are indebted to the
          Catholics for all this blessed information, and all the glory
          associated with it, and I suppose the Catholics are indebted to
          some of the ancient painters for it. I want nothing to do with
          such things, I care nothing about them. But as an intelligent
          being, if I have a mind capable of reflection, I wish to
          contemplate the works of nature, and to know something of
          nature's God, and my destiny. I love to view the things around
          me; to gaze upon the sun, moon, and stars; to study the planetary
          system, and the world we inhabit; to behold their beauty, order,
          harmony, and the operations of existence around me. I can see
          something more than that mean jargon, those childish quibbles,
          this heaven beyond the bounds of time and space, where they have
          nothing to do but sit and sing themselves away to everlasting
          bliss, or go and roast on gridirons. There is nothing like that
          to be found in nature--every thing is beautifully harmonious, and
          perfectly adapted to the position it occupies in the world.
          Whether you look at birds, beasts, or the human system, you see
          something exquisitely beautiful and harmonious, and worthy of the
          contemplation of all intelligence. What is man's wisdom in
          comparison to it? I could not help but believe there was a God,
          if there was no such thing as religion in the world.
          152
          If we look at men, with the best and most exalted talents you can
          find, what do they know or comprehend, or what can they do in
          comparison to the works of God. What is there that is worthy of
          notice in all the mechanism of men, with all their intelligence
          and science combined, upon which they have been improving from
          year to year, and from generation to generation? What do they
          know to the present time? If you look at their governments you
          see none of them pursuing their legitimate object of promoting
          the happiness of the world, but they are engaged in watching each
          other for evil, and destroying themselves. They have organized
          armies, navies, custom-house officers, &c., in order to support
          their own peculiar locality and interests, independent of any
          thing else, or any regard to the rest of mankind. They look upon
          each other as upon as many thieves, and maintain their armies and
          navies for self defence against the intrusions of their
          neighboring brother robbers.
          152
          Such is the nature of the main organization of the nations at the
          present time. But if we look back for a few ages, we shall
          discover that where the most mighty nations existed generations
          ago, is now a desolate waste, and a howling wilderness. We are
          now occupying a place that was a wilderness, before we commenced
          to people it, but which was densely populated generations ago.
          Such is the case, in a great measure, with Palestine, Babylon,
          and many parts of the Assyrian empire. Changes have been going on
          continually, and the ambition of man has desolated nations,
          overturned kingdoms, depopulated empires, overthrown countries,
          and millions have had to welter in their gore. This has been the
          wisdom of Gentile governments, with all their intelligence and
          philosophy.
          153
          We look again at the works of God, and see nothing exhibited
          there but perfection, harmony, symmetry, and order. If we look at
          the planetary system, we see this principle beautifully and most
          perfectly maintained. Immense planets revolve round our sun, and
          this system; and other suns, with their systems, round another;
          and that, and innumerable other suns and systems, with our own,
          around another yet greater and more magnificent; and so, millions
          of systems more in their order, until it is past our
          comprehension, and yet every thing is beautiful, perfect, and
          harmonious. If it was otherwise, if the kingdoms of God were
          governed by the same confused order of things that are
          characteristic of the governments of this world, we would have
          had planet dashing against planet in wild confusion, and millions
          of their inhabitants sent to desolation in a moment.
          153
          God's works are perfect. If you examine vegetation, how beautiful
          that is. Who is there that can imitate it? We can see some
          painters who have managed to make rough daubs in imitation. One
          of the greatest feats that a painter ever did, was to paint a
          curtain so perfectly as to deceive another painter so, that he
          went forward to draw it aside to exhibit a picture behind it.
          There are millions of curtains in the works of nature, which
          spring forth from the works of God by that light which is in
          them, which is imparted to them by the great Eloheim.
          153
          We see men who are considered very talented, whose names are
          handed down to posterity as great sculptors or painters. Their
          works are among the ancient ruins, and are exhibited as specimens
          of artistic skill, that men may see how intelligent their
          forefathers were. And what is it which they had wisdom to make?
          Something like a man, or a beast. But break off an arm or a leg,
          and you discover that it is but a lifeless piece of matter,
          though the outlines may be true to nature; and in this alone
          consist the beauty and skill of the artist. But there is no life
          in them, and they fall far short of perfection, beauty, and
          symmetry, as it is seen in the human system, or that of any other
          animal. Look upon a man, he is a perfect being, he is perfect
          inside and outside. If you remove the skin, the perfect covering
          of the human form, the nerves, muscles, arteries, veins, and
          everything necessary for this peculiar system, are there found in
          perfect harmony, and in every way adapted to make complete a
          living, moving machine. Not only so, but he is an intelligent
          being, capable of reflecting and acting. We profess to know a
          great deal, but what of our philosophy? Who is there can tell me
          by what power I lift my right arm? If that cannot be told, what
          do we know? How far short, then, are we that intelligence that
          governs the universe, and regulates all the works of nature. I
          look at the bones of the mammoth, and they tell me of something
          that was. I can gaze upon an elephant, as it now is, a mighty,
          ponderous moving machine, with strength and energy. Who planned
          and contrived these mighty beings? I look again at the
          animalcula, a thousand of which can float in a drop of water, and
          I see, by means of a powerful glass, the veins, muscles, and
          every thing that is perfect to constitute a living, moving
          creature, invisible to the naked eye. He who organized the one,
          regulates the other. Man is an intelligent being, but how far
          does his intelligence fall short of that which regulates the
          world! He cannot even govern himself, he never was able to do it,
          and never will be able until he receives that wisdom and
          intelligence which comes from God. If every man can obtain
          intelligence of that kind, and from that source, which governs
          the world, and keeps in order all the planetary systems, and
          adapts every fish, fowl, and insect to its own peculiar position
          in the world, and supplies all its wants; if he can receive it
          from God, as his instructor, he is then able to govern himself,
          possessing intelligence which he now knows nothing about; and
          intelligence which indeed is worthy of God and man. If I cannot
          have a portion of that intelligence and that wisdom, if the great
          Eloheim cannot impart a portion of that spirit to me, and teach
          me the same lessons that He understands, I want nothing to do
          with a system of theology at all.
          154
          I believe in obtaining from Him, intelligence to enable me to
          comprehend all the works of God, to comprehend all the purposes
          of God. And if I cannot know something of these, I am altogether
          in the back-ground, and shall not be able to comprehend my true
          position in society, and for what I came into the world.
          154
          What are we? We are noble, intelligent beings, bearing the
          impress of Jehovah. With all our imperfections, we can reflect
          upon things back, and things to come. Our minds are capable of
          flying from one part of the earth to the other, in less than a
          moment of time. We can contemplate things we did in the years of
          our infancy, and thousands of miles distant from our present
          position; and in another moment contemplate things that are ahead
          of us. That is a degree of wisdom and intelligence which God has
          imparted unto us, and which we may improve as intelligent beings,
          and, having tasted of the fountain, go and drink, and participate
          more fully in all those blessings which are in store for us.
          154
          I have often been amused at the narrow contracted ideas of men,
          when I have looked abroad in the world, and seen their
          cogitations and calculations in their writings. One man believes
          in justification by faith, another in justification by works.
          Some believe in one thing, and some in another; all have their
          own peculiar ideas, unguided and ungoverned by the only
          legitimate rule and standard of truth--the living and eternal
          Priesthood of God. Few can extend their charity sufficiently for
          to believe it is possible that some will be saved as well as
          themselves; but that some few thousands of people are going to
          heaven, and all the rest, to hell, is the prevailing belief; and
          if a few, besides these "elect," reach heaven, they think it will
          be a hard chance. The Protestants believe the Catholics are all
          in error, and pack the whole church off to hell as the mother of
          harlots, without any trouble, or without even a sigh. And the old
          mother is just as uncharitable towards her daughters, for they
          are her offspring, and she sends the whole of them
          unceremoniously to the same place. The Catholics and Protestants
          are generally united in sending all the Mahometans and Heathens
          there. It would be something like it was with me once, when I was
          discussing with a minister on the principles of "Mormonism."
          Before I got through with him, he nearly destroyed and cast away
          the whole of the Bible, in his zeal to destroy our faith. He
          threw away one book after another, until but a small portion
          remained. So it is with the religious world generally; each one
          packs off his neighbor to hell; and after such narrow minds have
          made their selections of the worthy ones, and put them right, as
          they think, few besides will get to heaven.
          154
          Others will take every body to heaven, no matter who or what they
          are. I think the latter idea is as ridiculous as the former,
          although there is something more pleasing in the last idea, I
          must confess, than in the other. The only thing I would hate in
          it, is being associated with a multitude of cut-throats and
          blacklegs there. For instance--the old world was cut off through
          their wickedness and corruption. I could not think it right of
          the Lord to take all those wicked fellows straight to heaven,
          because they were wicked and unworthy, and leave Noah and his
          family to combat with the troubles of earth because they were
          righteous. But such are the ideas of men; while some are all
          charity, others have none at all. I have sometimes thought that
          we "Mormons" are almost as uncharitable as others.
          155
          I believe God has a great design in view, in the creation of the
          human family. I do not believe that an all-wise Being would ever
          make a beautiful earth like this, and people it with man, and a
          multiplicity of other kinds of beings designed to exist upon it,
          and all for no purpose. I do not believe that 350,000,000 of
          people that live in China in a state of heathen darkness are
          created to live in this state, and be damned because they have
          not the right religion. I do not believe that all the nations
          that worship various kinds of idols, in different parts of the
          earth, and know nothing about the true God, will be consigned to
          be burned in fire hereafter, because they know no better than
          worship as they do. I cannot receive any such ideas into my mind.
          Although I was going to say I am not a Universalist, but I am,
          and I am also a Presbyterian, and a Roman Catholic, and a
          Methodist, in short, I believe in every true principle that is
          imbibed by any person or sect, and reject the false. If there is
          any truth in heaven, earth, or hell, I want to embrace it, I care
          not what shape it comes in to me, who brings it, or who believes
          in it, whether it is popular or unpopular. Truth, eternal truth,
          I wish to float in and enjoy.
          155
          Now I come to us, "Mormons." We are the only true Church, so we
          say. We have got the only true faith, so we say and believe. I
          believe we have got many great and true principles revealed from
          the heavens. I will tell you how I feel about it, and what I have
          said many times when I have been abroad among the priests,
          people, and philosophers. If any man under the heavens can show
          me one principle of error that I have entertained, I will lay it
          aside forthwith, and be thankful for the information. On the
          other hand if any man has got any principle of truth, whether
          moral, religious, philosophical, or of any other kind, that is
          calculated to benefit mankind, I promise him I will embrace it,
          but I will not partake of his errors along with it. If a man
          should say, I am in possession of one piece of truth, and,
          because I have got that, I must be right, am I to believe him?
          Certainly not. It does not follow that he has not many errors.
          155
          The Catholics have many pieces of truth; so have the Protestants,
          the Mahometans, and Heathens; and am I to embrace one of these
          systems because it has got certain things that are right? No.
          Suppose a person should tell me that two multiplied by two makes
          four. Well, that is right. I believe it with all my heart. But
          suppose he believes and teaches also, that six and four make
          twenty, and exhorts me to believe it, saying--I was right in the
          other calculation, did I not prove the other to you? O yes, but
          you did not prove that six and four make twenty. I will take out
          the truth and leave the error.
          155
          Then you believe that we, as "Mormons," have got truth? O yes, I
          do, and for this reason, I have travelled extensively in most of
          the States of the Union, and in Canada; also in England, Ireland,
          and Scotland; in the Isle of Man, Jersey, and other islands of
          the sea; in France, Germany, Belgium, and other parts of the
          earth; and I have not yet seen a man that could find one error in
          doctrine or principle connected with the religion of the
          Latter-day Saints. I do not talk of practice. God knows there is
          too much delinquency among us. I speak of principle. Then if you
          have got a thing that nobody can overturn, but can be sustained
          everywhere; that bids defiance to the wisdom and intelligence of
          the world to find one fault in it, you must say it is right,
          until it is proven to be wrong.
          156
          Can anybody prove to you that two multiplied by two makes six?
          There are certain things which are matters of fact--two
          multiplied by two makes four, and two parallel lines infinitely
          extended will never meet at right angles, but run to eternity.
          These truths demonstrate themselves, no man can alter these
          matters of fact. And if I have got principles which are out of
          the power of man to prove false, I consider they are right, and I
          stand upon them as a sure foundation.
          156
          On the other hand, am I to think it is right, because I am right,
          to send every body else to hell? No, I will leave them in the
          hands of God. He has told me to preach the Gospel to every
          creature, saying, "he that believeth and is baptized shall be
          saved; and he that believeth not shall be damned." He has told me
          to do this. And how many millions of mankind are there who have
          never heard the Gospel? And are they going to be damned for not
          believing in a thing they have not heard, and that never came
          within their range, and that they have not the slightest
          knowledge of? No. What is it we have to do? We must spread forth
          the light of the Gospel. Why? Because God has communicated a
          system of religion which is calculated to ennoble and exalt the
          human family.
          156
          The world is confused, it is in darkness and ignorance, and knows
          nothing about God, His purposes, designs, or the object of His
          creations. God knows how to touch my understanding, and how to
          touch theirs; and if they live and die without a knowledge of
          God, and His law, we are told that they will be judged according
          to the light they have, and not according to that they have not.
          Those that have lived without law, will be judged without law.
          156
          Am I going to weep over the condition of the world? No. God made
          it, and if He suffers millions to dwell upon it in ignorance of
          Him, I have nothing to do with it. All I have to do is, when God
          sends me, to go and teach the people the principles of light,
          intelligence, and truth, so far as I know them, and no further;
          and if they reject them, it is none of my business. In many
          instances, they do it for want of information, and according to
          the government, priestcraft, prejudices, &c., of which they are
          under the dominion. It is difficult for them to comprehend
          correct principles when they hear them, or to know the light when
          they see it shine. The light shineth in darkness, and the
          darkness comprehendeth it not. They understand many things,
          perhaps better than you do, but they do not understand the
          principles of the Gospel as you do, for want of the light of the
          Spirit of God. No man can understand that without the Spirit. A
          great many among the prevailing sects of the day have to some
          considerable extent encompassed sea and land to make proselytes,
          and in the majority of instances where they have been successful,
          they have made them ten fold more the children of hell than they
          were before." They have taught them hypocrisy, and evils of many
          kinds, of which they were ignorant before. They do not understand
          how to propagate true principles, for they do not understand them
          themselves, and how can they teach them to others? But I will
          love them, and let them go.
          157
          We "Mormons" think that we have made a wonderful stretch, for we
          say that all Israel is going to be saved, and we believe we are
          of Israel, and that we shall be gathered into the fold with them.
          And when we are gathered in with all the Israel of God, as we
          call them, that have lived in the various ages of the world up to
          the present time, we with them shall be redeemed and saved in the
          eternal kingdom of God. What else? Then His work will be
          accomplished, you may say. But I do not think it will, though it
          will certainly be a great work. This looks like the time of the
          restoration of all things, but in reality it is only a
          restoration of a few. Why, you may inquire, will you take in
          somebody besides the Israelites? Certainly. We are told they were
          beloved for the fathers' sakes, and in consequence of the
          promises made to the fathers. If they are brought in, it will be
          in consequence of these promises. I wonder if there were no other
          men of faith besides Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, that existed
          previous to their days. And if there were, I want to know if they
          knew anything about God, and obtained promises for their
          offspring. I will go a little further than old Abraham, and say,
          I am glad to see your posterity saved, Abraham, but I think some
          of your descendants prophesied of the time when Ammon would
          stretch out his hands to God, and Moab and Philistia be blessed
          with the same blessing. I think some of your descendants, when
          their minds were enlightened and expanded, looked forward into
          the womb of the future, to a time when there would be a great
          gathering, when people from Hainath, Cush, and from the islands
          of the sea, when different tribes and nations, should flow
          together to the name of the Lord of Hosts. If Abraham knew how to
          obtain promises, I wonder, for instance, if the old man that was
          called Melchizedek, who lived before Abraham, and whom Paul in
          his writings makes a greater man than Abraham, for, says he, "the
          lesser was blessed of the greater"--I wonder if Melchizedek did
          not know also how to obtain promises for his seed? There was an
          old man who lived in the land of Uz, who is said to have been a
          very patient man; notwithstanding he cursed the day he was born,
          and the womb that gave him birth. He surely knew how to obtain
          blessings from God. God came to him, and he obtained blessings
          from God, and could look forward through the dark vista of ages
          and contemplate the purposes of God, and he saw himself not only
          dead and buried, but, said he, "though after my skin worms
          destroy this body, yet in my flesh shall I see God." He had the
          kind of religion I believe in, exactly--a religion that caused
          him to know and understand something of God and His purposes; and
          he acted upon it, and profited by it. Very well, if he knew about
          these things, I want to know whether he will not have some
          promises to claim for himself and descendants by and bye, when
          they are hunted up.
          157
          I will go further back yet; to old Noah, for instance. He was a
          good man, and while the whole earth was destroyed, his life was
          preserved, and his posterity with him. He was a man of God. I
          want to know if he could also obtain blessings for his posterity,
          and whether he will feel after them some time or other, and if
          the time will come round that they may partake of the covenants
          and blessings of God, and stand in their proper place, and not be
          consigned to all eternity in this dreadful hell. I think he would
          not like to see his posterity there, more than Abraham would like
          to see his. All the men have their interest to feel after their
          posterity, and all desire to see them brought forth.
          157
          "But," says one, "they are fallen creatures." And so are the
          Israelites. Where will you find a more corrupt set than the
          descendants of Ephraim, so far fallen and so debased a set as the
          Indians that dwell in these mountains, and that roam wildly over
          the broad prairies of this country? Their fathers have got to do
          something for them, to bring them forth to inherit the promises.
          It is for Abraham to feel after his seed, and be interested in
          their welfare.
          158
          We will go back to old Adam, and see him coming on the earth, as
          he is the head and father of us all. Well, now I want to know if
          the old gentleman would like to see his children packed off by
          nations into a place of torment, millions and millions turned off
          into the Catholic hell, to roast there to all eternity. I think
          he has fatherly feeling to his numerous offspring, and would
          desire, and seek earnestly to have them saved, to have them
          redeemed from their fallen and degraded condition. For they are
          no worse fallen, no more degraded and corrupt, than the
          Israelites are, and have as much right to be brought forth at the
          proper time, and be blessed, as they have. This is my doctrine,
          and these are my feelings.
          158
          You may go to the head fountain of all, to the God who made Adam,
          and say, O Lord, why did you make the earth, and cause the sun,
          and moon, and stars to be made to give light to it, and man to
          inhabit it, telling him to multiply, and replenish the earth, and
          cause it to bring forth in its strength for man and beast?
          158
          I will go back further, and find the spirits that are existing
          with him in the eternal world. They came here, and obtained
          bodies, that both bodies and spirits might receive an exaltation
          among the Gods, and be capable of eternal increase worlds without
          end. I think this agrees more with philosophy and truth, with an
          intelligent and extensive mind, with true religion, with our
          fathers, and with God, than any thing else we see abroad.
          158
          I see the world of mankind in darkness, and try my best to
          enlighten them as much as possible. If I can do them any good, I
          will do it. God has revealed His truth to us, "Mormons." What to
          do? To make us glory in it, and in nothing but what God gives to
          us; and to teach it to others, that they may be put in possession
          of the same intelligence that we enjoy. What have we to do? To
          spread this Gospel to every nation, kindred, tongue, and people,
          that the Spirit of the Lord may operate upon those who love the
          truth, that they may have an opportunity of embracing it, and of
          participating in the same blessings we enjoy, and forming a
          nucleus whereby a fulness of eternal truth may be developed, and
          angels come again and communicate with the human family, that the
          earth may answer the end of its creation, and that all men who
          ever did or ever will live may answer the end of their creation,
          that men who have fallen from righteousness may suffer for their
          sins and transgressions, and by and bye come forth and enjoy
          their proper lot in the eternal world.
          158
          "O then," say you, "I will do as I please in this world." Very
          well, go and do it. It will prove that you do not live by the
          truth because you love it, but if you follow the truth, you are
          actuated to do so by a dastardly fear of hell. If that is the
          case, I would not give the ashes of a rye straw for ten thousand
          such "Mormons." If a man cannot stand up in the defence of truth,
          to the death, it is not worth having, and he is not a man who is
          acknowledged or considered worthy among the Saints. But such will
          find it is a fearful thing to fall into the hands of the living
          God.
          159
          I will notice an instance for your information, to stir up your
          pure minds, if you have got such minds. I read of many people who
          were destroyed by the flood; and in Jesus Christ's day, we read
          that he was put to death in the flesh, and quickened by the
          Spirit, by which he went to preach to the spirits in prison, who
          had been disobedient in the days of Noah, &c. He preached to
          them, and they came forth out of their confinement. "Well, that
          would be all right," you say. O yes, but I want to know how you
          would like to be shut up in prison, three or four thousand years,
          or even one year. It is said in Scripture, that "it is a fearful
          thing to fall into the hands of the living God." It also says
          that "the wicked shall be turned into hell, with all the nations
          that forget God." Do you believe that? "Certainly I do." I
          remember a minister once asking me a question upon this subject.
          Says he, "Do you believe in eternal punishment?" "O yes, I
          believe the wicked will be turned into hell, with all the nations
          that forget God." "Do you believe they will stay there?" "O no."
          "Why do you not?" "Because it is not according to Scripture."
          "But if they all be turned into hell, who forget God, and will go
          away into everlasting punishment, will they not stay there
          forever?" "Yes," I said, "they will go into everlasting
          punishment, but they will come out again." "How is that?" "Why
          the Scriptures declare that death and hell will deliver up their
          dead, and the sea deliver up the dead that is in it; and all
          nations will stand before God, to be judged according to the
          deeds done in the body." So you see they have got to come out to
          be judged according to their works, whether they be good or evil.
          Suppose we have a States prison, for instance, in this place, a
          transgressor of the laws of the land is put in for a certain
          time, according to the deeds which he has done, and the evidence
          and circumstances of the case. After he has suffered according to
          law, he is set at liberty, but, mark you, the prison still
          remains, which may be compared to eternal punishment, or God's
          punishment. Who will go there? The wicked, for the punishment of
          their sins, and to teach them a useful lesson. The Scriptures say
          that some will not have forgiveness in this world, nor in the
          world to come, but these we will leave in the hands of God.
          159
          Some people will ask if we think the devil will be saved. You
          must ask him, for I have nothing to say about it. I have gone far
          enough in my remarks. I believe God will accomplish all His
          purposes, and Satan will not have power to frustrate His designs
          in any way whatever; for if he did, he would be more powerful
          than God. Every man will be rewarded according to the deeds done
          in the body. Those who have received pure and heavenly
          principles, and lived up to them, and kept the celestial law of
          God, will enjoy a celestial kingdom. Those who have not attained
          to this perfection, but can obey a terrestrial law, will receive
          a terrestrial glory, and enjoy a terrestrial kingdom, and so on.
          But I believe, furthermore, that there are eternal grades of
          progression, which will continue worlds without end, and to an
          infinity of enjoyment, expansion, glory, progression, and of
          everything calculated to ennoble and exalt mankind.
          159
          This is one of our first estates, or it is our second estate, if
          you please, an we move on from state to state, with a knowledge
          of the true principles of the eternal world revealed to us, which
          principles are eternal--eternal truth, eternal life, eternal
          intelligence, leading us on to the possession of celestial
          kingdoms of God. From intelligence to intelligence, from glory to
          glory, from power to power we proceed onward, until we possess
          thrones, and powers, and dominions in the eternal worlds. And I
          pray God to give us power to obtain all these things in the name
          of Jesus Christ. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Heber
          C. Kimball, October 9, 1852
                          Heber C. Kimball, October 9, 1852
                  MATERIALS FOR THE TEMPLE--THE CLAY AND THE POTTER
             An address delivered by President Heber C. Kimball, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
          Great Salt Lake City, October 9, 1852, at the General Conference.
          160
          The subject President Young wished me to speak of is in regard to
          our temple, which we shall soon commence to build--what course we
          shall take, and what kind of materials it shall be built of;
          whether we shall build it of the stone that is got in the Red
          Bute Kanyon, or of adobies, or of the best stone we can find in
          these mountains. For instance--at Sanpete there is some splendid
          stone; and inasmuch as we intend to build a house unto the Lord
          for Him to accept, for His angels to come to as ministers to give
          instructions, I can feel, myself, as though we are perfectly able
          to build one, of the best kind of materials, from the foundation
          to the tip top. We are able, and we have strength and union, and
          we have bone, and marrow, and muscle, and we are able to commence
          it next year.
          160
          I merely present these things for the brethren to consider and
          reflect upon. We can go to work and make an adobie house, and lay
          the foundation of stone from Red Bute, and then we can plaster it
          outside, and make it like the Tithing office. I would like to see
          something pretty nice, something noble, and some of the most
          splendid fonts that were ever erected. I know for a certainty
          that our President is perfectly able to give us the design of
          this contemplated house, and all other necessary instructions.
          What we need is to receive those blessings that we all want, and
          this must be felt more, especially by those who have come in this
          present season. These blessings are just as necessary for those
          who go South, as for those who go North, it makes no difference.
          They will all, however, get their blessings, and enjoy their
          privileges in obtaining those things. We have plenty of time, and
          there is no particular hurry, but it is for every man to walk up
          to his duty in the time being, and then when to-morrow comes,
          walk up to it to-morrow, and so let us do all we can, for we have
          got considerable over one thousand years to work, and when we
          have worked one thousand years, there will be another, and
          another, and we shall be at work to all eternity. There is no end
          to our work for the living and for the dead. Let us try and be
          active to do whatever we find to do to-day.
          160
          Let the brethren go and get farms, and locate themselves, and
          raise good fields of grain, that they can bring in the first
          fruits of the earth. This is what is required to be done at the
          present time. Take this course, brethren, and then every thing
          you possess will prosper, and you will be abundantly blessed. It
          is just as necessary to be engaged in one thing, as it is in
          another. It takes many kinds of materials to build a house, so it
          requires all kinds of materials to build another earth like this,
          it requires the same kinds of materials to make one man as it
          takes to make another. But let us try to temper ourselves
          according to the Gospel of Jesus Christ, and the plan of
          salvation.
          161
          We will bring up a few comparisons. Now supposing brother Tanner
          goes into the shop, to make a scythe, and he takes the materials
          necessary for the formation of that scythe, is he dictated to by
          it, as to how he shall mould it and fashion it? Would you have
          the scythe rise up and say--Brother Tanner, what do you do so
          for? Why do you strike me on the back? Well, it is just as
          ridiculous for you to undertake to dictate to President Young, or
          those whom he set to work. It is not for you to dictate to them.
          Upon the same principle, supposing I have a lump of clay which I
          put upon my wheel, out of which clay I want to make a jug; I have
          to turn it into as many as 50 or 100 shapes before I get it into
          a jug. How many shapes do you suppose you are put into before you
          become Saints, or before you become perfect and sanctified to
          enter into the celestial glory of God? You have got to be like
          that clay in the hands of the potter. Do you not know that the
          Lord directed the Prophet anciently, to go down to the potter's
          house to see a miracle on the wheel? Suppose the potter takes a
          lump of clay, and putting it on the wheel, goes to work to form
          it into a vessel, and works it out this way, and that way, and
          the other way, but the clay is refractory and snappish; he still
          trys it, but it will break, and snap, and snarl, and thus the
          potter will work it and work it until he is satisfied he cannot
          bring it into the shape he wants, and it mars upon the wheel; he
          takes his tool, then, and cuts it off the wheel, and throws it
          into the mill to be ground over again, until it becomes passive,
          (don't you think you will go to hell if you are not passive?) and
          after it is ground there so many days, and it becomes passive, he
          takes the same lump, and makes of it a vessel unto honor. Now do
          you see into that, brethren? I know the potters can. I tell you,
          brethren, if you are not passive you will have to go into that
          mill, and perhaps have to grind there one thousand years, and
          then the Gospel will be offered to you again, and then if you
          will not accept of it, and become passive, you will have to go
          into the mill again, and thus you will have offers of salvation
          from time to time, until all the human family, except the sons of
          perdition, are redeemed. The spirits of men will have the Gospel
          as we do, and they are to be judged according to men in the
          flesh. Let us be passive, and take a course that will be
          perfectly submissive.
          162
          What need you care where you go if you go according to direction,
          and when you get to Coal Creek, or Iron County, be subject to
          that man who is placed there to rule you, just the same as you
          would be subject to President Young, if you were here, because
          that man is delegated by this Conference and sanctioned by this
          people, and that man's word is law. And so it is with the
          Bishops; they are our fathers, our governors, and we are their
          household. It is for them to provide for their household, and
          watch over them, and govern and control them; they are potters to
          mould you, and when you are sent forth to the nations of the
          earth, you go to gather the clay, and bring it here to the great
          potter, to be ground and moulded until it becomes passive, and
          then be taken and formed into vessels, according to the dictation
          of the presiding potter. I have to do the work he tells me to do,
          and you have to do the same, and he has to do the work told him
          by the great master potter in heaven and on earth. If brother
          Brigham tells me to do a thing, it is the same as though the Lord
          told me to do it. This is the course for you and every other
          Saint to take, and by your taking this course, I will tell you,
          brethren, you are on the top of the heap. We are in the tops of
          the mountains, and when the stone shall roll down from the
          mountains, it will smash the earth, and break in pieces every
          thing that opposes its course; but the stone has to get up there
          before it can roll down.
          162
          We are here in a happy place, in a goodly land, and among as good
          a people as ever the Lord suffered to dwell upon the face of the
          earth. Have I not a reason to be proud? Yes, I am proud of the
          religion of Christ, I am proud of his Elders, his servants, and
          of his handmaids, and when they do well I am prouder still. I do
          not know but I shall get so proud, that I shall be four or five
          times prouder than I am now.
          162
          I want a vote from the congregation concerning the temple,
          whether we shall have it built of the stone from Red Bute, or of
          adobies, or timber, or of the best quality of stone that can be
          found in the mountains. It is now open for discussion.
          162
          Our temple block is 600 feet square, and according to the number
          of people that compose the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day
          Saints, we are able to build a temple that size, and do it easier
          than we built a temple at Kirtland. I put the motion which is
          before you, that we build a temple of the best materials that can
          be furnished in the mountains of North America, and that the
          Presidency dictate where the stone and other materials shall be
          obtained; and that the Presidency shall be untrammelled from this
          time henceforth and forever. I want every brother, sister, and
          child to vote one way or the other. All in favour of this motion
          raise your right hand. [It was unanimous.]
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, July 31, 1853
                            Brigham Young, July 31, 1853
                               INDIAN HOSTILITIES AND
                  TREACHERY--EXCITEMENT--COVETOUSNESS--CONSEQUENCES
                OF OBEDIENCE AND OF DISOBEDIENCE--POLICY TOWARDS THE
                                   INDIANS--WALKER
                              AND HIS BAND--VIGILANCE.
               An address delivered by President Brigham Young, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, July 31, 1853.
          162
          I wish to say a few words to the Latter-day Saints this morning,
          as there seems to be considerable excitement in the feelings of
          the people, and many inquiring what will be the result of the
          present Indian difficulties.
          162
          I will give you my testimony, as far as I have one on the
          subject, concerning these difficulties in this territory, north
          and south, pertaining to our brethren, the Lamanites. My
          testimony to all is--IT IS RIGHT, and perfectly calculated, like
          all other providences of the Lord, of the like nature, to chasten
          this people until they are willing to take counsel. They will
          purify and sanctify the Saints, and prepare the wicked for their
          doom.
          163
          There has nothing strange and uncommon to man, yet occurred;
          nothing has yet happened out of the ordinary providences of the
          Lord. These common dealings of our great Head with His people
          have been manifested from days of old, in blessings and
          chastisements. Wars, commotions, tumults, strife, nation
          contending against nation, and people against people, have all
          been governed and controlled by Him whose right it is to control
          such matters.
          163
          Among wicked nations, or among Saints, among the ancient
          Israelites, Philistines, and Romans, the hand of the Lord was
          felt; in short, all the powers that have been upon the earth,
          have been dictated, governed, controlled, and the final issue of
          their existence has been brought to pass, according to the wisdom
          of the Almighty. Then my testimony is, IT IS ALL RIGHT.
          163
          There seems to be some excitement among the people and fears are
          arising in the breasts of many, as to the general safety. Some
          person has been shot at by the Indians, or some Indians were seen
          in an hostile condition. And away go messengers to report to head
          quarters, saying, "What shall we do? for we cannot tell, but we
          shall all be killed by them; they have stolen our horses, and
          driven off some cattle, which has created a great excitement in
          our settlement," &c.; when, perhaps, to-morrow, the very Indians
          who have committed these depredations will come and say, "How do
          you do? We are friendly, cannot you give us some Chitcup?" They
          will shake hands, and appear as though it were impossible for
          them to be guilty of another hostility. And what is the next
          move? Why, our wise men, the Elders of Israel, are either so
          fluctuating in their feelings, so unstable in their ways, or so
          ignorant of the Indian character, that the least mark of
          friendship manifested by these treacherous red men, will lull all
          their fears, throw them entirely off their guard, saying, "It is
          all right; wife, take care of the stock, for I am going to the
          kanyon for a load of wood."
          163
          Away he goes without a gun or a pistol to defend himself, in case
          of an attack from some Indian or Indians, to rob him of his
          cattle, and perhaps his life. Herds of cattle are driven upon the
          range, the feelings of the people are divested of all fear by
          this little show of Indian friendship, and their hearts are at
          peace with all mankind. They lie down to sleep at night with the
          doors of their houses open, and in many instances with no way a
          close them if they were willing, only by means of hanging up a
          blanket. Thus they go to sleep with their guns unloaded, and
          entirely without any means of defence, in case they should be
          attacked in the night. On the other hand, they no sooner discover
          an Indian in an hostile attitude, than the hue and cry is "We
          shall all be murdered immediately." That is the kind of
          stability, the kind of unshaken self-command, the style of
          generalship and wisdom manifested by Elders in Israel. To-day all
          are in arms, war is on hand; "we are going to be destroyed, or to
          fight our way through," is in every mouth. To-morrow all is
          peace, and every man turns to his own way, wherever the common
          avocations of life call him. No concern is felt as to protection
          in the future, but "all is right, all is safety, there is no fear
          of any further trouble," is the language of people's thoughts,
          and they lie down to sleep in a false security, to be murdered in
          the night by their enemies, if they are disposed to murder them.
          164
          I can tell you one thing with regard to excitement and war. You
          may take Israel here, as a community, with all their experience,
          and with all they have passed through in the shape of war, and
          difficulties of various kinds, and these wild Indians are
          actually wiser in their generations in the art of war than this
          people are. They lay better plans, display greater skill, and are
          steadier in their feelings. They are not so easily excited, and
          when excited are not so easily allayed, as the men who have come,
          to inhabit these mountains, from where they have been trained and
          educated in the civilization of modern nations. You may not
          believe this assertion; it is, however, no matter whether you do
          or do not, the fact remains unaltered, as well as the conviction
          of my own mind regarding it.
          164
          I have been frequently asked, what is going to be the result of
          these troubles? I answer--the result will be good. What did you
          hear, you who have come to these valleys within the last few
          years, previous to your leaving your native country? You heard
          that all was peace and safety among the Saints in these regions;
          that the earth yielded inner strength, giving an abundance of
          food; and that this was a splendid country to raise stock. Your
          determination was then formed to go up to the Valleys of the
          mountains, where you could enjoy peace and quiet, and follow the
          avocations of life, undisturbed. When the people arrive here,
          many of them come to me and say, "Brother Brigham, can we go
          here, or there, to get us farms? Shall we enter into this or that
          speculation? We have been very poor, and we want to make some
          money, or we want the privilege of taking with us a few families
          to make a settlement in this or that distant valley." If I
          inquire, why they cannot stay here, their answer is, "because
          there is no room, the land is chiefly taken up, and we have a
          considerable stock of cattle, we want to go where we can have
          plenty of range for our stock, where we can mount our horses, and
          ride over the prairies, and say, I am Lord of all I survey. We do
          not wish to be disturbed, in any way, nor to be asked to pay
          tithing, to work upon the roads, nor pay territorial tax, but we
          wish all the time to ourselves, to appropriate to our own use. I
          want you, brother Brigham, to give us counsel that we can get the
          whole world in a string after us, and have it all in our own
          possession, by and bye." If there is light enough in Israel, let
          it shine in your consciences, and illuminate your understandings,
          and give you to know that I tell you the truth. This is the
          object many have, in wishing to settle and take in land that is
          far distant from the main body of the people. I have not given
          you the language of their lips to me, but the language of their
          hearts.
          164
          Elders of Israel are greedy after the things of this world. If
          you ask them if they are ready to build up the kingdom of God,
          their answer is prompt--"Why, to be sure we are, with our whole
          souls; but we want first to get so much gold, speculate and get
          rich, and then we can help the Church considerably. We will go to
          California and get gold, go and buy goods and get rich, trade
          with the emigrants, build a mill, make a farm, get a large herd
          of cattle, and then we can do a great deal for Israel." When will
          you be ready to do it? "In a few years, brother Brigham, if you
          do not disturb us. We do not believe in the necessity of doing
          military duty, in giving over our surplus property for tithing;
          we never could see into it; but we want to go and get rich, to
          accumulate and amass wealth, by securing all the land adjoining
          us, and all we have knowledge of." If that is not the spirit of
          this people, then I do not know what the truth is concerning the
          matter.
          165
          Now I wish to say to you who are fearing and trembling, do not be
          afraid at all, for it is certain if we should be killed off by
          the Indians, we could not die any younger; this is about as good
          a time as can be for us to die, and if we all go together, why
          you know, we shall have a good company along with us; it will not
          be lonesome passing through the valley, which is said to have a
          vail drawn over it. If we all go together, the dark valley of the
          shadow of death will be lighted up by us, so do not be scared.
          But there will not be enough slain by the Indians at this time to
          make the company very conspicuous in that dark valley. Do you
          begin to secretly wish you had staid in the States or in England
          a little longer, until this Indian war had come to an end? There
          is a mighty fearing and trembling in the hearts of many. I know
          what men have done heretofore, when they have seen the enemy
          advancing, they have skulked, they were sure to be somewhere else
          than on hand when there was fighting to do, although, upon the
          whole, I have no fault to find with the Latter-day Saints, or
          with the Elders of Israel upon that subject, for they love to
          fight a little too well. If I were to have fears concerning them,
          it would not be that they would make war, but in the case of war
          being made on them, I should have more fear in consequence of the
          ignorant and foolish audacity of the Elders, than of their being
          afraid. I should fear they would rush into danger like an
          unthinking horse into battle. So I will not find fault with
          regard to their courage. On that point I am a coward myself, and
          if people would do as I tell them, I would not only save my own
          life, but theirs likewise.
          165
          Suppose, now, that we should say to this congregation, and to all
          the wards in this city, the time has come for us to fort up; do
          you not think a great many persons would come immediately to me,
          and inquire if I did not think their houses quite safe enough,
          without being put to that trouble and expense? Yes, my office
          would be crowded with such persons, wanting to know if they might
          not live where they were now living, "for" they would say, "we
          have got good houses, and well finished off, besides, such a
          course will ruin them, and our gardens will go to destruction; we
          really cannot fort up." Would there not be a great amount of hard
          feelings upon the subject? I think so, whether you do or not. I
          think I should want as many as a legion of angels to assist me to
          convince every family it was necessary, if it actually was so.
          165
          I do not know but the time may come, and that speedily, when I
          shall build a fort myself in this city, and those who are
          disposed can go into it with me, while the rest can stay out.
          When I see it is absolutely necessary to do this, I shall do it.
          If the people of Utah Territory would do as they were told, they
          would always be safe. If the people in San Pete County had done
          as they were told, from the beginning of that settlement, they
          would have been safe at this time, and would not have lost their
          cattle. The day before yesterday, Friday, July 29th, the Indians
          came from the mountains, to Father Allred's settlement, and drove
          off all the stock amounting to two hundred head. If the people
          had done as they were told, they would not have suffered this
          severe loss, which is a just chastisement.
          166
          I recollect when we were down at Father Allred's settlement last
          April, they had previously been to me not only to know if they
          might settle in San Pete, but if they might separate widely from
          each other, over a piece of land about two miles square, each
          having a five acre lot for their garden, near their farms. They
          were told to build a good substantial fort, until the settlement
          became sufficiently strong, and not live so far apart, and expose
          themselves and their property to danger. Father Allred told me
          they were then so nigh together, they did not know how to live! I
          told him they had better make up their mind to be baptized into
          the Church again, and get the Spirit of God, that each one might
          be able to live at peace with his neighbor in close quarters, and
          not think himself infringed upon. They wanted to know if they
          were to build a fort. "Why, yes," I said, "build a strong fort,
          and a corral, to put your cattle in, that the Indians cannot get
          them away from you." "Do you think, brother Brigham, the Indians
          will trouble us here?" they inquired. I said, "It is none of your
          business whether they will or not, but you will see the time that
          you will need such preparations." But I did not think it would
          come so quickly. There will more come upon this people to destroy
          them than they at present think of, unless they are prepared to
          defend themselves, which I shall not take time, this morning, to
          dwell upon. I said also to the brethren at Utah, "Do you make a
          fort, and let it be strong enough, that Indians cannot break into
          it." They commenced, and did not make even the shadow of a fort,
          for in some places there was nothing more than a line to mark
          where the approaching shadow would be. They began to settle round
          upon the various creeks and streamlets, and the part of a fort
          that existed was finally pulled up, and carried away somewhere
          else. I have told you, from the beginning, you would need forts,
          where to build them, and how strong. I told you, six years ago,
          to build a fort that the Devil could not get into, unless you
          were disposed to let him in, and that would keep out the Indians.
          Excuse me for saying devil; I do not often use the old
          gentleman's name in vain, and if I do it, it is always in the
          pulpit, where I do all my swearing. I make this apology because
          it is considered a sin to say devil, and it grates on refined
          ears.
          166
          I told the settlement in San Pete, at the first, to build a fort.
          They did not do it, but huddled together beside a stone quarry,
          without a place of common shelter where they could defend
          themselves, in case of an Indian difficulty. They had faith they
          could keep the Indians off. Well, now is the time to call it into
          exercise. They did, after a while, build a temporary fort at San
          Pete, which now shields them in a time of trouble.
          166
          When the brethren went to Salt Creek, they wanted to make a
          settlement there, and inquired of me if they might do so. I told
          them, no, unless they first built an efficient fort. I forbade
          them taking their women and children there, until that
          preparatory work was fully accomplished. Has it ever been done?
          No, but families went there and lived in wagons and brush houses,
          perfectly exposed to be killed. If they have faith enough to keep
          the Indians off, it is all right.
          166
          From the time these distant valleys began to be settled, until
          now, there has scarcely been a day but what I have felt
          twenty-five ton weight, as it were, upon me, in exercising faith
          to keep this people from destroying themselves; but if any of
          them can exercise faith enough for themselves, and wish to excuse
          me, I will take my faith back.
          166
          The word has gone out now, to the different settlements, in the
          time of harvest, requiring them to build forts. Could it not have
          been done last winter, better than now? Yes. Do you not suppose
          people will now wish they had built forts when they were told? If
          they do not, it proves what they have been all the time, shall I
          say fools? If that is too harsh a term, I will say they have been
          foolish. It is better for me to labor in building a house or a
          fort, to get out fencing timber, and wood to consume through
          winter, when I have nothing else to do, and not be under the
          necessity of leaving my gain on the ground to do those things.
          Harvest is no time to build forts, neither is it the time to do
          it when we should be plowing and sowing.
          167
               Now the harvest is upon us, I wish to say a few words
          concerning it. I desire you to tell your neighbors, and wish them
          to tell their neighbors, and thus let it go to the several
          counties around--now is the time for women and children to assist
          in the harvest fields, the same as they do in other countries. I
          never asked this of them before; I do not now ask it as a general
          thing, but those employed in the expedition south, in the work of
          defending their brethren from Indian depredations, who have heavy
          harvests on hand, rather than suffer the grain to waste, let the
          women get in the harvest, and put it where the Indians cannot
          steal it. And when you go into the harvest field, carry a good
          butcher knife in your belt, that if an Indian should come upon
          you, supposing you to be unarmed, you would be sure to kill him.
          167
          Tell your neighbors of this, and go to work, men, women, and
          children, and gather in your grain, and gather it clean, leave
          none to waste, and put it where the Indians cannot destroy it.
          167
          Does this language intimate anything terrific to you? It need
          not. If you will do as you are told, you will be safe
          continually. Secure your bread stuff, your wheat, and your corn,
          when it is ripe, and let every particle of grain raised in these
          valleys be put where it will be safe, and as much as possible
          from vermin, and especially from the Indians, and then build
          forts.
          167
          Let every man and woman who has a house make that house a fort,
          from which you can kill ten where you can now only kill one, if
          Indians come upon you. "Brother Brigham, do you really expect
          Indians to come upon us in this city?" This inquiry, I have no
          doubt, is at this moment in the hearts of a few, almost
          breathless with fear. Were I to answer such inquirers as I feel,
          I should say, it is none of your business; but I will say, you
          are so instructed, to see if you will do as you are told. Let
          your dwelling house be a perfect fort. From the day I lived where
          brother Joseph Smith lived, I have been fortified all the time so
          as to resist twenty men, if they should come to my house in the
          night, with an intent to molest my family, assault my person, or
          destroy my property; and I have always been in the habit of
          sleeping with one eye open, and if I cannot then sufficiently
          watch, I will get my wife to help me. Let an hostile band of
          Indians come round my house, and I am good for quite a number of
          them. If one hundred should come, I calculate that only fifty
          would be able to go to the next house, and if the Saints there
          used up the other fifty, the third house would be safe.
          167
          But instead of the people taking this course, almost every good
          rifle in the territory has been traded away to the Indians, with
          quantities of powder and lead, though they waste it in various
          ways when they have got it. The whites would sell the title to
          their lives, for the sake of trading with the Indians.
          167
          They will learn better, I expect, by and by, for the people have
          never received such strict orders as they have got now. I will
          give you the pith of the last orders issued--"That man or family
          who will not do as they are told in the orders, are to be treated
          as strangers, yea, even as enemies, and not as friends." And if
          there should be a contest, if we should be called upon to defend
          our lives, our liberty, and our possessions, we would cut such
          off the first, and walk over their bodies to conquer the foe
          outside.
          168
          Martial law is not enforced yet, although the whole territory is
          in a state of war, apparently, but it is only the Utah [Indians]
          who have declared war on Utah [Territory.] Deseret has not yet
          declared war; how soon it will be declared is not for me to say;
          but we have a right, and it is our duty, to put ourselves in a
          state of self defence.
          168
          The few families that settled in Cedar Valley, at the point of
          the mountains, were instructed to leave there, last spring. They
          have gone back again, upon their own responsibility, and now want
          to know what they must do. They have been told to do just as they
          have a mind to.
          168
          Those who have taken their wives and children in the kanyons to
          live, have been told to remove them into the city; and if you
          want to make shingles, or do any other work that requires you to
          remain there, have your gun in a situation that an Indian cannot
          creep up and steal it from you before you are aware, that you can
          be good for a few Indians if they should chance to come upon you.
          168
          If I wished to live away from the body of the people, my first
          effort should be directed towards building a good and efficient
          fort. When new settlements were made in the eastern countries,
          they built them of timber, and they were called "block houses." I
          would advise that every house in a new settlement should be made
          good for all the Indians that could approach it, with an
          intention to tear it down. If I did not do that, I would go to
          where I could be safe, I would take up my abode with the body of
          the people. I would take my family there at least. By taking this
          course, every person will be safe from the depredations of the
          Indians, which are generally committed upon the defenceless and
          unprotected portions of the community.
          168
          I know what the feelings of the generality of the people are, at
          this time--they think all the Indians in the mountains are coming
          to kill off the Latter-day Saints. I have no more fear of that,
          than I have of the sun ceasing to give light upon the earth. I
          have studied the Indian character sufficiently to know what the
          Indians are in war, I have been with them more or less from my
          youth upward, where they have often had wars among themselves.
          Let every man, woman, and child, that can handle a butcher knife,
          be good for one Indian, and you are safe.
          168
          I am aware that the people want to ask me a thousand and one
          questions, whether they have done it or not, touching the present
          Indian difficulties. I have tried to answer them all, in my own
          mind, by saying, it will be just as the Lord will.
          168
          How many times have I been asked in the past week, what I intend
          to do with Walker. I say, LET HIM ALONE, SEVERELY. I have not
          made war on the Indians, nor am I calculating to do it. My policy
          is to give them presents, and be kind to them. Instead of being
          Walker's enemy, I have sent him a great pile of tobacco to smoke
          when he is lonely in the mountains. He is now at war with the
          only friends he has upon this earth, and I want him to have some
          tobacco to smoke.
          168
          I calculate to pursue just such a course with the Indians, and
          when I am dictated to by existing circumstances, and the Spirit
          of the Lord, to change my course, I will do it, and not until
          then.
          169
          If you were to see Walker, do you think you would kill him? You
          that want to kill him, I will give you a mission to that effect.
          A great many appear very bold, and desire to go and bring me
          Walker's head, but they want all the people in Utah to go with
          them. I could point out thousands in this Territory who would
          follow these Indians, and continue to follow them, and leave the
          cattle to be driven off by the emigrants, and the grain to
          perish, and thus subject the whole community to the ravages of
          famine, and its consequent evils. I have been teased and teased
          by men who will come to me and say, "Just give me twenty-five,
          fifty, or a hundred men, and I will go and fetch you Walker's
          head." I do not want his head, but I wish him to do all the Devil
          wants him to do so far as the Lord will suffer him and the Devil
          to chastise this people for their good.
          169
          I say to the Indians, as I have often said to the mob, go your
          length. You say you are going to kill us all off, you say you are
          going to obliterate the Latter-day Saints, and wipe them from the
          earth; why don't you do it, you poor miserable curses? The mob
          only had power to drive the Saints to their duty, and to remember
          the Lord their God, and that is all the Indians can do. This
          people are worldly-minded, they want to get rich in earthly
          substance, and are apt to forget their God, the pit from which
          they were dug, and the rock from which they were hewn, every man
          turning to his own way. Seemingly the Lord is chastening us until
          we turn and do His will. What are you willing to do? Would you be
          willing to build a fort, and all go in there to live? I tell you,
          you would have a hell of your own, and devils enough to carry it
          on. Do you suppose you will ever see the time you would do that,
          and live at peace with each other, and have the Spirit of the
          Lord enough to look each other in the face, and say, with a heart
          full of kindness, " Good morning, Mary," or "How do you do,
          Maria"? YOU WILL BE WHIPPED UNTIL you have the Spirit of the Lord
          Jesus Christ sufficiently to love your brethren and sisters
          freely, men, women, and CHILDREN; until you can live at peace
          with yourselves, and with every family around you; until you can
          treat every child as though it were the tender offspring of your
          own body, every man as your brother, and every woman as your
          sister; and until the young persons treat the old with that
          respect due to parents, and all learn to shake hands, with a warm
          heart, and a friendly grip, and say, "God bless you," from
          morning till evening; until each person can say, "I love you all,
          I have no evil in my heart to any individual, I can send my
          children to school with yours, and can correct your children when
          they do wrong, as though they were my own, and I am willing you
          should correct mine, and let us live together until we are a holy
          and sanctified society." There will always be Indians or somebody
          else to chastise you, until you come to that spot; so amen to the
          present Indian trouble, for it is all right. I am just as willing
          the rebellious of this people should be kicked, and cuffed, and
          mobbed, and hunted by the Indians, as not, for I have preached to
          them until I am tired. I will give no more counsel to any person
          upon the duties of self preservation; you can do as you please;
          if you will not preserve yourselves, I may reason with you until
          my tongue cleaves to the roof of my mouth, to no avail. Let the
          Lord extend the hand of benevolence to brother Walker, and he
          will make you do it by other means than exhortations given in
          mildness.
          169
          This very same Indian Walker has a mission upon him, and I do not
          blame him for what he is now doing; he is helping me to do the
          will of the Lord to this people, he is doing with a chastening
          rod what I have failed to accomplish with soft words, while I
          have been handing out my substance, feeding the hungry,
          comforting the sick. But this has no effect upon this people at
          all, my counsel has not been needed, go the Lord is making
          brother Walker an instrument to help me, and perhaps the means
          that he will use will have their due effect.
          169
          Do you suppose I want to kill him? No. I should be killing the
          very means that will make this people do what we wanted them to
          do years ago.
          170
          There are hundreds of witnesses to bear testimony that I have
          counselled this people, from the beginning, what to do to save
          themselves both temporally and spiritually.
          170
          In one of our orders issued lately, the southern settlements were
          advised to send their surplus cattle to this valley. No quicker
          had the news reached them, than our ears were greeted with one
          continued whine, which meant, "We are afraid you want them." So
          we did, to take care of them for you.
          170
          When Father Allred was advised to adopt measures to secure
          themselves and their property, he replied, "O, I do not think
          there is the least danger in the world; we are perfectly able to
          take care of our stock, and protect ourselves against the
          Indians." All right, I thought, let circumstances prove that.
          170
          Now as difficulties surround them, they say to me, "Why, brother
          Brigham, if you had only told us what to do, we would have done
          it. Were we not always willing to take your counsel?" Yes, you
          are a great deal more willing to take it, than to obey it. If
          people are willing to carry out good counsel, they will secure
          themselves accordingly.
          170
          I have thought of setting a pattern, by securing myself; but were
          I to build a fort for myself and family, I should want about a
          legion of angels from the throne of God, to stay nine months with
          me, to get my folks willing to go into it. But I am so
          independent about it, I care not the snap of my finger for one of
          them. If my wives will not go into a place of security with me,
          it is all right, they can stay out, and I will go in and take my
          children with me. I say, I do not know but I may take a notion to
          set a pattern by building a fort; if I do, some one in this city
          may follow my example, and then somebody else, &c., until we have
          a perfect city of forts.
          170
          "Brother Brigham, do you really think we shall ever need them?"
          YES, I DO. All the difficulties there is in the community this
          year, is not a drop in comparison to the heavy shower that will
          come. "Well, and where is it coming from?" From hell, where every
          other trouble comes from. "And who do you think will be the
          actors?" Why, the Devil and his imps. [W. W. Phelps in the stand,
          We could not do very well without a devil.] No, sir, you are
          quite aware of that; you know we could not do without him. If
          there had been no devil to tempt Eve, she never would have got
          her eyes opened. We need a devil to stir up the wicked on the
          earth to purify the Saints. Therefore let devils howl, let them
          rage, and thus exhibit themselves in the form of those poor
          foolish Lamanites. Let them go on in their work, and do you not
          desire to kill them, until they ought to be killed, and then we
          will extinguish the Indian title, if it is required.
          170
          Did you never feel to pity them on viewing their wretched
          condition? Walker with a small band has succeeded in making all
          the Indian bands in these mountains fear him. He has been in the
          habit of stealing from the Californians, and of making every
          train of emigrants that passed along the Spanish trail to
          California pay tithing to him. He finally began to steal children
          from those bands to sell to the Spaniards; and through fear of
          him, he has managed to bring in subjection almost all the Utah
          tribes.
          170
          I will relate one action of Walker's life, which will serve to
          illustrate his character. He, with his band, about last Feb.,
          fell in with a small band of Piedes, and killed off the whole of
          the men, took the squaws prisoners, and sold the children to the
          Mexicans, and some few were disposed of in this territory. This
          transaction was told by Arapeen, Walker's brother, though he was
          not at the affray himself.
          171
          The Indians in these mountains are continually on the decrease;
          bands that numbered 150 warriors when we first came here, number
          not more than 35 now; and some of the little tribes in the
          southern parts of this territory, towards New Mexico, have not a
          single squaw amongst them, for they have traded them off for
          horses, &c. This practice will soon make the race extinct.
          Besides, Walker is continually, whenever an opportunity presents
          itself, killing and stealing children from the wandering bands
          that he has any power over, which also has its tendency to
          extinguish the race.
          171
          Walker is hemmed in, he dare not go into California again. Dare
          he go east to the Snakes? No. Dare he go north? No, for they
          would rejoice to kill him. Here he is, penned up in a small
          compass, surrounded by his enemies; and now the Elders of Israel
          long to eat up, as it were, him and his little band. What are
          they? They are a set of cursed fools. Do you not rather pity
          them? They dare not move over a certain boundary, on any of the
          four points of the compass, for fear of being killed; then they
          are killing one another, and making war upon this people that
          could use them up, and they not be a breakfast spell for them if
          they felt so disposed. See their condition, and I ask you, do you
          not pity them? From all appearance, there will not be an Indian
          left, in a short time, to steal a horse. Are they not fools,
          under these circumstances, to make war with their best friends?
          171
          Do you want to run after them to kill them? I say, let them
          alone, for peradventure God may pour out His Spirit upon them,
          and show them the error of their ways. We may yet have to fight
          them, though they are of the house of Israel to whom the message
          of salvation is sent; for their wickedness is so great, that the
          Lord Almighty cannot get at the hearts of the older ones to teach
          them saving principles. Joseph Smith said we should have to fight
          them. He said, "When this people mingle among the Lamanites, if
          they do not bow down in obedience to the Gospel, they will hunt
          them until there is but a small remnant of them left upon this
          continent." They have either got to bow down to the Gospel or be
          slain. Shall we slay them simply because they will not obey the
          Gospel? No. But they will come to us and try to kill us, and we
          shall be under the necessity of killing them to save our own
          lives.
          171
          I wished to lay these thing before the people this morning, to
          answer a great many questions, and allay their fears. Yesterday,
          brother Kimball heard at his mill, ten miles north, that I had
          sent word to him, that the mountains were full of Indians, and he
          and the families with him were to move into the city; so they
          immediately obeyed this report. Brother Kimball came to me and
          inquired if I had sent such orders. I said, no. But it is all
          right, for I wanted the women and children from there. This shows
          the excited state of the people.
          171
          One thing more. I ask you men who have been with Joseph in the
          wars he passed through, and who were with him at the time of his
          death, what was it that preserved us, to all outward appearances?
          It is true, in reality, God did it. But by what means did He keep
          the mob from destroying us? It was by means of being well armed
          with the weapons of death a send them to hell cross lots. Just so
          you have got to do.
          172
          As for this people fostering to themselves that the day has come
          for them to sell their guns and ammunition to their enemies, and
          sit down to sleep in peace, they will find themselves deceived,
          and before they know, they will sleep until they are slain. They
          have got to carry weapons with them, to be ready to send their
          enemies to hell cross lots, whether they be Lamanites, or mobs
          who may come to take their lives, or destroy their property. We
          must be so prepared that they dare not come to us in a hostile
          manner without being assured they will meet a vigorous
          resistance, and ten to one they will meet their grave.
          172
          The Lord will suffer no more trouble to come upon us than is
          necessary to bring this people to their senses. You need not go
          to sleep under the impression that it is the north and south only
          that is in danger, and we are all safe here. Now mind, let this
          people here lie down to sleep, and be entirely off their watch,
          and the first thing they know, they are in the greatest danger.
          You must not desert the watch tower, but do as I do--keep some
          person awake in your house all night long, and be ready, at the
          least tap of the foot, to offer a stout resistance, if it is
          required. Be ready at any moment to kill twenty of your enemies
          at least. Let every house be a fort.
          172
          After the cattle were stolen at San Pete, a messenger arrived
          here in about thirty hours to report the affair, and obtain
          advice. I told brother Wells, "you can write to them, and say,
          'Inasmuch as you have no cows and oxen to tumble you, you can go
          to harvesting, and take care of yourselves.'" If you do not take
          care of yourselves, brethren, you will not be taken care of. I
          take care of them that help themselves. I will help you that try
          to help yourselves, and carry out the maxim of Doctor Dick--"God
          helps them that help themselves."
          172
          I am my own policeman, and have slept, scores of nights, with my
          gun and sword by my side, that is, if I slept at all. I am still
          a policeman. Now is the day to watch. It is as important for me
          to watch now, as well as pray, as it ever has been since I came
          into this kingdom. It requires watching, as well as praying men;
          take turns at it, let some watch while others pray, and then
          change round, but never let any time pass without a watcher, lest
          you he overtaken in an hour when you think not; it will come as a
          thief in the night. Look out for your enemies, for we know not
          how they will come, and what enemy it will be. Take care of
          yourselves.
          172
          Again, let me reiterate to the sisters, do not be afraid of going
          into the harvest field. If you are found there helping your sons,
          your husbands, and your brethren, to gather in the harvest, I
          say, God bless you, and I will also.
          172
          Take care of your grain, and take care of yourselves, that no
          enemy come to slay you. Be always on hand to meet them with
          death, and send them to hell, if they come to you. May God bless
          you all. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Parley
          P. Pratt, January 30, 1853
                          Parley P. Pratt, January 30, 1853
                       THE STANDARD AND ENSIGN FOR THE PEOPLE.
               A discourse delivered by Elder Parley P. Pratt, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
                       Great Salt Lake City, January 30, 1853.
          173
          Brethren and Friends--I am glad to see you once more, and for the
          privilege of meeting with you. I did not expect to address you
          this morning, not being well in health; but at the request of my
          brother, who presides over me, and in the absence of many who
          might edify you, I rise to speak a short time, and give place to
          others.
          173
          I desire your prayers, that my body may be strengthened, and also
          for the Gift of the Holy Spirit, without which no man can edify
          his fellow man.
          173
          We are told, by the Prophet of old, in the good old Bible, and by
          that peculiar Prophet that the Christian world (that portion of
          them that esteem the Bible) consider more clear, and more
          eloquent than any other, whose prophecies are on record--the
          Prophet Isaiah; we are told by him, that the Lord would, some
          time, "lift up a standard for the people," "an ensign for the
          nations," and that He would not only do this, but do it as a
          manifestation which should result in the great restoration of all
          things spoken of by the Prophets, in the restoration of the
          twelve tribes of Israel from the four quarters of the earth, to
          their own country, nationality, institutions, and religion; that
          they might again be nationalized, established, and reinstated in
          their covenant renewed unto them, as in days of old, and have
          their own Priesthood, rulers, governors, and consequently their
          own blessings. I say, we are told, by one of the greatest
          Prophets, whose prophecies are on record, that a standard would
          be lifted up or manifested, in order to bring about that great
          restoration. What is that standard? Let us reason a little upon
          that subject, this morning. Some might say it is a book. It might
          be, in a certain sense. A dictionary of a language is sometimes
          called a standard, that is, something established, something that
          is a sufficient authority, something to which all can refer, as
          to a sample or doctrine, to decide a question or an uncertainty
          in the meaning of words.
          173
          In point of principle or doctrine, a book that we might call a
          "standard," might be considered to contain truths. But I do not
          understand the prediction to which I refer as exclusively
          pertaining to a book, but rather to a religion, to a set of
          principles developed, to a covenant established, or, to carry it
          out more fully, to a people organized, gathered together, and
          established in one, having one faith, one spirit, one baptism,
          one God, one eternal and everlasting covenant by which they are
          all united, and one set of principles by which they are governed.
          For where such a government might be subdivided by local
          circumstances, whether these principles were written in one book
          or in a thousand books, or whether they were taught and acted
          upon without any book, whether the people could read a book or
          could not, nothing short of the development of certain principles
          of religion, law, and government, embraced by a certain portion
          of people, by which they could see eye to eye, in which they were
          united, and by the spirit of which they were made one in light
          and truth and fellowship, and gathered, organised, planted,
          established--in short, a system containing a development of all
          the principles that constitute a heavenly government, nothing
          short of this, if I understand the prediction of Isaiah, would be
          considered by the Jews, and by the other tribes of Israel,
          wherever they were found, and finally by the whole of the Gentile
          world that might live to see it, as a "standard." This would be
          something worthy to be called a standard, something to which they
          could look, and come to, and be organized, consolidated,
          nationalized, and governed by, politically and religiously; or
          more truly and consistently speaking, religiously, because that
          includes all the political governments that are worth naming or
          striving for in heaven or on earth.
          174
          A system of religion, or a people organized upon it, should
          include every branch of government that they could possibly need
          for their dwelling with each other, for their organization,
          peace, welfare, defence, order, happiness, and for their dwelling
          with neighboring nations. A system of religion that is from
          heaven never would stop short of including all these principles.
          Therefore it is inconsistent, it is because of the ignorance that
          is in the world that two terms--"political government" and
          "religious government," are used.
          174
          Men have been in the habit of walking with, of being organised
          and identified with, religions more or less false, and not
          sufficient in themselves to carry out all the principles of
          government; they are a kind of Sunday convenience, separate and
          distinct from the every-day affairs of life; a kind of a big
          religious cloak, to be put on for that day, but not to be
          considered to have anything to do with every-day affairs. This
          kind of religion not being sufficient for the happiness and
          government, enlightenment and improvement, education and
          regulation of mankind, or of society in all its branches, of
          course men would get up some thing else separate from it, and
          call that "the policy of civil government." I do not blame them,
          for a false religion, or one partly false and partly true, never
          was calculated to answer the purpose. A religion not wholly true
          could not possibly develop all the resources, principles,
          branches, departments, officers, and powers adapted to the
          government, organization, peace, order, happiness, and defence of
          society, and for its regulation while dwelling with foreign
          departments and powers.
          174
          Men require something more than these imperfect systems, which
          are a mixture of truth and error, that exist in the world, (and
          they have no better, of course;) they need something else besides
          their Sunday arrangements, besides this machinery of theories;
          they need something of every-day practical utility; and this they
          call civil government and politics, distinct from religion,
          though in some countries they blend one with the other, and both
          are in force. But I use the terms politics and religion to adapt
          myself to those obsolete ideas, that are about passing away with
          us, but under which a great majority of mankind still labor. In
          addressing the Saints, I make no distinction; when I say a
          religious system, I mean that which unites principles of
          political government and religions, which is perfectly sufficient
          for, and completely adapted to, all the wants of cities,
          boroughs, counties, states, kingdoms, empires, or the world, or a
          million of worlds; that system of religion or government, just
          which you please to call it, that regulates things in heaven, and
          for which all professing Christian men pray.
          175
          Whether men realize it or not, when they say, "Thy kingdom come,
          thy will be done on earth as it is in heaven," it is as much as a
          say, "O God, sweep away all the falsehood and abuses of power
          there are in the world, whether religious or political; down with
          the tyrants, down with the abuses, down with the false nobility,
          down with the pride, extravagance, and idleness of the one class,
          and down with the hard trials, want, oppression, and poverty that
          are heaped upon the other class; do away with all the kingcraft,
          priestcraft, and republic craft that are in the world. And in the
          place of all these false governments and religions, in political
          and social life, introduce that eternal government, that pure
          order of things, those eternal principles and institutions, which
          govern society in those better worlds, the worlds of immortality
          and eternal life." That is what a man prays for, as well as I can
          tell it, when he says, "Thy will be done on earth, as it is in
          heaven." He says, "Sweep away all abuses, all corruption, all
          falsehood, all war, all ungodly and selfish ambition; and in its
          place introduce a new government for universal man, a system that
          will touch all his wants, religiously, politically, and every
          other way; which will organise and govern society upon the
          principles that society is governed upon in heaven."
          175
          I pray for that day, understanding it in that light. And if
          anybody uses that prayer, and does not mean it in that light, it
          is for want of reflection. For instance--does any man in his
          senses, believe that the government of the eternal heavens in the
          presence of God, consists of a variety of kingdoms, empires,
          republics, and states, governed by various principles, ruled by
          aspirants, and sometimes by tyrants, that differ widely one from
          another in the principles by which they rule, one jarring with,
          and encroaching upon, the other, and frequently going to war with
          him, having a thousand different ways of worship, and of
          religious and political administration? I ask, again, does any
          sane person, who reflects, believe that heaven is governed in
          that way? No. Every reflecting person believes as well as I, that
          if there is a world of immortality at all, where righteousness
          rules, the same principles, as far as they go, are developed unto
          all, and adapted to all. Some may have more truth, ascend to
          greater degrees of perfection, and be able to receive higher and
          more glorious principles of government than others, even in
          heaven. Some may attain to a celestial glory, of which the sun is
          typical; others be as telestial beings, the glory of which is
          compared with be stars, as they appear to our sight; and these
          two classes may differ as widely from each other as the stars
          differ from the sun in glory, as seen by man. So far as heavenly
          beings have become enlightened by revelation in the laws of
          eternal government, a sameness exists in their possession of
          principles of truth, as far as it goes. Some may be in possession
          of the same portion of truth, but may not possess it in fulness,
          but it is true so far as it goes, by which all are in union,
          peace, and love, and by which they all do right, and all glorify
          God, and maintain an eternal peace and bond of happiness.
          176
          In viewing heaven thus, "I do not believe I differ, except in
          degree, from the expectations and views of all Christendom that
          believe in a hereafter. They would not contend for a moment for
          the jargon and division that exist in this world, that
          produce--what? Envy, hatred, darkness, and ignorance. They do not
          believe for a moment that anything of this kind exists in heaven.
          They pray as well as we, "Thy will be done on earth as it is in
          heaven." They pray, whether they think of it or not, that all the
          jargon, errors, abuses, darkness, and ignorance that now exist in
          the world, under the name of religion, government, or anything
          else, may come to an end; that, so far as there is
          unrighteousness, or any error in principle, thrones may be cast
          down; that all the powers of earth, whether republic or
          monarchial, that are not in accordance with the law and
          government of heaven, may pass away, and those principles be
          introduced that govern the sanctified in heaven, so far as man in
          this life is capable of receiving these good things, and enjoying
          them in truth, union, and peace. Then with this view of the
          subject, such a system introduced, even among a few men, they
          being organised upon it, and acting it out in a good measure, we
          should call this a "standard." The Jews could look to it and call
          it a "standard." The ten tribes, and the scattered remnants, and
          all that appertain to the lineage of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob,
          scattered through the world, waiting for the redemption, and the
          restoration of the kingdom to Israel, could look to such a
          "standard," to the people organised upon these principles
          developed from heaven, and carrying them out in all their points,
          for they are capable of governing a world, or a million of
          worlds; to this they could look and say, there is a "standard."
          176
          If all the railroads, steam-boats, and other swift means of
          conveyance, with all the gold and silver, were in the hands and
          under the control of the right lineage, and all the sea captains
          and railroad proprietors stood ready to serve them, as the Jew
          turned his attention to the brightening prospect, and to his own
          land, the question would naturally arise in his mind--under what
          STANDARD shall I go? You may say under the colors of Great
          Britain, but that is not sufficient. Upon what principles shall
          we be organized, religiously and politically? Which of all the
          churches in Christendom will present us with a just standard,
          constituted to our capacity? Which of all the nations will
          present a government standard, constituted to our position?
          176
          "Well, but," you say, "let the Jews take their own standard."
          Then they will neither have the Christian dispensation, nor that
          of Moses and the Prophets, because both of these had power in
          them that the Jews do not profess to have. The Christian religion
          had its inspired men, Apostles and Prophets. Those the Jews have
          not got. Moses and the Prophets had their miracles, gifts,
          powers, and oracles, men who were raised up by heaven, to direct,
          make laws and governments, and organise a kingdom among the Jews;
          they have not got these either. The most they pretend to have is
          a Book that gives the history of their fathers, and of Moses and
          the Prophets; showing that they lived under a dispensation of
          Priesthood, revealed from heaven, and handed down from the
          fathers, from generation to generation, which Priesthood held the
          Urim and Thummim, and the charge of the holy place, containing
          the holy things, and power to inquire of God, and to instruct the
          people in what was for their peace, defence, welfare, government,
          judgment, and law. The Jews cannot say they have these things
          now. Moses and the Prophets had the ministering of angels. The
          Jews at this day have not. Moses and the Prophets had living
          oracles from heaven. The Jews have not. Moses and the Prophets
          had power to control the elements, and work mighty wonders in the
          name of the Lord, some of them even rolled the earth back on its
          axis. Have the Jews this power? No. To restore them to Palestine,
          and let their own institutions be a standard, would be to put
          there what neither resemble Moses and the Prophets, nor Jesus and
          the Prophets.
          177
          "But suppose we try to convert them to the present Christian
          institutions," says one. Well, where is the "standard?" Who has
          got it? The Christian institution consisted of Apostles and
          Prophets, ministers whose Priesthood was after the order of the
          Son of God, and ordained by himself, for he says, "As my Father
          hath sent me, even so send I you;" "ye have not chosen me, but I
          have chosen you, and ordained you." Connected with the
          Apostleship are the keys and powers of government, the
          administration of ordinances, and the gifts and powers of the
          Holy Spirit. This is a "standard," which the Jews, and the ten
          tribes would all acknowledge, and it is a Christian one, yet such
          a one all Christendom cannot present. They can present a book,
          like the Jews; the one is a book that testifies that Moses and
          the Prophets had this power, the other that Jesus and his
          Apostles had it, but neither of these books can be the
          "standard," because the mere history that somebody had this power
          would not be a living "standard." If the Christians present the
          Jews with the New Testament, the Jews will present the Christians
          with the Old Testament, and the writers of both of them had the
          power. The Jew would have to admit, that the power and "standard"
          that his book was the key of, had passed away; and the Christian,
          that the angels, gifts, and blessings that his book gave an
          account of, had also passed away.
          177
          If you take the despotic standard of Russia, or the standard of
          any other of the nations of Europe, some of them are unlimited in
          their provisions--the sovereign is the law; others are
          limited--the sovereign only being part of the law and power,
          frequent bloody wars arise between the monarch and the people;
          and those who come direct to the throne by hereditary right are
          beset by the same evils. Besides that, in Russia there is one
          kind of religion; in Greece, another; in Rome, a third; and in
          England, a fourth; all widely differing from each other.
          177
          To take the republican form of government, and set it up as a
          standard, would be to set the Jews and the Ten Tribes, when they
          get home, to creating their own government, religion, and
          officers. They would say, "This is not a restoration of all
          things to the order of the fathers. Who ever heard of a nation's
          rising up, and making its own ministry of angels, its own
          Prophets, Apostles, and Priesthood to speak the word of God, and
          to inquire of Him?" The Lord would turn round and say, "I have
          not chosen this man, you have chosen him and ordained him." Did
          the people elect and appoint Moses to receive all his powers, to
          hold communion with the burning bush, and divide the waters of
          the Red Sea? Did they elect Joshua to that faith by which he
          lived to lead Israel into Canaan, and divide Jordan by the word
          of God? Did they instruct him to lengthen out the day while
          Israel conquered their enemies? No. God Almighty chose Moses and
          ordained him, and Moses laid his hands upon Joshua and ordained
          him, and therefore the two were full of the Spirit of God to fill
          a similar calling.
          177
          The Jews and the Ten Tribes know better than to bow to such an
          order of things, for no rule, precedent, or example, can be found
          in the history of the fathers to substantiate such a course; they
          would either conclude that God had changed, or that such
          proceedings were an imposition, and pertained to no real
          government from heaven at all.
          177
          "Well, then," says the Lord,"I will set up a standard for my
          people, and lift up my hand to the Gentiles. A system shall be
          developed from heaven, by which the people are to be planted in
          one, that is, those who embrace it; by which shall be developed
          among them all, one spirit, one doctrine, one order of
          Priesthood, worship, power, and government, to lead, direct,
          control, and say what religion they shall adopt, including every
          department of government, sufficient for all the affairs of
          state, both internal and external, and that would contribute to
          their enlightenment, improvement, defence, exaltation, and their
          relations with all the world." Such a thing would be a
          "standard." It would answer the purpose to plant and govern them.
          It would bring the Gentiles to it. In order for this, it would be
          a principle of government developed in all its parts, not
          differing so much from the old one either. "Do you mean the law
          of Moses?" Yes, but only so far as the same eternal principles
          existed in that law. There were many principles given in that law
          which pertained not to the eternal kingdom of God; they had to be
          fulfilled in Christ, and then have an end.
          179
          "Well, then, what do you mean? Do you mean to say that this
          modern standard must not differ from the institutions revealed
          and carried out in the days of Christ and his Apostles?" No, this
          is not what I mean, because it must differ in some of its
          bearings from those institutions. "Wherein?" In this respect, if
          nothing more--Peter and the rest of the Apostles having done what
          we are doing now, that is, talked about that "standard," and the
          restoration of the kingdom and government to Israel, said to
          Jesus, "Lord, wilt thou at this time restore the kingdom to
          Israel?" That is, "Wilt thou at this time raise a standard with
          all the powers of government, break down the Roman Empire, and
          give the kingdom and the greatness of the kingdom under the whole
          heaven to thy Saints, that so all Israel may be saved?" So far
          from a satisfactory answer being given to Peter and the Apostles,
          the Saviour said, "It is not for you to know the times or the
          seasons" when this shall be done, letting alone doing it, for the
          knowledge of these times "the Father hath put in his own power."
          Jesus did not turn round and answer them as the sectarians
          would--"You are entirely mistaken, my kingdom will always be a
          spiritual kingdom; and you will be very much disappointed if you
          look for anything else." He virtually said--"Suffice it to say,
          it is not given to you Apostles to hold the keys of my kingdom in
          that day and age of the world, or even to know the time that I
          will do that work." "Well, Lord, what will you have us to do? As
          the Scriptures are more full upon that subject than almost any
          other, for kings and Prophets spoke of little else, and you will
          not tell us of that, but reserve it for some other people, and to
          be known at some other time, which we are not to know, what is it
          you would have us to do?" "Simply be witnesses of me in
          Jerusalem, Samaria, and in the uttermost parts of the earth.
          Baptize the people, if they will repent, after you have taught
          them to believe in me, their eternal King and great High Priest,
          who rose from the dead, and ascended up on high in your presence,
          to reign in heaven, and eventually upon the earth. Go and tell
          the people that, and let them repent, and turn to me with full
          purpose of heart, and know that I am the law, and the way, and
          the truth; and if they shall keep my words, they shall have
          eternal life; and if they do not, they shall remain in
          condemnation. If they hear you, they hear me; and if they receive
          you, they receive me; and if they receive me, they receive him
          that sent me; and if they reject you, they reject me, and
          whatsoever they do to you, it is the same as though they did it
          to me. You are my ambassadors, my representatives, my ministers,
          and if they do good to you, it is the same as though they did it
          to me. If they discard you, and believe not your words, and
          withhold their hands from helping you to carry out the principles
          of truth, it is the same as though they did it unto me." "But,
          master, how shall we establish a standard of government, and
          peace, so as to maintain these principles?" "You cannot do it."
          Did Jesus Christ and his Apostles say these things in so many
          words? No. But in words that amounted to the same thing. Says
          he--"The time cometh, that whosoever killeth you will think that
          he doeth God service." And unto Peter, the head of the Apostles,
          Jesus said, speaking of the death Peter should die--"When thou
          shall be old, thou shalt stretch forth thy hands, and another
          shall gird thee, and carry thee whither thou wouldest not." Jesus
          told his servants they would be scourged from city to city, and
          from place to place, and from synagogue to synagogue, and be
          overcome, for another power would rise different from the kingdom
          of God, and it should make war with them, and overcome them, and
          be drunken with the blood of the Saints, and hold dominion over
          all the kings of the earth, over every tribe and tongue and
          people, until the word of God should be fulfilled; therefore they
          were not to think to gather the people, to establish a kingdom or
          government on the earth, for they could not do it. There was
          another power to rise, that would put their power down, and bear
          rule over all nations, and all nations would be deceived by it.
          179
          Now you take the instructions of the Apostles to the Saints in
          former days, and the manifestations of the Lord to the last of
          the Twelve while he was on the Isle of Patmos, and see if they do
          not amount to the above.
          179
          Well, then, give us a dispensation like the one they had, one
          fitted to the New Testament; and it is simply to run through the
          world, and witness of the manifestations of the Lord of life and
          glory in the flesh, and his resurrection from the dead; to call
          upon the people to repent and be baptized, and give them the
          first principles of the Gospel, and prepare them to reign in
          yonder world of glory, so far as they could by being faithful
          through the Gospel; and as fast as they were baptized, say to
          them, "You may expect to be killed, and if you are not willing to
          lay down your life, do not put your name among us, nor be
          baptized at all, for the wicked will make war with the Saints and
          overcome them." To repent, and be baptized, and receive the
          Gospel for the remission of sins, be killed and go home to glory,
          was the Gospel the ancient Apostles preached. I say. if we had a
          dispensation precisely like that which Peter and the rest of the
          former-day Apostles had, that is just as far as we could I carry
          it. Where is the place where we could build up the kingdom of
          God? No where. If you lived in Rome (and Rome was the world), and
          submitted to its butcheries, until the words of God should he
          fulfilled, you would be slain and go into yonder world.
          179
          Hence the kingdom of God had to be set up twice, once in the days
          of Peter, wherein those who obeyed the Gospel ordinances had to
          submit to the Roman power and be killed. After they are killed,
          and the Priesthood is taken from the earth, and the keys of it
          are gone from the earth also, or hid up, so that no body holds
          them, and all nations are deceived, as it was written by the
          Revelator John, by this ruling power, which is nothing more nor
          less than Rome, for that was the world then known--after all
          this, when the time comes for the word of God to be fulfilled,
          and for a standard to be set up, what does this book, the Bible,
          say? What does Jesus Christ himself say? "There shall be signs in
          the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars, and upon the earth
          distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves
          roaring; men's hearts failing them for fear;" and he goes on to
          say that when you shall see these things come to pass, then know
          that the kingdom of God is at hand.
          179
          The Millerites mistook it, and thought it meant, then know that
          the kingdom of the Lord Jesus Christ is just at the door. A great
          many have been mistaken on this subject, among Christian
          communities, so called. But if they had searched diligently to
          know, they would not have taken the second advent of Messiah, and
          put it in the place of his kingdom, to be at hand when you see
          the signs begin to take place; then "know ye, that the kingdom of
          God is nigh at hand."
          180
          Now it is evident that the kingdom of God was to be set up
          twice--at two distinct times, or else the whole matter is a
          mistake from the beginning to the end, because John the Baptist
          said it was at hand in his day, Jesus Christ said the same, the
          Apostles and Seventies said, in their days, that it was right at
          the door. And then Jesus Christ predicted a whole string of
          events, including the destruction of Jerusalem, and the
          dispersion of the Jews. He then predicted signs that were to be
          seen in the sun, moon, and stars, and said, lo! "the kingdom of
          God is nigh at hand." Just as sure as the sun shines, the kingdom
          had to be set up twice, or there is no meaning to the Book, and
          the last, too, at the time the Millerites and others have set for
          the personal appearance of the Saviour.
          180
          The Lord, in speaking to his Apostles, said, "It is not given for
          you to know the times or the seasons, which the Father hath put
          in his own power." What would he say to the Apostles in the last
          days? He would say quite the reverse of this--"To you it is given
          to know the times and the seasons, because you are the very men
          to do that work, but my old Apostles were only to bear witness of
          me to the world. As the received traditions and religion of the
          world were at war with the principle of the resurrection
          presented in my body, I required my ancient Apostles to bear
          witness of it in Jerusalem and Samaria, and to the uttermost part
          of the earth, where-ever they could find followers. But I now
          will raise up you and other men, and ordain you, and cause keys
          of power to be committed to you, as in days of old, in the same
          Gospel ordinances and spirit; but when they come, you will not be
          required to fulfil any such thing as my servants did anciently,
          which was, to bear witness, preach repentance, baptize the
          people, and be killed. You will know the times and the seasons,
          which the Father put in His own power, and which my other
          Apostles could not know, and then go to work with your mights and
          fulfil it."
          180
          Hence the gathering of the Saints; the organization of the
          kingdom of God, religiously and politically, if you will; the
          revelation of the law of God, and the new and everlasting
          covenant made to Abraham of old and his seed, which has never
          been altered by the Lord, only lost to the people. Paul said that
          the law given upon Mount Sinai, four hundred and thirty years
          after that covenant was made, might not disannul it. Jesus Christ
          was that man spoken of when God said, "In thee and in thy seed
          shall all nations of the earth be blessed." Thus, Paul and Jesus,
          in so many words, confirmed the covenant made with Abraham, that
          neither the law of Moses nor Jesus Christ ever disannulled. What
          was it? A great many things, but the principal thing was, "I will
          greatly multiply thy seed;" in short, a law was given him by
          which he and his posterity should be regulated and governed, with
          regard to matrimony and posterity.
          180
          Now, then, to restore the new and everlasting covenant made with
          Abraham, and not disannulled by Moses, the Prophets, Jesus
          Christ, and the Apostles; to restore an organization of
          principles, of law; a development that would make a standard to
          regulate families, households, and kingdoms in every respect;
          that would be to fulfil the words of Isaiah, where he says, I
          will "set up my standard to the people;" then I will gather you.
          Going to work to gather them to a standard set up by modern
          professors would be nonsense, for it would not chime in with the
          law that governed Abraham and his family matters, when he and a
          great many others should come together and sit down in the
          kingdom of God. Such a standard would be lame in some points.
          181
          If I were a Jew, you might cry to me and preach to me until
          doomsday, and then take a sword, and hold it over me to sever my
          head from my body, but I should say, "I will not move one step to
          the standard that is not Abraham's, nor from the everlasting
          covenant in which my fathers Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, and all
          the holy Prophets will come and sit down in the presence of God,
          upon the same principles with their modern children. I am a Jew,
          and my hope is in the covenants of the fathers. If you nations
          who are not numbered in that covenant wish to be blessed, it must
          be in that covenant, and in no other way; and you cannot bring me
          any other standard that is a lawful one. You may teach me
          Christianity, as you call it; you may try to govern me by a
          republican government, as you call it; and ten thousand other
          things; but when you have taught them all to me, neither for your
          fire, your sword, your government, your religion, your threats,
          nor anything else will I ever embrace any other system but the
          standard, the covenant, in which all my nation, all the Ten
          Tribes and the scattered remnants can be blessed; a covenant that
          will look them up, with all the Gentile world; and raise all the
          ancients from the dead, and by which all can sit down together in
          the same kingdom, and be governed by the same principles,
          covenants, laws, and ordinances for ever." That is the
          stubbornness I should have in my nature, if I were a Jew. And the
          blood that flows quick through my veins tells me I am not one
          whit behind the Jew; it tells me I am of the seed of Abraham,
          Isaac, and Jacob; therefore I am just about as hard as they are
          to believe in anything but a full and complete standard, a
          development of that system which will organize me and my house,
          and all the people, whether Jew or Gentile, that will embrace it,
          in all the world, if they will repent. I read it, in so many
          words of the good old Prophet, that "the nation and kingdom that
          will not serve thee shall perish; yea, those nations shall be
          utterly wasted." I would say to king Agrippa, if he were here
          to-day, "Believest thou the Prophets?" If the world would
          believe, then, the whole of their kingcraft, and priestcraft, and
          confused systems would soon pass away, and the covenant made with
          Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, and to which the Prophets, Jesus, and
          the Apostles looked forward, would be established.
          182
          "When ye see these things come to pass, know ye that the kingdom
          of God is nigh at hand." Is it a system of government, to
          organize and gather the people? Yes, a people that will not have
          their heads cut off any more by that government that has deceived
          the whole world, and drunk the blood of the Saints of the Most
          High. It is a kingdom that the wicked will not be permitted again
          to possess or destroy. How shall we look for it? It will be one
          of the smallest of governments upon this earth, to which a grain
          of mustard seed is brought as a comparison. When we see the signs
          in the sun, moon, and stars, and among different nations, it
          proves that the kingdom of God is nigh at hand; we may then begin
          to look around for it. We must not look to Russia, or to England,
          to become this kingdom, but to the smallest of the governments in
          this world, one so small that it is compared to a grain or
          mustard seed. Where must we look for it? In the very spot where
          it has room to grow, and in its smallness be overshadowed with
          weeds and plants of other kinds; so we must look for its
          organization, establishment, and development in some country
          where that little few compose the majority, and should rule. Now
          with these great characteristics, and plain directions, which any
          man can gather from the Bible, we need not look to any other
          place where we may find this kingdom. Then among the Saints right
          here, where they compose the majority, where there is not another
          larger government, where they are hemmed in with mountains, and
          can establish peace, and a kingdom, and a government, and a law.
          "Well," says one, "you are a republican government; how does that
          chime in with the word kingdom?" It matters not as to the outward
          name, whether it takes the name of republic or kingdom, or this,
          that, or the other; it is not the name that does the business. We
          call England a monarchy, because its Presidency perpetually comes
          from one line, it is hereditary. We call the United States a
          republican government, because they put in a man to rule, and put
          him out once in four years. I have been in both countries, and
          lived and acted more or less under the two governments. I went to
          England with a good deal of prejudice; for I was brought up to
          believe that a republican government was the only good government
          in the world, and the British were made to be killed off. When my
          brother Orson began to speak at all, the first word which I can
          remember he ever said, was--"Why, dad's gone to shoot the
          British." So I must have gone there more or less prejudiced
          against that government. What is the fact, against all these
          prejudices of early life? It is, that government is tolerably
          good in both countries. The United States have the best
          institutions of the two, but I tell you, if they had carried them
          out better for us, we might have been here, not so poor as we are
          to-day. I like England the better of the two; not because her
          institutions are better, but because they are carried out better.
          A government well carried out is better than any other form of
          government not carried out. You may spread your forms on paper,
          but paper will lie a long time before it will take off a man's
          head for breaking the law.
          183
          Here we are, and, thank God for it, a small government, you may
          call it a republican government, or what you please; but the
          spirit, and Gospel, and law, and principles of union are here,
          and nobody can help it. There is no law against unity, against
          being baptized, against receiving the administration of angels,
          or the keys of the Apostleship, against laying hands on others
          that men may be filled with the Holy Ghost. There is no law
          against these things, thank God. This makes us united, it makes
          us do our duty, and remain in the spirit of oneness and in faith,
          operating diligently upon the principles developed by revelation
          upon revelation, and precept upon precept, and law upon law, and
          truth upon truth. We find ourselves a government organized upon
          these great principles, and a government in peace. This
          government has to maintain its character, and become a standard,
          having developed in it every principle for the salvation of the
          living and the dead; to hold the keys of the Priesthood that bear
          rule in heaven, on earth, and in hell, and maintain a people
          built upon it, which is all necessary in order to become a
          standard. To this the Ten Tribes will look, to this will look the
          scattered remnants that are aware of the promise to Abraham, that
          in his seed, and not in some other Priesthood and lineage, shall
          all the nations and people of the earth be blessed. Where should
          they look, if we were to be scattered abroad, if we should come
          to a standstill, and stick our stakes, and say to the Almighty
          and to His servants--"We will do this, and that, and that is what
          we will not do, but we will go our own way?" Suppose now the
          spirit of prophecy should descend upon the Ten Tribes of Israel,
          and they smite the mountains of ice by the word of God, and the
          mountains flow down, and their Prophets travel abroad to search
          the world through, for they have seen the signs in the heavens,
          and they feel like the wise men of the east as they inquired for
          the Saviour; suppose the Ten Tribes come and inquire--"Where is
          the Temple of God, for we have seen the signs in the heavens;
          where shall we find it?" and we were to scatter and divide, and
          lose the Spirit of God, and become sectarians, or something
          worse; the Ten Tribes would then have to search with a lighted
          candle, and could not find the Temple here, and I defy them to
          find it anywhere else.
          183
          "Now, then, brother Pratt, we have embraced all this good Gospel,
          which you tell about. We have been baptized, we have come into
          the new and everlasting covenant, we are one, our sins are
          forgiven us, and we have received a portion of the Holy Ghost."
          Having availed ourselves of all these things, what we are, as
          individuals, we have gained together as number one and two, and
          all are justified together, and the common interests of the
          kingdom are carried out. Some may say, "There are warmer climates
          than this, why not go to them, and accommodate ourselves better
          than we can here? Besides that, there are places where men get
          more gold and silver, and can buy sugar, fruit, &c., where wood
          is plentiful, and where the country presents more beautiful
          scenery, and is more like Paradise than this place is; the whole
          earth is before us, why can we not go and possess it where we
          please? Why can we not go and serve ourselves awhile, and let the
          kingdom of God take care of itself, or let these good, pious
          Elders and Apostles that are so attached to it, take care of it?"
          If it is right for you to set your minds upon warmer climates,
          upon more convenient timber, and upon making money, then it is
          right for every one of us to do the same. If it is right for you,
          it is right for our President, and his Council, and the Twelve,
          and everybody else. If each person should get his own way, go to
          where the climate will suit him best, where there are a market
          and all other conveniences, I want to know, then, where the
          kingdom of God is? What worldly government could you live under,
          as the kingdom God, when you had satisfied these desires? Just
          point your finger to the place, on this wide earth, where there
          is any better climate than this, any better market than this,
          where the staple necessaries and conveniences of life exist in
          greater abundance than they do here. Point your finger to such a
          place, and convince me by mathematical demonstration that this
          people can live there, and be a majority there, and reign there,
          and maintain the kingdom of God there, and I am not sure but I
          will go with you, and, I believe, the President will, and I think
          the Lord would be pleased with it. If we had such a place, and
          could go and enjoy it, who cares? The less time it will take to
          get a living, the more time we shall have to attend to the
          teaching of others, and the more convenience to gather them to
          it. I do not know that the Lord would have any objection to it,
          if you could name such a place.
          184
          What kind of a government is the out yonder, west of us? The very
          scum floods out of the United States into that goodly land, that
          golden country; there is a concentration of jargon, ignorance,
          folly, corruption, and abomination, all gathered together in one
          focus, and then corrupting itself after being made of corruption.
          A Saint of God might put all the advantages of climate, timber,
          soil, trade, and money together in the world, and he could not
          live under that government. Why did you not stop in Rome, and
          serve God there? You were in a fine country, a salubrious
          climate, the timber was handy, and you possessed a delightful
          situation. Why? Because the Apostles could not live under the
          Roman Government without being killed; and how could you do it
          without sharing the same fate? If you did live in Rome, you
          cannot say that the government is according to the covenant made
          with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. Why not stay in England? It is a
          fine climate, and, in many respects, it has a good soil, with
          trade, and plenty of coal for fuel. Why not stay in the United
          States, where you can get sugar for three cents. per pound? Why
          did you ever leave your countries, your native homes, to come
          here? Look at these snow-clad mountains, and naked plains--look
          at the scarcity of timber, and the difficulty of travelling such
          a distance to get here, and so far from any market. Bless your
          soul, you will not find conveniences in the world, anywhere,
          handier than they are here! Why not stay where you were? "Why,"
          you say, "I thought I should get a little instruction here, that
          I could not get anywhere else; but, having got that instruction,
          I thought to enjoy it, and go where I pleased." My view of the
          subject is this--to gather, and stay gathered, to be organized
          into the government of God, and call it what you please as to
          name. They used the word kingdom in ancient times, meaning
          nothing more nor less than government. We should stay gathered,
          and count one in schools, in meetings, in paying tithing, in
          paying taxes, in acting our part as members of the community;
          count one when men are needed, if necessary, to go against the
          savages; count one in influence, in beauty, in spirit, in faith,
          and in works; to build Temples, to attend to the ordinances, and
          administer to the living and the dead, and set an example worthy
          of imitation. What would a million of people do if they were all
          doing this, under one covenant, being actuated by the same
          spirit, baptized by one baptism? They would be a million of that
          faith, a million of that spirit, a million of that light and
          truth, a million possessing the very powers of peace, and heaven,
          and Zion in their bosoms. What would they do? Why, the world
          itself would see their light. Like a lighted candle on a
          candlestick, it could not be hid. Do you want riches? This is
          gold, it is silver, it is clothing, it is bone, it is sinew, it
          is industry and power. It will come flowing to you like a flowing
          stream. Your Apostles and your First Presidency, instead of being
          perplexed with the cares of this world, as to how to plow their
          fields, or build their cabins, would not have time scarcely to go
          out of yonder temple to get their breakfast, if we had the temple
          built. To a people thus consolidated, nations of the earth would
          come. The kings and queens, and governors and rulers, and a great
          many of the house of Israel, and people of influence and power
          out of all nations, would come. They would say, "The Lord is
          there, the power of God is there;" and if they had any money they
          would make a deposit of it there, for the nations would be
          breaking up, and the people would want to escape with their life
          from war, and distress of nations. The people would say, "There
          is where we will go to find safety, for there the inhabitants
          live in union, they have the light of eternal truth, while other
          people are in darkness and ignorance without measure. Those happy
          people know how to unite and defend themselves: it is not their
          numbers that constitute their strength, but it is their union,
          and, of course, their numbers have an influence."
          185
          If one man is mighty, there are more mighty. If a man wants the
          riches of time and eternity, let him have a good government,
          education, and the laws of heaven to bring up his children in the
          right way. He never will get rich as fast as he would if he
          co-operated with the kingdom of God. You know when anything is
          wanted of me, I am on hand all the time, though there would not
          be a man you could hire. Men will go to California, to the
          States, or anywhere else, but you could not get them to do it
          ordinarily without hiring them. But if you appoint them to take a
          mission without purse or scrip, the same as an angel, they will
          go to hell, if the Lord will give them a mission there, and be
          mighty glad to get back as soon as they have done it.
          185
          I have detained you too long. May the Lord bless you. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, June 19, 1853
                            Brigham Young, June 19, 1853
             WHERE THE WICKED GO--CONTINUAL OPPOSITION TO AND PREJUDICE
                                       AGAINST
          THE TRUTH--THE JUDGES AND THE DELEGATE OF UTAH--THE SPIRIT OF GOD
                 AND THE SPIRIT OF THE WORLD--POTENCY OF THE GOSPEL.
            An address delivered by President B. Young in the Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, June 19, 1853.
          185
          I do not feel like making a military or a political speech on the
          present occasion; but I wish to say a few words in reference to
          some of the items that have occupied the tongue and the lips of
          so many of this community.
          185
          The expression, "Old Zechariah Taylor is dead and in hell, and I
          am glad of it," which the returning officers, in their Report,
          alleged was said by me, I do not know that I ever thought of,
          until I heard Brocchus himself mention it on the stand in the Old
          Bowery. When he made the statement there, I simply bore testimony
          to the truth of it. But until then, I do not know that it ever
          came into my mind whether Taylor was in hell or not, any more
          than it did that any other wicked man was there. I suppose he is
          where all the ignorant wicked are gone, and where they will
          continue to go. The Bible declares that the Lord Almighty turns
          the wicked into hell, with all the nations that forget God. But I
          did not suppose that Zechariah Taylor could be classed with those
          that forget God, for he never knew anything about Him. I am
          confident that such a thing was never mentioned by me.
          186
          When wicked men die--Zechariah Taylor, or any other wicked man,
          they go to hell. This has been explained to a congregation in
          this hall by Elder Hyde, and also in the Frontier Guardian. If as
          good a man as Jesus Christ went to hell, we may well expect that
          a wicked and ungodly man will go there to atone for his sins.
          Enough upon that matter: suffice it to say, that all, when they
          die, go somewhere; and if the people want to know particularly
          where they are going when they die, let them read the Bible and
          learn. As for this people, as for the disturbances and Reports of
          the returned judges, as for the say so of one nation, and all the
          nations upon the earth, I am entirely unconcerned; but I hope one
          thing concerning this people and kingdom of God which are
          established upon the earth, that they will turn neither to the
          right nor to the left, but maintain continually a steady and
          unslackened pace to build up the cause of truth. Let small men or
          large men, officers of state or citizens, kings or beggars, say
          or do what they please, it is all the same to the Almighty. The
          king upon his throne, the president in his chair, the judges upon
          the bench, and the beggar in the street, are all overruled in
          their actions by the Almighty God of heaven and earth. Who can
          successfully fight against Him? All persons who are acquainted
          with this kingdom, who knew Joseph Smith from his boyhood, from
          the time the Lord revealed to him where the plates containing the
          matter in the Book of Mormon were deposited, from the time the
          first revelation was given to him, and as far back as he was
          known, in anywise whatever, as a person professing to have
          received a visitation from heaven--all must know that as much
          priestcraft as was then within the circle of the knowledge of
          Joseph Smith, Jun., he had to bear on his back, and to lift from
          time to time. On the other hand, as his name spread abroad, and
          the principles of the Gospel began to be more extensively taught,
          in the same proportion he had more to bear. The Lord began to
          raise him up, and endow him with wisdom and power that astonished
          both his friends and his foes. Did Joseph rise? He did. Did his
          influence grow and spread far and wide? It did. Under what
          circumstances? Why, with all the influence and power that could
          possibly be arrayed against him, by priests and people, by
          doctors and lawyers, judges and juries, backed up by the whole
          mass of the wicked world. All this he had to raise up, and carry
          with him.
          186
          If anything oppose the progress of this great work, if any
          person, whether great or small, should stand in the way of it, do
          you suppose it will stop? Do you think the great car will stay in
          its onward progress, because some infernal scoundrel stands on
          the track? No; but the wheels will roll over him, and crush him,
          until, like the pig brother Bernhisel spoke of, he will "die all
          over."
          186
          I admit it is hard for our Elders, for our brethren that are
          abroad, when anything of a transverse nature occurs in the midst
          of this people, especially in our present organization. It is
          hard for our Elders to meet with interruptions in their course,
          to meet with, and have to combat, the prejudices of the people.
          But who causes prejudice against this people? Do they cause it
          themselves? No. It is the wicked. They court it, and nourish and
          cherish it; they suck it in like the infant child the mother's
          milk, they love it, they languish for it; it is their food, it is
          their life. Why do they love it? Because it is falsehood.
          186
          Do the righteous of this people cause persecution to come upon
          themselves? No. Do the principles of the Gospel create prejudice
          and persecution against them? No. But it is the disposition of
          the wicked to oppose the principles of truth and righteousness,
          which cause it.
          187
          When the officers returned from this territory to the States, did
          we send them away? We did not. But I will tell you what I did,
          and what I will do again--I did chastise the mean ruffian, the
          poor miserable creature, who came here by the name of Brocchus,
          when he arose before this people to preach to them, and tell them
          of meanness which he supposed they were guilty of, and traduce
          their character. But they bore the insult like Saints of God. It
          is true, as it is said in the Report of these officers, if I had
          crooked my little finger, he would have been used up, but I did
          not bend it. If I had, the sisters alone felt indignant enough to
          have chopped him in pieces. I did not, however, do it, but
          suffered him to fill up the measure of his shame and iniquity
          until his cup is running over. He was not hurt in the least.
          187
          With regard to the four different Reports of those judges, which
          were in existence at the same time, brother Bernhisel seems to
          wonder how they came. I know how they came. Some friends of those
          judges, thinking they could better the matter for them, were the
          authors of those extra Reports. But those friends found that the
          Reports did not answer their expectations, and those officers
          themselves would not acknowledge who wrote them. In this
          instance, they over-shot their mark, and foiled, in a signal
          manner, their own purposes.
          187
          There is one circumstance the doctor did not relate, which is
          worthy of notice. Secretary Harris stated that he did sign Doctor
          Bernhisel's certificate, but that he was intimidated by Governor
          Young, and dare not but do it. How could this be, when no person
          knew about this signing, but the doctor and Harris? Thus every
          man that operates against the truth, will forestall himself, and
          be confounded by his own arguments and operations in every
          movement and act that he shall perform; it will all work to his
          own injury and disgrace. Every man that comes to impose upon this
          people, no matter by whom they are sent, or who they are that are
          sent, lay the axe at the root of the tree to kill themselves. I
          will do as I said I would, last Conference. Apostates, or men who
          never made any profession of religion, had better be careful how
          they come here, lest I should bend my little finger.
          187
          If the congregation wish to know if we are well situated for
          territorial officers at the present time, I will say, for their
          information, I believe we are. I will speak for this people, and
          say, we cannot be situated better in that respect than we are at
          the present time, so far as we know. One of our judges, Judge
          Shaver, has been here through the winter, and, as far as he is
          known, he is a straightforward, judicious, upright man, and a
          good adjudicator in the law. This I believe, and so do others who
          are acquainted with his acts. He cannot be beaten among Jews or
          Gentiles. He and Judge Reid, who has lately arrived, I believe
          will do the best they can, and all is right. They have not come
          here with the impression that we are going to send them as our
          delegates to Washington, as others did, so they are not
          disappointed. As far as I know, we are just as well situated in
          this respect as we need ask to be.
          187
          I have no fears whatever of Franklin Pierce excusing me from
          office, and saying that another man shall be the Governor of this
          territory. At the beginning of our settlements here, when we sent
          Almon W. Babbit to Washington with our Constitution for a State
          Government, and to ask leave to adopt it, he requested that I
          should not sign my name to it as Governor; "for" said he, "if you
          do, it will thwart all your plans." I said, "My name will go as
          it is in that document, and stay there from this time henceforth
          and for ever. Now," I continued, "if you do not believe it, you
          may go to Washington, and give those papers to Doctor Bernhisel,
          and operate against him, and against our getting a State
          Government, and you cannot hinder it, I will be Governor still,
          after you have done every thing you possibly can to prevent it."
          188
          We have got a Territorial Government, and I am and will be
          Governor, and no power can hinder it, until the Lord Almighty
          says, "Brigham, you need not be Governor any longer;" and then I
          am willing to yield to another Governor. I have told you the
          truth about that. I entertain no concern about it, or about the
          changing of any of our other officers; we are well enough off in
          this respect at present.
          188
          It came into my mind when brother Bernhisel was speaking, and the
          same thing strikes me now, that is, inasmuch as he has done
          first-rate, as our delegate in Washington, to move that we send
          him again next season, though it is the Sabbath Day. I understand
          these things, and say as other people say, "We are Mormons." We
          do things that are necessary to be done, when the time comes for
          us to do them. If we wish to make political speeches, and it is
          necessary, for the best interest of the cause and kingdom of God,
          to make them on the Sabbath, we do it. Now, suffer not your
          prejudices to hurt you, do not suffer this to try you, nor be
          tempted in consequence of it, nor think we are wandering out of
          the way, for it is all embraced in our religion, from first to
          last.
          188
          Brother Kimball has seconded the motion, that Doctor Bernhisel be
          sent back to Washington, as our delegate. All who are in favour
          of it, raise your right hands. [More than two thousand hands were
          at once seen above the heads of the congregation.]
          188
          This has turned into a caucus meeting. It is all right. I would
          call for an opposite vote if I thought any person would vote. I
          will try it, however. [Not a single hand was raised in
          opposition.]
          188
          I will now say, not only to our delegate to Congress, but to the
          Elders who leave the body of the Church, that he thought that all
          the cats and kittens were let out of the bag when brother Pratt
          went back last fall, and published the Revelation concerning the
          plurality of wives: it was thought there was no other cat to let
          out. But allow me to tell you, Elders of Israel, and delegates to
          Congress, you may expect an eternity of cats, that have not yet
          escaped from the bag. Bless your souls, there is no end to them,
          for if there is not one thing, there will always be another.
          188
          Do you suppose that this people will ever see the day that they
          will rest in perfect security, in hopes of becoming like another
          people, nation, state, kingdom, or society? They never will.
          Christ and Satan never can be friends. Light and darkness will
          always remain opposites. The kingdom of God and the kingdom of
          Satan will always remain two kingdoms; and so long as they are,
          you will find from time to time that the citizens of Satan's
          kingdom will be telling you of cats that are ready to leap out of
          the bag, of something that is wonderful and alarming in its
          nature, as much so as the circumstance which brother Bernhisel
          touched at, which created a great excitement in Washington--that
          we had revolted from the parent Government, and hoisted the flag
          of our independence. I know how that report originated. The
          letter containing this startling intelligence, and purporting to
          have been received at California from this place, was written in
          Washington. After the originators had failed in their object,
          they supposed that nothing more would be said about it, but the
          whole of the United States believed the report to be true, and
          thought that all the citizens in Utah were rebels.
          189
          Do you understand the reason why such feelings exist against this
          people? Go to the United States, into Europe, or wherever you can
          come across men who have been in the midst of this people, and
          one will tell you that we are a poor, ignorant, deluded people;
          the next will tell you that we are the most industrious and
          intelligent people on the earth, and are destined to rise to
          eminence as a nation, and spread, and continue to spread, until
          we revolutionize the whole earth. If you pass on to the third
          man, and inquire what he thinks of the "Mormons," he will say
          they are fools, duped and led astray by Joe Smith, who was a
          knave, a false Prophet, and a money digger. Why is all this? It
          is because there is a spirit in man. And when the Gospel of Jesus
          Christ is preached on the earth, and the kingdom of God is
          established, there is also a spirit in these things, and an
          Almighty spirit too. When these two spirits come in contact one
          with the other, the spirit of the Gospel reflects light upon the
          spirit which God has placed in man, and wakes him up to a
          consciousness of his true state, which makes him afraid he will
          be condemned, for he perceives at once that "Mormonism" is true.
          "Our craft is in danger," is the first thought that strikes the
          wicked and dishonest of mankind, when the light of truth shines
          upon them. Say they, "If these people called Latter-day Saints
          are correct in their views, the whole world must be wrong, and
          what will become of our time-honoured institutions, and of our
          influence, which we have swayed successfully over the minds of
          the people for ages. This Mormonism must be put down." So
          priestcraft presents a bold and extended front against the truth,
          and with this we have to contend, this is our deadliest foe.
          189
          Why should there be any more excitement when a public officer is
          chastised in Utah for publicly insulting a loyal people, than
          there would be if a similar occurrence transpired in Oregon,
          Minnesota, or any other territory? It is because we are
          Latter-day Saints. And let me tell you the Devil has put the
          whole world on the watch against us. It is impossible for us to
          make the least move without exciting, if not all the world, at
          least a considerable portion of it. They are excited at what we
          do, and, strange to relate, they are no less excited at what we
          do not do.
          189
          You will find that there will be cats and kittens leaping out of
          the bag continually. "What can come next, I wonder!" I do not
          know; but this I know, the Lord Almighty will not suffer the
          Saints, neither the world, to slumber upon their oars. The time
          is past for them to fold their hands, and say, "Yet a little
          sleep, a little slumber, a little folding of the hands." This
          people will never see that day, for the Lord will keep them on
          the alert all the time; they will continually have something to
          contend with to keep them from dropping to sleep, and it is no
          matter to me as to what means He may use to do it.
          189
          Inasmuch as we send brother Bernhisel back to Washington, I say
          to him, Fear not their faces, nor their power, for we are
          perfectly prepared to take all the nations of the earth on our
          back; they are there already, and we will round up our shoulders,
          and bear up the ponderous weight, carry the Gospel to the
          uttermost parts of the earth, gather Israel, redeem Zion, and
          continue our operations until we bind Satan, and the kingdoms of
          this world become the kingdom of our Lord and His Christ; and no
          power can hinder it.
          189
          I care not what may come, I will do the work the Lord has
          appointed unto me. You do the same, and fear not, for the Lord
          manages the helm of the ship of Zion; and on any other ship I do
          not wish to be. As I once said to Sydney Rigdon, our boat is an
          old snag boat, and has never been out of snag harbor, but it will
          root up the snags, run them down, split them up, and scatter them
          to the four winds. Our ship is the old ship of Zion. Nothing that
          runs foul of it can resist the shock and fire.
          190
          The hue and cry in the world about this people is--"What an awful
          set of people these Mormons are! Why, they are a dreadful
          people!" What makes them so? "They are Mormons." And that is all
          the people can say about the matter.
          190
          Do you know what it is that scares the world? As I have already
          said, it is the Spirit of the Lord that is placed in man, and the
          reflection of light from it upon his spirit wakes up the
          sensibilities in him, and creates conviction. That Spirit, with
          the Gospel of Christ, interrupts the whole world in their common
          career, in every capacity of life. That Spirit does not chime in
          and harmonize with any earthly kingdom or government, either in
          their political or religious institutions; but it seems to put a
          check upon every thing, to throw into disorder the best laid
          plans of the wise and far-seeing among men; in short, it turns
          the whole current of earthly calculations back upon the world,
          and deluges it in the dark waters of confusion.
          190
          As this kingdom of God knows, spreads, increases, and prospers in
          its course, it will cleanse, thoroughly purge, and purify the
          world from wickedness. He who supposes his house to be built upon
          a rock, and well calculated to withstand any test that may be
          applied to it, finds, when it is tried by the Gospel of the
          kingdom, that its foundation proves to be sand, and the whole
          fabric appears nothing in which a man may securely trust for
          salvation. One of the weakest of our Elders, I mean one of our
          boys, who is conversant with the Bible, is well qualified to
          instruct the learned priest, confound in Bible doctrine the
          greatest theologians upon the earth, and throw into confusion,
          and interrupt, and fill with contradictions and inconsistencies,
          their choicest theories.
          190
          Imagine to yourselves a learned doctor of divinity, securely
          surrounded with the bulwarks of his religious lore, pampered with
          the applause of thousands who hang on his skirts for religious
          instructions; he is satisfied that he knows and understands the
          Bible from the beginning to the end of it, and is capable of
          withstanding all creation upon Bible doctrine, and is as well
          skilled in theological researches as a man can be--imagine this
          great man sailing triumphantly over the sea of time, and the
          little unassuming bark, the boy, darts along, and strikes this
          proud hulk, this great, tremendous vessel, and pierces it through
          below the water mark; it begins to sink, and turns to make
          battle, but the little craft hits it on the keel and capsizes it,
          sinking it in shame and bitter disappointment. Such will be the
          fate of all who will oppose the truth.
          190
          The report of the Gospel of Jesus Christ terrifies the people, it
          goes forth with such gigantic strides. When this Church first
          commenced, I used to say to the people, "If you do not like my
          preaching, when I do the best I can, I cannot help it, but if you
          will let us alone, and suffer us peaceably to enjoy our religion,
          we shall enjoy ourselves better together, as friends, neighbors,
          and citizens. If you will come to my house, I will give you your
          dinner and your supper, I will treat you hospitably, as one
          friend ought to treat another; and when I come into your
          neighborhood, do the same to me, for, in pursuing this course, we
          shall feel much better than if we suffered a difference of
          opinion to make us enemies. I will tell you what we will do--we
          will preach the Gospel, and revolutionize the whole earth, that
          is, if you will let us alone, but if you persecute us, we will do
          it quicker." This places the wicked in the same circumstances as
          the drunken man, who would fall down if he tried to stand, and
          fall if he tried to walk. So, if they will let us alone, we will
          evangelize the whole earth; and if they do not, we will do it the
          quicker.
          191
               How often, to all human appearance, has this kingdom been
          blotted out from the earth, but the Lord has put His hand over
          the people, and it has passed through, and come out two, three,
          and four times larger than before. Our enemies have kicked us and
          cuffed us, and driven us from pillar to post, and we have
          multiplied and increased the more, until we have become what we
          are this day, in possession of a territory with an appropriate
          government. Let them still continue to persecute us, and who
          cares? If they will let us alone, we will preach the Gospel to
          all nations, and gather Israel. If they continue to abuse us, we
          will overrun them entirely, until all shall be brought in
          subjection to the will of heaven.
          191
          Do not be afraid, whether you are at Washington or anywhere else,
          for we will progress. I say to brother Bernhisel and everybody
          else, Put your shoulders to the wheel, and do not go from this
          place with your hearts in your mouths, you that go to the
          nations, and be so faint that you have need to carry a bottle of
          camphor with you, but go like men of great hearts, and say, in
          the midst of your enemies--I stand here in the name of Him who
          sent me, and who has called me to defend the truth, which I am
          determined to do, whether I live or die.
          191
          God bless you all, brethren, in the name of Jesus Christ. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / George
          Albert Smith, October 7, 1853
                        George Albert Smith, October 7, 1853
           DISOBEDIENCE OF COUNSEL--THE INDIAN WAR THE RESULT OF THE SAME.
          An address delivered by Elder George A. Smith, in the Tabernacle,
          Great Salt Lake City, at the General Conference, October 7, 1853.
          191
          It is with pleasure that I have listened to the remarks of
          President Kimball. The sentiments he has advanced are true and
          just, and I am certain no person can have listened to them
          without having felt edified and instructed.
          192
          There is no doubt that a great proportion of the people who have
          been here in these valleys for years past, can bear witness to
          the counsel and instructions that have been given, for the
          preservation of the settlements, and the establishment of the
          stakes of Zion within the limits of these mountains. Perhaps
          those persons, when they see me arise to occupy the stand, will
          at once say within themselves. "We are going to hear something in
          relation to enlarging the new settlements, making entirely new
          ones, establishing iron works, or some other thing of that
          nature, to draw our feelings out of the channel they have run
          in," for it is so really certain, that I have scarcely attended a
          single Conference since I have been in the Valley, without having
          something of this kind to present during the term of Conference.
          I think, however, for the last year, it has not been my lot to
          address an assembly in this place, perhaps more than once or
          twice, and as I had been noted for short sermons and short
          prayers, my addresses have also been few. But although my voice
          has not been heard from this stand, I have not been silent,
          neither have I been idle.
          192
          I was appointed to preside over the affairs of the Church in the
          county of Utah. I have also made two trips annually through the
          southern portion of the territory, visiting all the Branches,
          taking considerable time and a great deal of interest in the
          affairs of Iron County, besides making as many missions to this
          place as were necessary, to obtain counsel, and acquire
          information to carry on the work entrusted to my charge.
          192
          Any man that knows the country, and is acquainted with the
          business that has been placed before me, will be aware, that,
          lazy as I might be, I have had plenty to occupy my thoughts, and
          to give me active exertion, at least for the past year, in the
          exercise of my ministry and calling.
          192
          I present myself before you, then, to offer a few reflections
          upon what I feel to be important for this Conference to consider
          for the safety, welfare, and protection of the Saints in the
          valleys of these mountains. I have been made familiar with the
          condition of our settlements south, and am aware somewhat of the
          condition of our settlements in other parts of the territory.
          192
          In the commencement of my remarks, I will say, that the people
          almost universally do not realize the importance of listening to
          the voice of God through His servant Brigham. My heart has been
          pained by the things that are past, when I have been travelling
          and laboring in different parts of the territory; it has been
          pained to see the carelessness and indifference with which the
          words of the Almighty, through His servant have been received.
          192
          Numbers were counselled to go to Iron County, and make there a
          strong settlement, sufficiently so to enable the people to
          protect themselves, and establish iron works. Many started in
          that direction, and succeeded in making the distance of from
          thirty to seventy miles, and concluded they had travelled far
          enough on good land without settling upon it.
          192
          Last spring, when President Young made his visit through the
          settlements, the county of Utah was very flourishing in
          appearance. Many splendid farms had been opened, and men were
          living upon them with the same security and carelessness as
          heretofore the people have done in the State of New York, where
          they need not fear the attacks of hostile Indians. The President
          had previously counselled them to settle in forts, and not
          scatter asunder so as to render themselves in a state of
          helplessness in the case of attack by the red men. Forts had
          accordingly been surveyed, and cities had been surveyed, where
          the people could gather together and fortify themselves; yet the
          great mass, I may say, or, at any rate, all the wealthy portions
          of them, had selected good farms, and were building good
          buildings, and making improvements upon them, and were dwelling
          safely, scattered all over the valley; a great many of them had
          lately come from England, and different parts of the world, and
          were in a flourishing condition; cattle were increasing around
          them, corn was growing in abundance, and fruit and all things
          seemingly were beginning to flourish exceedingly.
          193
          On viewing this state of things, I said to myself, "Is this to be
          the order of things? Are the people going to prosper in this way,
          while in open violation of the counsels that have been given,
          namely, to gather into forts?" I knew that that state of affairs
          would not continue a great length of time, and can call the men
          and women in every settlement to bear witness that I have
          publicly testified that that order of things could not remain;
          for when God has a Prophet on the earth, and that Prophet tells
          the people what to do, and they neglect to do it, they must
          suffer for it. I bear witness before you, this day, in the name
          of the Lord God of Israel, that no people can treat lightly the
          sayings of a Prophet of God, whom He places on the earth to
          direct His people, and prosper. I know it is impossible. I have
          borne this testimony to the settlements, in my preachings, when I
          have visited them. In reply, the folks would say, "There is no
          danger, brother Smith, if we do live in the country, upon our
          farms, for it is so unpleasant to live in town."
          193
          When President Young was going south last season, in one of the
          large meetings he addressed at Palmyra, in Utah County, he bore
          testimony, in the name of the Lord God of Israel, that if the
          people did not gather into cities and forts, and fortify
          themselves, they should be driven out of these mountains. If God
          had come down upon one of these mountains as He did upon Mount
          Sinai, and kicked up a tremendous thunder storm, I could not have
          been impressed with the truth of those remarks one particle more
          than I was on that occasion. I knew Brigham to be a Prophet of
          the Lord, and esteemed his words as the voice of God to the
          people.
          193
          I straightway commenced to encourage the people, and preached to
          them and proposed laying out a fort for them, when they would
          perhaps turn round and say, "Really, brother Smith, do you think
          there is any danger?" I would say within myself, "Here are
          hundreds and thousands of brethren that have never been proved;
          they have never borne the heat and burden of the day, but they
          are picking up the fat valleys of Ephraim, and selecting good
          farms, and securing to themselves beautiful situations, and
          making splendid improvements, and living in peace, and eating of
          the fat of the land, and forgetting their God. Can this state of
          things remain?"
          193
          I went to every settlement, and attempted to encourage them to
          fort, but failed to accomplish anything towards getting them to
          obey the word of the Lord on this matter. Some of them said they
          would move into forts in the fall of the year.
          193
          Some time in the summer, however, a man, known in these mountains
          by the name of Walker, found that the people cared nothing about
          God, or the instructions of brother Brigham, and brother George
          A., so he said, "I wonder if you will mind me;" and in less than
          one solitary week, he had more than three hundred families on the
          move, houses were thrown down in every direction, and I presume
          one hundred thousand dollars' worth of property was wasted.
          193
          Had the people listened to the counsel of President Young, in the
          first place and put their property in a proper place, it would
          have been protected. In the counties of Utah, Juab, and San Pete,
          the houses were vacated, and the Indians got into them, and shot
          the brethren, so they had to be entirely demolished, which
          rendered it necessary for great numbers to move into forts. This
          has been affected by brother Walker. That blood-thirsty Indian,
          in this matter, had more influence to make the Saints obey
          counsel than the Presidency of this Church had, and could
          actually kick up a bigger fuss in a few days than they could by
          simply telling the people the will of the Lord.
          194
          When God places a man on the earth to be His mouth, he says this
          or that is the law, and this is the thing for the people to obey.
          "Well, but," says one, "I cannot make as good a living in town as
          I can away out on a farm, where I can keep a great many cattle."
          It appears probable to me, you might make more by going to parts
          of California, or Australia, than you can make even out on a farm
          in this country. If your object is to make as much earthly gain
          as possible, why not go where you can get the most of it? This
          business of having one hand in the golden honey-pots of heaven,
          and the other in the dark regions of hell undertaking to serve
          both God and Mammon at once, will not answer.
          194
          Aside from the settlements in San Pete, I believe I have, more or
          less, been with nearly all the settlements south, and I have also
          visited the San Pete settlements two or three times, and I do
          know, that if the counsel and instructions of President Young
          could have been observed, it would have saved the people at least
          one hundred thousand dollars. And I do further know, to my
          satisfaction, that if the counsel of President Young had been
          observed, not one of the Saints would have lost his life by an
          Indian. I am certain of these facts; and yet occasionally some
          man falls a prey to some cruel savage, and whole villages have to
          be removed, and farms vacated, and tens of thousands of dollars'
          worth of damage is done all the time, because men will not live
          according to the instructions given to them by the Prophet of
          God. If you ask men to build in a fort, they will say, "It is a
          free country, and we can build where we please." I admit that a
          man is free to serve the devil if he thinks proper; but let me
          tell you, it is the cheapest in the end to do right.
          194
          There was no more necessity of having this Indian war than there
          is of our going out to kill the cattle on the plains of Jordan,
          and leave them for the wolves to devour. If we had taken the
          course that was marked out to us, and observed the advice given
          to us, all our past troubles would not have occurred. I know this
          language will hurt the feelings of a great many.
          195
          But I will talk about Iron County, as I am the "Iron Major;" I am
          advancing in the ranks. They used to say, in Utah, I was a pretty
          good sort of a fellow until I got to be a Colonel, and then I
          became more savage. Be this as it may, I do know, that if the
          people of Iron County had listened to the counsel given to them,
          they would have saved to themselves in that little
          settlement--not over eight hundred strong, not less than
          twenty-five thousand dollars, which they have actually lost, or I
          may more properly say, WASTED, in consequence of the disposition
          to do as they pleased. When we first went to Iron County, we went
          with the same instructions the people had in all the other
          settlements, and accordingly we laid out forts as well as we were
          capable of. We will admit that those efforts were not planned as
          well as they might have been, but they were planned as well as we
          knew how to plan them at the time. A considerable number of men
          went to work at building forts, and those who did so were
          subjected to very little loss. But almost every time I have
          visited any settlement in Iron County, from the time it first
          commenced, up to the present, and I have been through a great
          proportion of them, I have had from one to fifty applicants
          saying, "Brother Smith, may I not go further, this way or that
          way, to make me a farm? or, to the other place, to make me a
          ranch?" And so it would be almost continually--asking for
          privileges to do things that they knew were contrary to counsel.
          My answer would be, "Yes, of course, just as soon as the
          settlements are strong enough to secure to you protection; but it
          will not do to venture out, and separate far from each other, for
          two or three years. Until the settlements get strong, we must
          stay together, lest some evil influence should stir up the
          Indians and destroy our settlements entirely."
          195
          With all the influence I could use in those parts of the country,
          some of the brethren broke through and established several posts
          for cattle ranches, and commenced to open farms, but it was
          afterwards found necessary to gather these distant posts in, and
          those who were living on large farms, and erecting fine
          buildings, which either had to be removed away or entirely
          abandoned. All this trouble and loss of property could have been
          prevented, only for that reckless disposition--"I want a little
          more liberty to go a little further off."
          195
          As I had the honor to preside over Provo, I take the liberty to
          talk about my own place, and tell its history, and I want all the
          new comers to profit by it. In the first place, there was a
          number of men wanted to go to Provo and make a settlement, and
          have a chance to fish in the waters, and trade with the Indians.
          They accordingly begged of the President to let them go in
          accordance with their wishes. He finally gave them the privilege
          of going there, if they would build a fort for their protection.
          They went, and made a beginning; they built something, but I
          never knew what it was. I have passed there, but not being very
          well acquainted with the science of fortification, nor with the
          science of topography, I never could find or frame a name for the
          thing which they built.
          195
          They then petitioned for the privilege of laying out a city with
          small lots, and living in the capacity of a town, as it is so
          much more convenient to live in a town than in a fort. The
          President gave them the privilege, because he was afraid, I
          presume, if he had not granted it to them, some of their own
          careless boys, or the Indians, would set their hay on fire and
          burn up the whole concern. They went to work and laid out a city.
          The President of that company is one of the most righteous men I
          ever was acquainted with; there is not a man living, I presume,
          would say any evil of him, and I am the last man to do it on any
          account; but he wanted to set an example, you know; for it is
          generally expected that Presidents and Bishops love to set an
          example to the flock of Christ; so he went off up the creek, and
          found a splendid piece of farming land. He took his cabin from
          the miserable huddle they meant for a fort, and put it on this
          piece of land, and said, "Now, you poor brethren, (if he did not
          say it, I always thought he did,) you stay in town, and I will
          remain here, and when I get rich I will remove into town, and
          build me a fine house, for these log cabins will not look well in
          town." Every man that wanted to get rich went up the creek to
          what we technically call "the Bishop's," and pretty much all the
          property went into the bushes, and there it remained until Walker
          spoke, and it was not a week after before this good President,
          and all who followed his brave example, came bundling into town,
          after he had put up a thing up the creek among the bushes, that I
          call one of the mysteries of the kingdom.
          195
          Now if that man had taken the good and wholesome advice that was
          given him, he would now have been well off, it would have been
          over two thousand dollars in his pocket, and so it is with all
          the balance of the people who have acted as he has. They have had
          to sacrifice all this property by taking their own way.
          196
          The Indian war is the result of our thinking we know better than
          our President, the result of following our own counsel instead of
          the counsel of Brigham Young. It has been the cause of almost all
          the loss of life and property that has been sustained from the
          Indians; that is, in the southern departments. Understand me, I
          do not pretend to say anything about matters this side the Utah
          mountains, but I will tell you what I think: I think that all the
          forting I have seen in Great Salt Lake County--it is true I have
          not seen much of it, but the most of what I have seen amounts to
          nothing more than a humbug; and if ever an Indian war comes upon
          you, you will be no better off than the distant settlements,
          unless you make timely calculations for it beforehand, and make
          them right. Such a war will cost you nearly all you possess. I do
          not know that you will ever have one, but I should think,
          allowing me to judge, that you have one on your hands now. And if
          I had a family scattered out on any of these creeks, or living in
          any of these unfortified settlements, I should think it prudent
          for me to move them into the city, or into a fort, and do it the
          first thing I did. After the Indians have come and peeled your
          heads clean, murdered your wives, killed off your children, burnt
          your houses, and plundered your property, then you can move into
          forts, and it will be all right. That appears to me to be the
          kind of forting I can observe in the thinly settled parts of this
          county; in the cities the people are more wide awake.
          196
          I expect, brethren, I shall preach here again, if I live, and I
          shall probably preach about the Indian difficulties, about the
          Indian war, if they did say I was the biggest coward south of the
          Utah mountains, and that I dare not go out anywhere, not even for
          my cows, without my gun, and generally with somebody with me; and
          consequently, being so nervously afraid, I shall say to the new
          comers, especially if they want to be preserved and to save their
          property, and labour to preserve the lives of their families,
          they have got to take the counsel of President Young, and that
          is, to SETTLE IN FORTS--and have fortified cities; and not only
          to settle in forts and cities, but to go armed, and not be
          overtaken and murdered by the way, in the manner that some have
          been.
          196
          You might suppose, because I am so cowardly, that I am very
          anxious to kill the Indians; but no man ever heard me undertake
          to advocate the business of killing Indians, unless it was in
          self defence; and in no orders that I have issued (and I have
          issued a great many under different circumstances since the war
          commenced, being the "Iron Colonel,") have I ever given licence
          of this kind, but to act in defence of ourselves and property.
          For I do believe, if the people can be made to listen to
          President Young's counsel, we can close the war without
          bloodshed. I have believed it all the time, and I have acted upon
          it. With the exception of a few blood-thirsty individuals that
          may have to be punished for their crimes, the great body of the
          Indians that have been affected, can be brought to peace and
          duty, if the people themselves will observe their instructions.
          197
          I know not what my friends may think of me for talking as I have
          to-day; but I have expressed freely my candid sentiments, and I
          can express nothing else; at the same time I do not consider that
          the Indians have had any provocation in any shape or manner, to
          cause them to commence this war upon their friends. I believe it
          was commenced through the influence of some corrupt individuals
          who were fired with a desire for plunder; and that it never would
          have been commenced at all, if the people had all been in forts,
          as they ought to have been, notwithstanding this influence. But
          when the Indians saw property scattered all over the plains,
          thousands of cattle and horses, with grain and everything spread
          before them, in an unprotected condition, those that were evil
          minded among them coveted our property, and thought we could not
          defend it. And sure enough we could not, for we have more
          property than we can defend, we have more cattle than we can take
          care of; Indians can steal from us all the time, and we cannot
          take care of that which God has given us, because we have so much
          of it; and for want of its being brought under a proper
          organization, it is badly scattered and exposed; and until we
          make proper provisions to take care of our stock, evil minded
          persons will plunder us.
          197
          If we had built our forts, established our corrals, and taken
          care of every thing we had, according to the instructions that
          all the new settlements received, this Indian war never would
          have commenced, because the Indians would have discovered there
          was no chance for plunder. They had no idea we would move into
          forts as we have done.
          197
          I advised one individual, before he built a house out on a farm,
          to build in the city. O no, he must have more room; and he built
          in one of the most dangerous positions in the mountains. By and
          by the Indians drove him in. I absolutely did know, if I let that
          man's house stand, his family would sooner or later be murdered,
          which might have occurred any day; so I issued an order for it to
          be removed. He durst not trust me to remove it, for fear I should
          break something; and don't you think the poor miserable fellow
          broke two joists in removing it himself, which did not appear so
          small a matter to him as it does to us. He lost considerable,
          because he would not build in a safe place. His house was
          situated in a position to completely command the mouth of a
          kanyon, and at the same time a more dangerous place did not exist
          in the district; the safety of the settlement actually required
          its removal.
          197
          There were several men wounded through leaving their houses and
          not throwing them down, for they became a barricade for the
          Indians; so I took upon me the responsibility of removing such
          dangerous places as would give shelter to our enemies, while they
          pierced us with their bullets.
          197
          Some men would tell me such a course was not strictly according
          to law. I told them I should save the lives of the people. And if
          they had not been gathered up, scores of men, women, and children
          would have been butchered before now.
          197
          I presume I have talked to you long enough. It is a matter I feel
          considerable about. I know men are careless, women are careless;
          and if there is not greater care taken, women will be carried
          away prisoners; and their children will be murdered, if they
          wander off carelessly and unprotected. I tell you, in a country
          like this, where women are scarce and hard to get, we have great
          need to take care of them, and not let the Indians have them.
          197
          Walker himself has teased me for a white wife; and if any of the
          sisters will volunteer to marry him, I believe I can close the
          war forthwith. I am certain, unless men take better care of their
          women, Walker may supply himself on a liberal scale, and without
          closing the war either.
          197
          In conclusion I will say, if any lady wishes to be Mrs. Walker,
          if she will report herself to me, I will agree to negociate the
          match.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, April 6, 1852
                            Brigham Young, April 6, 1852
                   WEAKNESS AND IMPOTENCE OF MEN--CONDITION OF THE
                                 SAINTS--DEDICATION
                            TO THE LORD--THE MILLENNIUM.
           A discourse delivered by President Brigham Young at the opening
             of the new Tabernacle, Great Salt Lake City, April 6, 1852.
          198
                
                    I
                      rise to occupy a few moments of time this morning, as
          we have opened our Conference by the dedication prayer, for we
          will spend the remainder of the forenoon in speaking. I desire to
          offer my own reflections upon this interesting occasion, but
          whether they may be strictly appropriate or not, will, of course,
          be left for you to judge.
          198
          We have assembled together in this comfortable and commodious
          building in peace, and are we not led to exclaim who could have
          fathomed, who could have understood the ways of the Lord, which
          are higher than man's ways, as heaven is higher than the earth?
          We can now calmly reflect upon the experience of our past lives,
          and those minds that are opened to receive light and truth, that
          can behold the manifestations of the Lord, can at once see that
          He has done that which we could not have accomplished by our own
          power, and that directly behind (to all human appearance) a
          frowning Providence oftentimes are concealed the greatest
          blessings that mankind can desire. It teaches us to trust in the
          Lord, to have confidence in our God. It teaches us absolutely
          that we need never undertake to guide the ship of Zion, or
          dictate, by our own wisdom, to the kingdom of God on the earth.
          It teaches us definitely and emphatically that the Lord Almighty
          can do His own work, and no power of man can stay the potency of
          His wonder-working hand. Men may presume to dictate to the Lord;
          they come to naught, but His work moves steadily forward. Many
          who have left this Church have tried the experiment of building
          up the kingdom of God by their learning, saying, "When we have
          established our Church it will then be the kingdom of the Lord."
          They have laid their subtle plans, have marked out their ground,
          pointed out their own path, have firmly (as they supposed) set
          their stakes, commanding their proselytes not to turn to the
          right hand nor to the left, from the course marked out by them,
          but in every case has the Lord overthrown their plans, and
          thwarted all their designs. When the Lord works, no man can
          hinder, while those who feel willing to hearken to His words work
          with Him; and when He says, "Be still," they are subject; when He
          dictates, they cease to direct; when He directs, they are willing
          to do His commandments, He bestows blessings on their labors, His
          work prospers in their hands, His kingdom moves onward with a
          steady and unwavering progress, the honest in heart are blessed,
          and the whole is in a state of continual and rapid increase. Then
          let the world and the enemies of Christ and His kingdom that are
          upon earth and in hell, do their worst, it matters not, the work
          of the Lord is still onward and prosperous in His hands.
          199
          It is a great privilege which we enjoy this morning of assembling
          ourselves together in this comfortable edifice which has been
          erected in the short space of about four months, in the most
          inclement season of the year. We have now a commodious place in
          which we can worship the Lord, without the fear of being driven
          from our seats by wet and cold, or of standing exposed to the
          weather. I now say to my brethren, that I feel to dedicate myself
          and all I possess to the Lord, and constantly feel, with all I
          have, on the altar of sacrifice to the cause of my God.
          199
          A year ago this day, when the brethren were assembled to offer up
          their prayers, and to present business before the Conference, for
          the consideration of the people, and for the furtherance of the
          cause we have espoused, I recollect I was not able to sit up,
          being sick, but not discouraged. I had not fainted by the way,
          but my heart was as brave as it ever was in any moment of my
          life, yet I was not able to be in the assembly. I contemplated
          the situation of this people, and looked over our past history,
          considered our then present prospects and privileges in these
          peaceful valleys. My eyes were upon those who were faltering by
          the way or wandering after the things of this world, and I could
          not refrain from tracing their steps, as they were passing to the
          right and to the left after the perishing things of this life. I
          saw the afflictions of the people, and contemplated their past
          sufferings and present situation. As I mused, I said in my heart,
          "As soon as I am able to speak to the people, I will unfold to
          them my thoughts and feelings, and tell them that in the midst of
          all the afflictions and checquered scenes through which the
          Saints have passed--their joys and their toils, their sufferings
          and their comforts, their fears and their faith, I have never
          seen them as comfortable as they are now. I shall say to the
          brethren, Come, let us build a house that we may enter within its
          walls, and there offer our prayers and thanksgivings before the
          Lord, and worship Him as long as we please, without the fear of
          being driven home with storms of wind, rain, and snow." I said,
          "If the Lord blesses me with life and health, I shall put forth
          my hand to rear an edifice, in which the people can comfortably
          assemble as large as we can build at present, and dedicate it to
          the Lord, that the people may say in their heart, Let us go up to
          the house of the Lord to worship." I saw that when we should
          obtain this commodious building, some would wish to be excused
          from engaging in the pleasing duty of worshipping here, and say,
          "My cattle, my farm, or my business will be forsaken. I must take
          care of my family, for the Lord gave them to me to take care of;"
          or, "I must attend to my affairs here and there, and I cannot
          therefore stay to worship the Lord." I say to such, Go! but as
          for me, though all the world should sink into oblivion, I will go
          up to worship the Lord.
          199
          These were my feelings a year ago and they are the same to-day. I
          dedicate myself, my family, and my substance anew unto the Lord,
          they are not mine, I am not my own creator, nor the producer of
          anything I possess; I did not originate one atom of it. Let the
          world and its cares go! The Lord, Almighty, who made it, is able
          to take care of it, and He may do with it what He pleases; but He
          has commanded me to worship Him, which is one of the greatest
          privileges that could be conferred upon man.
          200
          How long shall we stay here? I answer, as long as I please.
          Brethren and sisters, cast from you the love of the world, and
          let it have no dominion over you. There are a many who delight in
          the good things of this earth--in gold and silver, in carriages
          and horses, in houses and splendid furniture, in costly clothing,
          in orchards and gardens, in vineyards and fields, and extended
          possessions. These things, compared with eternal riches, are
          nothing, though in their place they are good. You may say, "If we
          live, we must eat, drink, and wear clothing" and, "He that
          provideth not for his own household, has denied the faith, and is
          worse than an infidel;" numberless arguments of this kind will
          present themselves to the minds of the people, to call them away
          from the line of their duty, when they know it is their privilege
          to dedicate themselves, their families, and all they possess to
          the Lord. How quick is the enemy, how ready to present something
          of an opposite nature to what is right before them! You know the
          mental and physical weakness of man, so common to mortality, and
          which the enemy is so ready to turn against you, to his own
          advantage. You think that your business needs your continual and
          undivided attention, that you must attend to this, or to that,
          before you can dedicate yourselves and families to the Lord.
          There may perhaps be some few here this morning who feel they
          ought to be plowing, fencing, building, or attending to some
          minor affair, and cannot possibly spend time to remain at the
          Conference. If you will hearken to the counsel of your humble
          servant, you will say to the fields, the flocks, and the herds,
          to the gold and the silver, to the goods and chattels, to the
          tenements and the possessions, and to all the world--Stand aside,
          get away from my thoughts, for I am going up to worship the Lord.
          Let it all go by the board, brethren, and who cares? I do not.
          Your oxen and horses will not live for ever, they will die
          occasionally; and sometimes we are deprived by death of our
          children, and other members of our families. I say, let the dead
          bury the dead, let the corn and the wheat, and all other things,
          take care of themselves, but let us dedicate ourselves, our
          families, our substance, our time, our talents, and everything we
          have upon the face of this world, with all that will hereafter be
          entrusted to us, to the Lord our God; let the whole be devoted to
          the building up of His kingdom upon the earth, and whether you
          are called here or there, it makes no matter: but this morning
          let every heart be humble, watchful, and prayerful, dedicating
          themselves unto the Lord.
          200
          This people have passed through scenes of deep sorrow and
          affliction, but they are now in comfortable circumstances. They
          have been miserably poor, but they are now, I may say, in
          comparative wealth. We have been sick, now we are well. We have
          been tormented, now we are comforted. We have been afflicted by
          our enemies, but we are now far from them. You pause, and ask,
          how long will it be so? I answer, so long as you and I serve the
          Lord with all our hearts, just so long shall we be free from our
          enemies.
          201
          We have now a comfortable habitation to meet in, and we enjoy the
          privilege of assembling here in peace. How has it been in by-gone
          years? Look back six, seven, eight, ten, or twelve years ago, or
          to the year 1830, when the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day
          Saints was organized with six members--which is twenty-two years
          ago this day, and can you tell me of a year, of six months, or of
          three months that Joseph was not hunted like the deer upon the
          mountains, by sheriffs with writs in their hands to drag him from
          us to prison; when he and his brethren were not menaced with
          blood-thirsty mobs, until this people assembled in the peaceful
          valleys of the mountains? Who troubles them now? No person who
          fears God, who serves the King, the Lord of Hosts; and none who
          are willing to love our Father in heaven supremely--above all
          things else upon the face of this earth, or in eternity, will be
          found persecuting even an idolater, to say nothing of the Saints
          of the Most High.
          201
          Let us now seek with greater diligence to build up the kingdom of
          heaven, and establish righteousness; seek to magnify the Lord
          God, and sanctify our own hearts; establish peace on earth,
          destroy every root of bitterness from among the people, and cease
          from this moment to find fault with any brother or sister, even
          though they do wrong, for the Lord will apply the chastening rod
          to them if they need it. We serve our children so; if we consider
          they need chastening, we chastise them, but we do not thereby
          hate them. If it is necessary, we will correct their faults. But
          should we contend with them? By no means.
          201
          Are those who have assembled here this morning prepared to make a
          covenant with themselves that they will cease from all evil
          practices, from all evil speaking, and from all evil thinking,
          and say from this very morning, I will never do another evil as
          long as I live, the Lord being my helper? I will do all the good
          I can, and prepare for the coming of the son of man? To this end
          I wish we should dedicate our hearts, our affections, and our
          whole life to the cause of God on the earth.
          201
          I do not feel like preaching a discourse upon any particular
          subject; but of urging the necessity of the brethren and sisters
          absolutely coming to the determination this morning, and
          dedicating themselves and all they have to the Lord from this
          time henceforth. Can we come to this conclusion, to firmly,
          faithfully, and unitedly enter into a covenant with ourselves,
          saying, I am for the Lord and none else; from this time
          henceforth, I will do the will of my Father who is in the
          heavens, who has called me to minister the fulness of the Gospel,
          and to share the glory that is prepared for the righteous; I will
          be like clay in the hands of the potter, that He may mould and
          fashion me as seemeth Him good; and if He will make known to me
          His will, mine shall bow to it, my affections shall be placed
          upon eternal things, and shall not rest upon the fading,
          transitory objects of time and sense? Can we make this covenant
          with ourselves this morning. Not only to say we dedicate this
          house and ourselves, our flocks, herds, families, and
          possessions, to the Lord, but actually perform the work,
          dedicating our affections to His service. If our affections are
          won and wholly dedicated to His cause, we have then obtained the
          victory.
          202
          Perhaps we may find one here and there who will say, "I cannot do
          this, I may say it with my lips, but to feel it in my heart, the
          case is hard; I am poor and needy, and desire to go to the gold
          mines to obtain something to help myself, by speculating upon the
          Gentiles, and thus get me a good farm and team, with which to get
          out of this thraldom and difficulty; my mind is so perplexed, I
          cannot say my affections are fully dedicated to the Lord my God."
          What is to be done in such a case? I know what I would do, for I
          have experience in these matters--I would call upon the Bishop,
          and make known to him my distress. There are many who in these
          words complain, and say they are so poor they cannot pay their
          tithing; say they, "I have only got three horses and two yoke of
          cattle and about fifty sheep; I want one horse to ride, and the
          others to haul wood, I therefore do not know how I can possibly
          pay my tithing." While on the other hand, others who have only
          got half a dozen chickens can willingly pay their tithing. You
          may say, "It is easier for them to pay tithing than for those who
          possess so much, for they are so very poor, it does not infringe
          upon other matters." Now if I had but one cow, and felt thus, I
          would give her away forthwith. If you have only six horses and
          ten yoke of cattle, or only one cow, and you are too poor to pay
          your tithing, give the whole into the public works. I speak thus
          to those who are inclined to love the substance of this world
          better than the Lord. If you have gold and silver, let it not
          come between you and your duty. I will tell you what to do in
          order to gain your exaltation, the which you cannot obtain except
          you take this coarse. If your affections are placed upon anything
          so as to hinder you in the least from dedicating them to the
          Lord, make a dedication of that thing in the first place, that
          the dedication of the whole may be complete.
          202
          What hinders this people from being as holy as the Church of
          Enoch? I can tell you the reason in a few words. It is because
          you will not cultivate the disposition to be so--this comprehends
          the whole. If my heart is not fully given up to this work, I will
          give my time, my talents, my hands, and my possessions to it,
          until my heart consents to be subject; I will make my hands
          labour in the cause of God until my heart bows in submission to
          it.
          202
          I might here use a just and true comparison which will apply to
          the Church. The rulers of Great Britain have tried to make every
          capitalist identify his interest with the Government--that has
          sustained the kingdom, and is like a powerful net-work around the
          whole. Apply this comparison to the kingdom of God on earth.
          202
          Brethren, do you wish this heavenly government to stand? There is
          no government more beautiful, no confederacy more powerful! What
          shall we do to accomplish this? Imitate the policy of that
          earthly kingdom, identify our interest with the kingdom of God,
          so that if our hearts should over become weaned from loyalty to
          the sovereign, all our earthly interest is bound up there, and
          cannot be taken away. We must therefore sustain the kingdom in
          order to sustain our lives and interests; by so doing, we shall
          receive the Spirit of the Lord, and ultimately work with all our
          hearts.
          202
          This is a policy which I have not reflected upon until this
          morning, but before we get through with the Conference, I shall,
          perhaps, see it entered into, not as the result of any
          premeditation in the least, but when the condition of our
          temporal affairs is read from the stand, you will find the Church
          in considerable indebtedness. If any man is in darkness through
          the deceitfulness of riches, it is good policy for him to bind up
          his wealth in this Church, so that he cannot command it again,
          and he will be apt to cleave to the kingdom. If a man has the
          purse in his pocket, and he apostatizes, he takes it with him;
          but if his worldly interest is firmly united to the Kingdom of
          God, when he arises to go away, he finds the calf is bound, and,
          like the cow, he is unwilling to forsake it. If his calf is bound
          up here, he will be inclined to stay; all his interest is here,
          and very likely the Lord will open his eyes, so that he will
          properly understand his true situation, and his heart will chime
          in with the will of his God in a very short time. Were we to
          dedicate our moral and intellectual influence, and our earthly
          wealth to the Lord, our hearts would be very likely to applaud
          our acts. This reasoning is for those who do not feel exactly to
          subscribe to all that has been said this morning, with regard to
          dedicating ourselves to the cause of truth. This is what you must
          do to obtain an exaltation. The Lord must be first and foremost
          in our affections, the building up of His kingdom demands our
          first consideration.
          203
          The Lord God Almighty has set up a kingdom that will sway the
          sceptre of power and authority over all the kingdoms of the
          world, and will never be destroyed, it is the kingdom that Daniel
          saw and wrote of. It may be considered treason to say that the
          kingdom which that Prophet foretold is actually set up; that we
          cannot help, but we know it is so, and call upon the nations to
          believe our testimony. The kingdom will continue to increase, to
          grow, to spread and prosper more and more. Every time its enemies
          undertake to overthrow it, it will become more extensive and
          powerful; instead of its decreasing, it will continue to
          increase, it will spread the more, become more wonderful and
          conspicuous to the nations, until it fills the whole earth. If
          such is your wish, identify your own individual interest in it,
          and tie yourselves thereto by every means in your power. Let
          every man and every woman do this, and then be willing to make
          every sacrifice the Lord may require; and when they have bound up
          their affections, time, and talents, with all they have, to the
          interest of the kingdom, then have they gained the victory, and
          their work is complete, so far as they understand.
          203
          If this people would take that course, what hinders their being
          in the Millennium? If I were to ask what the Millennium--the
          Latter-day glory so often spoken of, is, I should find numerous
          opinions among this people, and many in and out of this
          congregation. I have learned long ago that the thoughts and
          expressions of men are very diversified; if, indeed, their
          thoughts or ideas are similar, I know their words differ widely;
          so should I find a great many different opinions among this
          people, with regard to the real essence and effect of the
          Millennium. The Millennium consists in this--every heart in the
          Church and Kingdom of God being united in one; the Kingdom
          increasing to the overcoming of everything opposed to the economy
          of heaven, and Satan being bound, and having a seal set upon him.
          All things else will be as they are now, we shall eat, drink, and
          wear clothing. Let the people be holy, and the earth under their
          feet will be holy. Let the people be holy, and filled with the
          Spirit of God, and every animal and creeping thing will be filled
          with peace; the soil of the earth will bring forth in its
          strength, and the fruits thereof will be meat for man. The more
          purity that exists, the less is the strife; the more kind we are
          to our animals the more will peace increase, and the savage
          nature of the brute creation vanish away. If the people will not
          serve the devil another moment whilst they live, if this
          congregation is possessed of that spirit and resolution, here in
          this house is the Millennium. Let the inhabitants of this city be
          possessed of that spirit, let the people of the territory be
          possessed of that spirit, and here is the Millennium. Let the
          whole people of the United States be possessed of that spirit,
          and here is the Millennium, and so will it spread over all the
          world.
          203
          Let us cease from all evil, and do all the good we can to the
          nations abroad, and by and by the vail of the covering will be
          taken from the earth, and the inhabitants see as they are seen.
          203
          May the Almighty Father of heaven and earth bless you, and I
          bless you in His name, and pray that we may be diligent in every
          good word and work before the Lord, in the name of Jesus Christ.
          Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Heber
          C. Kimball, October 8, 1852
                          Heber C. Kimball, October 8, 1852
             BLESSINGS OF FAITHFULNESS--EDUCATION OF CHILDREN--PRESIDENT
                       BRIGHAM YOUNG--THE CLAY AND THE POTTER.
             An address delivered by President Heber C. Kimball, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
                       Great Salt Lake City, October 8, 1852.
          204
          Brother John Young said he felt as though he wanted to talk; I
          told him to open his mouth wide, and he would be very apt to pour
          out something. What he has said, and what President Young has
          said before him, to-day, is verily true. I felt a flow of good
          feelings while he was speaking, and this I feel all the time
          while sitting under such teachings. The ideas advanced are so
          plain and simple, it seems to me as though every person
          possessing a sane mind, when they leave this house, or when they
          go home from this Conference, will do right, will determine in
          their hearts to do as they are instructed. If they will do this,
          it is well with them.
          204
          There are a great many who have the idea, that the time will come
          when we shall be broken up as a people. Do I fear any such thing?
          No, I do not fear anything. I fear nothing that is in heaven, or
          that is upon the earth. I do not fear hell nor its combinations;
          neither hell, nor the devil, nor any of his angels, has power
          over me, or over you, only as we permit them to have. If we
          permit the devil to have power over us, and we are seduced by
          him, and we crouch down under his power, then he will have
          dominion over us. Upon the same principle, we let sin have power
          over us, but it has no power over us unless we subject ourselves
          to it.
          204
          I think and reflect much upon these principles, and I wish to
          God, that you, my brethren, the Elders of Israel, when you go
          home from this place, would treasure up the counsel that you have
          received, that you would nourish and cherish it in your hearts,
          then you never would be unfruitful nor walk in darkness, nor be
          left to murmur, complain, and find fault.
          204
          When I proposed to the brethren of the complaining class, that
          they be organized into a building committee, I wish you to
          understand, that I had not heard any one murmur, but I heard
          there were some. I was rather inclined, however, to believe that
          those who told it were the ones that murmured, but they wanted to
          throw it off from their own shoulders, and make it out that
          somebody else was complaining. I do not believe you were,
          brethren. I do not believe we can raise material enough to
          organize a company of such characters. I do not believe you are
          going to murmur, but I believe you will go to and do as you have
          been told. I want you to do so, I know the blessings you will
          obtain in so doing.
          205
          Go and take up some good farms, but do not take up too much, as a
          great many in this place have done, they have taken up from one
          hundred to one hundred and fifty acres, and have then undertaken
          to put in 50 acres of wheat, when they could not attend to the
          half of it. Be cautious in this matter, put in no more seed than
          you can manage, and improve all the land you do take in, and be
          faithful to God, and I know that He will bless the land for your
          sakes, and He will bless you abundantly, and He will bless your
          increase, and He will bless your wheat, and your corn, and every
          thing that pertains to you.
          205
          I have spoken about these things many times. There is nothing
          impossible with God, but He will not do any thing that is
          contrary to His law, and that is not according to his designs. I
          have said, many times, if you only have faith, and listen, and
          put works with your faith, doing as you are told, it is not
          impossible for a hen to lay two eggs per day. To prove this, I
          have sheep in this valley, and so have other people, that have
          had four lambs this year, and we have over thirty lambs now of
          the second crop. I have seldom heard of such a thing in my life.
          This is quite a testimony to bear, but I can prove it to be true,
          now, on the spot, if it is necessary. The sheep have brought
          forth the second crop of lambs. That is a great curiosity, but it
          is true, and has taken place here under our immediate notice, and
          some of the sheep that have been so prolific belong to me.
          205
          This is not contrary to my faith; we are the children of Israel,
          and it is for us to he faithful, and listen to the will of
          heaven, and to the man that presides over us, and to his
          associates, for they will not teach you anything only what he
          sanctions; you need not be afraid, for if I should teach wrong
          doctrine or principle, here is the authority to correct me, that
          this people may have correct views. Well, inasmuch as we are the
          children of Israel, we are bound to prosper, if we continue in
          the goodness of God, and walk in His precepts; if we do not, it
          will be with us as it was with the children of Israel of old, our
          burdens will become hard to bear; but I believe ourselves, our
          flocks, our herds, our crops, and every thing that pertains to
          the earth which we inhabit, will greatly multiply and increase.
          These are my feelings, and this is my faith all the time--I have
          no other.
          205
          We should teach our children righteousness, if we would raise
          them up in the way of the Lord, as it is spoken in the Book of
          Mormon. Let mothers teach their children as they were taught
          then. Three thousand of those men are worth more than one hundred
          thousand not raised as they were. They had faith that they should
          never fall in battle, because their mothers taught them so.
          Although there was much of their blood shed, yet not one of them
          fell. That was the result of proper instructions being given them
          by their mothers. Mothers, I wish you would wake up and act in
          your office and calling, as well as the brethren. It is their
          calling to go and preach the Gospel, build up the kingdom of God,
          and establish righteousness, and it is for you to be stewards at
          home, and attend to the things that they leave behind, and to get
          wisdom and knowledge in all these things pertaining to your duty.
          205
          When I heard brother Brigham preaching here to-day, and laying
          things of worth before us, I felt greatly to rejoice, and I
          believe you felt as I did, and as though they never would be
          eradicated from your minds, but that you would treasure them up
          in your hearts. We have not a great while to stay on the earth,
          if we live to the full age of man. We must all die, sooner or
          later, as it regards our earthly tabernacles, but our spirits
          will continue to live for ever. If they go to a state of
          happiness, they will be happy; and if they go to a state of
          misery, they will be miserable. You all know this as well as I
          do, then why do you not live accordingly? I presume you will.
          206
               A great many things of this kind have been laid before the
          brethren who have come from England, and from the States, and
          from different nations of the earth. They will hear many more
          things taught here in addition to what they have heard in Old
          England. They could hear nothing there, except the first
          principles of the doctrine of Christ; but since they have come
          here it is all let out, that is, a great many things; the bird is
          let out of the cage, and they have it before them to read and
          reflect upon; it is the truth, it is the word of God, and the
          revelations of Jesus Christ, which were revealed to brother
          Joseph and others.
          206
          As to the power and authority invested in brother Brigham, do I
          doubt it? Have I the least hesitation as to his calling as the
          President of this Church? No, no more than I have that God sits
          upon His throne. He has the same authority that brother Joseph
          had. That authority was in the Twelve, and since brother Joseph
          stepped behind the vail, brother Brigham is his lawful successor.
          I bear testimony of what brother Joseph said on the stand at
          Nauvoo, and I presume hundreds here can bear witness of the same.
          Said he, "These men that are set here behind me on this stand, I
          have conferred upon them all the power, Priesthood, and authority
          that God ever conferred upon me." There are hundreds present this
          day who heard him utter words to that effect, more than once.
          206
          The Twelve had then received their endowments. Brother Joseph
          gave them the endowments, and keys and power were placed upon
          them by him, even as they were placed upon him by Peter, James,
          and John, who ordained him. That is true, gentlemen, because they
          held the Apostleship last, and had authority to confer it upon
          him, or any whom the Father had chosen. Brother Joseph called and
          ordained the Twelve Apostles of the last days, and placed that
          power upon them. Five of those men who received that authority
          from under his hands are now living. Have I any doubt? Why, no. I
          know all about it, I am a witness of this Gospel, of the order
          and power of the Priesthood, and of the organization of this
          church from the beginning. I glory in it, I glory in this Gospel,
          I know it is like a root out of the dry ground, it neither has
          form nor comeliness to this world, it is against them every way,
          and they will run against it and snag themselves. You know a root
          out of dry ground has many snags or sharp points to it, and they
          stick out many ways; so the people run against a snag when they
          run against this work, or against the servants of the Most High.
          I know, as well as I know that I live, that every man that fights
          against it will be damned. I know it, and am bearing testimony to
          what I know, gentlemen, and you may know it just as well as I do.
          This Gospel, this kingdom, this Church, and this people, are the
          pride of my heart, I have no pride in anything else. I have pride
          to see this work roll forth, and turn over the kingdoms, and
          break in pieces the nations of the earth. I know that every man
          and woman, every nation and king that oppose it, will wither like
          a limb that is severed from a tree.
          207
          Now there are a great many people that have broken off from this
          Church, we will not mention names, but have they not withered?
          Yes, and so will you if you turn away from it, and if you refuse
          to obey the counsel that is given to you, you will wither away
          like a limb that is cut off from an apple tree, or the grass that
          is mown down when the sun strikes it. We are the people of God,
          and we cannot prosper upon any other principle than to cleave
          together, to cleave to His work, to amalgamate our feelings in
          one, and nourish the all-powerful principle of union, all feeling
          a general interest for the public welfare.
          207
          As President Young has said, this is the household of faith, this
          is his house, and this is his people, and he is our leader, our
          Governor, he is our Prophet, and he is our Priest. As I have said
          in other places and in other meetings, when speaking to the
          Elders, when they are sent from this place, they are sent forth
          by the shepherd that God has stationed here; he is the head
          shepherd that is visible on earth, under the direction of Joseph,
          and he sends forth the Elders as shepherds to gather up the lost
          sheep of the house of Israel, and bring them home to put them
          into the fold. I have said that you have no business to make a
          selection of any of these sheep, or to make a choice of them, or
          make any covenant with them, until they are brought home and
          placed in the fold, and then if you want a sheep or two, ask the
          shepherd for them, and if you choose a sheep without taking this
          course you will get your fingers burnt. Why? Because they are his
          sheep--mark it. How would you like it, were I to go and take one
          of your sheep without permission, would you ever think of such a
          thing? One is just as right as the other. You will learn these
          things by and by. I would rather have my head laid upon a block,
          and severed from my shoulders, than ever make a proposal to any
          woman living upon the earth and marry her, unless I had
          permission from the chief shepherd. That tells it. I do not know
          that you can all understand me, but those who have their eyes
          open understand it. I only hint at these things, that you may be
          careful of the course you take.
          207
          Well, then, he that will not provide for his own household is
          worse than an infidel, and hath denied the faith. If this is
          brother Brigham's household, I belong to him, and it is my
          household. Well, then, provide for it, provide for Israel flat,
          and when they have got enough, then let others have it. Do not
          let others have the bread until Israel, the household of faith,
          are provided for. Do you understand it, brethren? If you do, say
          aye. [Aye.] All say aye for Israel.
          207
          Now we are going to stick together. Those that have come in here
          are like clay brought from different parts or the earth--it is
          taken out of the bank and thrown into the mill, and the mill has
          been grinding it until it has become pliable and passive; then we
          send out the Elders to bring in a fresh supply of new clay, and
          it is thrown into the mill, where it has to become passive, and
          thus the mill keeps grinding and grinding, and mixing that which
          is thrown into it. As soon as you are passive others come in.
          207
          It keeps us thrashing all the time. The reapers go forth, and
          bind up the wheat and draw it in, and thus we keep throwing in
          new wheat all the time, and we shall never get the floor empty,
          but we must thrash and thrash until we are worn out, and others
          will come up and continue it. Did you ever see them thrash in
          country towns in England? It is something like that. We are
          passing through the mill, and we have got to be thrashed and
          cleaned up, and the chaff has to be separated from the wheat in
          passing it through the fanners. There are three ends to this mill
          in the mountains, where the chaff goes out. Brother Brigham does
          not grind any in his mill, without first passing it through the
          smut machine; so we have got to pass through the smut mill,
          before we are fit to be thrown into the hopper to be ground.
          208
          We must be passive as clay in the hands of the potter. The potter
          takes the passive clay, and moulds it into numerous shapes; he
          can make it into a milk pan, or into a crock, or into a cup, or a
          jug, and from that into ten thousand shapes; he does everything
          according to his own pleasure, and as the Master Potter has told
          him to shape it. If the Master gives him a pattern, he must mould
          according to that pattern; it would make him busy indeed if he
          were to work according to every pattern. We must work according
          to the Master's pattern. If we take this course there will be no
          trouble. Go forth, then, upon your farms, sow your grain, and
          when you get your sheep, they will have two litters a year, but
          if you do not do right you shall have none. Does not God love to
          bless those who appreciate His blessings? Yes, just as much as a
          kind father loves to bless his son. Our Father in heaven is much
          more willing to bless us than we are to bless each other.
          208
          Let us remember these things in which we have been instructed.
          And let us take hold of that wall when the Conference is over,
          and put it round this block this winter, so that next spring we
          may fill it up with shrubbery of all kinds, and decorate it, and
          prepare it for future purposes. And let us build up a temple with
          diligent hands. I have helped to build up two temples, and have
          had my endowments in them, and in other places; but to have an
          endowment that is proper and consistent, is to have it in a
          temple that has been built and consecrated to that purpose. Now
          go to, and get your farms, and bring in the first fruits of the
          earth, the first things you raise; bring them in here and commit
          them into the hands of the Bishops. Remember that, and you shall
          have an endowment, and shall be greatly blessed with that
          blessing you have not room to contain, if you only appreciate it.
          We want these things to roll on, God's work to prosper, and His
          kingdom to be built up, and the work of God to spread to all the
          nations of the earth.
          208
          Do I fear the world? I do not fear them, I never did fear them,
          and I have seen enough of their stuff. I have been driven with
          the rest of my brethren from the United States and from my native
          home, but what do I care for it? My kindred are there, but they
          do not believe the Gospel, nor the revelations of Jesus Christ;
          they believe in the spiritual knocking, and nearly all the world
          are going into it, and receiving revelations for themselves from
          the regions of despair. It used to be with them, "Old JOE Smith,
          an old gold digger," but all are digging gold now, and all are
          getting revelations, but they did not believe a word from him. He
          was a Prophet of God, and they cannot help themselves. They slew
          him, and that nation has got to smart for it, and it will be as
          much as the Saints can do to gather out of it. If they stay
          there, they will not gather from there; it is necessary to gather
          the wheat, and put it into the barn; if it is left out, the
          storms will come and actually waste or destroy it.
          209
          Let us be stirring and moving the principles of life and
          salvation forward in every rightful and possible way. I do not
          care what I am told to do, if it were to take an adobie and turn
          it over 500 times a day; if I am doing the will of God, if I am
          doing the will of him who sent me to do it, it is none of my
          business nor yours. It is for us to do that which we are told to
          do. You need not trouble yourselves about brother Brigham, nor
          about brother Heber, nor about the Twelve; brother Brigham will
          attend to them, and then, if they live faithful, will judge you
          and your children, and the nations of the earth, and those that
          are dead. Don't you judge those men--that is for brother Brigham
          to do; if we need thrashing, he is capable of thrashing us, it is
          none of your business; and we will sit down and bear it like good
          fellows, and not move our tongue; if it should move, we will take
          it between our teeth, and give it a nip, and say, "Stay there,
          you little fellow." As for the Twelve, and brother Brigham, and
          brother Willard, they are all men of God; and there never were
          better men than the Twelve that live in these last days--better
          men never lived. [A voice in the stand, "True."] It is true, and
          I know it. Every soul of them can be prepared in two days to go
          to the nations of the earth, if we say so. You have got to be so
          too, brethren and sisters; you have got to learn to be subject to
          the Priesthood, as well as these brethren, and your children must
          learn the same lesson, and then you will be moulded into vessels
          of honor, but you cannot be moulded into vessels of honor except
          you be subject. You potters know it, if you have worked at the
          potter's business as I have.
          209
          I love to talk about these things. I love the Saints, they are
          the pride of my heart. As for the world, its gold or silver, or
          any thing that pertains to it, my heart is not upon it, but upon
          this Church and kingdom, and it never will be overcome, worlds
          without end. [A voice in the stand, "Amen."] Although we may be
          scattered to the four quarters of the earth, we will gather
          again, never to be removed any more, henceforth and for ever.
          Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, October 9, 1852
                           Brigham Young, October 9, 1852
                  MANAGEMENT OF THE KANYONS--PAYING DEBTS--KEEPING
                          STORES--MATERIAL FOR THE TEMPLE.
           An address delivered by President Brigham Young at the General
           Conference in the Tabernacle, Great Salt Lake City, October 9,
                                        1852.
          209
          There is a matter of temporal business that I wish to lay before
          this Conference, and I embrace the present opportunity to do so.
          I have not very acute feelings upon the matter, but I have
          frequently known cases of difficulty and dissatisfaction come
          before me, which were calculated to annoy my feelings, and the
          feelings of this people. I feel very acutely, very exquisitely,
          upon certain subjects pertaining to their history, but on the
          present occasion I am quite careless and indifferent as to the
          subject I now propose to lay before the Conference. If we could
          obtain a hearing of all the male members of this community, or in
          other words, get all the inhabitants of these valleys together
          that portion of them that can hear and understand, it would the
          better; but seeing that this cannot be done, we shall have to
          content ourselves by laying before this Conference the matter
          pertaining practically to the action of men, that we now wish to
          present. It is concerning the kanyons, the wood, the timber, or
          whatever the kanyon situated near these valleys produce.
          210
          Wood seems to be the first and most prominent product of the
          kanyons. The situation of them is too well known to make it
          necessary for me to offer a description. I believe that there are
          some acts performed in these kanyons, of which the actors are
          ashamed, and they would rather I would pass over these points,
          and the hard words they have made use of; they would much rather
          have them forgotten by all who have a knowledge of what they have
          done and said in the kanyons.
          210
          There are a great many whose experience exceeds the experience of
          brother Hyde in this matter. His short experience, he says,
          teaches him, that if he had the power in his hands, he would
          decree that all men who go into the kanyons for wood and timber
          should be saved. This may be the mind of others, and to them it
          may serve as an excuse for outraging the principles of
          righteousness, but to another class of men it would be no effort
          at all. I believe it would be just as necessary for the boys,
          when they have mounted their sleds on the top of the hill, to
          curse, and swear, and fight, and quarrel, while they are riding
          down with all ease, and without any trouble, as it would be to
          curse, swear, and fight while drawing their sleds up the hill to
          enjoy another ride. You know, boys enjoy themselves very well
          while their sleds are travelling down the hill at a great speed;
          it is hurrah with them, and all is right; but in drawing their
          sleds up the hill, they fall down sometimes, and bump their
          heads, and bruise their knees against the hard snow, and they
          have no sooner recovered their foot-hold than down they go again,
          and so they get into confusion. Now it appears to me to be just
          as necessary for them to quarrel in riding down the hill, as it
          is for them to quarrel in drawing their sleds up the hill, as for
          any good it accomplishes in either case.
          211
          It is an up hill business to go into these kanyons and get wood,
          to say the least of it. If I am able to present what I would like
          to present, and what I have previously had in my mind, and
          exhibit it in a few words, and in its true colors, I believe an
          expression upon it from this Conference will have a salutary
          influence upon the community; that is my opinion, and the reason
          why I now present the subject before you. I will call upon my
          brethren who sit here, to let their past experience answer a
          question, or perhaps more than one. Are you not dissatisfied, and
          is there not bitterness in your feelings, the moment you find a
          kanyon put in the possession of an individual, and power given
          unto him to control the timber, wood, rock, grass. and, in short,
          all its facilities? Does there not something start up in your
          breast, that causes you to feel very uncomfortable? You may be
          ready on the right and on the left to say, "No, I am not aware
          that it affects me any." This may be the case with a few, but
          while we find one here and another there of that class, do we not
          find multitudes of the other class that would lie very irritable
          upon that subject--a facsimile of a roily fountain much
          disturbed, or like the troubled sea that casts up mire and dirt?
          Why I judge the matter in this light is because of what I have
          learned previously to this day, concerning the real feelings of
          the majority of the people touching this matter. There were a few
          instances, some two or three years ago, of the legislative
          council assigning kanyons to individuals. Now it is in the hands
          of county officers to dispose of such matters. Are the people
          satisfied with these assignments? They are not. Could they be
          satisfied were they placed under different circumstances in
          relation to this matter? They could. Have we power as a people to
          introduce an order of things that will give general satisfaction?
          I will say, that it depends altogether upon circumstances. It can
          or it cannot not be done, just as the people please.
          211
          I will relate a few circumstances or incidents that have taken
          place here, but I will not name particular places, nor
          individuals. Mr. B. goes into the kanyons, without any leave or
          licence, and without even asking for a grant; he makes his way up
          a kanyon, and finds, on each side of him, both fire-wood and
          fence poles. He climbs the mountain, for two or three miles,
          works a road, and gets to the timber, poles, and wood, at an
          expense of from one to five hundred dollars. He commences to get
          out poles, and keeps his men and teams laboring there from day to
          day. Now how long will he remain there before news will come into
          the city, that Mr. B. is getting timber and poles at such a
          point, and that it is a most excellent chance there? Well, some
          of the citizens will say, "Has brother B. worked a road up
          there?" "Yes." "Can we get up with a team?" "Yes." "Then let us
          go and get some wood and poles." How long would it be before the
          eyes of a portion of the community would be turned directly to
          that spot? How long would it be before they would go to the very
          place where brother B.'s road branches off from the main road,
          and go up the mountain, (of course they could see no other track
          than where Mr. B. was getting out his wood,) and get poles, wood,
          and timber? They would not stop to look on the mountains around
          them, and make new roads for themselves. No, they can only get
          wood, poles, and timber where brother B. is getting them, after
          he has been at the trouble and expense of making a road. When
          they find brother B. there, he says, "You cannot come into this
          kanyon, for I have worked the road myself, to facilitate the
          getting of my wood and poles here." Another person comes along
          with twenty or thirty wagons. Mr. B. says to him, "Look yonder,
          there is plenty of timber, and as easy to get at as this that I
          call my own." Friend H. replies, "But I will be damned if I don't
          get wood where you get it." Mr. B. says, "And I'll be damned if
          you do go there." This is the language of men who sit here before
          me today, and so near me that I could put my hand upon them. They
          go up in the kanyon, and there quarrel with each other. Let
          friend S. once pass by the road that Mr. B has made, and he may
          go on up the kanyon ten miles, surrounded with wood, and not get
          a stick of timber, for he and friend H., with his train, and
          others, never can see and understand how they can get poles in
          any other place than where friend B. has made a good road leading
          to where he gets his. Is this so? You Elders of Israel will go
          into the kanyons, and curse and swear--damn, and curse your oxen,
          and swear by Him who created you! I am telling the truth. Yes,
          you will rip, and curse, and swear, as bad as any pirates ever
          did.
          211
          Suppose these characters do as the old quaker did when he whipped
          the man: he took off his coat, and said, "Religion, do thou lie
          there, until I whip this man." The boys or many of them, who go
          into the kanyons with wagons and teams, do the same: they lay
          down their religion at the mouth of the kanyon, saying, "Thou lie
          there, until I go for my load of wood." I expect, in all
          probability, it was the case with Elder Hyde, for he never would
          have thought that he ought to be saved for going into the kanyon
          once, if he had had his religion along with him.
          212
          I do not wish to say much upon this subject, I am not spirited in
          it, nor do I care much about it. I want to show to this community
          a plan by which these matters of business transactions can be
          brought to some kind of a system, to the better accommodation of
          the public. We will suppose, when strangers come to these
          valleys, that they find land offices, kanyon offices, timber
          offices, &c. They enter, and walk up before the clerk in the
          office, and inquire what facilities there are to get a living
          here. Out steps the landlord and says, "This valley and all the
          kanyons belong to old General Harris, and to his heirs after him.
          That valley over yonder--Utah Valley, belongs to old General
          Wolf's heirs; and there's another valley, that belongs to another
          man; and I am here as the guardian of these heirs to all this
          property, I am here to dispose of it." "We want to settle here,"
          say the people, "can we get any land?" "O yes," the landlord
          replies, "lift up your eyes to the right, and to the left--do you
          see the grass?" "Yes." "Do you see the lovely streams that gush
          from the mountains?" "Yes." "Do you see this vast prairie before
          you?" "Yes." "Look at the soil, it is rich and productive. We do
          not have winters here as you do in the eastern countries, but
          your cattle can feed in these mountain valleys both winter and
          summer. "The landlord says again, "Lift up your eyes and look:
          this wood, land, and the grass that you see growing, and all
          these valleys, with all they contain, you are freely welcome to;
          go now, lay out your city plots and your farms, dig your ditches,
          and turn the streams whithersoever you will, for to all this you
          are welcome." Would they not think he was one of the finest men
          that ever was? Would they not love such a landlord? The people
          inquire again, "What chance is there here for getting wood?" "O,"
          says he, "that is another thing, I will talk to you about that."
          "We wish to know if we can get wood here to burn, to cook our
          food with, and to keep our houses warm; and upon what terms?"
          Says the landlord, "My hired servants are up in the Redbute
          Kanyon, or they may be in Kanyon Creek Kanyon, or over in the
          west mountains; I have got servants, and plenty of wood, this you
          can have on certain conditions." "What are your conditions, good
          landlord?" "These are my conditions--you must take your teams
          into Redbute, where you will find a gate, and a man living there,
          to him you will have to pay 25 cents for getting a load of wood."
          "But how is the road after you get through the gate?" "O, it is a
          good road, and the wood, timber, rock, and every thing else are
          first rate; and now you go and get a cord of good wood for 25
          cents. Or you may go to the west mountains, there the kanyons are
          all prepared for you, the roads are made, and I keep men there to
          see that they are kept in good repair, and all you have got to do
          is to pay 25 cents for the use of the road." What would be the
          feelings of this people under such circumstances? Do you suppose
          they would feel as those do that have kept up a continual
          quarrelling, murmuring, and bickering, and have given way to
          wickedness? The kanyons are precisely in the position I present
          them to you in this similitude; and you murmur at the council, at
          the legislative assembly, at the county court, and at every body
          that wants to make these kanyons convenient and passable to the
          community.
          213
          Again, I ask the question, what would be the feelings of this
          people, supposing they had come to these valleys under such
          circumstances? "The valleys, the grass, the soil, the water, and
          all the advantages you are welcome to, but I shall charge you 25
          cents per load for your wood." If you won't answer the question,
          I will for you: every time you would meet with that landlord, it
          would be, "God bless you, you are the best man on earth;--and you
          would be ready to lick the dust off his feet; you would not say
          "God damn you, I will get wood where I please." I am ashamed to
          repeat the language that is too often made use of, but I do it
          that the community may see how disgraceful it is, and frown upon
          every man that will allow himself to be degraded by the use of
          such filthy language; it is a disgrace to the wicked, to say
          nothing of Saints. Again upon this point, would you not take off
          your hats, and say, "Thank you," every time you met that
          landlord? Yes, you would, and I know it. Well, supposing the
          legislative body in these valleys should say to some man, Take
          that kanyon, and put a gate at the mouth of it, and make a good
          road to the wood and timber, and to defray the expence of this,
          lay a tax of 25 cents on every man that passes through with a
          team to get wood, timber, or anything else the kanyon
          produces--could you bless that legislature, could you greet it
          with smiles and thanks, for doing that for this people? Or would
          you curse it?
          213
          If I had time to do so, and if it would be wisdom, I could
          demonstrate, by a mathematical calculation, definitely and truly,
          and you might take into the calculation Redbute kanyon, and every
          other kanyon that the people have been into--I could demonstrate
          that they have destroyed more horses, mules, harness, oxen,
          wagons, chains, and ox yokes, and other property, in getting out
          of these kanyons what they have got, than what would lay a first
          rate turnpike road in every direction, as far as they have
          penetrated these kanyons. Suppose we have a kanyon here within
          one mile of us, open to all the people, I ask where is there a
          man that would work the road to the wood? He is not to be found
          in this community. If it were open and free to all, I might spend
          a thousand dollars there, and never get one load of wood. I have
          done just such things myself. I have gone to work and made roads
          to get wood, and have not been able to get it. I have cut it
          down, and piled it up, and still have not got it. I wonder if
          anybody else can say so. Have any of you piled up your wood, and
          when you have gone back could not find it? Some stories could be
          told of this kind, that would make professional thieves ashamed.
          It is not all of this community that possesses such spirits. A
          flock of sheep consisting of thousands must be clean indeed if
          some of them are not smutty. This is a large flock of sheep that
          have come up to these mountain valleys, and some of them have got
          taglocks hanging about them, or in other words, there are those
          that will do what you have heard exhibited to you to-day.
          213
          What shall be done with sheep that stink the flock so? We will
          take them, I was going to say, and cut off their tails two inches
          behind their ears; however, I will use a milder term, and say,
          cut off their ears. But instead of doing this, we will try to
          cleanse them; we will wash them with soap, that will come well
          nigh taking off the sin; we will then apply a little Scotch
          snuff, and a little tobacco, and wash them again until we make
          them clean. That is what I am doing now. Peradventure we shall
          find a few such sheep here in the flock, and a few that have got
          the itch; these are apt to spread the disease among those that
          are clean, for they will run along and rub themselves on others,
          until all are smitten with the disorder, and it would be hard to
          tell in which it originated.
          214
          I do not want to destroy the people. I want to wash them, and, if
          necessary, apply the Scotch snuff. If this community would let
          any man of sense, of calculation, of a good mind and judgment,
          sit down and make his calculations, with regard to their getting
          wood out of these kanyons, they would see the advantage of taking
          the course the legislature has marked out, so clearly, that this
          whole people would speak out boldly and say, "You men having
          authority, look up every kanyon in these valleys, and put them in
          the possession of individuals who will make good roads to the
          timber, that we may get there without breaking our wagons, or
          without breaking our limbs, destroying our property, and
          endangering our lives." I say, every man of good sense would
          exclaim, "Put these kanyons into the hands of individuals, with
          this proviso--make good roads, and keep them in good repair."
          214
          To exhibit it to the people in another point of view. I will
          suppose a Gentile owns all these kanyons, Uncle Sam, for
          instance. He determines he will work these kanyons himself, work
          the roads, &c., and draw his revenue from them by the people's
          getting their timber--should we not esteem it a blessing? We
          should. If it would be a blessing to him, or to any rich company
          of speculators, then why would it not be a blessing to us, to act
          upon the same principles ourselves? Could you tell any reason why
          not?
          214
          A great many here do not understand certain things that exist; I
          can tell you some of them. If any individual will come here and
          live, and find out how we do business, learn and understand our
          business transactions, he will see that exhibited that will prove
          to him a great many things he is not acquainted with. I will take
          one of the best individuals we have, and put him into the tithing
          office, put another into the stone-cutter's shop, and another in
          the joiner's shop, and let them work there one or two years, when
          the books are examined they have taken up every farthing of their
          wages, and many have contracted considerable debts in that
          office, some are owing 800, 1000, and some as high as 1500
          dollars. Now comes the decision. Suppose you owe that store
          across the road there 1500 dollars, would you try to pay it? Yes,
          you would lie awake at nights to think how to pay those merchants
          that do not belong to the kingdom of God, you would offer them
          horses, and wagons, and oxen, to liquidate that debt. But that
          man who owes on the tithing books will say, "Just straighten that
          up for me, cancel that debt, for I want my name to look as good
          on the tithing books as the rest." Would he say this to a
          Gentile? No, he would not. We never see such goodness, such
          kindness, such benevolence, such philanthropy in the persons who
          owe the tithing office anything.
          215
          Did you ever ask me to liquidate your debts? You may answer the
          question for yourselves. I shall not name anybody. But let one of
          these merchants ask for the payment of a debt, saying, "I am
          going away in September," and you conclude that that debt must be
          paid--do you pay it? Yes, you will sell every thing you have on
          earth, to pay it. But do you owe the tithing office anything? "O
          yes, and I am going to work it off; I know I owe about 1500
          dollars. But you know it won't do to owe the Gentiles anything.
          Brother Brigham, can't you lend me some money to pay a small debt
          on that store? Can you let me have a yoke of cattle, my family is
          suffering for want of wood?" You trace those cattle, and where
          are they gone to? Why, to pay the enemies of this people. You
          would take out of this Church the last dime of money, and every
          ox, and cow, and horse, and hand them all over to our enemies,
          and let the Church sink to the nethermost hell, for aught you
          care. That is the difficulty that exists here. If I have got your
          spectacles, or your shoes, or any other thing of yours, the
          common saying made use of is, "O, never mind, it is all in the
          family, you are a brother, it is all right." I am telling you as
          it is in that tithing office. What did you hear read, last April
          Conference? That there were 48000 dollars owing to the tithing
          office; yet do you try to pay that debt? No, but the word is
          "Brother Brigham, trust me another thousand;" and you never will
          pay it on the face of the earth, and you think me rather hard
          because I scold you. These are the difficulties that are here
          among us.
          215
          There exists a double spirit, there is a false, hypocritical
          spirit in many of the people; it is bred in the flesh, and in the
          bones, it is received from their fathers and mothers, a
          hypocritical pretension to friendship, when the real thing itself
          does not exist in them, and never did; but they are destitute of
          the true knowledge of the principles of righteousness. I have
          frequently thought it was not good for a man to have around him
          too many friends. I have said to my brethren, heretofore, "Don't
          love me quite so well as to take away all I have got. I want you
          to love me pretty well, I have plenty of flour now, and scores
          and scores of tons I can distribute, but do not take my soul out
          of me, do not love me quite to death. I am willing to be loved
          sincerely, but covet not that which I possess, under a false
          pretension of love to me." There is that spirit among this
          people, but it is for want of knowledge, and a proper
          understanding. Did they possess these, there would be no
          difficulty in the case.
          215
          Now, for instance, a great many inquire, saying, "Why does not
          our Church keep a store here?" Many can answer that question, who
          have lived here for some years past; and you who make such an
          inquiry, would have known the reason, had you also lived here.
          You that have lived in Nauvoo, in Missouri, in Kirtland, Ohio,
          can you assign a reason why Joseph could not keep a store, and be
          a merchant? Let me just give you a few reasons, and there are men
          here who know how matters went in those days. Joseph goes to New
          York and buys 20,000 dollars' worth of goods, comes into Kirtland
          and commences to trade. In comes one of the brethren, "Brother
          Joseph, let me have a frock pattern for my wife." What if Joseph
          says, "No, I cannot without the money." The consequence would be,
          "He is no Prophet," says James. Pretty soon Thomas walks in.
          "Brother Joseph, will you trust me for a pair of boots?" "No, I
          cannot let them go without the money." " Well," says Thomas,
          "Brother Joseph is no Prophet; I have found that out, and I am
          glad of it." After a while, in comes Bill and sister Susan. Says
          Bill, "Brother Joseph, I want a shawl, I have not got the money,
          but I wish you to trust me a week or a fortnight." Well, brother
          Joseph thinks the others have gone and apostatized, and he don't
          know but these goods will make the whole Church do the same, so
          he lets Bill have a shawl. Bill walks off with it and meets a
          brother. "Well," says he, "what do you think of brother Joseph?"
          "O he is a first-rate man, and I fully believe he is a Prophet.
          See here, he has trusted me this shawl." Richard says, "I think I
          will go down and see if he won't trust me some." In walks
          Richard. "Brother Joseph, I want to trade about 20 dollars."
          "Well," says Joseph, "these goods will make the people
          apostatize; so over they go; they are of less value than the
          people. Richard gets his goods. Another comes in the same way to
          make a trade of 25 dollars, and so it goes. Joseph was a
          first-rate fellow with them all the time, provided he never would
          ask them to pay him. In this way it is easy for us to trade away
          a first-rate store of goods, and be in debt for them.
          216
          And so you may trace it down through the history of this people.
          If any brethren came into the midst of them as merchants, I never
          knew one of them go into their stores and go out again satisfied,
          neither did you. If I had 100,000 dollars worth of goods in that
          store, owned by myself, or held by a "Mormon" company, in six
          months the goods would be gone, and we should not have 100
          dollars to pay the debt. But let an infernal mobocrat come into
          our midst, though he brands Joseph Smith with the epithet of
          "false Prophet," and calls the "Mormons" a damned set of thieves,
          and would see all Israel scorching in Tophet, you would give him
          the last picayune you could raise.
          216
          There is not a man who has been in this community a few years but
          knows I am telling the living truth. Do any of you hate me for
          it? Do any of you love me for it? It is all the same to me. Do
          you love the cause? "Yes," every heart at once responds," "I love
          the cause, I love the Lord and my religion." If I would only
          permit myself to swear, I would say, What the devil is the
          reason, then, you don't live according to it? What keeps you from
          that? What is the reason you cannot pay me what you owe me, as
          well as your enemy. You continue to trade with the Almighty that
          way, and it will sink this whole people down to hell. You trade
          with the Almighty worse than you do with the devil. These things
          exist, and you know it. A man comes into this Church with a
          little property, and he must suffer them to pick him until he is
          as blind as brother Leonard is, that sits over there, or else the
          people will turn round and curse him, and sink him to the
          nethermost hell if possible. They have treated Edwin D. Woolley
          so, and others. Can they keep a store among this people? No, they
          must let them have the goods, and wait until they can pay them,
          if they ever do it at all.
          216
          They got up a quarrel, about a year ago, and every High Priest
          and Elder were going to cut Thomas Williams off from the Church,
          because he asked them to pay their just debts. I said to Thomas,
          "If they do not pay you as they agreed, arraign them before the
          High Council; I will be your lawyer, and they shall be cut off
          from the Church." They had got it all cut and dried, that if he
          asked them to pay him, he should be cut off from the Church, but
          I told them that if they did not live up to their agreement, they
          should be cut off from the Church, and then be tried by the law
          of the land.
          217
          How has Thomas Williams behaved here? He has paid his tithing,
          and done good to this people; he has handed over nails, cotton
          cloth, and other necessary articles. When he brings in his goods,
          he pays his tithing on them honorably, yet he can be abused; and
          it is so with every man who comes into the midst of this people
          with goods, unless he pays them out at random to Tom, Dick, and
          the devil. Latter-day Saints cannot keep a store of goods,
          because they will not act as Latter-day Saints, but they will
          sustain their enemies. How much do you suppose you have paid into
          these Gentile stores within four months? Can you give a rough
          guess? I can tell you, if you do not know, for I know something
          about it. You have paid to them 300,000 dollars within the last
          six months. The brethren think that we are very hard with them if
          we ask for a little tithing. I wonder if we have received 30,000
          dollars, which we should certainly have received in silver and
          gold, if the people had been faithful in paying their tithing on
          the money they have spent at these stores; the money has gone,
          from time to time, in gold and silver, by box-fulls, to the east.
          There is not a span of mules that could be found in this valley,
          able to draw the money, if it were all in silver, to the States,
          that this people have spent with these merchants within a few
          months past; they must therefore do business upon the principle
          of checks; in any other way it is a burden to them to get it over
          the plains. These are the difficulties that work against our
          living and doing as we should do.
          217
          I will now go back, and say to all the inhabitants of these
          valleys, if I had the power, and the people were willing to
          subscribe to that which would do them good, I would look up all
          the kanyons containing wood and other facilities, put gates at
          the mouths of them, have good roads worked in them, so as to make
          the wood and the timber easy of access, and make the people pay
          for the roads and the keeping of them in good repair. If I was a
          Gentile, and I owned these kanyons, and should make such a
          proposition, it would be so that I could hardly get down to this
          meeting house without some one crying out, "I move that we give
          that gentleman a vote of thanks;" another would second it, "For
          that is certainly a Gentile of the first class." [The speaker
          made motions, such as bowing and scraping, as the poor serfs of
          foreign nations do, who subsist on the patrimony of a titled
          fellow mortal.] I make these motions to show this people how
          disgraceful it is; it is a disgrace to any community to act as
          they have done towards the measures of those who wish to do them
          good all the day long. If a Latter-day Saint wants to do good,
          why not bless him for it. But no, it is overlooked as a thing of
          naught. Now, if I do ape out a little of these feelings here, it
          is to show you how they look inside. I can see them in the
          people, I know what there is in the midst of them, I know what
          they have to contend against, and the difficulties and weaknesses
          they are subject to; it is the want of true knowledge and a sound
          understanding which causes them to act as they do; if it were not
          for that, if this people had the knowledge of angels, and then
          did as they do, they would be sent to hell before the rising of
          another sun; but as they are ignorant, and inasmuch as they
          desire to do good, God winks at their foibles, and hopes by it to
          bless them.
          218
          Now, I am going to have an expression from this Conference, with
          regard to the plan that we, as a community, shall adopt; not as a
          county, not as the Legislature of Utah, not as civil and military
          officers, but as officers and members of the Church of Jesus
          Christ of Latter-day Saints; and before I take the expression, if
          there is one man in this house who feels himself capable of
          showing a better method, or of producing a better plan to keep
          the people from running over each other, from breaking each
          other's necks, and the necks of their horses, I will give him an
          opportunity of presenting that plan. In the first place, the
          feelings of individuals are--what advantage can I get by
          introducing this plan? I wish you to remember that all I can get
          by it is, to protect you against running over and trying to kill
          each other. We do not own the kanyons, but the plan is--let them
          go into the hands of individuals who will make them easy of
          access, by paying them for their labor. Before I take an
          expression, I want to see if there is a man that can rise up and
          propose a better plan than I propose, which of course would be to
          our advantage to adopt in preference to mine. I have talked long
          enough upon this matter. The motion is, that we, as the Church of
          Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, in the capacity of a General
          Conference assembled, and embracing the whole community in the
          midst of the mountains, recommend, and give it as our opinion,
          that the best method of disposing of the kanyons is to put them
          in the hands of individuals to make good roads in them, and
          obtain their pay by taking toll from those who use the roads, at
          a gate erected for that purpose at the mouth of each kanyon. Now,
          sisters, I want you to vote also, because women are the
          characters that rule the ballot box. If you are in favor of this
          motion, as Latter-day Saints, signify it by the uplifted hand.
          [Unanimous.]
          218
          Let the judges in the county of Great Salt Lake take due notice,
          and govern themselves accordingly. The same thing I say to the
          judges of any of the other counties of the territory, Take
          notice, and govern yourselves accordingly. Put these kanyons into
          the hands of individuals who will make good roads into them, and
          let them take toll from the inhabitants that go there for wood,
          timber, and poles. Now this is my order for the judges to take
          due notice of; it does not come from the Governor, but from the
          President of the Church; you will not see any proclamation in the
          paper to this effect, but it is a mere declaration of the
          President of the Conference. Let these things go out to make the
          people satisfied, and feel contented to have the privilege of
          getting wood without breaking their necks and destroying their
          teams.
          218
          I want to occupy a few moments more, and talk about our
          contemplated temple. It has been moved, seconded, and carried by
          this Conference, that we build a temple here of the best material
          that America affords. If this is done, it will have to be built
          of platina; and I do not know that there is any of it to be got
          in this territory. It is purer, stronger, and is every way a
          better metal than pure gold. If we cannot get the platina, we
          must build a temple of pure gold; that is here, I know. But if
          the Conference want us to build a temple of pure gold, they will
          have to put into the tithing stores something besides old
          half-dead stinking cows, and old broken-kneed horses; or if they
          even put in all the good cattle they possess, will it build a
          temple of gold, of silver, or of brass? No, it will not.
          218
          I am inclined to offer a chemical argument with regard to the
          material for building a temple in our present circumstances. The
          best materials, I have mentioned, probably. Iron might be better
          than stone; the time will come when the Lord will bring for brass
          gold, for iron silver, and for stones iron, and for wood brass,
          to beautify His sanctuary, and make the place of His feet
          glorious. That will be, but it is not now. I thought, when I was
          at Iron County, and saw the iron mountains, that the iron was
          actually come instead of stone.
          219
          But for the chemical argument touching the material for the
          building of a temple in this city. It has been proposed, that we
          send to San Pete to get the rock. Some say it will cost too much,
          others say we cannot do it, and others say that we can. I, not
          being a practical chemist, but only a chemist in theory, shall
          have to use my own language, to express my ideas. You may bring
          the stone from San Pete, which is a beautiful specimen or rock,
          and erect a temple here with it; then you may take this sand
          stone that is found in abundance in the Redbute Kanyon, and build
          a temple of that; then you step over to the Emigration Kanyon,
          and get this bastard marble, and build another of the same
          dimensions as that you have built of the red sand stone. Now you
          have got the San Pete rock temple, the red sand stone temple, and
          another built of lime stone, or bastard marble I call it; then,
          right beside of that, another one of adobies, mixed with
          pebbles--take that clay, and these pebble stones that are so
          abundant here, and mix in with them straw, and build another
          temple of that composition, besides the three which are built of
          different kinds of rock, and let them stand together--which do
          you think will stand the longest? Being a chemist in theory, I
          should say, according to my mind, when the San Pete rock is
          washed into the Jordan, the other buildings will still be
          standing, and be in moderate condition. The red sand stone will
          go the next, and the other two still remain, the bastard marble
          or lime stone will be in pretty good preservation; and when that
          is all decomposed and washed away into the Jordan, you will find
          that temple which is built of mud or adobies, as some call them,
          still remains, and in better condition than at the first day it
          was built.
          219
          You may ask any practical chemist, any man who knows,
          understands, and studies the elements, and he will corroborate
          these statements. This is a matter I want you to look at, to
          think and meditate upon. I do not talk about the expense of the
          building, and the time it would take to erect it, but its
          durability, and which is the best material within our reach to
          build it with. If you take this clay, which is to be found in
          abundance on these bottom lands, and mix with it these pebble
          rocks, and make adobies of the compound, it will petrify in the
          wall and become a solid rock in five hundred years, so as to be
          fit to cut into millstones to grind flour, while the other
          materials I have mentioned will have decomposed, and gone back to
          their native elements. I am chemist enough to know that much. My
          simple philosophy is this. The elements of which this terra firma
          is composed, are every moment either composing or decomposing.
          They commence to organize or to compose, and continue to grow
          until they arrive at their zenith of perfection, and then they
          begin to decompose. When you find a rock that has arrived at its
          greatest perfection, you may know that the work of decaying has
          begun. Let the practical chemist make his observations upon a
          portion of the matter of which this earth is composed; and he
          will find, that just as quick as it is at its perfection, that
          very instant it begins to decompose. We have proof of this. Go
          into Egypt, for instance, and you will find the monuments,
          towers, and pyramids, that were erected in the days of Joseph,
          and before he was sold into Egypt; they were built of what we
          call adobies, clay mixed up with straw; these fabrics, which have
          excited interest for so many ages and are the wonder of modern
          nations, were built of this raw material. They have bid defiance
          to the wear of ages, and they still remain. But you cannot find a
          stone column that was reared in those times, for they are all
          decayed. Here we have actual proof that the matter which is the
          furthest advanced to a state of perfection, is the first to
          decompose, and go back into its native element, at which point it
          begins to be organized again, it begins to congeal, petrify, and
          harden into rock, which grows like a tree, but not so
          perceptibly.
          219
          Gold and silver grow, and so does every other kind of metal, the
          same as the hair upon my head, or the wheat in the field; they do
          not grow as fast, but they are all the time composing or
          decomposing. So much, then, for my views touching the material to
          be used in building a Temple upon this block. You may go to San
          Pete and get stone for it, and when five hundred years have
          elapsed you will not find a building. You may build of that red
          sand stone, and it will live out the San Pete rock, and the lime
          stone will out live that. But when you come to the adobies, they
          will out-live either of them, and be five hundred years better
          than the day they were first laid. This is a pretty strong
          argument in favor of a mud building.
          220
          How long has the city of Washington been built? What was there
          before my father entered into the revolutionary war? Where was
          the Capitol then? It was in Philadelphia sixty years ago, there
          was no such thing as a Capitol in Washington. Let me ask a
          question--is it built of rock? I never was there. [Voice, "Yes."]
          It is built of rock. The House of Representatives was rebuilt in
          1812, not more than forty years ago. Would any of you that have
          not been there, suppose that it would need patching up already to
          make it comfortable for the representatives of the nation? This,
          however, is the case, for within ten years past eighty thousand
          tons of putty have been used to putty up the places where the
          stone has decayed by the operation of the elements, and it has
          not yet been built forty years. I mention this, because I wish
          the Conference to know what they are doing when they commence to
          build a temple of stone. As for myself, I know enough about rock.
          If a man should undertake to put me up a stone house, I should
          wish him to build it of adobies instead, and then I should have a
          good house. We are talking about building one for the community,
          and I mention this about the Capitol to show you that the rock
          does not endure; the moment it becomes as hard as it is ever
          going to be, that moment it begins to decay. It may be a slow
          process in growing, or decomposing, yet it is doing the one or
          the other continually.
          220
          I have my own individual thoughts, of course, and these I express
          with regard to the temple. According to my present views, there
          is not marble in these mountains, or stone of any kind or
          quality, that I would rather have a building made of than
          adobies. As for the durability of such a building, the longer it
          stands the better it becomes; if it stands five thousand years,
          it increased in its strength until it comes to its highest
          perfection, before it begins to decay. What do our "Mormon" boys
          say about trying to dig into one of those old Catholic cathedrals
          that are now standing in California? They say they might as well
          have undertaken to dig through the most solid rock you ever saw,
          as to dig through those adobie walls. Do you think they are
          decaying and falling down? No, they are growing better all the
          time, and so it is with the houses we live in. If they have good
          foundations, these houses that we live in will be better when
          they have stood fifty years than they are at this day. I will not
          say that it is so with a stone house, or with a brick house; for
          when you burn the clay to make brick, you destroy the life of it,
          it may last many years, but if the life is permitted to remain in
          it, it will last until it has become rock, and then begin to
          decay.
          220
               A
                s for the temple, I will give you the nature of your vote
          with regard to it--the sum of it was, that those that dictate the
          building of it be left to do with it as they please. They will,
          anyhow. But I give it as my opinion that adobies are the best
          article to build it of. I do not fear the expense, neither do I
          care what you build it of; only when it is built, I want it to
          stand, and not fall down and decay in twenty or thirty years,
          like brother Taylor's one would, that he was giving an exposition
          of; "that when we go within the vail into the heavenly world, we
          need not be ashamed of it, but when we look down upon it, it will
          be of solid rock:" but if it is built of San Pete rock, when he
          looks down to see it he will find it ain't there, but it is gone,
          washed into the Jordan. It cannot remain, it must decay.    May
          the Lord bless you. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / John
          Taylor, April 8, 1853
                             John Taylor, April 8, 1853
                             LEGITIMACY AND ILLEGITIMACY.
               A sermon delivered by Elder John Taylor, at the General
                                     Conference,
               in the Tabernacle, Great Salt Lake City, April 8, 1853.
          221
          It rejoices my heart to hear the principles that have been
          advanced this day by our President, because they have their
          foundation in truth, are based upon the principles or equity, and
          are calculated to promote the happiness, well-being, exaltation,
          and glory of man, in time, and throughout all eternity. They lead
          us back into eternity; they existed with us there, and in all the
          various stages of man's existence they are calculated to elevate
          and ennoble him, and place him in a proper position before God,
          angels, and men. They will put him in possession of his
          legitimate right, save him from the grasp of the adversary, from
          every subtle stratagem of the powers of darkness, and place him
          in his proper station in time and in eternity.
          221
          I have been much pleased with and edified by the remarks that
          have been made upon this stand during the Conference. Wisdom has
          been displayed in them; from them the intelligence of heaven has
          beamed forth, the mysteries of eternity have been spread before
          our minds, and we have had a view of heavenly things, that has
          filled our hearts with joy and our mouths with praise. It has
          made us feel as though we were upon the threshold of eternity; as
          though we were eternal beings, and had to do with eternal things;
          as though the things of this world were short, fleeting, and
          evanescent, not worthy of a thought when compared with those
          things that are calculated to exalt and ennoble us in time and in
          eternity.
          221
          The principles of justice, righteousness, and truth, which have
          an endless duration, can alone satisfy the capacious desires of
          the immortal soul. We may amuse ourselves like children do at
          play, or engage in the frivolities of the dance. We may take our
          little enjoyments in our social assemblies, but when the man
          comes to reflect, when the Saint of God considers, and the
          visions of eternity are open to his view, and the unalterable
          purposes of God are developed to his mind--when he contemplates
          his true position before God, angels, and men, then he soars
          above the things of time and sense, and bursts the cords that
          bind him to earthly objects; he contemplates God and his own
          destiny in the economy of heaven, and rejoices in a blooming hope
          of an immortal glory.
          221
          Such have been some of our feelings, while our minds have been
          carried away from the things of earth to contemplate the thing
          with which eternal beings are associated, and the glories that
          await us in the everlasting mansions of the Gods.
          221
          The principles that we have to do with, then, are eternal, and
          not simply to play a game upon the checker of mortality, on which
          people can win and lose for the time being. We have to do with
          that which shall continue
                
                     
                    Or immortality endures."  
                                                   
                
                    "
                     While life, and thought, and being last,
          221
          We seek not to build our hopes upon things that are evanescent,
          fleeting and transitory.
          222
               It is not he that can play the best game at checkers, that
          can take the most advantage of his neighbor, that can grasp the
          most earthly good, or that can put himself in possession of
          anything his heart desires pertaining to time, that is the most
          happy; but it is he who does that which will last, live, and
          continue to abide with him while "immortality endures," and still
          be on the increase worlds without end.
          222
          If we can possess principles of this kind, then we are safe,
          everything else amounts to an illusion or a delusion, which
          cannot satisfy the desires of the mind, but as the Prophet says,
          it is like a thirsty man who dreams he is drinking, but when he
          awakes, he is faint, and his soul is thirsty; he dreams that he
          is eating, and when he awakes his soul is empty. This is the true
          situation of all men who are without God in the world; and
          nothing but a knowledge of eternal principles, of eternal laws,
          of eternal governments, of eternal justice and equity, and of
          eternal truth, can put us right, and satiate the appetite of the
          immortal soul.
          222
          If we make not a just estimate of these things, it is in vain
          that we attempt to say, "Lord, Lord," because we do not the
          things which He says. Every thing associated with the Gospel of
          salvation is eternal, for it existed before the "morning stars
          sang together for joy," or this world rolled into existence. It
          existed then, just as it now exists with us, and it will exist
          the same when time with us is no more. It is an eternal
          principle, and every thing associated with it is everlasting. It
          is like the Priesthood of the Son of God, "without beginning of
          days or end of years." It lives and abides for ever. If there is
          any principle that is not eternal, it is not a principle of the
          Gospel of life and salvation.
          222
          There are many changes and shifting scenes that may influence the
          position of mankind, under different circumstances, in this stale
          of mortality; but they cannot influence or change the Gospel of
          the Son of God, or the eternal truths of heaven; they remain
          unchangeable; as it is said very properly by the Church of
          England, in one of their homilies, "as it was in the beginning,
          is now, and ever shall be, worlds without end." If nothing else
          they say is true, that is, and I can say amen to it, with all my
          heart. All true principles are right, and if properly understood
          and appreciated by the human family, to them they are a fountain
          of eternal good.
          223
          The principle of "heirship," which President Young preached about
          to-day, is a principle that is founded on eternal justice,
          equity, and truth. It is a principle that emanated from God. As
          was said by some of our brethren this morning, there may be
          circumstances arise in this world to pervert for a season the
          order of God, to change the designs of the Most High, apparently,
          for the time being, yet they will ultimately roll back into their
          proper place--justice will have its place, and so will mercy, and
          every man and woman will yet stand in their true position before
          God. If we understand ourselves correctly, we must look upon
          ourselves as eternal beings, and upon God as our Father, for we
          have been taught when we prayed to say, "Our Father, which art in
          heaven, hallowed be thy name." We have fathers in the flesh, and
          we do them reverence, how much more shall we be in subjection to
          the Father of Spirits and live. I need not enter into any proof
          in relation to this, for it is well understood by the Saints that
          God is the Father of our spirits, and that when we go back into
          His presence, we shall know Him, as we have known our earthly
          parents. We are taught to approach Him as we would an earthly
          parent, to ask of Him such blessings as we need; and He has said,
          If a son ask bread of his father shall he give him a stone, or if
          he ask for fish, a scorpion. If ye then, being evil, know how to
          give good gifts unto your children, how much more will your
          Heavenly Father give His holy Spirit to them that ask Him.
          223
          We have a Father, then, who is in heaven. He has placed us on
          this earth for some purpose. We found ourselves in possession of
          bodies, mental faculties, and reasoning powers. In a word, we
          found ourselves intelligent beings, with minds capable of
          recalling the Past and launching into the unborn future with
          lightning speed; and were it not for this earthly tabernacle,
          this tenement of clay, they would soar aloft and contemplate the
          unveiled purposes of Jehovah in the mansions of the redeemed. We
          found ourselves here with minds capable of all this and more.
          God, who has ordained all things from before the foundation of
          the world, is our Father. He placed us here to fulfil His wise
          and unerring counsels, that we might magnify our calling, honor
          our God, obtain an exaltation, and be placed in a more glorious,
          exalted, and dignified position than it would have been possible
          for us to enjoy if we had never taken upon us these bodies. This
          is my faith; it is the faith of this people.
          223
          I have no complaints to make about our father Adam eating the
          forbidden fruit, as some have, for I do not know but any of us
          would have done the same. I find myself here in the midst of the
          creations of God, and it is for me to make use of the
          intelligence God has given me, and not condescend to anything
          that is low, mean, grovelling, and degrading--to anything that is
          calculated to debase the immortal mind of man, but to follow
          after things that are in their nature calculated to exalt,
          ennoble, and dignify, that I may stand in my true position before
          God, angels, and men, and rise to take my seat among the Gods of
          eternity.
          223
          We will now come to the principle of legitimacy, which was the
          text given out this morning--to our rights, privileges,
          Priesthoods, authorities, powers, dominions, &c. &c. And as some
          of us are Scriptorians, and all profess to believe the Bible, I
          feel inclined to quote a text from it. Paul, when speaking of
          Jesus Christ, gives us to understand that he is the firstborn of
          every creature, for by him were all things made that were made,
          and to him pertains all things; he is the head of all things, he
          created all things, whether visible or invisible, whether they be
          principalities, powers, thrones, or dominions; all things were
          created by him and for him, and without him was not anything made
          that was made. If all things were created by him and for him,
          this world on which we stand must have been created by him and
          for him; if so, he is its legitimate, its rightful owner and
          proprietor; its lawful sovereign and ruler. We will begin with
          him, then, in the first place, in treating on the subject of
          legitimacy.
          223
          But has he had the dominion over all nations, kindreds, peoples,
          and tongues? Have they bowed to his sceptre, and acknowledged his
          sway? Have all people rendered obedience to his laws, and
          submitted to his guidance? Echo answers "NO!" Has there ever been
          a kingdom, a government, a nation, a power, or a dominion in this
          world that has yielded obedience to him in all things? Can you
          point out one?
          224
          We read of the Jews who were a nation that submitted only in part
          to his authority, for they rebelled against his laws, and were
          placed under a schoolmaster until the Messiah should come. We
          read also, in the Book of Mormon, of some Nephites that dwelt
          upon this land, who kept the commandments of God, and perhaps
          were more pure than any other nation that history gives any
          account of. But, with these exceptions, the nations, kingdoms,
          powers, and dominions of the world have not been subject to the
          law, dominion, rule, or authority of God; but, as it is expressed
          by one of the ancients, the prince and power of the air, the god
          of this world has ruled in the hearts of the children of
          disobedience, and led them captive at his own will. Where is the
          historian, the man acquainted with ancient lore, who can point me
          out one government, nation, power, or dominion, that has been
          subject to the rule of God, to the dominion of Jesus Christ, with
          the exception of those Jews and Nephites which I have referred
          to? If there has been any such nation, the history of it has
          escaped my notice. I have never been able to obtain such
          information.
          224
          What then has been the position of the world for generations
          past? They have been governed by rulers not appointed of God; if
          they were appointed by Him, it was merely as a scourge to the
          people for their wickedness, or for temporary rulers in the
          absence of those whose right it was to govern. They had not the
          legitimate rule, Priesthood, and authority of God on the earth,
          to act as His representatives in regulating and presiding over
          the affairs of His kingdom.
          224
          Perhaps it may be well, at this stage of my remarks, to give you
          a short explanation of my ideas on government, legitimacy, or
          Priesthood, if you please. The question, "What is Priesthood?"
          has often been asked me. I answer, it is the rule and government
          of God, whether on earth, or in the heavens; and it is the only
          legitimate power, the only authority that is acknowledged by Him
          to rule and regulate the affairs of His kingdom. When every wrong
          thing shall be put right, and all usurpers shall be put down,
          when he whose right it is to reign shall take the dominion, then
          nothing but the Priesthood will bear rule; it alone will sway the
          sceptre of authority in heaven and on earth, for this is the
          legitimacy of God.
          225
          In the absence of this, what has been the position of the
          nations? You who have made yourselves acquainted with the
          political structure and the political intrigues of earthly
          kingdoms, I ask, from whence did they obtain their power? Did
          they get it from God? Go to the history of Europe, if you please,
          and examine how the rulers of those nations obtained their
          authority. Depending upon history for our information, we say
          those nations have been founded by the sword. If we trace the
          pages of history still further back to the first nation that
          existed, still we find that it was founded upon the same
          principle. Then follow the various revolutions and changes that
          took place among subsequent nations and powers, from the
          Babylonians through the Medo Persians, Grecians, Romans, and from
          that power to all the other powers of Europe, Asia, and Africa,
          of which we have any knowledge: and if we took to America from
          the first discoveries by Columbus to the present time, where are
          now the original proprietors of the soil? Go to any power that
          has existed upon this earth, and you will find that earthly
          government, earthly rule and dominion, have been obtained by the
          sword. It was the sword of men that first put them in possession
          of this power. They have walked up to their thrones through
          rivers of blood, through the clotted gore and the groans of the
          dying, and through the tears and lamentations of bereaved widow's
          and helpless orphans; and hence the common saying is, "Thrones
          won by blood, by blood must he maintained." By the same principle
          that they have been put in possession of territory, have they
          sought to sustain themselves--the same violence, the same fraud,
          and the same oppression have been made use of to sustain their
          illegitimacy.
          225
          Some of these powers, dominions, governments, and rulers, have
          had in their possession the laws of God, and the admonitions of
          Jesus Christ; and what have they done to his servants in
          different ages of the world, when he has sent them unto them?
          This question I need not stop to answer, for you are already made
          too familiar with it. This, then, is the position of the world.
          Authority, dominion, rule, government has been obtained by fraud,
          and consequently is not legitimate. They say much about the
          ordination of kings, and their being anointed by the grace of
          God, &c. What think you of a murderer slaying hundreds and
          thousands of his fellow-creatures because he has the power, and
          while his sword is yet reeking with human blood, having a priest
          in sacerdotal robes to anoint him to the kingship? They have done
          it. What think you of the cries of the widows, the tears of the
          orphans, and the groans of the dying, mingling with the prayers
          and blessings of the priest upon the head of the murderer of
          their husbands and their fathers?
          225
          It is impossible that there can be any legitimate rule,
          government, power, or authority, under the face of the heavens,
          except that which is connected with the kingdom of God, which is
          established by new revelation from heaven.
          225
          In a conversation with some of our modern reformers in France,
          one of their leaders said, "I think you will not succeed very
          well in disseminating the principles of your religion in France."
          I replied, "You have been seeking to accomplish something, for
          generations, with your philosophy, your philanthropic societies,
          and your ideas of moral reform, but have failed; while we have
          not been seeking to accomplish the thing that you have,
          particularly, and yet have accomplished it." We began with the
          power of God, with the government of heaven, and with
          acknowledging His hand in all things; and God has sustained us,
          blessed and upheld us to the present time; and it is the only
          government, rule, and dominion under the heavens that will
          acknowledge His authority.
          225
          Brethren, if any of you doubt it, go into some of those nations,
          and get yourselves introduced into the presence of their kings
          and rulers, and say "Thus saith the Lord God." They would at once
          denounce you as a madman, and straightway order you into prison.
          What is the matter? They do not acknowledge the legitimacy, the
          rule and government of God, nor will they inquire into them. They
          receive not their authority from Him. Nations honor their kings,
          but they do not honor the authority of their God in any instance,
          neither have they from the first man-made government to the
          present time. If there has been such a nation, or if there is at
          this time such a government, it is a thing of which I am
          ignorant.
          226
          The kings and potentates of the world profess to be anointed by
          the grace of God. But the priests who anoint them have no
          authority to do it. No person has authority to anoint a king or
          administer in one of the least of God's ordinances, except he is
          legally called and ordained of God to that power; and how can a
          man be called of God to administer in His name, that does not
          acknowledge the gift of prophecy to be the right of the children
          of God in all ages? It is impossible. These men have been gasping
          after power, and for this they have laid waste nations and
          destroyed countries. Some of them possessed it for a while, and
          others were on the eve of getting it when they were cut off, and
          down they went. What became of them afterwards? Isaiah in vision
          saw the kings of the earth gathered together as prisoners in a
          pit, and after many days they were to be visited.
          226
          Having said so much in relation to other governors and
          governments, we will now notice the difference between them and
          Abraham of old. Abraham was a man who contended for the true and
          legitimate authority. God promised to him, and to his seed after
          him, the land of Canaan for their possession, "The Lord said unto
          Abram, after that Lot was separated from him, Lift up now thine
          eyes, and look from the place where thou art northward, and
          southward, and eastward, and westward; for all the land which
          thou seest, to thee will I give it, and to thy seed for ever."
          What did Stephen say, generations afterwards? That God "gave him
          none inheritance in it, no, not so much as to set his foot on;
          yet he promised that he would give it to him for a possession,
          and to his seed after him, when as yet he had no child."
          Ezekiel's vision of the dry bones explains this seeming
          contradiction. The Lord said to him, "Son of man, can these bones
          live?" &c. Who are they? We are told, in the same chapter, they
          are the whole house of Israel, and that they shall come out of
          their graves, bone come to its bone, and sinew to sinew, and
          flesh come upon them, and they shall become a living army before
          God, and they shall inherit the land which was given to them and
          their fathers before them. The measuring line shall again go
          forth upon those lands, and mark out the possessions belonging to
          the tribes of Israel.
          226
          Abraham was a man who dared fear God, and do honor to His
          authority, which was legitimate. God tried and proved him, the
          same as He has tried many of us, and felt after his
          heart-strings, and twisted them round. When He had tried him to
          the utmost, He swore by Himself, because He could swear by no
          greater, saying, "That in blessing I will bless thee, and in
          multiplying I will multiply thy seed." "And in thy seed shall all
          the nations of the earth be blessed." Abraham obtained his
          dominion by legitimate authority; his Priesthood was obtained
          from God; his authority was that which is associated with the
          everlasting Gospel, which was, and is, and is to come, that
          liveth and abideth for ever. And the promises made to him will
          rest upon him and his posterity, through every subsequent period
          of time, until the final winding up scene of all things. Will he
          ever obtain them? Yes. For we are eternal beings, and I am now
          talking as though we were in eternity. We shall wake up in the
          morning of the resurrection, attain to all the blessings which
          have been promised to us, and strike hands with Abraham, and see
          him inherit the promises. Abraham and all his children will then
          inherit the promises, through the principle of legitimacy. And
          there are many of the sons and daughters of Abraham among us at
          the present time; these will be baptized for their dead brethren
          and sisters, and by this means bring them unto Christ, beginning
          on the outside branches of the tree, and so progressing to the
          main stock, and from that to the root. And it shall come to pass
          that all Israel shall be saved. Why? Because it is their
          legitimate right. And they are Israel who do the works of
          Abraham.
          227
          Thus it is, then, with Abraham. The old man feels perfectly easy
          about the matter; and if he does see many of his descendants
          existing as a cursed race on account of their transgressions,
          many of them enjoying no higher avocation than crying "Old
          clothes," still the time of their redemption will come, and by
          means of the eternal Gospel and Priesthood, they with us will be
          made perfect, and we with them. While the faithful are operating
          in heaven to bring this about, the Saints are operating on earth;
          and by faith and works we will accomplish all things, we will
          redeem the dead and the living, and all shall come forth, and
          Abraham will stand at the head of his seed as their ruler. This
          is his legitimate position.
          227
          We will now notice those men who are contending for it without
          any authority, and make a contrast between the two. We see them
          gathering their forces, and using their influence to destroy the
          poor among men. How long will the kings and rulers of the earth
          do this? Until they are dead and damned. And what then? They will
          be cast down into a pit. Isaiah saw them there, along with many
          other scoundrels, murderers, and scamps. After many days they
          will be visited, but they have got to lie in prison a long time
          for their transgressions. The one is legitimacy, and the other is
          illegitimacy; the one is the order of God, and the other is the
          order of the devil.
          227
          Such is the position of things in relation to the world, to
          legitimacy and illegitimacy, in regard to things that are right
          and things that are wrong. Jesus Christ created all things, and
          for him were they made, whether it be principalities, powers,
          thrones, or dominions. Now the question is, is he going to be
          dispossessed of his right because scoundrels exist in the world,
          and stand in power and dominion; because his subjects have
          rebelled against him from time to time, and usurpers have taken
          his place, and the dominion is given to another? Verily, no. But
          the time will come when the kingdom and the greatness of the
          kingdom under the whole heaven will be given to the Saints of the
          Most High, and they will possess it for ever and ever.
          227
          We will now notice some of the acts of God. and some of the acts
          of those who have been under the dominion of Satan, those who
          have had dominion over the world--the proud and haughty usurpers,
          and the shedders of innocent blood. These are they that have
          lived in the world, and possessed all the good things of it. And
          what has been the situation of the Saints in every age? All those
          who dared acknowledge that God lived, that this kingdom belonged
          to Him, that it was His right, and that He would without doubt
          possess it, have been trodden under foot, persecuted, cast out,
          hated, killed: "they wandered about in sheepskins and goat skins;
          being destitute, afflicted, and tormented." As one of old says,
          in speaking of the Jews--Which of the prophets have not your
          fathers killed who testified before of the coming of the Just
          One.
          227
          This was the case in ancient days and has been carried on in
          modern times. I have, with my own eyes, seen holy Prophets
          expire, who were killed by the hands of a murderous gang or
          blood-thirsty assassins, because they bore the same testimony
          that the holy Prophets did in days of old. How many more of their
          brethren who dared acknowledge the truth, have fallen beneath the
          same influences--have been shot, whipped, imprisoned, and put to
          death in a variety of ways, while hundreds of others, driven from
          their homes in the winter, have found their last bed; they were
          worn out with suffering and fatigue, the weary wheels of life
          stood still; they were obliged to forsake the world, in which
          they could no longer remain, because of the persecution heaped
          upon them by the enemies of the truth.
          227
          The reason of all this vile outrage upon innocent men, women, and
          children, is because there is no legitimate rule upon the earth.
          God's laws and government are not known, and His servants are
          despised and cast out.
          228
          Legitimacy and right, whether in heaven or on earth, cannot mix
          with anything that is not true, just, and equitable; and truth is
          free from oppression and injustice, as is the bosom of Jehovah.
          Nothing but that will ultimately stand. What has been the
          position of the world generally, among themselves? You see men
          marshalling armies, and making war with one another to destroy
          each other, and take possession of their territory and wealth.
          One man who is in possession of wealth, power, and authority,
          sees oppression exercised by kings; so he follows the example, as
          do rulers who exercise authority under their sovereign; then
          others in a still lower degree do the same; thus oppression
          treads upon the heels of oppression, and distress follows
          distress. You will find this to exist in a great measure through
          every grade of society, from the king on his throne, down to the
          match-maker, or the chimney-sweep.
          228
          To ameliorate the condition of man, there are a great many
          institutions introduced into the world in the shape of Tract
          Societies, Bible Societies, and many more too numerous for me to
          name. Many of them are founded by sincere men, but commencing on
          the wrong foundation, they keep wrong all the time, and fail to
          accomplish the object desired. If any one of these different
          institutions were to carry out their own principles, they would
          not only fail in accomplishing the object they have in view, but
          ultimately destroy themselves.
          228
          There are Peace Societies among the rest; their object is to
          bring peace into the world, without the Spirit of God. They see
          plainly that peace is desirable, but they wish to graft it on to
          a rotten stock. In Europe they had a "Peace Congress," and sent
          their representatives to all parts of the world; and of course
          this "Congress of Peace" wished to regulate the world, make an
          end of war, and bring in universal peace.
          228
          Talk about peace, when rancorous discord makes its nest in the
          councils and cabinets of all nations, and the hearts of their
          statesmen are steeped in hatred one to another. Jealousy,
          animosity, and strife, like the influence of a deadly contagion,
          may be found in almost every family; brother rising up against
          sister, sister against brother, the father against the mother,
          and the mother against the father, etc. We can find discord
          reigning even in the "Peace Society" itself.
          228
          Jesus Christ says, "My peace I give unto you: not as the world
          giveth, give I unto you," &c. Wherever this peace exists, it
          leaves an influence that is comforting and refreshing to the
          souls of those who partake of it. It is like the morning dew to
          the thirsty plant. This peace is alone the gift of God, and it
          can only be received from Him through obedience to His laws. If
          any man wishes to introduce peace into his family or among his
          friends, let him cultivate it in his own bosom; for sterling
          peace can only be had according to the legitimate rule and
          authority of heaven, and obedience to its laws.
          229
          Everything is disordered, and in confusion in the world. The
          reason is, because no legitimate authority has been known or
          acknowledged on the earth. Others have been trying to build up
          and establish what they supposed to be the kingdom of God. The
          socialists of France call themselves religious people, and they
          also expect to bring about a reign of glory through a species of
          Robespierreism. I was told by a man well acquainted with matters
          of fact in relation to these things, that if they gained the
          ascendancy in France, their first object would be to erect a
          statue to Robespierre. They were going to cut off thousands of
          people, to accomplish their designs: and had not Napoleon taken
          active measures to head them, hands of men were ready on a
          moment's warning to cut off the heads of thousands, and among
          these, I was informed, fifty thousand priests were doomed.
          229
          These are some of the principles and ideas that exist in the
          world, among the various nations and institutions of men, which
          are framed according to illegitimate principles. A change of
          government changes not the condition of the people, for all are
          wrong, and acting without God.
          229
          Our ideas are, that the time has come to favor God's people; a
          time about which Prophets spoke in pathetic strains, and poets
          sung. These men of God looked through the dark vista of future
          ages, and being wrapped in prophetic vision, beheld the latter
          day glory--the time of the dispensation of the fulness of times,
          spoken of by all the holy Prophets since the world began; for
          they all looked forward with joyful anticipations to the things
          which have commenced with us; they all had their eye upon the
          time when legitimacy would obtain its proper place upon the
          earth, in the shape of the kingdom of God established in the
          world, when all false rule and dominion would be put down, and
          the kingdoms of this world would become subject to God and His
          Christ. These are the ideas that they had, and these are the
          things we are seeking to carry out.
          229
          If we look at what illegitimacy has done in former times, we
          shall see the absolute necessity of the restitution spoken of by
          the Prophets, for it has filled the earth with evil, it has
          caused the world to groan in bondage, laid millions in the cold
          embrace of death, and caused disease to spread its pestiferous
          breath among the nations, leaving ruin, misery, and desolation in
          its path, and made this fair earth a howling wilderness. And
          nothing but the wisdom and intelligence of God can change it. The
          kingdom of God will establish truth and correct principles--the
          principles of truth, equity, and justice; in short, the
          principles that emanate from God, principles that are calculated
          to elevate man in time and through all eternity. How shall this
          be? It will be by a legitimate rule, authority, and dominion.
          230
          Who have we for our ruling power? Where and how did he obtain his
          authority? Or how did any in this Church and kingdom obtain it?
          It was first obtained by a revelation from the Lord of the
          Universe, by the opening of the heavens, by the voice of God, and
          by the ministering of holy angels. It is by the voice of God and
          the voice of the people, that our present President obtained his
          authority. Many people in the world are talking about mis-rule
          and mis-government. If there is any form of government under the
          heavens where we can have legitimate rule and authority, it is
          among the Saints. In the first place, we have a man appointed by
          God, and, in the second place, by the people. This man is chosen
          by yourselves, and every person raises his hand to sanction the
          choice. Here is our President, Brigham Young, whom we made choice
          of yesterday, who is he? He is the legitimate ruler among this
          people. Can anybody dispossess him? They cannot, because it is
          his legitimate right, and he reigns in the hearts of the people.
          He obtains his authority first from God, and secondly from the
          people; and if a man possesses five grains of common sense, when
          he has a privilege of voting for or against a man, he will not
          vote for a man that oppresses the people; he will vote according
          to the dictates of his conscience, for this is the right and duty
          of this people in the choice of their President, and other
          leading officers of the kingdom of God. While this is being done
          here, it is being done in every part of the world, wherever the
          Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints has a footing. Is
          there a monarch, potentate, or power under the heavens that
          undergoes a scrutiny as fine as this? No, there is not; and yet
          this is done twice a year, before all the Saints in the world.
          Here are legitimacy and rule. You place the power in their hands
          to govern, dictate, regulate, and put in order the affairs of the
          kingdom of God. This is, Vox Dei vox populi. God appoints, the
          people sustain. You do this by your own act; very well, then, it
          is legitimate, and must stand, and every man is bound to abide it
          if it takes the hair off his head. I know there are things
          sometimes that are hard, tough, and pinching; but if a man is a
          man of God, he has his eyes upon eternal things, and is aiming to
          accomplish the purposes of God, and all will be well with him in
          the end.
          230
          What advantage is there, then, between this government and
          others? Why, we have peace, and as eternal beings we have a
          knowledge of eternal things. While listening to the remarks made
          on this stand, what have we not heard--what have we not known?
          The curtains of heaven have been withdrawn, and we have gazed as
          by vision upon eternal realities. While, in the professing world,
          doubt and uncertainty throw their dark mantle over every mind.
          230
          Let us now notice our political position in the world. What are
          we going to do? We are going to possess the earth. Why? Because
          it belongs to Jesus Christ, and he belongs to us, and we to him;
          we are all one, and will take the kingdom and possess it under
          the whole heavens, and reign over it for ever and ever. Now, ye
          kings and emperors, help yourselves, if you can. This is the
          truth, and it may as well be told at this time as at any other.
          230
                
                     
                    "There's a good time coming, Saints,
                
                     
                          
                         A good time coming,
                
                     
                    There's a good time coming, Saints,
                
                     
                         Wait a little longer."
          230
          Having said so much on this point, we will return to the
          principle of legitimacy. God is our legitimate Father, and we are
          His children, and have a claim upon Him, and He has a claim upon
          us. We have come into this world to accomplish a certain purpose,
          and we have come in the dispensation of the fulness of times,
          when God decreed to gather all things together into one, whether
          they be things in heaven or on earth; and everything that has
          been in existence in any age of the world, or that is, or will
          be, which is calculated to benefit and exalt man, we shall have;
          consequently it is for us to look after anything and everything
          that ever has been true, or that has ever been developed in any
          period of the history of man, for it all belongs to us, and has
          got to be restored, for restitution means bringing back that
          which is lost. If the Antediluvians enjoyed anything that was
          good, true, and eternal, which is not yet made known to us, it
          has to be restored; or if anything existed among the ancient
          Patriarchs and Prophets, that has been lost, it has to be
          restored. If there are any people of God upon any detached part
          of this world, they with it have got to be restored. God's word
          will also be gathered into one, and His people and the Jews will
          hear the words of the Nephites, and the Ten Tribes must hear the
          words of the Jews and Nephites, and God's people be gathered and
          be one. All things will be gathered in one, and Zion be redeemed,
          the glory of God be revealed, and all flesh see it together.
          God's dominion will be established on the earth, the law go forth
          from Zion, and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem, and the
          kingdoms of this world will become subject to God and His Christ.
          231
          As eternal beings, then, we existed with our Father in the
          eternal worlds. We came on to this earth, and obtained
          tabernacles, that through taking possession of them, and passing
          through a scene of trial, and tribulation, and suffering, we
          might be exalted to more glory, dignity, and power, than would
          have been possible for us to obtain had we not been placed in our
          present position. If any of you do not believe this, let me refer
          you to a passage of Scripture or two. How was man created at
          first? We are told that God made man a little lower than the
          angels; then says Paul, "Know ye not that we shall judge angels."
          What through? It is through the atonement of Jesus Christ,
          through the taking of our bodies, the powers of the holy
          Priesthood, and the resurrection of Jesus Christ that we shall
          obtain a higher exaltation than it would have been possible for
          us to enjoy, if we had not fallen. To do right in our present
          state, then, we must carry out the principle of legitimacy
          according to a correct rule, and, if we profess to be subjects of
          the kingdom of God, we must be subject to the dominion, rule,
          legitimacy, and authority of God. No person can escape from this,
          unless he apostatizes, and goes to the devil, like a fool. He
          must be a fool who would banter away eternal life, thrones,
          principalities, and powers in the eternal world, for the paltry
          trash which exists in the shape of wealth and worldly honor; to
          let go his chance of heaven and of God, of being a King and
          Priest unto Him, of living and reigning for ever, and of standing
          among the chiefs of Israel. I cannot help calling such men fools,
          for they are damned now in making such a choice, and will be
          hereafter.
          231
          I will say a little more on legitimacy and right to rule. What
          would be the position of a man who would take a course to rob his
          neighbor, or take advantage of him in the case of his legitimacy,
          which you have heard of this morning? Such a man must be a
          greater fool than the other. For instance, a good man dies, who
          has served God in righteousness all his days; the weary wheels of
          life stand still, and he goes to the world of spirits. He
          believed in the principles of justice, equity, righteousness, and
          truth, and that his rights would be held sacred to him by his
          brethren after he was gone. But some professed man of God comes
          to his widow, and wants to steal her away from him; he would rob
          the dead with impunity, under the ostensible garb of justice to
          her and her dead husband; he will tell her he is doing it out of
          pure love to them both, and he is going to exalt them in the
          kingdom of God. We read of the kingdom of God suffering violence;
          if violence is ever attempted, it is in a case of this kind. It
          is bad enough to steal from a man his earthly property, his oxen,
          his cow, his horse, his harness, his wagon wheels, and other
          paraphernalia; but what think you of a man that would rob the
          dead of a treasure which he holds the most dear, and prized as
          the most precious thing he possessed on earth--his affectionate
          wife! Such a person will assuredly miss his figure.
          232
          You will find in the ancient laws of Israel, there were proper
          rules in relation to these matters; one was, that if a man died
          without a child, his brother or the nearest relation of the
          husband should take the widow, and raise up seed to her husband,
          that his name might be continued in Israel, and not be blotted
          out. Where did these laws come from? We are told they came from
          God. But instead of doing this, suppose he should try to steal
          this woman away, and rob his brother--how would he get along, I
          wonder, with such a case against him, at the bar of justice? The
          laws and ordinances that exist in the eternal world have their
          pattern in the things which are revealed to the children of men
          on earth. The Priesthood as it exists on the earth is a pattern
          of things in heaven. As I said in a former part of this
          discourse, Priesthood is legitimate rule, whether on earth or in
          heaven. When we have the true Priesthood on earth, we take it
          with us into the heavens; it changes not, but continues the same
          in the eternal world.
          232
          There is another feature of that ancient law which I will
          mention. It was considered an act of injustice for the nearest
          relation not to take the wife of the deceased; if he refused to
          do it, he was obliged to go before the Elders of "Israel, and his
          brother's wife shall loose his shoe from off his foot, and spit
          in his face, and shall answer and say, So shall it be done unto
          the man that will not build up his brother's house; and his name
          shall be called in Israel, The house of him who hath his shoe
          loosed." If the restitution of all things is to be brought to
          pass, there must be a restitution of these things; everything
          will be put right, and in its proper place.
          232
          There is another thing which is most grievous, afflicting, and
          distressing to contemplate. When a man takes to himself a woman
          that properly belongs to another, and defiles her, it interferes
          with the fountain of life, and corrupts the very source of
          existence. There is an offspring comes forth as the fruit of that
          union, and that offspring is an eternal being--how can it be
          looked upon? To reflect upon it, wounds the finest feelings of
          human nature in time, and will in eternity. For who can gaze upon
          the degradation of their wife, and the corruption of their seed,
          without peculiar sensations? How much more is this feeling
          enhanced when the wronged man considers that he has been robbed
          by one who professed to be his friend? This thing is not to be
          trifled with, but is of the greatest importance; hence the
          necessity of the sealing powers, that all things may be pure,
          chastity maintained, and lasciviousness be rooted out from among
          the Saints. Why so? That we may have a holy offspring, that shall
          be great, and clothed with the mighty power of God, to rule in
          His kingdom, and accomplish the work we propose they shall
          fulfil; and that when we go to sleep, we may sleep in peace,
          knowing that justice will be administered in righteousness. We
          shall know that we have a claim upon our own in the first
          resurrection; we shall know that our wives and our children will
          be there to join us, justice will be administered, and we shall
          have a claim upon them in the eternal world, and that no
          unprincipled scoundrel will be permitted to set his face on
          another, or rob him of his just claims. Why is a woman sealed to
          a man for time and all eternity? Because there is legitimate
          power on earth to do it. This power will bind on earth and in
          heaven; it can loose on earth, and it is loosed in heaven; it can
          seal on earth, and it is sealed in heaven. There is a legitimate,
          authorized agent of God upon earth; this sealing power is
          regulated by him; hence what is done by that, is done right, and
          is recorded. When the books are opened, every one will find his
          proper mate, and have those that belong to him, and every one
          will be deprived of that which is surreptitiously obtained.
          232
          Let us do righteously, and you who would seek to injure another
          and take advantage of one who was just and faithful to his God in
          his day, how would you like, when you get a few years older and
          drop into eternity, for somebody to come and serve you the same?
          You could not expect anything else, you could not die without
          being menaced by this supposition, and your dying pillow would be
          made unhappy, you would know you had done wrong, and would expect
          somebody to measure to you the same measure pressed down, shook
          together, and running over.
          233
          We have been told to preach confidence--correct principles and
          just dealings alone will inspire it. If a man speaks that which
          is not true about another, can you have confidence in him? No. If
          a man defrauds another, can you have confidence in him? No, But
          if you would, through a principle of covetousness, seek to sap
          the foundation of another's happiness, by trying to wrench from
          him those sacred rights which pertain to his interest in the
          eternal world, how much greater will be your condemnation?
          Nothing but truth, integrity, virtue, honor, and every pure
          principle, will stand in the great day of God Almighty. If such a
          person happens to get through this world, he will find barriers
          in the next, and probably miss a chance of obtaining a place in
          the first resurrection. Nothing contrary to the authority, rule,
          and government of heaven, will stand in time or in eternity; and
          if any man wants to be blessed and honored, and to obtain a high
          place in the eternal world, let him pursue a course of honor,
          righteousness, and virtue before his God; and if he wants to find
          himself amongst usurpers, defrauders, oppressors, and those in
          possession of illegitimate claims, let him take an opposite
          course. If time would permit, much more might be said about
          social, family, and individual legitimate rights; but as time
          hastens, I forbear for the present.
          233
          Well, brethren and sisters, may God bless you. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, July 24, 1853
                            Brigham Young, July 24, 1853
             EFFECTS AND PRIVILEGES OF THE GOSPEL--THE LATTER-DAY SAINTS
                              AND THE CHRISTIAN WORLD.
           A discourse delivered by President B. Young, in the Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, July 24, 1853.
          233
          I feel disposed to occupy a portion of time this morning.
          233
          I have no doubt but the people, who are Saints, are much edified
          by the preaching and exhortations given from this stand. Were I
          to speak for myself, I could truly say, I am glad, I rejoice, and
          I feel exceedingly happy, when preaching myself, and when
          listening to preaching, exhortations, and prayer, and when
          associating with the Saints in other occupations and pursuits of
          life. Also in a family capacity, in our family prayer meetings,
          and in all the avocations of life that concern myself as an
          individual, I am happy.
          234
          The Gospel of Jesus Christ, as it is given in the Old and New
          Testaments, the Book of Mormon, the Book of Doctrine and
          Covenants, and in the experience of every true Christian who has
          lived and still lives upon the earth, teaches that it is the
          privilege of every Saint so to live and walk before their God, as
          to enjoy the light of the spirit of truth from day to day, from
          week to week, and from year to year, through their whole lives.
          Without this privilege in the Gospel, connected with the gifts of
          the Holy Ghost, I should be inclined to believe that the religion
          that is taught in the Bible and in the Book of Mormon, would
          amount to nothing more than a mere phantom--an imaginary thing.
          It would be inadequate to satisfy, in any degree, the mind of
          man, as it is now organized.
          234
          I can appeal to the experience of thousands as well as to my own,
          that the doctrine of the Saviour is true, that the history given
          in the New Testament is a true history, as far as it goes, of the
          feelings and the experience common to every variety of human
          life, and chimes with the experience of every true believer in
          Jesus Christ in all ages of the world, though the expression,
          "true believer," needs qualifying, for many believe who do not
          obey--I will qualify it by saying, a believer in Jesus Christ,
          who manifests his faith to God, angels, and his brethren, by his
          obedience. Not but that there are believers who do not obey, but
          the only true believers are they who prove their belief by their
          obedience to the requirements of the Gospel.
          234
          It is a special privilege and blessing of the holy Gospel to
          every true believer, to know the truth for himself. For orators
          to speak to us, Prophets to expound the law, and teach us
          doctrine, for the special purpose of giving us comfort, is not
          particularly required; but in the reflections and meditations of
          the mind in contemplating the things of God and the rich
          treasures of infinite wisdom, which are opened to the children of
          men who obey the Gospel, they enjoy a continual feast to the
          soul. This is the privilege of Latter-day Saints, it is the
          privilege of the whole world, as quick as the knowledge of God
          can be disseminated among the people. It is true, the world
          groans in darkness. They are bound with the fetters of unbelief,
          error, and ignorance, more than we are; yet we can say truly,
          that we only begin to see the dawning of truth through the deep
          mantle of ignorance in which we are enveloped. To those who live
          faithfully in their duty as Saints of God, and continue to serve
          Him, time will develop that the Latter-day Saints--the best of
          them--the most intelligent among them, are still in ignorance,
          still wanting, still looking for something more, still
          increasing, still growing; I say, time will develop to their
          satisfaction that at this stage of their existence they were in
          ignorance, but not to the same degree as those who had not had
          the privileges they enjoyed.
          234
          It is frequently observed--especially by the Latter-day
          Saints--what a curiosity it is, how singular that the Gospel of
          Jesus Christ should have the effect upon the minds of the people
          that it does have. It is remarkable! It is strange! When people
          reflect upon it, they are astonished that the Gospel of salvation
          should so disturb the feelings, the quiet, the peace of the
          community. Does it have this effect upon the world? Your own
          observation enables you to answer in the affirmative. It is a
          true saying of the Saviour's, that he came not into the world to
          make peace, to unite the whole people, but to make division. He
          came for the express purpose of dividing the righteous from the
          wicked. This formed as much a part of his holy ministry as any
          other part of the will of his Father.
          235
          We see this principle verified from days of old. It was
          demonstrated in the very commencement of the peopling of the
          earth. How soon an opposition was introduced in the morning of
          creation, when righteousness was proclaimed, when truth was
          revealed, when the light and knowledge of eternity shone with
          lustrous beauty upon Adam and his children, Cain must rise up and
          slay his brother, while they were walking with the Lord while He
          visited them from day to day, administered to them, conversed
          with them, preached to them, and gave them instruction, as I and
          my brethren instruct you from this stand. He taught them how to
          live, how to order their course, and acted in all points like a
          tender and affectionate parent, yet at the same time there must
          be an opposition.
          235
          It is very true, had not sin entered into the world, and
          opposition been introduced, death would not have entered. From
          that time to this, death, opposition, selfishness, malice, anger,
          pride, darkness, and wickedness of every description that could
          be invented by the children of men, as they have multiplied and
          spread abroad on the earth, have increased. Yes, verily, they
          have increased. And the days that we, as Christians, call the
          days of darkness and ignorance, were days of light, knowledge,
          and intelligence, to exceed that which we enjoy in this age.
          235
          We discover that the Gospel of life and salvation is perfectly
          calculated to disturb the wicked. Shall we say they are at peace?
          Are they in happiness? Are they enjoying that which their hearts
          desire? We can truly say they are seeking for it as well as they
          know how, but the result is, the increase of wickedness upon the
          earth, and the increased unhappiness of the human family.
          Mankind, indeed, cannot be happy unless they are first miserable;
          they cannot be easy, they cannot be at rest and feel comfortable,
          unless they are first in pain; they cannot be joyful, unless they
          are first in sorrow. Refer, for instance, to your own
          dispositions, to the fallen nature that is in you. When passion
          rises within you, can you satisfy your feelings unless you give
          way to them, to the injury of yourselves and others? You cannot
          sit down and feel at rest unless you can satiate the burning
          vengeance of passion, by reeking your vengeance upon some person,
          or upon some helpless animal.
          235
          The Gospel of salvation is perfectly calculated to cause
          division. It strikes at the root of the very existence of mankind
          in their wickedness, evil designs, passions, and wicked
          calculations. There is no evil among the human family, but at the
          foundation of which it strikes effectually, and comes in contact
          with every evil passion that rises in the heart of man. It is
          opposed to every evil practice of men, and consequently it
          disturbs them in the wicked courses they are pursuing.
          235
          When the Gospel which was preached by Jesus and His Apostles was
          preached to the children of Israel by Moses, it created the same
          effect among them. When he taught them to forsake their sins, to
          forsake every evil principle and practice of their lives, and
          turn to the Lord with all their hearts, it created such a
          division that Moses could not establish the Gospel among them,
          after all the kindness the Lord had shown towards them, though He
          brought them out of Egypt with a high hand, dividing the sea,
          causing the water to gush out of the rock to quench their thirst,
          manna to fall from heaven to satisfy their hunger, and quails to
          satisfy their desire for flesh. He also ordained that their
          clothing should not wax old, nor their shoes wear out for the
          space of forty years. They did not have to plough, to reap, or
          gather into barns, as we do. Notwithstanding this manifestation
          of the goodness of their God, he could not establish the Gospel
          among them, and was obliged to give them a law of carnal
          commandments. Why did not the Lord destroy them, seeing they were
          so very wicked? He did; and out of all who left Egypt, only two
          went into the land of Canaan--Joshua and Caleb.
          236
          Whenever the Gospel is preached in towns, cities, country places,
          or in any community who are in darkness, it never fails to bring
          light; it manifests their ignorance; it distracts them, and
          annoys their peace. They say, "I supposed I was wise, happy,
          comfortable, and well enough off; but here comes something that
          informs me I am mistaken, that this and the other thing are
          wrong. It reflects light upon my understanding, and teaches me
          that my acts, while I live upon the earth, should tend to the
          glory of God and the peace of mankind. This naturally seems
          contrary to my feelings, disposition, passions, and traditions,
          and to every thing about me, except the reflection of truth upon
          my mind, which enlightens my understanding, and teaches me to
          glorify God, and do good to my fellow creatures."
          236
          The Gospel is not only calculated to divide the people, but it
          will divide sin from those who embrace it with a true heart. In
          the world we find goodness, honesty, humility, and prudence,
          which are prompted by the motives of a good heart. But virtue is
          trampled into the dust, honesty and prudence are pointed at with
          the finger of scorn and derision! We see almost every principle
          of righteousness discarded. If the whole world are not in this
          condition already, it needs but a few steps more to lead them
          into the depths of it, and complete them in their rebellion
          against all good and its Author.
          236
          It is the darkness upon the earth, the gross darkness that broods
          over the minds of the people, that leads them into error,
          wickedness, and distraction, yet in the midst of this ignorance
          and awful corruption of the human mind, there are to be found
          humility, goodness, and virtue. But what use is made of them?
          They are destroyed; they are used according to the wishes of the
          wicked, and according to the designs of the evil designer. This
          is almost universally the case.
          236
          The Gospel is calculated to divide this wickedness from those who
          embrace it, and then it will divide those who embrace it from
          those who reject it. Christ and Belial cannot be made friends,
          neither can the Church of Christ and the worshippers of Belial
          unite together. They cannot amalgamate. Consequently, those who
          receive the Gospel with all their hearts, after believing the
          testimony of God's servants, will divide themselves from those
          who do not receive it. In this Gospel, life and salvation are
          offered to every honest soul; in the world they find tribulation,
          but in Jesus Christ peace. In obeying the Gospel is comfort, but
          in the glory of the world sadness and sorrow.
          236
          If the inquiry should arise in our minds, why it is that we are
          in the position we this morning occupy, it is very easily
          answered and understood by every person who understands the
          nature of the Gospel of Christ. It is because it is impossible to
          unite Christ and Belial--to unite righteousness with
          unrighteousness, for they never can go hand in hand.
          Righteousness cannot become unrighteousness, and wickedness never
          can inherit a righteous kingdom.
          237
          The ancient Saints were and the Saints of latter days have been
          driven from pillar to post, their name a hiss and a bye-word, and
          their character traduced to the lowest degree. I will appeal to
          men in this congregation, who have lived for years in the society
          of the world, who are judges, magistrates, sheriffs, merchants,
          mechanics, and farmers, if anything was ever alleged against
          their character until they joined the Latter-day Saints. But
          where are your characters now in the world? Your former friends
          now have found out that you always were miserable creatures, they
          now declare they never had any confidence in you, for you always
          were enthusiastic beings, and knew not what you were doing. They
          always believed you would prove yourselves dishonest, &c. This
          has been the character given to the Saints by the world in all
          ages.
          237
          Suppose we now notice that part of the world called Christians,
          that profess to believe the Old and New Testament, King James's
          translation. They say they believe this Bible, yet if you are in
          France, Germany, England, in the United States, in the Canadas,
          in the islands of the sea, or no matter where among the Christian
          nations, the moment you make it known that you have embraced the
          Book of Mormon, and that you believe Joseph Smith is a Prophet,
          they will at once accuse you of throwing away the Bible, they
          will publish abroad that you have become a "Latter-day Saint," "a
          Mormon," and consequently have denied the Bible you formerly
          believed, and have cast it entirely away. What is the reason of
          this, which I need not undertake to substantiate, for it is a
          fact that almost every person knows? Now, we ARE believers in the
          Bible, and in consequence of our unshaken faith in its precepts,
          doctrine, and prophecy, may be attributed "the strangeness of our
          course," and the unwarrantable conduct of many towards this
          people.
          237
          Come, my brother Presbyterian; come, my brother professors of
          every persuasion of long standing and popular distinction in the
          world, who are dubbed with the word "ORTHODOX;" come, we are all
          good Christians; I find no fault with you--why should you find
          fault with me? But you reply, "I cannot be a Latter-day Saint,
          consequently we must be separated, and we cannot be brethren any
          longer."
          237
          Come, my good brother Methodist, and my good brother Baptist, you
          are free and open in your views and feelings, for you hold forth
          a free salvation. This is a favorite doctrine of the Methodists.
          They say salvation is handed out to all the human family, without
          money and without price, and invite them to come and partake of
          the waters of life freely. I declare the same. I am a believer in
          Jesus Christ, in God the Father, and in the doctrines of
          salvation as they are taught in the Old and New Testaments,
          though not so pointedly in the Old as in the New. Yet the same
          principles of life and salvation are set forth in both of these
          books, and I believe them. Come, my brother B, do you believe
          them? You reply, "Yes, and have for these thirty years,
          twenty-seven of which I have been a preacher of the Gospel. I
          believe in the Son of God, and in the Old and New Testaments."
          Well, then, what in the world do you want to quarrel with me for?
          "Because you are not a believer, you have thrown away the Bible."
          You are mistaken, Mr. B.; for instead of that, I have learned
          wisdom, got light, knowledge, and understanding, so that I know
          how to believe the Bible. I ask you, brother B, how I must
          believe the Bible, and how shall you and every other follower of
          the Lord Jesus Christ believe it? "Brother Mormon, how do you
          believe it?" I believe it just as it is. I do not believe in
          putting any man's interpretation upon it, whatever, unless it
          should be directed by the Lord Himself in some way. I do not
          believe we need interpreters and expounders of the Scriptures, to
          wrest them from their literal, plain, simple meaning.
          238
          Let us take up a point of Scripture, and we will try to agree
          with Mr. B, and take him along with us a few moments, and find
          out where we disagree. We read in the Bible many things
          pertaining to life and salvation. We first begin to read that
          Jesus came in the flesh. Now to touch that point, which I do not
          purpose to do but slightly this morning, I am sure we shall
          disagree at the commencement. But suppose I examine that, a
          moment. The New Testament tells me that the Father gave His
          only-begotten Son a ransom for the sins of the world. Do you
          believe that, brother B.? Do you believe that Jesus Christ is the
          only-begotten Son of the Father? "Yes." Do you believe the Son
          was begotten by the Father, as the Apostles said he was? Here I
          shall have to disagree with you, to begin with; for I believe the
          Father came down from heaven, as the Apostles said he did, and
          begat the Saviour of the world; for he is the ONLY-begotten of
          the Father, which could not be if the Father did not actually
          beget him in person.
          238
          "I cannot believe that, for he is a God without body, parts, or
          passions; He has no person, therefore, I must disagree with you,
          brother Mormon." I believe the Father came down in His tabernacle
          and begat Jesus Christ. Mr. B. believes He has no tabernacle. I
          believe He has a tabernacle, and begat Jesus Christ in His
          express image and likeness, because the Bible expressly declares
          it. You disbelieve it, because your priest and your mother have
          taught you it is not so. When your mothers first read this
          Scripture, it was so plain to their understandings and to their
          children, that they understood it as an angel would, but deacon
          Jones must be called in to explain, and he explained it away. So
          I disagree with you, Mr. B., in the first point we have noticed,
          for you believe that God is without body and parts, while the
          Bible declares He has a corporeal body; that in His likeness,
          precisely, He created Adam. The priests of this age declare it is
          not so. The God Mr. B. believes in, is without body, parts, and
          passions. The God that his "brother Mormon" believes in, is
          described in the Bible as being a personage of tabernacle, having
          eyes to see, for he that made the eye shall he not see? Having
          ears to hear, for his ear are open to hear the prayers of the
          righteous. He has limbs that he can walk, for the Lord God walked
          in the garden in the cool of the day. He conversed with His
          children, as in the case of Moses at the fiery bush, and with
          Abraham on the plains of Mamre. He also ate and drank with
          Abraham and others. That is the God the "Mormons" believe in, but
          their very religious Christian brethren do not believe in the God
          of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, which is the God the Bible sets
          forth, as an organized corporeal being. In this one point, you
          can now clearly see wherein we disagree.
          238
          You say, I have thrown away the New Testament. I say, I have not.
          You say, I have sacrificed it for the Book of Mormon. I say, I
          have not. I have acknowledged the Bible from the time I could be
          taught by my parents to revere it. They taught me that it was the
          sacred word of God. And as far as it could be translated
          correctly from the Hebrew and Greek languages, it is given to us
          as pure as it possibly could be given. The Bible is mine, and I
          am not prepared to have you rob me of it, without my consent. The
          doctrine in it is mine, which I firmly believe. I believe the
          Father begat the Son, and gave him to be a propitiation for the
          sins of the world. I believe he died for the redemption of man,
          and rose again the third day.
          238
          Do you believe in the death and resurrection of Christ for the
          salvation of man, Mr. B.? "Yes."
          239
          Again, I believe he endowed the Apostles to go and preach the
          Gospel of life and salvation to the world. For, said Jesus
          Christ, "Ye are my witnesses; go and preach my resurrection from
          the dead. Tell the people, the Father gave me for their sins; but
          in Adam all die, but in me all shall again be made alive. If they
          ask you what they shall do to be saved, tell them what I have
          told every other person who has been saved; that they can only be
          saved in acts of obedience to prove they believe in me, in the
          Father, in heaven, in angels, and in you, that you are my
          servants and true believers in me. Tell them to go into the
          waters of baptism, and be baptized for the remission of sins.
          That is the first ordinance to be attended to after believing.
          After they have manifested their faith in God the Father, in me,
          and in your words by their repentance, then immerse them in water
          in imitation of my burial, and raise them up again out of the
          water, in imitation of my resurrection."
          239
          "Oh," says brother B., "I believe in baptism, but still I believe
          a person can be saved purely by the blood of Jesus, without the
          first drop of water." But Jesus told them to go into all the
          world, and preach the Gospel to every creature; he that believeth
          and is baptized shall be saved, and he that believeth not shall
          be damned.
          239
          "And do you believe it is absolutely necessary to be baptized in
          order to be saved? I cannot believe that." This is another point
          wherein you and I differ, Mr. B. You cannot say with a good
          grace, you believe the Bible, while in your works you deny it. I
          not only say I believe, but prove it by my works. I go and submit
          to be baptized for the remission of sins, as I am commanded.
          239
          "But, brother Mormon, do you really suppose that water will wash
          away your sins?" I will tell you what I suppose. I suppose THE
          LORD SAID IT WOULD, and further it is none of my business.
          Baptism has been instituted for the remission of sins; I
          therefore do it to take away my sins; if there is any guilt in
          this, it rests upon the Author of it, and not upon me. Paul was
          told to be baptized TO WASH AWAY HIS SINS.
          239
          My Christian brethren in the world Say it is a piece of folly--a
          species of extreme nonsense, to believe that water will wash away
          sins. It is no matter to me what they say; it is a commandment of
          the Lord; there is no mistake in it, it tells for itself. He
          says, Do thus and so, and your sins shall be washed away. I care
          not how they are taken away; whether an angel takes them to the
          Lord to get forgiveness, whether they sin to the bottom of the
          stream, or float on the top, and be scattered to the four winds;
          He says, Go into the water and be baptized, and they shall be
          washed away; which is enough for me. On this point also the
          Christian world and the "Mormons" disagree. But I want to know if
          we agree with the teachings of the Bible, in our belief and
          practice. The Latter-day Saints believe in doing just what the
          Lord has told them to do in this book. If they go forth and are
          baptized for the remission of sins, their sins are remitted to
          them, if they go with all good conscience, calculating to serve
          the Lord all the rest of their days.
          240
          What next? Jesus instructed his servants, after they had baptized
          believers, to lay their hands upon them for the gift of the Holy
          Ghost. We believe in that. What do you believe concerning it, Mr.
          B.? "Why, I believe it is necessary to give up our hearts to
          God." We believe that, as much as you do. "I believe in going to
          our great meetings, to our prayer meetings, and protracted
          meetings. and camp meetings, and reformation meetings; for they
          are got up for the purpose of exciting the feelings of the
          people; I believe in going there and struggling with the Lord for
          the forgiveness of sins. We do not care how long or how loud you
          pray; you may pray loud enough to break up the roof of the house,
          and send it to the four winds, but are you going to get the
          forgiveness of sins in this way? "O yes, brother Mormon, do you
          not see the world is almost evangelized by our meetings, our
          tract societies, and our missionary societies. We are going to
          convert the world in that way. I was converted so, and I am
          trying with all my might to convert others in the same way. We
          tell sinners to go to the anxious seat to get remission of their
          sins." Here is where we differ again. You tell them to go to the
          anxious seat to get forgiveness; Christ, his Apostles, and we,
          tell them to be baptized for the remission of sins. You also tell
          them to go to the anxious seat to get the Holy Ghost; we tell
          them to receive it by the laying on of hands, as the Bible
          instructs us.
          240
          "Well, Mr. Mormon, and do you actually receive the Holy Ghost in
          that way?" Yes, we do. If you call for testimony to substantiate
          this, we can give the highest, the testimony of Jesus Christ. He
          said to his ancient servants, "Go ye into all the world and
          preach the Gospel to every creature. He that believeth and is
          baptised shall be saved; and he that believeth not shall be
          damned. And these signs shall follow them that believe; In my
          name shall they cast out devils; they shall speak with new
          tongues; they shall take up serpents; and if they drink any
          deadly thing, it shall not hurt them; they shall lay hands on the
          sick, and they shall recover. We appeal to thousands in this
          Church, who can testify to the fulfilment of this quotation. At
          any rate, for one I am here to testify to hundreds of instances,
          of men, women, and children being healed by the power of God,
          through the laying on of hands: and many I have seen raised from
          the gates of death, and brought back from the verge of eternity;
          and some whose spirits had actually left their bodies, returned
          again. I testify that I have seen the sick healed by the laying
          on of hands, according to the promise of the Saviour.
          240
          "Well," says Mr. B., "if you have got this great power, and can
          heal the sick by the laying on of hands, come with me and heal
          the sick in our neighborhood; or how is it that any of you
          Mormons die at all?" Take your time, Mr. B. The Bible teaches me
          I am dust, and to dust I must return. It is not for me to thwart
          the plans of Jehovah, or do away with any item of doctrine the
          Lord has taught me. From dust I am, and to dust I must return. So
          it is with the rest of us, we shall all die and be buried in the
          silent grave, unless we can obtain faith sufficient to overcome
          death. We die because we have not conquered death, hell, and the
          grave. But if we continue obeying the Gospel, you will see the
          time when we will have that power.
          241
          Here again we disagree, as to the reception of the gift of the
          Holy Ghost. Mr. B. converts people with long prayers and loud
          shouting; we convert people by preaching repentance, and
          baptizing them for the remission of sins, and laying on of hands
          for the gift of the Holy Ghost; which spirit broods over them
          continually for their good, heals their bodies, enlightens their
          minds, and makes them humble, meek, and harmless as little
          children. When a person receives the Holy Ghost by legal
          authority, he is like a child in its mother's lap; all is
          harmony, praise to God, and good will to the children of men on
          the earth. He is full of peace, comfort, and salvation, and feels
          like crying hallelujah all the time. He is perfectly humble and
          passive, and the Lord can do with him as He pleases. Will this
          state of feeling always remain? Will passion ever rise again?
          Yes; for you then commence a warfare, though the Comforter fills
          you heart, making you rejoice in God your Saviour, with the
          atmosphere of your existence clear and unclouded; this is not to
          continue, but soon the day of trial and temptation darkens the
          fair prospect, to teach you to lean on the Lord, and to overcome
          the world. Under the influence of the Holy Ghost I have felt as
          happy as I possibly could feel, my heart has been full of joy; I
          cling to that, and hold fast to the promise of the Lord in the
          hour of temptation, and call upon Him to give me strength to
          overcome.
          241
          I must break from the thread of my discourse here, and
          say--Husbands, is that the way you do? Wives, do you adopt that
          plan when passion arises in your hearts against each other? Do
          you call upon the name of Jesus Christ, and say, "Father, I ask
          thee for the gift of thy Spirit to conquer this rising passion;"
          or do you give way to it, and scold at your wives, or at your
          children, in bitter and vindictive language? I say, shame on that
          man who will give way to his passions, and use the name of God or
          of Christ to curse his ox or his horse, or any creature which God
          has made; it is a disgrace to him.
          241
          After this short digression, I will again resume the thread of my
          subject. You remember the points upon which we disagree with our
          brother Christians; our disagreement is mutual; they disagree as
          much with us as we with them. The Bible leads us to disagree with
          all the Christian nations, and then with all the world. It has
          drawn the line of demarcation between those who serve God and
          those who serve Him not.
          241
          The Holy Ghost takes of the Father, and of the Son, and shows it
          to the disciples. It shows them things past, present, and to
          come. It opens the vision of the mind, unlocks the treasures of
          wisdom, and they begin to understand the things of God; their
          minds are exalted on high; their conceptions of God and His
          creations are dignified, and "Hallelujah to God and the Lamb in
          the highest," is the constant language of their hearts. They
          comprehend themselves and the great object of their existence.
          They also comprehend the designs of the wicked one, and the
          designs of those who serve him; they comprehend the designs of
          the Almighty in forming the earth, and mankind upon it, and the
          ultimate purpose of all His creations. It leads them to drink at
          the fountain of eternal wisdom, justice, and truth; they grow in
          grace, and in the knowledge of the truth as it is in Jesus
          Christ, until they see as they are seen, and know as they are
          known.
          241
          "What!" says Mr. B., "a man or a woman have revelation in these
          days--in this enlightened age!" Yes, my brethren and sisters
          here, both men and women, have revelation, and I can say with
          Moses of old--" Would God that all the Lord's people were
          prophets." But in this point we disagree.
          241
          Mr. B. is a stormer to preach, and to work upon the sympathies of
          the people, and especially upon the tender feelings of the female
          portion of his congregation. He will tell about their children
          dying, and picture out the sufferings of the poor, little, tender
          creatures. He will tell about their husbands dying, and about
          wives dying, and how they are lying in the lowly and silent
          grave. Add to this subject, which is so thrilling to the
          sensations of mortals, a peculiar trembling, plaintive tone, and
          perhaps accompanied with a shower of tears streaming down the
          preacher's face, and it is well calculated to disturb the
          equilibrium of the naturally tender-hearted, throw them into
          tears and sobs, and make them suppose it is the operations of the
          Holy Spirit, when in reality there is not one word of common
          sense or saving truth in all the preaching.
          242
          Again, they will walk up into the pulpit and pray for God the
          Father to descend into their midst, for Jesus Christ and angels
          to mingle in their company, and be one with them. They will pray
          for a Pentecostal shower of the Holy Ghost, whereas, in very
          deed, the persons who want the Holy Ghost, angels, the Son, the
          Father, and all heaven in their midst, when they have done
          praying, will straightway tell the people that God does not give
          the Holy Ghost, and that there is no such thing in these days as
          revelation; that Joseph Smith was an impostor because he
          professed to have received new revelation; that the Latter Day
          Saints are all impostors, and have thrown away the Old and New
          Testaments; that they are dangerous persons; and advise their
          hearers to keep away from them, or they are sure to be deluded,
          and carried away with their false doctrines; that they are the
          most wicked and dangerous people on the earth, &c.
          242
          Well, Mr. B., on this point you and I disagree. We believe the
          New Testament, and consequently, to be consistent, we must
          believe in new revelation, visions, angels, in all the gifts of
          the Holy Ghost, and all the promises contained in these books,
          and believe it about as it reads. We give great credit to the
          Apostles, translators, and the fathers that have preserved and
          handed down the Bible to us, their children, and defended it
          through blood and fire. In this they have certainly bequeathed a
          great blessing to the world, if they will be guided by the plain
          instructions contained in that book.
          243
          The Latter-day Saints understand the Bible as it reads, but the
          generality of modern Christians disagree with us, and say it
          needs interpreting. They cannot believe our Lord means what he
          says in the 16th chapter of Mark, when he tells his Apostles to
          go "into all the world, and preach the Gospel to every creature.
          He that believeth and is baptized shall be saved; but he that
          believeth not shall be damned. And these signs shall follow them
          that believe," &c. "Now," say they, "we cannot believe that as it
          is written, but we have a very pretty interpretation which suits
          us much better than the plain text. And furthermore we have a
          sweeping argument that will destroy all your system from
          beginning to end, and prove there is to be no more revelation."
          Let us look at the passage here referred to. John, while upon the
          Isle of Patmos, had a revelation which he wrote, and he concluded
          the same by saying, "For I testify unto every man that heareth
          the words of the prophecy of this book, if any man shall add unto
          these things, God shall add unto him the plagues that are written
          in this book; and if any man shall take away from the words of
          the book of this prophecy, God shall take away his part out of
          the book of life, and out of the holy city, and from the things
          which are written in this book." When this book, the Bible, was
          compiled, it was selected by the council of Carthage from a pile
          of books more than this pulpit could hold, which has been
          printed, and bound in almost all shapes and sizes, and called the
          Bible. John's revelation was one of the many books destined by
          that council to form the Bible. And the saying which we have
          quoted, and which constitutes the sweeping argument of modern
          Christians against new revelation, only alludes to this
          particular book, which was to be kept sacred, as the word of the
          Lord to John, and not to the whole Bible; nor does it prohibit
          the Saints in his day, or the Saints in any future time, from
          getting new revelation for themselves. That is not all; if we
          turn to the writings of Moses, we find the same sentiment, and
          almost the same language used. Moses says, "Ye shall not add unto
          the word which I command you, neither shall ye diminish ought
          from it, that ye may keep the commandments of the Lord your God
          which I command you." So if such quotations are given with the
          intent to shut the heavens, and put an end to all new revelation,
          then the revelations given to Prophets who arose after Moses, and
          the revelations given to Jesus Christ and his Apostles, including
          John and his revelation on the Isle of Patmos, all amount to
          nothing, and are not worthy of our notice. This "sweeping
          argument," when it is examined, sweeps away rather too much;
          besides, John's Gospel and his epistle to his brethren were
          written after he wrote his revelation on the Isle of Patmos,
          consequently he would destroy his own system; but it sets forth
          the ignorance and short-sightedness of those who have not the
          testimony of Jesus, which is the spirit of prophecy.
          243
          In this we disagree. They say that the Bible needs interpreting;
          that it does not mean what it sets forth; that the Holy Ghost has
          not been given since the days of the Apostles; that there is no
          need of any more revelation, the canon of Scripture being full.
          My KNOWLEDGE is, if you will follow the teachings of Jesus Christ
          and his Apostles, as recorded in the New Testament, every man and
          woman will be put in possession of the Holy Ghost; every person
          will become a Prophet, Seer, and Revelator, and an expounder of
          truth. They will know things that are, that will be, and that
          have been. They will understand things in heaven, things on the
          earth, and things under the earth, things of time, and things of
          eternity, according to their several callings and capacities.
          243
          There is one idea entertained by the "Mormons" which is somewhat
          of a stumbling-block to the people, and apostates handle it to
          suit their purpose. It is, that we consider the Bible merely as a
          guide or fingerboard, pointing to a certain destination. This is
          a true doctrine, which we boldly advance. If you will follow the
          doctrines, and be guided by the precepts, of that book, it will
          direct you where you may see as you are seen, where you may
          converse with Jesus Christ, have the visitation of angels, have
          dreams, visions, and revelations, and understand and know God for
          yourselves. Is it not a stay and a staff to you? Yes: it will
          prove to you that you are following in the footsteps of the
          ancients. You can see what they saw, understand what they
          understood, and enjoy what they enjoyed.
          243
          Is this throwing the Bible away? No, not at all; but it adds
          faith to faith, virtue to virtue, knowledge to knowledge, light
          to light, truth to truth; for truth embraces truth, light cleaves
          to light, and every holy principle cleaveth to its own. We have
          always differed in these items.
          243
          I have always, from my first experience, been ready to talk,
          converse, and exchange ideas with every man and woman in whose
          society I have chanced to be thrown. I say to all parties, I have
          no quarrels with you, no contentions, but I am willing to exhibit
          my belief before you, for it is the doctrine of the New
          Testament, which is also the doctrine of the Book of Mormon, and
          the Book of Doctrine and Covenants, which books contain the
          revelations of Jesus Christ, and lead to eternal life. I give
          them to you freely. If you have got anything extra, and worth
          more than what I have, why not be willing to give to me as I am
          to give to you? Have you got true principles of Christianity?
          They are also mine. I never had any occasion to have a quarrel or
          debate with any man.
          244
          You say you belong to the Presbyterians; it is no matter if you
          have got the truth. Are you a Calvinist, or a Wesleyan? It is no
          matter, if you have got the truth; that truth is also mine. Do
          you belong to the Methodist's society? And have you got the
          truth? It is right, that truth is "Mormonism," it is my property.
          Are you a Quaker? It is no matter, if you have the truth, that
          same truth is mine. Are you a Catholic, and have got the truth?
          That is my doctrine, and I will not quarrel about it.
          244
          "Well," says one, "I am a Jew; I guess I can get up a quarrel
          with you." No, you cannot. I shall not contend with you, for the
          Jews have got true principles, and they possess no truth but what
          belongs to "Mormonism;" for there is not a truth on earth or in
          heaven, that is not embraced in "Mormonism."
          244
          Another steps forward and says, "I am a Pagan; I think you will
          not agree with me." Yes I will, as far as you follow the path of
          truth; and when you have got to the end of that, I will give you
          more truth; but if you reject it, it is your own business, and
          not mine. I will not ask any person to embrace anything that is
          not in the New Testament, until they have asked God if it is true
          or untrue, who will satisfy them if they ask in faith nothing
          doubting. I will not ask any person to embrace the Book of Mormon
          and the Doctrine and Covenants, to believe that we talk with God
          and angels, until they find out the truth of it for themselves.
          If you say you believe it, because I say it is true, and never
          seek to know it for yourselves, my testimony will do you very
          little good. For me to say, I believe in Christ, and not obey the
          Gospel, will do me very little good; to say that Joseph Smith was
          a Prophet, and not obey his Gospel, would not profit me.
          244
          This may be considered strong language. But I will say further:
          if I attain to the knowledge of all true principles that have
          ever existed, and do not govern myself by them, they will damn me
          deeper in hell than if I had never known anything about them.
          244
          I have noticed a few principles upon which the Christian world so
          called, and the Latter-day Saints, disagree. Now let me say to
          you, my hearers, to Saints and sinners: there is the New
          Testament; you may leave out the Book of Mormon, and the Book of
          Doctrine and Covenants, and follow the precepts of that book
          faithfully, and I will warrant you to arrive at salvation.
          245
          "That is what we have believed all the time," say some; "we never
          did believe in gathering to the Salt Lake Valley; we have always
          believed the Lord could save us in our own land as well as in
          America. Cannot the Lord save us in England as well as in that
          far off distant valley? And we never thought it was very
          necessary to embrace the Book of Mormon." But if you will follow
          up the testimony of that book (the New Testament), and square
          your lives strictly by its doctrines, precepts, and commandments,
          you will come to me and say, "Brother Brigham, baptize me, that I
          may receive the Holy Ghost, for the Lord has told me that I must
          be baptized for the remission of my sins by one who has
          authority; and the Latter-day Saints hold the keys of the
          kingdom;" and by that means find out that the Book of Mormon is
          true, that Joseph Smith was a true Prophet of the Lord, that an
          angel from heaven administered to him, that the Latter-day Saints
          have got the true Gospel, that John the Baptist came to Joseph
          Smith and committed to him the keys of the Aaronic Priesthood;
          and that Peter, James, and John also came to him, and gave him
          the keys of the Melchizedek Priesthood, which is after the order
          of the Son of God. "And now, brother Brigham, Joseph has sent an
          angel to me, who has told me all about it, and I am going with
          you to the Salt Lake Valley in the mountains." So by faithfully
          attending to the first principles of the Gospel laid down in the
          New Testament, you are introduced into the knowledge of the works
          of God in the dispensation of the fulness of times. I say to the
          Christian world, all this is as true as the Lord God liveth; but
          is this my testimony to convert anybody? No. Nevertheless it is
          verily true.
          245
          If the Christian world would follow the instructions of the New
          Testament, they would believe the doctrines of the Latter-day
          Saints: and our swords would be beaten into plough-shares, and
          our spears into pruning-hooks, and we should hail each other as
          brethren. All quarrelling upon these plains would come to an end,
          and all desire to injure each other would cease. The word in each
          person's mouth would be "Brother, what can I do for you? Have I
          anything you need, that I can serve you with, which is necessary
          to administer to your sick wife and children? Are your cattle
          lost, and shall I help you to find them?" All the weapons of
          warfare would be buried in the dust, no more to be resurrected,
          and each man would say, "Come, let us hail each other as
          brethren, and do each other good instead of evil."
          245
          How is it with the Latter-day Saints? I dare scarcely talk about
          them. We that have been inside among the Saints, have known
          longer than you who have been outside, that they are not over
          righteous, though we are not guilty of what you think we are.
          245
          Let me explain. A man or woman who has embraced, and who enjoys,
          the principles of this Church, ought to live like an angel. They
          ought never to be angry with each other, but live the light of
          the truth continually, and every man be kind to his neighbor.
          Instead of that, there are bickering, quarrelling, and hard
          feelings, and men who are seeking to build up themselves, and get
          glory at the expense of their brethren. I would not give much for
          the exaltation of such men, unless they seek to do good for this
          people, and the people immediately around them. The Lord does not
          thank you for your alms, long prayers, sanctimonious speeches,
          and long faces, if you refuse to extend the hand of benevolence
          and charity to your fellow creatures, and lift them up, and
          encourage and strengthen the feeble, while they are contending
          against the current of mortal ills.
          245
          Cease your anger, and sullenness of temper, and serve the Lord
          with cheerfulness, and singleness of heart. You need not expect
          salvation, except you can administer the same salvation to
          others, both in precept and example. If you expect compassion
          from me, administer the same to me. If you wish kind words and
          kind treatment from me, give me the same blessing you desire
          yourself; and that is the way you will be saved.
          245
          I say, O! ye Latter-day Saints, cease your wickedness; serve the
          Lord with all your hearts, and keep your covenants with God and
          your brethren. Then we shall gain the victory, and our warfare
          very soon will come to a close. We will gain the upper hand of
          the enemy and subdue our foe, and find ourselves in heaven with
          our families and friends.
          245
          This is Zion; and if we do not get this union among ourselves, it
          is not Zion that will make us happy. We must begin and make Zion
          in our own hearts, and then extend it to our neighborhoods, and
          so continue until the Lord shall reign upon the earth.
          245
          These broken remarks I have dealt out to you freely. May God
          bless you. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Heber
          C. Kimball, September 23, 1852
                        Heber C. Kimball, September 23, 1852
                                   FUNERAL ADDRESS.
            Delivered by President Heber C. Kimball, September 23, 1852,
              on the death of Sister Mary Smith, relict of the martyred
              Patriarch Hyrum Smith, and who departed this life at the
                 residence of President Kimball, September 22, 1852.
          246
          I wish to make a few remarks, on this solemn occasion, in regard
          to sister Mary, and in regard to what brother Brigham has said,
          which is perfectly congenial to my feelings.
          246
          As it regards sister Mary Smith's situation and circumstances, I
          have no trouble at all, for if any person has lived the life of a
          Saint, she has. If any person has acted the part of a mother, she
          has. I may say she has acted the part of a mother, and a father,
          and a Bishop. She has had a large family, and several old people
          to take care of, and which she has maintained for years by her
          economy and industry.
          246
          One thing I am glad of, and I feel to rejoice in the providence
          of God that things have been as they have. She came here sick on
          the Sabbath, eight weeks ago last Sunday, for me to lay hands
          upon her. She was laid prostrate upon her bed, and was not able
          to recover afterwards. I felt as though it was a providential
          circumstance that it so happened. She always expressed that she
          knew the thing was dictated by the Lord that she should be placed
          here in my house, though accidentally. She probably would not
          have lived so long, had she been where she could not have had the
          same care. On Tuesday evening, eight weeks and two days since,
          she came here sick; from that time until her death she was
          prayerful and humble. I have never seen a person in my life that
          had a greater desire to live than she had, and there was only one
          thing she desired to live for, and that was to see to her family;
          it distressed her to think that she could not see to them; she
          wept about it. She experienced this anxiety for a month previous
          to her death, and she wept and prayed that the diseased place
          might be opened.
          246
          She was never left alone, after she became sick. My family, and
          brother Brigham's family, and others, waited upon her all the
          time. She had every attention paid to her, that ever was paid to
          a sick person. This she expressed, herself, times and times
          again. Sister Thompson has been here ever since sister Mary was
          taken sick, and she paid every attention to her. I say, with
          regard to my family, if ever there were good feelings shown to
          any person, they have manifested them to her, so also have
          brother Brigham's family, and others who live around here. I will
          say so much in their behalf, and for the consolation of the
          friends of the departed.
          247
          I am thankful to the Lord God, that I have had the privilege,
          with my family, to do Mary a kindness; it is a consolation to me.
          Do I regret it? No. I never regret a good deed that I have done
          in my life. If I regret anything, it is that I have not the
          ability to do more good.
          247
          Let us do all the good we can. Show all the kindness we can to
          the world, to both Saint and sinner, to all upon the face of the
          earth, and I know we shall receive our reward for every good and
          for every evil work we do, but I do not want to be rewarded for
          anything but that which is good. May God grant me life, that it
          may be spent for the good of this people, and for the comfort and
          consolation of brother Brigham. God forbid I should ever grieve
          his feelings, and the Spirit of God, from this time forth, that
          when I die I may depart in peace, to mingle with those who have
          gone before me.
          247
          I know sister Mary has departed in peace; she has gone home. I
          never heard her murmur against brother Brigham in my life, nor
          against me. If I went to see her, it was well; if not, it was all
          the same. She has come to see me, sometimes once, and sometimes
          twice a week. When I have seen her, I have said to her, I have no
          time to come and see you, Mary, therefore you must come and see
          me. She never considered it too much trouble to come and see me
          and her brethren. I am satisfied she desired to live for the
          benefit of her children. I know she has given them good counsel,
          and if they will follow it they will never be in trouble. I feel
          well towards them, and towards all present, and, in fact, I have
          nothing against any being upon the face of the earth. I feel to
          rejoice, I am comforted, and I feel to praise the Lord God; and
          when I have done my work, I will go to my brethren, and be with
          those I have associated with from the beginning. Why I believe
          it, is because I have an assurance for myself, which is like an
          anchor, and taketh hold of that which is within the vail. I shall
          land safe; this is my feeling, and I have no other desire in my
          heart, nor ever had from the first day I enlisted into this
          Church. I never had any wish, but to do that which is right all
          the time. Considering the character of my calling, connected as I
          am and have been with the Prophet, Apostles, and Patriarchs of
          Jesus Christ, and with holy men of God, I do not consider that
          anything else but doing right is the character of such a man, it
          is the nature of his calling and office to be an Apostle, and
          issue forth the light and truth of God, from this time henceforth
          and forever. These are my feelings, brother Brigham, all the
          time. [President Brigham Young, "I know it."] When I eat and when
          I drink, when I go out and when I come in, my prayer is, and
          feelings are, to do right; and I am glad I did right to sister
          Mary, and took care of her, and that my family had the pleasure
          of nourishing her; the satisfaction this gives me, is worth more
          to me than a hundred thousand dollars. Do I believe they know it
          in heaven? Yes, as much as you do. I want to live all the time in
          righteousness, as I know that God sees me and all the works of
          His hands. When we see as He sees, and comprehend as He
          comprehends, it will be by the same powers and keys that we are
          known to Him. I rejoice exceedingly before God, that I am a
          Latter-day Saint, that I am a "Mormon" Elder in Israel, for what
          I know, and for what I have seen and passed through; it is worth
          more to me than gold and silver, or precious stones; what I have
          passed through has given me an experience, and I praise the Lord
          God that I am a member of the house of Israel, and one of the
          elect of God; and I shall dwell with you in eternity, and I know
          it.
          247
          May God bless you forever, Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, June 5, 1853
                             Brigham Young, June 5, 1853
                             USE AND ABUSE OF BLESSINGS.
           An address delivered by President B. Young, in the Tabernacle,
                         Great Salt Lake City, June 5, 1853.
          248
          I feel disposed to say a few words on the present occasion. It is
          said that "at the sight of the eyes the heart is made to
          rejoice." This is truly the case with me this afternoon, when I
          look upon the congregation, to see I this spacious hall filled
          with the Saints of the Most High, for the purpose of partaking of
          the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper. It is a sight which I have
          not had the privilege of seeing before, only on Conference days.
          This morning I looked around to see how the house was crowded,
          which was packed to that extent that scores could not be seated.
          I looked if peradventure I could designate any person that did
          not belong to the Church, that did not profess to be a Saint; but
          I could not see a single person of that description, that I knew
          of. I thought, why not be as diligent to attend the afternoon
          meetings, to partake of the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper, as to
          attend the morning meetings? Hitherto it has not been the case,
          but my heart rejoices to see the house so well filled this
          afternoon. I feel in my heart to bless you; it is full of
          blessings and not cursings. It is something that does not occupy
          my feelings to curse any individual, but I will modify this by
          saying those who ought not to be cursed. Who ought to be? Those
          who know their master's will, and do it not; they are worthy of
          many stripes; it is not those who do not know, and do not do, but
          those who know it, and do not do it--they are the ones to be
          chastised.
          249
          While the brethren have been speaking upon the blessings the Lord
          bestows upon this people, my mind has reacted upon many of the
          circumstances of life, and upon certain principles. I will ask
          you a question--Do you think persons can be blessed too much? I
          will answer it myself. Yes, they can, they can be blessed to
          their injury. For instance, suppose a person should be blessed
          with the knowledge of the holy Gospel, whose heart is set in him
          to do evil. We esteem this as a blessing, and would not the Lord
          consider it a blessing to bestow His favors and mercies upon any
          individual, by giving him a knowledge of life and salvation? But
          suppose He bestowed it upon persons whose hearts were set in them
          to do evil, who would by their wickedness turn these blessings
          into curses, they would be blessed too much. It is possible to
          bless people to death, you can bless them to everlasting misery
          by heaping too many blessings upon them. Perhaps this is what was
          meant by the saying--It is like heaping coals of fire upon their
          heads; it will injure them, consume them, burn them, destroy
          them. Suffice it to say, that people can be blessed too much. Can
          you bless a wise man too much? a man who knows what to do with
          his blessings when they are bestowed upon him? No, you cannot.
          Can you bless a wise people too much? No, it is impossible, when
          they know how to improve upon all blessings that are bestowed
          upon them. But the Lord does and will bless the inhabitants of
          the earth with such great and inestimable blessings, in the
          proclamation of the Gospel, that they will be damned who reject
          them, for light brings condemnation to men who love darkness
          rather than light.
          249
          Have this people been blessed too much? I will not positively
          say, but I think they have, inasmuch as their blessings in some
          instances have been to their injury. Why? Because they have not
          known what to do with their blessings.
          249
          While the brethren were speaking of the liberal hand of
          Providence in bestowing abundantly the products of the earth, it
          occurred to me, that this people, to my certain knowledge, had
          felt that they had too much, and they esteemed it as good for
          nothing. It is true what brother Jedediah Grant said with regard
          to wheat, and other grains, for I have seen it myself. I have
          seen hundreds, and thousands, and scores of thousands of bushels
          of grain lying to waste and rot, when it has not brought a great
          price. Many of this people have thought, and expressed themselves
          in language like this--"I can go to California, and get so much
          gold, or I can trade and make so much gold, I cannot therefore
          spend time to take care of wheat, nor to raise it; let it lie
          there and rot while I go and accumulate riches." They were then
          wealthy, for their granaries and barns were full of the blessings
          of the Lord, but now they are empty, because they did not know
          what to do with their blessings.
          249
          I can tell this people how to dispose of all their blessings, if
          they will only allow me time enough; and if I cannot tell them
          how, I can show them. For instance, you who have fields of wheat,
          beyond the limits of grasshoppers, will have considerable crops
          when it is harvested, and perhaps so much that you will not know
          what to do with it. I know what you ought to do with it; you
          ought to say to your poor brethren--"Come and help take care of
          my grain, and share with me, and feed yourselves and your
          families." If you have so much that you cannot take care of it,
          and have no where to put it, and your neighbour is not without
          bread, tell Bishop Hunter that you have got so many hundred
          bushels to lay over in the store, and you will have the benefit
          of it on your tithing. That is what I recommend you to do with
          your blessings, when you have more than you can take care of
          yourselves. I say, hand it over and let your neighbors take care
          of it for you.
          250
          This makes me think of what I saw the first year I came into this
          valley, the same year I moved my family, which was the next
          season after the pioneers arrived here. It was late in the season
          when I arrived, but from the ground where this house now stands,
          there had been cut two crops of wheat. They had harvested the
          first crop very early, and the water being flooded over, it again
          started from the roots, and produced a fair crop, say from ten to
          twelve bushels to the acre. That was harvested, and it was
          corning up again. I said to the brethren, "Let these my brethren
          who have come with me gather up this wheat," but they would not
          suffer them to do it. Some of the brethren had gathered their
          crops of grain, and left a great deal wasting on the fields. I
          said, "Let the poor brethren, who have come in from abroad, glean
          in your fields." You can bear me witness that a great many widows
          and poor men came here, and brought but very little with them,
          and there never was a man, to my knowledge, ever expressed a
          desire to let them glean in his field. "All right," I said, "we
          can live on greens," while at the same time there was more wasted
          that season than to make up the deficiency, that all might have
          been comfortable. Late in the fall I saw one man working among
          his corn; he had a huge crop, more than a single man could take
          care of. I saw he was going to let it go to waste; I said to him,
          "Brother, let the brethren and sisters help you to husk your
          corn, to gather it and put it safely away, for so much it will
          benefit them and help you." "O," he replied, "I have nothing to
          spare, I can take care of it myself." I saw it wasting, and said
          to him, "Brother, get your corn husked immediately, and let the
          brethren do it, and pay them with a portion of it." He replied,
          "I cannot spare a bit of it." I have no question of it at all in
          my mind, but three-fourths of his corn went into the mud, and was
          trampled down by the cattle; and women and children went without
          bread in consequence of it. That man had no judgment, he knew not
          what to do with the blessings the Lord had bestowed upon him.
          250
          Were I to ask the question, how much wheat or anything else a man
          must have to justify him in letting it go to waste, it would be
          hard to answer; figures are inadequate to give the amount. Never
          let anything go to waste. Be prudent, save everything, and what
          you get more than you can take care of yourselves, ask your
          neighbors to help you. There are scores and hundreds of men in
          this house, if the question were asked them if they considered
          their grain a burden and a drudge to them, when they had plenty
          last year and the year before, that would answer in the
          affirmative, and were ready to part with it for next to nothing.
          How do they feel now, when their granaries are empty? If they had
          a few thousand bushels to spare now, would they not consider it a
          blessing? They would. Why? Because it would bring the gold and
          silver. But pause for a moment, and suppose you had millions of
          bushels to sell, and could sell it for twenty dollars per bushel,
          or for a million dollars per bushel, no matter what amount, so
          that you sell all your wheat, and transport it out of the
          country, and you are left with nothing more than a pile of gold,
          what good would it do you? You could not eat it, drink it, wear
          it, or carry it off where you could have something to eat. The
          time will come that gold will hold no comparison in value to a
          bushel of wheat. Gold is not to be compared with it in value. Why
          would it be precious to you now? Simply because you could get
          gold for it? Gold is good for nothing, only as men value it. It
          is no better than a piece of iron, a piece of limestone, or a
          piece of sandstone, and it is not half so good as the soil from
          which we raise our wheat, and other necessaries of life. The
          children of men love it, they lust after it, are greedy for it,
          and are ready to destroy themselves, and those around them, over
          whom they have any influence, to gain it.
          250
          When this people are blessed so much that they consider their
          blessings a burden and a drudge to them, you may always calculate
          on a cricket war, a grasshopper war, a drought, too much rain, or
          something else to make the scales preponderate the other way.
          This people have been blessed too much, so that they have not
          known what to do with their blessings.
          251
          What do we hear from the inhabitants of the different
          settlements? The cry is--"I do not wish to live out yonder, for
          there is no chance to speculate and trade with the emigrants."
          Have you plenty to eat? Have you plenty of wheat, fowls, butter,
          cheese, and calves? Are you not raising stock in abundance for
          flesh meat of different kinds? What use is gold when you get
          enough to eat, drink, and wear without it? What is the matter?
          "Why, we are away off, and cannot get rich all at once." You are
          lusting after that which you do not know what to do with, for few
          men know what to do with riches when they possess them. The
          inhabitants of this valley have proved it. They have proved it by
          their reckless waste of the products of the earth, by their
          undervaluing the blessing conferred upon them by the emigration,
          which has administered clothing and other necessaries to them. We
          can see men who can clothe themselves and their families easily,
          go into the kanyons in their broad-cloth pantaloons to get wood,
          or you may see them take a horse, and ride bare-backed until they
          tear them to pieces, that they are not fit to come to meeting in.
          They do not know how to take care of good clothing. Again, if we
          were digging in a water-ditch to-morrow, that required all hands,
          in consequence of the rising of the water, I have no doubt but
          you would see what I saw the other day--one of our young dandies,
          who was perhaps not worth the shirt on his back, came to work in
          a water-ditch, dressed in his fine broad-cloth pantaloons, and a
          fine bosomed shirt, and I have no doubt he would have worn gloves
          too if he had been worth a pair. You would see men of this
          description, who are without understanding, whole hearted, good
          fellows, and ready to do anything for the advancement of the
          public good, commence to dig in the mud and wet, in their fine
          clothes, and go into the water, up to their knees, with their
          fine calf-skin boots. This is a wanton waste of the blessings of
          God, that cannot be justifiable in His eyes, and in the eyes of
          prudent, thinking men, under ordinary circumstances. If prudence
          and economy are necessary at one time more than at another, it is
          when a family or a nation are thrown upon their own resources, as
          we are. But you may trace the whole lives of some men, and it
          will be impossible for you to point out a single portion of time
          when they knew how to appreciate and how to use even the common
          comforts of life, when they had them, to say nothing of an
          abundance of wealth.
          252
          Again, there have been more contention and trouble between
          neighbors, in these valleys, with regard to surplus property,
          which was not needed by this people, than any other thing. For
          instance, a widow woman comes in here from the United States, and
          turns out on the range beyond Jordan three yoke of oxen and a few
          cows, for she considers she is too poor to have them herded.
          Again, a man comes in with ten yoke of oxen; he also turns there
          out to wander where they please. If he is asked why he does not
          put them in a herd, he will tell you, "I do not want to pay the
          herding fee." Another comes on with three or four span of horses,
          and twenty or thirty yoke of cattle. Has he any for sale? No, but
          he turns them all out upon the range and they are gone. By and by
          he sends a boy on horseback to hunt them, who is unsuccessful in
          finding them after a week's toil. The owner turns out himself,
          and all hands, to hunt up his stock, but they also fail in
          finding them, they are all lost except a very few. He was not
          able to have them herded, he thought, though he possessed so much
          property, and knew nothing more than to turn them out to run at
          large. Thus he consumes his time, running after his lost
          property. He frets his feelings, for his mind is continually upon
          it; he is in such a hurry in the morning to go out to hunt his
          stock, that he has no time to pray; when he returns home late at
          night, worn out with toil and anxiety of mind, he is unfit to
          pray; his cattle are lost, his mind is unhinged and darkened
          through the neglect of his duty, and apostacy stares him in the
          face, for he is not satisfied with himself, and murmurs against
          his brethren, and against his God. By and by some of his cattle
          turn up with a strange brand upon them; they have been taken up
          and sold to this person or that one. This brings contention and
          dissatisfaction between neighbor and neighbor. Such a person has
          too much property, more than he knows what to do with. It would
          be much better for a man who is a mechanic, and intends to follow
          his business, to give one out of two cattle which he may possess,
          to some person, for taking care of the other. It would be better
          for those who possess a great quantity of stock, to sell half of
          them to fence in a piece of land, to secure the other half, than
          to drive them all out to run at large, and lose three-fourths of
          them. If there are half-a-dozen men round me, and I can put a cow
          in their way or anything else that will do them good, for fencing
          up a lot for me, the property I thus pay is not out of the world,
          but is turned over to those men who had not a mouthful of meat,
          butter, or milk; it is doing them good, and I am reaping the
          profit and benefit of their labors in exchange. If I did not do
          this, I must either see them suffer, or make a free distribution
          of a part of what I have among them.
          252
          It is impossible for me to tell you how much a man must possess
          to entitle him to the liberty of wasting anything, or of letting
          it be stolen and run away with by the Indians. The surplus
          property of this community, as poor as we are, has done more real
          mischief than everything else besides.
          252
          I will propose a plan to stop the stealing of cattle in coming
          time, and it is this--let those who have cattle on hand join in a
          company, and fence in about fifty thousand acres of land, make a
          dividend of their cattle, and appropriate what they can spare, to
          fence in a large field, and this will give employment to
          immigrants who are coming in. When you have done this, then get
          up another company, and so keep on fencing until all the vacant
          land is substantially enclosed.
          252
          Some persons will perhaps say--"I do not know how good and how
          high a fence it will be necessary to build to keep thieves out. I
          do not know either, except you build one that will keep out the
          devil. Build a fence which the boys and the cattle cannot pull
          down, and I will ensure you will keep your stock. Let every man
          lay his plans so as to secure enough for his present necessities,
          and hand over the rest to the laboring man; keep making
          improvements, building, and making farms, and that will not only
          advance his own wealth, but the wealth of the community.
          253
          A man has no right with property, which, according to the laws of
          the land, legally belongs to him, if he does not want to use it;
          he ought to possess no more than he can put to usury, and cause
          to do good to himself and his fellow-man. When will a man
          accumulate money enough to justify him in salting it down, or, in
          other words, laying it away in the chest, to lock it up, there to
          lie, doing no manner of good either to himself or his neighbor.
          It is impossible for a man ever to do it. No man should keep
          money or property by him that he cannot put to usury for the
          advancement of that property in value or amount, and for the good
          of the community in which he lives; if he does, it becomes a dead
          weight upon him, it will rust, canker, and gnaw his soul, and
          finally work his destruction, for his heart is set upon it. Every
          man who has got cattle, money, or wealth of any description, bone
          and sinew, should put it out to usury. If a man has the arm,
          body, head, the component parts of a system to constitute him a
          laboring man, and has nothing in the world to depend upon but his
          hands, let him put them to usury. Never hide up anything in a
          napkin, but put it forth to bring an increase. If you have got
          property of any kind that you do not know what to do with, lay it
          out in making a farm, or building a saw mill or a woollen
          factory, and go to with your mights to put all your property to
          usury.
          253
          If you have more oxen and other cattle than you need, put them in
          the hands of other men, and receive their labor in return, and
          put that labor where it will increase your property in value.
          253
          I hope you will now lay your plans to set men to work who will be
          in here by and by, for there will be a host of them, and they
          will all want employment, who trust to their labor for a
          subsistence; they will all want something to eat, and calculate
          to work for it. In the first place, keep the ground in good order
          to produce you plentiful crops of grain and vegetables, and then
          take care of them.
          253
          Let me say to the sisters, those who have children, never
          consider that you have bread enough around you to suffer your
          children to waste a crust or a crumb of it. If a man is worth
          millions of bushels of wheat and corn, he is not wealthy enough
          to suffer his servant girl to sweep a single kernel of it into
          the fire; let it be eaten by something, and pass again into the
          earth, and thus fulfil the purpose for which it grew. Some
          mothers would fill a basket full of bread to make a plaything for
          their children, but I have not had flour enough in the time of my
          greatest abundance, to let my children waste one morsel of bread
          with my consent. No, I would rather feed the greatest enemy I
          have on the earth with it, than have it go into the fire.
          Remember it, do not waste anything, but take care of everything,
          save your grain, and make your calculations, so that when the
          brethren come in from the United States, from England, and other
          places, you can give them some potatoes, onions, beets, carrots,
          parsnips, water-melons, or anything else which you have, to
          comfort them, and cheer up their hearts, and if you have wheat,
          dispose of it to them, and receive their labor in return. Raise
          enough and to spare of all the staple necessaries of life, and
          lay your plans to hire your brethren who will come in this fall
          to fence your farms, improve your gardens, and make your city
          lots beautiful. Lay your plans to secure enough to feed
          yourselves, and one or two of the brethren that are coming to
          dwell with us.
          254
          When we first came into the Valley, the question was asked me, if
          men would ever be allowed to come into this Church, and remain in
          it, and hoard up their property. I say, NO. That is a short
          answer, and it is a pointed one. The man who lays up his gold and
          silver, who caches it away in a bank, or in his iron safe, or
          buries it up in the earth, and comes here, and professes to be a
          Saint, would tie up the hands of every individual in this
          kingdom, and make them his servants if he could. It is an
          unrighteous, unhallowed, unholy, covetous principle; it is of the
          devil, and is from beneath. Let every person who has capital, put
          it to usury. Is he required to bring his purse to me, to any of
          the Twelve, or to any person whatever, and lay it at their feet?
          No, not by me. But I will tell you what to do with your means. If
          a man comes in the midst of this people with money, let him use
          it in making improvements, in building, in beautifying his
          inheritance in Zion, and in increasing his capital by thus
          putting out his money to usury. Let him go and make a great farm,
          and stock it well, and fortify all around with a good and
          efficient fence. What for? Why for the purpose of spending his
          money. Then let him cut it up into fields, and adorn it with
          trees, and build a fine house upon it. What for? Why for the
          purpose of spending his money. What will he do when his money is
          gone? The money thus spent, with a wise and prudent hand, is in a
          situation to accumulate and increase a hundred-fold. When he has
          done making his farm, and his means still increase by his
          diligent use of it, he can then commence and build a woollen
          factory for instance, he can send and buy the sheep and have them
          brought here, have them herded here, and shear them here, and
          take care of them, then set the boys and girls to cleaning,
          carding, spinning, and weaving the wool into cloth, and thus
          employ hundreds and thousands of the brethren and sisters who
          have come from the manufacturing districts of the old country,
          and have not been accustomed to dig in the earth for their
          livelihood, who have not learned anything else but to work in the
          factory. This would feed them and clothe them, and put within
          their reach the comforts of life; it would also create at home a
          steady market for the produce of the agriculturist, and the labor
          of the mechanic. When he has spent his hundred and fifty thousand
          dollars, which he began business with, and fed five hundred
          persons, from five to ten years, besides realizing a handsome
          profit from the labor of the hands employed, by the increased
          population, and consequent increased demand for manufactured
          goods, at the end of ten years, his factory would be worth five
          hundred thousand dollars. Suppose he had wrapped up his hundred
          and fifty thousand in a napkin, for fear of losing it, it would
          have sent him down to perdition, for the principle is from
          beneath. But when he puts forth his money to usury, not to me or
          any other person, but where it will redouble itself, by making
          farms, building factories for the manufacture of every kind of
          material necessary for home consumption, establishing
          blacksmith's shops and other mechanical establishments, making
          extensive improvements to beautify the whole face of the earth,
          until it shall become like the garden of Eden, it becomes a
          saving blessing to him and those around him. And when the kings,
          princes, and rulers of the earth shall come to Zion, bringing
          their gold, and silver, and precious stones with them, they will
          admire and desire four possessions, your fine farms, beautiful
          vineyards, and splendid mansions. They will say--"We have got
          plenty of money, but we are destitute of such possessions as
          these." Their money loses its value in their eyes when compared
          with the comfortable possessions of the Saints, and they will
          want to purchase your property. The industrious capitalist
          inquires of one of them--"Do you want to purchase this property?
          I have obtained it by my economy and judgment, and by the labour
          of my brethren, and in exchange for their labour I have been
          feeding and clothing them, until they also have comfortable
          situations, and means to live. I have this farm, which I am
          willing to sell to enable me to advance my other improvements."
          "Well," says the rich man, "how much must I give you for it?"
          "Five hundred thousand dollars," and perhaps it has not cost him
          more than one hundred thousand. He takes the money and builds up
          three or four such farms, and employs hundreds of his brethren
          who are poor.
          254
          Money is not real capital, it bears the title only. True capital
          is labor, and is confined to the laboring classes. They only
          possess it. It is the bone, sinew, nerve, and muscle of man that
          subdue the earth, make it yield its strength, and administer to
          his varied wants. This power tears down mountains and fills up
          valleys, builds cities and temples, and paves the streets. In
          short, what is there that yields shelter and comfort to civilized
          man, that is not produced by the strength of his arm making the
          elements bend to his will.
          255
          I will now ask the question again-- How much must a man possess
          to authorize him to waste anything? Three or four years ago money
          was of little value in this country; you might go round
          exhibiting a back load of gold, and hold out a large piece to a
          man, I was going to say, almost as big as this bible, and ask him
          to work for you, but he would laugh at your offer, and tell you
          he was looking for some one to work for him. He would then hail
          another man who had been in Nauvoo, and passed through the
          pinches there, and had scarcely a shirt to his back, but he would
          reply--"I was looking for some man to work for me." Gold could
          not purchase labor, it was no temptation whatever, but those
          times are passed. It is not now as it was then. I consequently
          alter my counsel to the brethren. I used to counsel you to hand
          over your surplus property, or that which you could not take care
          of, to me, and I would apply it to a good purpose, but now I
          counsel you to put it into the hands of men who have nothing at
          all, and let them pay you for it in labor.
          255
          I have never been troubled with thieves stealing my property. If
          I am not smart enough to take care of what the Lord lends me, I
          am smart enough to hold my tongue about it, until I come across
          the thief myself, and then I am ready to tie a string round his
          neck.
          255
          I have not the least hesitation in saying that the loose conduct,
          and calculations, and manner of doing business, which have
          characterized men who have had property in their hands, have laid
          the foundation to bring our boys into the spirit of stealing. You
          have caused them to do it, you have laid before them every
          inducement possible, to learn their hands and train their minds
          to take that which is not their own. Those young men who have
          been taken up the past season and condemned to ignominious
          punishment, may trace the cause of their shame to that
          foundation. Distribute your property. The man that thinks he
          requires ten yoke of cattle, and can only use one yoke, is
          laboring under a mistake, he ought to let nine yoke go to the
          laboring community. If every man would do this with the property
          which he is not using, all would be employed and have sufficient.
          This would be the most effectual means of bringing the vile
          practice of stealing cattle and other property to a termination,
          which, as I have already said, has been encouraged by covetous,
          selfish men, who have refused to use their property for their own
          good, or the community's.
          255
          Let us hold before our mind the miser. If the people of this
          community feel as though they wanted the whole world to
          themselves, hate any other person to possess anything, and would
          hoard up their property, and place it in a situation where it
          would not benefit either themselves or the community, they are
          just as guilty as the man who steals my property. You may
          inquire--"What should be done with such a character? "Why, CUT
          HIM OFF FROM THE CHURCH. I would disfellowship a man who had
          received liberally from the Lord, and refused to put it out to
          usury. We know this is right.
          256
          I recollect well the days brother Grant was telling of, when it
          was so hard to raise fifty dollars for brother Joseph. I also
          remember we had a man for trial before the High Council, a man
          who had plenty of money, and refused to loan it, or use it for
          the advancement of the cause of truth. He would not put his money
          out to usury. I was going into the Council when he was making his
          plea, and he wept and sobbed. His name was Isaac McWithy, a man
          of about fifty-three years of age. I knew him when he lived on
          his farm in York state. He told them, in his plea, what he had
          done for the cause, that he had always been a Christian, and had
          done so much for the churches, and for the Priests, and been so
          liberal since he had been in this Church, which was between three
          and four years. Some of the brethren said--"Brother McWithy, how
          much do you suppose you have ever given for the support of the
          Gospel?" The tears rolled down his checks, and he said,
          "Brethren, I believe I have given away in my life time two
          hundred and fifty dollars." I spake out and said, "If I could not
          preach as many months each year in this kingdom as you have been
          years in this Church, and give no more than two hundred and fifty
          dollars, I should be ashamed of myself."
          256
          On one occasion, brother Joseph Young and myself had travelled
          more than two hours among snow, and in a piercing cold, to preach
          in his neighborhood one evening. Having had no dinner or supper,
          we went home with him, and he never asked us to eat a mouthful of
          supper, though he did muster courage enough to go into the cellar
          with a little basket, he came up with the tears almost running
          down his cheeks, and said with some difficulty--"Brethren, have
          some apples." He held out the basket to us, and when we were
          about to help ourselves, his niggardly soul made him draw it back
          again, for fear we should take any. I saw he did not intend us to
          have any apples, so I put my hand on the basket, and drew it out
          of his hand, saying--"Come here." I took it on my knees, and
          invited brother Joseph to eat some apples. He did make out to
          give us some breakfast in the morning, and even then he got up
          from the table before we had time to half finish our breakfast,
          to see if we would not give over eating. Said I--"Never mind, I
          shall eat what I want before I stop."
          256
          I am happy to say, through your Trustee in trust, that the
          Latter-day Saints, in the capacity of a Church and kingdom, do
          not owe near as much money as they have on hand. A year ago last
          April Conference, we owed over sixty thousand dollars, but we do
          not now owe a single red cent.
          256
          May God bless us, that we may always have enough, and know what
          to do with what we have, and how to use it for the good of all,
          for I would not give much for property unless I did know what to
          do with it.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Parley
          P. Pratt, April 10, 1853
                           Parley P. Pratt, April 10, 1853
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Parley
          P. Pratt, April 10, 1853
                              HEIRSHIP AND PRIESTHOOD.
             A discourse delivered by Elder P. P. Pratt, at the General
                                     Conference,
              in the Tabernacle, Great Salt Lake City, April 10, 1853.
          256
          At the request of my brethren, I rise to occupy a portion of the
          time. I realize that there are many present who are equally
          prepared to administer in the things of the Spirit of God. The
          time is precious, and I desire I that I may have the Spirit of
          God, with the prayers and confidence of the people, to speak in
          wisdom that which is necessary, and then give opportunity to my
          brethren; for I love to hear them, and so do this people.
          257
               I have reflected a little upon the text I that was presented
          to us by our President a few days since, and upon the excellent
          remarks made by himself and others upon the subject of heirship,
          or the inherent rights of the firstborn, and of election. I
          consider, indeed, that it opens a broad field, and that there is
          no danger of exhausting the subject, whatever may be said of it.
          257
          The covenants made with the fathers, and the rights of the
          children by reason of them, are an interesting subject to me.
          257
          In the first place, if all men were created alike, if all had the
          same degree of intelligence and purity of disposition, all would
          be equal. But, notwithstanding the declaration of American sages,
          and of the fathers of our country, to the contrary, it is a fact
          that all beings are not equal in their intellectual capacity, in
          their dispositions, and in the gifts and callings of God. It is a
          fact that some beings are more intelligent than others, and some
          are endowed with abilities or gifts which others do not possess.
          257
          In organizing and peopling the worlds, it was found necessary to
          place among the inhabitants some superior intelligences, who were
          capacitated to teach, to rule, and preside among other
          intelligences. In short, a variety of gifts, and adaptations to
          the different arts, sciences, and occupations, was as necessary
          as the uses and benefits arising therefrom have proved to be.
          Hence one intelligence is peculiarly adapted to one department of
          usefulness, and another to another. We read much in the Bible in
          relation to a choice or election, on the part of Deity, towards
          intelligences in His government on earth, whereby some were
          chosen to fill stations very different from others. And this
          election not only affected the individuals thus chosen, but their
          posterity for long generations, or even for ever.
          257
          It may be inquired where this election first originated, and upon
          what principle a just and impartial God exercises the elective
          franchise. We will go back to the earliest knowledge we have of
          the existence of intelligences. We learn from the writings of
          Abraham and others, and from modern revelation, that the
          intelligences that now inhabit these tabernacles of earth were
          living, active intelligences in yonder world, while the particles
          of matter which now compose our outward bodies were yet mingled
          with their native element; that then our embodied spirits lived,
          moved, conversed, and exercised an agency. All intelligences
          which exist possess a degree of independence in their own sphere.
          For instance, the bee can go at will in search of honey, or
          remain in the hive. It can visit one flower or another, as
          independent in its own sphere as God is in His. We find a degree
          of independence in everything which possesses any degree of
          intelligence; that thinks, moves, or acts: because the very
          principle of voluntary action implies an independent will to
          direct such action.
          257
          Among the intelligences which existed in the beginning, some were
          more intelligent than others, or, in other words, more noble; and
          God said to Abraham, "These I will make my rulers!" God said unto
          Abraham, "Thou art one of them; thou wast chosen before thou wast
          born."
          257
          NOBLE! Does He use the word noble? Yes; the word noble, or that
          which signified it, was used in conversation between God and
          Abraham, and applied to superior intelligences on earth, and
          which had pre-existed in the heavens.
          258
          I am aware that the term is greatly abused, in Europe and
          elsewhere, being applied to those titled, and to those who
          inherit certain titles and estates, whether they are wise men or
          fools, virtuous or vicious. A man may even be an idiot, a
          drunkard, an adulterer, or a murderer, and still be called a
          nobleman by the world. And all this because his ancestor, for
          some worthy action, or perhaps for being skilled in murder and
          robbery, under the false glare of "military glory," obtained a
          title, and the possession of a large estate, from which he had
          helped to drive the rightful occupant.
          258
          Now the Lord did not predicate His principle of election or
          nobility upon such an unequal, unjust, and useless order of
          things. When He speaks of nobility, He simply means an election
          made, and an office or a title conferred, on the principle of
          superiority of intellect, or nobleness of action, or of capacity
          to act. And when this election, with its titles, dignities, and
          estates, includes the unborn posterity of a chosen man, as in the
          case of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, it is with a view of the noble
          spirits of the eternal world coming through their lineage, and
          being taught in the commandments of God. Hence the Prophets,
          Kings, Priests, Patriarchs, Apostles, and even Jesus Christ, were
          included in the election of Abraham, and of his seed, as
          manifested to him in an eternal covenant.
          258
          Although some eternal intelligences may be superior to others,
          and although some are more noble, and consequently are elected to
          fill certain useful and necessary offices for the good of others,
          yet the greater and the less may both be innocent, and both be
          justified, and be useful, each in their own capacity; if each
          magnify their own calling, and act in their own capacity, it is
          all right.
          258
          It may be inquired, why God made one unequal to another, or
          inferior in intellect or capacity. To which I reply, that He did
          not create their intelligence at all. It never was created, being
          an inherent attribute of the eternal element called spirit, which
          element composes each individual spirit, and which element exists
          in an infinitude of degrees in the scale of intellect, in all the
          varieties manifested in the eternal God, and thence to the lowest
          agent, which acts by its own will.
          258
          It is a fixed law of nature that the higher intelligence presides
          over, or has more or less influence over, or control of, that
          which is less.
          258
          The Lord, in surveying the eternal intelligences which stood
          before Him, found some more noble or intellectual than others,
          who were equally innocent. This being so, He exercised the
          elective franchise upon wise principles, and, like a good and
          kind father among his children, He chose those for rulers who
          were most capable of benefiting the residue. Among these was our
          noble ancestor, Abraham.
          259
          I do not take up the subject in the middle of it, like the
          natural man who knows little of the past or future, and who
          judges by the things present before his eyes. Such a one might
          suppose that it so happened that Abraham came along, and was
          picked up without any particular reference to the past, or to
          eternal principles, and was elected to office; that it might just
          as well have been somebody else instead of him. But instead of
          this, he was chosen before the world was, and came into the world
          for the very purpose which he fulfilled. But, notwithstanding
          this pre-election in passing the veil, and entering a tabernacle
          of flesh, he became a little child, forgot all he had once known
          in the heavens, and commenced anew to receive intelligence in
          this world, as is the case with all. He therefore was
          necessitated to come up by degrees, receive an experience, be
          tried and proved. And when he had been sufficiently proved
          according to the flesh, the Lord manifested to him the election
          before exercised towards him in the eternal world. He then
          renewed that election and covenant, and blessed him, and his seed
          after him. And He said--In multiplying, I will multiply thee; and
          in blessing I will bless thee.
          259
          The Sodomites, Canaanites, &c., received the reverse of this
          blessing. Instead of giving them a multiplicity of wives and
          children, He cut them off, root and branch, and blotted their
          name from under heaven, that there might be an end of a race so
          degenerate. Now this severity was a mercy. If we were like the
          people before the flood, full of violence and oppression; or if
          we, like the Sodomites or Canaanites, were full of all manner of
          lawless abominations, holding promiscuous intercourse with the
          other sex, and stooping to a level with the brute creation, and
          predisposing our children, by every means in our power, to be
          fully given to strange and unnatural lusts, appetites, and
          passions, would it not be a mercy to cut us off, root and branch,
          and thus put an end to our increase upon the earth? You will all
          say it would. The spirits in heaven would thank God for
          preventing them from being born into the world under such
          circumstances. Would not the spirits in heaven rejoice in the
          covenant and blessings of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, in relation
          to the multiplying of their seed, and in every additional wife
          which God gave to them as a means of multiplying? Yes, they
          would; for they could say--"Now there is an opportunity for us to
          take bodies in the lineage of a noble race, and to be educated in
          the true science of life, and in the commandments of God." O what
          an unspeakable contrast, between being a child of Sodom, and a
          child of Abraham!
          259
          Now, Abraham, by his former superiority of intelligence and
          nobility, by his former election before the world was, and by
          conducting himself in this world so as to obtain the renewal of
          the same according to the flesh, brought upon his posterity, as
          well as upon himself, that which will influence them more or less
          to the remotest generations of time, and in eternity.
          259
          Paul, the great Apostle of the Gentiles, when speaking upon this
          subject, testifies that the children of Israel differ much every
          way from the Gentiles, for to them, says he, pertains the
          election, the covenants, the promises, the service of God, the
          adoption, the glory, the giving of the law, and the coming of
          Christ in the flesh. He then goes on to trace the peculiar
          branches in which the heirship is perpetuated. Abraham had a son
          Ishmael, and several children by his other wives and concubines
          which the Lord gave unto him. They might all be blessed, but the
          peculiar blessings of heirship and Priesthood remained and were
          perpetuated in Isaac.
          259
          Again, when Rebecca, the wife of Isaac, had conceived twins, the
          election to these peculiar blessings ran in the lineage of Jacob,
          and not of Esau. True, Esau was the first-born, and was heir to
          the inheritance, which always pertains to the birth-right, but
          the election to hold and perpetuate the keys of eternal
          Priesthood was peculiar to Jacob, and even that which Esau did
          inherit was forfeited by transgression, and therefore transferred
          to Jacob.
          259
          The Lord blessed Ishmael in many things, because he was Abraham's
          seed. The Lord blessed Esau in many things, because he was a son
          of Abraham and Isaac, but the peculiar things of the Priesthood,
          through which all nations should be blessed, pertained
          exclusively to that peculiar branch of the Hebrews which spring
          from Jacob.
          260
          Now before these two children were born, or had done any good or
          evil in this life, God, who was acquainted with them in the
          former life, and who knew the grades of intelligence or of
          nobility possessed by each, revealed to Rebecca, their mother,
          that two nations or manner of people would spring from these
          twins, and that one people should be stronger than the other, and
          that the elder should serve the younger. When these two children
          had been born, and had died, and when their posterity had become
          two nations, then the Lord spoke by the Prophet Malachi, that He
          loved Jacob, because of some good he had done, and that He hated
          Esau, and laid his mountains waste, because of certain evils
          specified in the same declaration.
          260
          The Apostle Paul, in speaking of Jacob and Esau, quotes the
          revelation of Rebecca, before they were born, and the revelation
          to Malachi after they had become two nations; and the two
          quotations, both following in immediate connexion in Paul's
          writings, have been mistaken by many, as if God had revealed both
          sayings before the two children were born; and thus the
          Scriptures are wrested and made to say that God hated a child
          before he was born, or had done any good or evil. A more false
          and erroneous doctrine could hardly be conceived, or a worse
          charge sustained against Juggernaut, than the imputation of
          hating children before they are born.
          260
          Here I would inquire, if it is anything inconsistent, or
          derogatory to the character of a good or impartial father, who
          loves all his children, for him to elect or appoint one of them
          to fulfil a certain purpose or calling, and another to fulfil
          another useful calling? Is it anything strange for one person to
          be stronger than another, for one person to serve another, or for
          one person to have a more numerous posterity than another? Is it
          anything strange or unrighteous for one person to be a farmer, a
          wine-dresser, or a builder, and another a teacher, a governor, or
          a minister of justice and equity? What is more natural, more
          useful, or just, than for a father who discovers the several
          abilities or adaptations of his children, to appoint them their
          several callings or occupations?
          261
          God did not say that Jacob should be saved in the kingdom of God,
          and Esau be doomed to eternal hell, without any regard to their
          deeds; but He simply said that two distinct nations, widely
          differing, should spring from them, and one should be stronger
          than the other, and the elder should serve the younger. If one
          nation is stronger than the other, it can assist to defend the
          other. If the one nation serves the other, it will have a claim
          on a just remuneration for services rendered. If one inherits a
          blessing or Priesthood, through which all nations shall be
          blessed, surely the nation which is composed of his brother's
          children will have an early claim on salvation through this
          ministry. I should esteem it a great privilege if, while I was
          serving my brother, and we were both partaking of the fruits of
          my labors, he should be elected to a Priesthood, through the
          ministry of which myself and all my posterity, as well as his
          own, might be taught, exalted, and eternally saved. By our mutual
          labors, then, we could be mutually benefited in time and in
          eternity. I am administering to him, and I am happy. He is
          administering to me, and he is happy. It is a kind of mutual
          service, a classification of labor, wherein each attends to the
          business most natural to him, and wherein there is mutual
          benefit. Why, then, should I find fault, or entertain envy or
          hatred towards my brother? Dressing a vine, ploughing a field,
          harvesting, or building, is just as necessary as teaching, or
          administering the ordinances of salvation; one acts in one
          capacity, and the other in another, but they are mutually blessed
          and benefited by their separate callings and endowments.
          261
          On the subject of hatred, I feel much as the Lord did when He
          hated Esau, and laid his mountains waste. When the children of
          Jacob were in trouble with their enemies, Esau's descendants
          joined with the enemy, and did not stand by their brethren. When
          Jacob was unpopular, and the nations hated him because of the
          peculiarities of his religion, Esau forsook his brother and
          disowned relationship, fellowshipping with his brother's
          persecutors. I also hate a traitor, who turns against me in a day
          of adversity, when I have claim on him as a brother.
          261
          But to return to the subject of election, and of heirship. In the
          lineage of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, according to the flesh, was
          held the right of heirship to the keys of Priesthood for the
          blessings and for the salvation of all nations. From this lineage
          sprang the Prophets, John the Baptist, Jesus, and the Apostles;
          and from this lineage sprang the great Prophet and restorer in
          modern times, and the Apostles who hold the keys under his hand.
          It is true, that Melchizedek and the fathers before him held the
          same Priesthood, and that Abraham was ordained and blessed under
          his hand, but this was an older branch of the chosen seed. I am
          speaking more fully of those who have lived since the older
          branches passed away, and since the transfer of the keys to
          Abraham and his seed. No Ishmaelite, no Edomite, no Gentile, has
          since then been privileged to hold the presiding keys of
          Priesthood, or of the ministry of salvation. In this peculiar
          lineage, and in no other, should all the nations be blessed. From
          the days of Abraham until now, if the people of any country, age,
          or nation, have been blessed with the blessings peculiar to the
          everlasting covenant of the Gospel, its sealing powers,
          Priesthood, and ordinances, it has been through the ministry of
          that lineage, and the keys of Priesthood held by the lawful heirs
          according to the flesh. Were the twelve Apostles which Christ
          ordained, Gentiles? Were any of them Ishmaelites, Edomites,
          Canaanites, Greeks, Egyptians, or Romans by descent? No, verily.
          One of the Twelve was called a "Canaanite," but this could not
          have alluded to his lineage, but rather to the locality of his
          nativity, for Christ was not commissioned to minister in person
          to the Gentiles, much less to ordain any of them to the
          Priesthood, which pertained to the children of Abraham. I would
          risk my soul upon the fact that Simon the Apostle was not a
          Canaanite by blood. He was perhaps a Canaanite upon the same
          principle that Jesus was a Nazarite, which is expression of the
          locality of his birth or sojourn. But no man can hold the keys of
          Priesthood or of Apostleship, to bless or administer salvation to
          the nations, unless he is a literal descendant of Abraham, Isaac,
          and Jacob. Jesus Christ and his ancient Apostles of both
          hemispheres were of that lineage. When they passed away, and the
          Saints, their followers, were destroyed from the earth, then the
          light of truth no longer shone in its fulness.
          261
          The world have from that day to this been manufacturing priests,
          without any particular regard to lineage. But what have they
          accomplished? They have done what man could do; but man could not
          bestow that which he did not possess, consequently he could not
          bestow the eternal keys of power which would constitute the
          Priesthood. They have manufactured something, and called it
          Priesthood, and the world has been cursed with it up to this
          time.
          262
          But God Almighty, in fulfilment of the covenants made with
          Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, and with the Prophets, Apostles, and
          Saints of old, raised up a Joseph, and conferred upon him the
          ancient records, oracles, and keys of the eternal Priesthood. If
          he was the imposter the world took him to be, why did he not
          happen to state in his book that he was a descendant of the
          Romans, or that he had come through the loins of Socrates, or
          sprung from some of the Greek philosophers, or Roman generals?
          Why not a descendant of some noble house of the Gentile kings or
          nobles? As we were ignorant of the peculiarities of election and
          heirship to the royal Priesthood, why did not the Book of Mormon
          predict that a noble Gentile should be the instrument to receive
          and translate it in modern times, that through the Gentiles the
          Jews might obtain mercy? It is true the book was brought forth
          and published among the Gentiles: it is also true that it comes
          from the Gentiles to Israel, speaking nationally; but when it
          predicts the name and lineage of its modern translator, "Behold,
          he is a descendant of Joseph of Egypt," why should an imputed
          impostor be consistent in this as well as in all other items? The
          reason is obvious. It is because the record is true, and its
          translator no impostor.
          262
          Knowing of the covenants and promises made to the fathers, as I
          now know them, and the rights of heirship to the Priesthood, as
          manifested in the election of God, I would never receive any man
          as an Apostle or a Priest, holding the keys of restoration, to
          bless the nations, while he claimed to be of any other lineage
          than Israel.
          262
          The word of the Lord, through our Prophet and founder, to the
          chosen instruments of the modern Priesthood, was this--"Ye are
          lawful heirs according to the flesh, and your lives have been hid
          with Christ in God." That is to say, they have been held in
          reserve during the reign of Mystic Babel, to be born in due time,
          as successors to the Apostles and Prophets of old, being their
          children, of the same royal line. They have come forth, at
          length, as heirs to the keys of power, knowledge, glory, and
          blessing, to minister to all the nations of the Gentiles, and
          afterwards to restore the tribes of Israel. They are of the royal
          blood of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, and have a right to claim the
          ordination and endowments of the Priesthood, inasmuch as they
          repent, and obey the Lord God of their fathers.
          262
          Those who are not of this lineage, whether they are Gentiles,
          Edomites, or Ishmaelites, or of whatever nation, have a right to
          remission of sins and the Gift of the Holy Spirit, through their
          ministry, on conditions of faith, repentance, and baptism, in the
          name of Jesus Christ. Through this Gospel they are adopted into
          the same family, and are counted for the seed of Abraham; they
          can then receive a portion of this ministry under those (literal
          descendants) who hold the presiding keys of the same.
          263
          By obeying the Gospel, or by adoption through the Gospel, we are
          all made joint heirs with Abraham, and with his seed, and we
          shall, by continuance in well doing, all be blessed in Abraham
          and his seed, no matter whether we are descended from
          Melchizedek, from Edom, from Ishmael, or whether we be Jews or
          Gentiles. On the principles of Gospel adoption, the blessing is
          broad enough to gather all good, penitent, obedient people under
          its wings, and to extend to all nations the principles of
          salvation. We would therefore more cordially invite all nations
          to join themselves to this favored lineage, and come with all
          humility and penitence to its royal Priesthood, if they wish to
          be instructed and blessed, for to be blessed in this peculiar
          sense in any other way, or by any other institutions or
          government, they cannot, while the promises and covenants of God
          hold good to the elect seed.
          263
          Turn from all your sins, ye Gentiles; turn from all your sins, ye
          people of the house of Israel, ye Edomites, Jews, and
          Ishmaelites; all ye nations of the earth, and come to the legal
          Priesthood, and be ye blessed. The promise is to each and all of
          you; do not reject it. The keys of the kingdom, of government, of
          Priesthood, of Apostleship; the keys of salvation to build up,
          govern organize, and administer in temporal and spiritual
          salvation to the ends of the earth, are now restored, and held by
          the chosen instruments of this lineage.
          263
          I have spoken in a national capacity and in general principles.
          In regard to individual heirship and the rights of fathers,
          mothers, husbands, wives, sons, daughters, &c., I have not the
          power, if I had the time, to make the subject any plainer than
          our President made it the other day. It is for us to learn more
          and more from day to day, and continue to learn and practise
          those principles and laws that will secure to each individual and
          family its rights, according to the ancient order of the
          government of God, which is now being restored.
          263
          The living oracles or Priesthood in our midst can develop these
          principles from time to time as we need them, for they minister
          in holy things, and soon they will enter with us into the holy
          temple, where we may learn more fully; and if we are still
          lacking, they will with us enjoy the great thousand years in
          which to teach, qualify, and prepare us for eternity.
          263
          We have need to learn more fully the relationship we sustain to
          our families, to the community, to the nations of the earth, to
          the house of Israel, to heaven, to earth, to time, and to
          eternity. We have need to learn more fully to fulfil the duties
          of those relationships. We must learn by degrees. Truth is not
          all told at once, nor learned in a few days. A little was
          developed by our President the other day, for which we are very
          glad; we will treasure it up, and as circumstances call for it,
          we shall receive a little more, until by degrees the law of God
          is learned from those who hold the keys, even every item which
          pertains to our own rights, and the rights of our children, so
          that we shall not trespass on another's. In this manner all the
          good people on earth, in the spirit world, or in the world of the
          resurrection, may become one in love, peace, good-will, purity,
          and confidence, and in keeping the laws of Jesus Christ and of
          the holy Priesthood. If each person has the knowledge and the
          disposition to do right, and then does it continually, even as he
          would wish others to do to him, this will not only give to each
          his right, but create the utmost confidence, love, and good-will,
          by which a perfect union may be formed between each other, and
          with all good spirits and angels, and, finally, with Jesus Christ
          and his Father in worlds without end. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, August 14, 1853
                           Brigham Young, August 14, 1853
                                TRUE AND FALSE RICHES.
                A discourse delivered by President Brigham Young, at 
                     the Special Conference, in the Tabernacle, 
                       Great Salt Lake City, August 14, 1853.
          264
          I am disposed this morning to give my testimony to this
          congregation upon the subject of true riches. Wealth and poverty
          are much talked of by all people. The subject was tolerably well
          discussed yesterday, and according to my understanding, the most
          that I have heard said upon that point has been on the negative
          of the question.
          264
          If you wish me to take a text, I will take the Scriptures of the
          Old and New Testaments, referring, if you please, to both text
          and context, and let the people distribute, or apply them
          according to their own pleasure. I will, however, use one passage
          of Scripture as a text, that was used yesterday. Jesus said to
          his disciples, to them it was given to know the mysteries of the
          kingdom of heaven, but to them that were without, it was not
          given. If we were to examine the subject closely, we should learn
          that a very scanty portion of the things of the kingdom were ever
          revealed, even to the disciples. If we were prepared to gaze upon
          the mysteries of the kingdom, as they are with God, we should
          then know that only a very small portion of them has been handed
          out here and there. God, by His Spirit, has revealed many things
          to His people, but, in almost all cases, He has straightway shut
          up the vision of the mind. He will let His servants gaze upon
          eternal things for a moment, but straightway the vision is
          closed, and they are left as they were, that they may learn to
          act by faith, or as the Apostle has it, not walking by sight, but
          by faith.
          264
          In viewing this subject, permit me to preach what I have to
          preach, without framing or systematising my address. When I have
          endeavored to address a congregation, I have almost always felt a
          repugnance in my heart to the practice of premeditation, or of
          pre-constructing a discourse to deliver to the people, but let me
          ask God my heavenly Father, in the name of Jesus Christ, to give
          me His Spirit, and put into my heart the things He wishes me to
          speak whether they be for better or worse. These have been my
          private feelings, as a general thing. I would ask our Father in
          heaven, in the name of Jesus Christ, to pour His Spirit upon each
          one of us this morning, that we might speak and hear with an
          understanding heart, that a hint, a key word, or a short sentence
          pertaining to the things of God, might open the vision of our
          minds, so that we might comprehend the things of eternity, and
          rejoice exceedingly therein.
          265
          In the first place, suppose we commence by examining the
          principles that have been laid before us this Conference, taking
          up the negative of the question; suppose, in our social capacity
          here, we have a system that feeds the hungry, clothes the naked,
          administers to the widow and the fatherless, so that we can say
          of a truth, as they did in the days of the Apostles, we have no
          poor among us. Would it establish the principle that we are rich?
          To me it would establish no more than a good wholesome principle
          upon which the wicked may act, as well as the righteous--a
          principle upon which the world ought to act, by the moral
          obligations they are under to stretch out the arm of charity to
          every person, to fill up their days with industry, prudence, and
          faithfulness, procuring means to sustain themselves, and to
          administer to the wants of those who are unable to administer to
          themselves. To me, I say, this principle manifests no more than a
          moral obligation under which all are placed. Though some may
          think it a decided mark of Christianity, that it is a proof of
          deep piety, and bespeaks the character of Saints, and all this,
          if we scan the subject closely, it amounts to nothing more than a
          moral obligation all are under to each other.
          265
          Again, we call up the question of riches, wealth. We may behold
          one upon the right, that commands his thousands of gold and
          silver, which he has treasured up; he has houses and lands to
          occupy, goods and chattels to fill his store-houses, cattle to
          cover his fields, and servants to obey his commands; we call such
          an individual rich, wealthy, but when we take into consideration
          the "true riches" spoken of in this book [the Bible], they are
          not riches. We may behold another upon the left, reigning as a
          monarch; the gold, and the silver, yea all the treasures of the
          kingdom over which he reigns are at his command; and all his
          subjects are fully disposed to do the will of their sovereign. He
          reigns, he rules, he governs, and controls, and there are none to
          gainsay, none to offer a single word of opposition, his word is
          the law, his commands are supreme, he rides in his richly-adorned
          chariots, and wears his crown of gold, set with the most precious
          stones. He sets up one, and drags down another. Those who have in
          the least incurred his displeasure, he condemns to the block, and
          he exalts others to sudden wealth and power. This monarch reigns
          for a day, a month, a year, or for half a century, according to
          the will of Him by whom kings sway the sceptre of power; and the
          world say he is a rich man, a powerful and wealthy man. But this
          is not riches according to the saying of the Saviour in the New
          Testament.
          266
          Suppose we could heap to ourselves the treasures of the earth, as
          was mentioned yesterday; suppose we could load our wagons with
          the purest of gold; with it we could open our commercial business
          on an extensive scale, we could build our temples and mansions,
          macadamize our streets, beautify our gardens, and make these
          valleys as it were like the Garden of Eden, but would it prove we
          were actually rich? It would not. As it was said yesterday, and
          justly, too, we might be brought into circumstances in the midst
          of this supposed wealth, to be glad to give a barrel of gold for
          as much flour. In such a circumstance, of what benefit to us
          would be this wealth, so called? Would not the idea which the
          wicked, and, I may say, with some propriety, the Saints, have of
          wealth vanish like smoke, and should we not find ourselves poor
          indeed? If we possessed mountains of gold, should we not perish
          without bread, without something to feed the body? Most
          assuredly. Though an individual, or a nation of people, could
          command their millions of millions of gold and silver, no uses,
          lands, goods, and chattels, horses and chariots, crowns, and
          thrones, or even the products of the soil--the wheat, the fine
          flour, the oil, and the wine, and all the precious metals of the
          earth in abundance--though they were flooded with all these good
          things, yet if the Almighty should withdraw His hand, they would
          be smitten with the mildew, and disappear; then wealth would
          become the most abject poverty. The possession of these things is
          not wealth to me. Not that I would cast them away as a thing of
          naught, or look upon the good things of this earth, and the
          riches of the world, as things of naught, but they are not the
          true riches, the pearl of great price spoken of in the
          Scriptures, when a man found which, he sold all he had to
          purchase; they do not belong to those principles couched in the
          saying of our Lord, touching the mysteries of the kingdom. The
          riches of this world are nothing more than a stepping stone, or
          necessary means whereby people may obtain the true riches--by
          which they can sustain themselves until they can procure the true
          riches of the kingdom of God. As such they ought to be looked
          upon and handled. "Seek first the kingdom of God." "Seek FIRST"
          that durable object. "Seek FIRST" the righteousness that will
          never betray you. Obtain "FIRST" the prize that will not forsake
          you. Procure to yourselves "FIRST" of all, that which will endure
          through time, and through all the eternities that will be. "Seek
          FIRST the kingdom of God, and its righteousness," and let the
          gold and silver, the houses, the lands, the horses, the chariots,
          the crowns, the thrones, and the dominions of this world be dead
          to you, as it is necessary you should secure for yourselves
          eternal riches that will never forsake you in time nor in all
          eternity.
          266
          The negative of the question is present with the people. If they
          begin to seek the kingdom of heaven, if they set out to glorify
          God in their souls and bodies, which are His, how quick their
          feelings and desires, how soon their natural propensities cling
          with greater pertinacity to the things that are perishable. On
          the right hand and on the left we see persons whose trust is
          wholly in the riches of this world; they say, "I have gathered to
          myself substance, if you rob me of it you rob me of my all. I
          have my flocks and herds around me, if you take these from me all
          is gone." Those men or women to whom this will apply have not
          eternal riches abiding in them. Their minds are set upon the
          things of this world, upon a shadow, upon the substance that
          passes away, like the shadow of morn, or like the morning dew
          upon the flowers. They are like a thing of naught to those who
          understand the things of the kingdom of God. They are to be used,
          but not abused. They are to be handled with discretion, and
          looked upon in their true light, without any lustful desires, as
          the means to feed, clothe, and make us comfortable, that we may
          be prepared to secure to ourselves eternal riches.
          267
          Suppose we should remain here to discuss the subject, for days
          months and years, and scan it with a scrutinizing examination, in
          the end of all our labor we should find that the things of this
          world called riches, are in reality not riches. We should find
          they are like miracles to the ignorant, mere phenomena to the
          inhabitants of the earth; to-day they are, to-morrow they are
          not; they were, but now they are gone, it is not known where. The
          earthly king upon his throne, who reigns triumphantly over his
          subjects is blasted, with all his kingdom and, brought to naught
          at one breath of Him who possesses true riches. Let Him who
          possesses the true riches say to the elements around that
          kingdom, "produce no wheat, nor oil, nor wine, but let there be a
          famine upon that people," in such a circumstance where is the
          wealth of that king his power, his grandeur, and his crown? There
          is no bread, no oil, there are no flocks, no herds, for they have
          perished upon the plains, his wheat is blasted, and all his crops
          are mildewed. What good does his wealth do him? His subjects are
          lying all around him lifeless for want of bread; he may cry to
          them, but in vain; his wealth, power, and influence have
          vanished, they are swept away like the flimsy fabric of a cobweb.
          267
          Again, the rich merchant, or private individuals, may have
          millions of gold and silver deposited, hid in the ground, or
          elsewhere, perhaps, and this is their god. Should the Lord
          Almighty say, as he did in the days of the Nephites, Let their
          substance become slippery, let it disappear that they cannot find
          it again; it is gone, and they may hunt for it in vain. Or let it
          be deposited in a bank, the first they know, the bank is broken,
          the, substance is gone, and they are left in perfect beggary. To
          possess gold and silver, or earthly power and wealth, is not
          riches to me, but it is the negative of the question.
          267
          There are hundreds of people in these valleys, who never owned a
          cow in the world, until they came here, but now they have got a
          few cows and sheep around them, a yoke of oxen, and a horse to
          ride upon, they feel to be personages of far greater importance
          than Jesus Christ was, when he rode into Jerusalem upon an ass's
          colt. They become puffed up in pride, and selfishness, and their
          minds become attached to the things of this world. They become
          covetous, which makes them idolators. Their substance engrosses
          so much of their attention, they forget their prayers, and forget
          to attend the assemblies of the Saints, for they must see to
          their land, or to their crops that are suffering, until by and
          bye the grasshoppers come like a cloud, and cut away the bread
          from their mouth, introducing famine and distress, to stir them
          up in remembrance of the Lord their God. Or the Indians will
          come, and drive off their cattle; where then is their wealth in
          their grain, and in their cattle? Are these things riches? No.
          They are the things of the world, made to decay, to perish, or to
          be decomposed, and thus pass away.
          267
          Were we to spend the period of our lives and try to trace the
          history of mankind upon this world from the beginning to the
          present time by referring to the lives of kings, rulers,
          governors, and potentates; to the wealth, magnificence, and power
          of nations; also to the poverty, wretchedness, war, bloodshed,
          and distress there have been among the inhabitants of the earth,
          it could not all be told, but I have noticed some few of the
          items which I call the negative of the question. To possess this
          world's goods is not in reality wealth, it is not riches, it is
          nothing more nor less than that which is common to all men, to
          the just and the unjust, to the Saint and to the sinner. The sun
          rises upon the evil and the good; the Lord sends His rain upon
          the just and upon the unjust; this is manifest before our eyes,
          and in our daily experience. Old King Solomon, the wise man,
          says, the race is not to the swift, nor the battle to the strong,
          neither riches to men of wisdom. The truth of this saying comes
          within our daily observation. Those whom we consider swift are
          not always the ones that gain the mastery in the race, but those
          who are considered not so fleet, or not fleet at all, often gain
          the prize. It is, I may say, the unseen hand of Providence, that
          over-ruling power that controls the destinies of men and nations,
          that so ordains these things. The weak, trembling, and feeble,
          are the ones frequently who gain the battle; and the ignorant,
          foolish, and unwise will blunder into wealth. This is all before
          us, it is the common lot of man, in short I may say, it is the
          philosophical providence of a philosophical world.
          268
          Suppose we look for a short time after the true riches--after the
          pearl of great price. In doing this were I to systematize, I
          would say, let us leave this subject, which is the negative of
          the question, and take up another, entirely different. We would
          have to take up the subject of salvation to the human family,
          calling up the characters who have officiated in this great work,
          and have brought forth redemption, and placed it before the
          world, putting it within the reach of every individual of the
          sons and daughters of Adam and Eve. Yet it is all the same
          subject.
          268
          Where shall we direct our course to find true riches? Who is
          there that possesses them? Were we to admit scriptural testimony,
          I could refer you to the Bible, where we read of people
          exhibiting a power that gave their beholders satisfactory proof
          of their possessing the true riches. The riches of the world are
          natural, and common to the human family, but who governs and
          controls them? Who holds the destiny of the wealth of the nations
          in his hand? Do the kings, rulers, governors, or the inhabitants
          of the earth generally? No, not one of them, by any means. Have
          there ever been persons upon the earth who have exhibited the
          principles of true riches? Yes. The Bible tells us who they are,
          and delineates the principles of true riches.
          268
          Again, here is the philosophical world, the terra firma on which
          we tread. Here is the atmosphere which the wise men of the world
          tell us it is surrounded with, which is congenial to the
          constitution of the vegetable and animal world, it is the air we
          breathe. Philosophers tell us that the terra firma on which we
          walk is surrounded with it 40 miles high from the surface of the
          earth. It revolves in a this subtle element, which is a
          combination of other elements. This is a philosophical world.
          What then are the results of the philosophical world? Why, if you
          were to put wheat in the ground that has been well tilled, it
          would grow, and bring an increase to repay the husbandman for his
          labor. If you plant potatoes in the ground the philosophy of the
          earth is, it will bring forth potatoes. If you plant corn, corn
          will be produced in abundance, and this will apply to all the
          grain, and vegetables, and products of this earth.
          268
          What is there here, in the valleys of these mountains? Why, the
          same that was centuries ago. As I told my brethren six years ago,
          I said, there are here wheat, corn, potatoes, buckwheat, beets,
          parsnips, carrots, cabbage, onions, apples, peaches, plums,
          pears, and fruits of every description and kind. They are all in
          the philosophical world--in the air we breathe, and in the water
          we drink; it needs nothing more than philosophical applications
          to bring them forth. The most delicate silks, the finest linen,
          and fine cloth of every description, that were ever produced upon
          the earth, are right here in this valley, and it requires nothing
          more than a philosophical application to bring them forth to
          administer to our wants. What more is there here! When we first
          came into this valley we had no knowledge that our brethren could
          find gold in California, or perhaps we might have been digging
          gold over there at this time; but our thoughts were occupied with
          how we should get our wives and children here; we were thinking
          about wheat, potatoes, water melons, peaches, apples, plums, &c.
          But allow me to tell you, that gold and silver, platina, zinc,
          copper, lead, and every element that there is in any part of the
          earth, can be found here; and all that is required, when we need
          them, is a philosophical application to make them subservient to
          our wants.
          269
          Here we pause, and think--"What! is there gold here, silver here?
          Are the finest and most beautiful silks that were ever made, to
          be found here? Yes. Is there fine linen here? Yes, and the finest
          broad-cloths, and shawls and dresses of every description. We are
          walking over them, drinking them, and breathing them every day we
          live. They are here with us, and we can make ourselves rich, for
          all these things are within our reach. What hinders us from being
          truly rich? This is the point. I will tell you when you and I may
          consider ourselves truly rich--When we can speak to the earth--to
          the native elements in boundless space, and say to them--"Be ye
          organized, and planted here, or there, and stay until I command
          you hence;" when at our command the gold is hid so that no man
          can find it, any more than they could in California until within
          a few years back.
          269
          Again, we have a little absolute truth still nearer, and which
          comes under our own knowledge. There is the Sweet Water that runs
          into the Platte river, that this people have passed by for years.
          There have been no pains spared to find gold on that stream and
          its tributaries, but it could not be seen, and yet of late an
          abundance of it has been discovered, ranging over a district of
          country from the South Platte to the South Pass. There are men
          present here to-day, I have no doubt, who have it in their
          pockets, or in their wagons. There are as good prospects for gold
          there, as there ever were in California. How is this? Why He that
          hath all power and all true riches in His possession, has said,
          "Let that sleep, let it be out of sight to this people, until I
          say the word; I organized the elements, and control them, and
          place them where I please." When He says, "Let it be found;" it
          is right there on the top of the earth. Where was it before? I do
          not know; it was out of sight. In the very place where men have
          gone from this valley, to my knowledge, and hunted weeks and
          weeks for gold, and could not find it, there is plenty of it now.
          When you and I can say, "Let there be gold in this valley," and
          turn round again, and command it to disappear, that it is not to
          be found; when we can call gold and silver together from the
          eternity of matter in the immensity of space, and all the other
          precious metals, and command them to remain or to move at our
          pleasure; when we can say to the native element, "Be thou
          combined, and produce those commodities necessary for the use and
          sustenance of man, and to make this earth beautiful and glorious,
          and prepare it for the habitation of the sanctified;" then we
          shall be in possession of true riches. This is true riches to me,
          and nothing short of it constitutes them. When I have gold and
          silver in my possession, which a thief may steal, or friends
          borrow, and never pay me back again, or which may take the wings
          of the morning, and I behold it no more, I only possess the
          negative of the true riches. When the riches of this world leave
          me, I cannot say--"Gold, return thou to my chest." I cannot say
          to the gold I pick up out of the earth, "Be thou separated from
          every particle of dross, and let me see the pure virgin gold." I
          cannot do that without submitting to a tedious process of
          chemical action.
          270
          All those who wish to possess true riches, desire the riches that
          will endure. Then look at the subject of salvation, where you
          will find true riches. They are to be found in the principles of
          the Gospel of salvation, and are not to be found anywhere else.
          With whom abide eternally the true riches? With that God whom we
          serve, who holds all things in His hands, that we know anything
          of; He is the first and the last, the Alpha and the Omega, the
          beginning and the end, who at one survey looks upon all the
          workmanship of His hands; who has the words of eternal life, and
          holds the hearts of the children of men in His hand, and turns
          them whithersoever He will, even as the rivers of waters are
          turned; who commands the earth to perform its revolutions, or
          stand still, at His pleasure; who has given the sun, the planets,
          the earths, and far distant systems their orbits, their times,
          and their seasons; whose commands they all obey. With Him abide
          the true riches.
          270
          I will now notice the character who exhibited the power of true
          riches on the earth, though he himself was in a state of abject
          poverty, to all human appearance, for he was made poor that we
          might be made rich, and he descended below all things that he
          might ascend above all things. When the only begotten Son of God
          was upon the earth, he understood the nature of these elements,
          how they were brought together to make this world and all things
          that are thereon, for he helped to make them. He had the power of
          organizing, what we would call, in a miraculous manner. That
          which to him was no miracle, is called miraculous by the
          inhabitants of the earth. On one occasion he commanded a
          sufficient amount of bread to be formed to feed his disciples and
          the multitude. It was in the air, in the water, and in the earth
          they walked upon. He, unperceived by his disciples and the
          multitude, spoke to the native elements, and brought forth bread.
          He had the power. We have not that power, but are under the
          necessity of producing bread according to a systematic plan. We
          are obliged to till the ground, and sow wheat, in order to obtain
          wheat. But when we possess the true riches, we shall be able to
          call forth the bread from the native element, like as Jesus
          Christ did. Everything that is good for man, is there. Jesus said
          to his disciples, Make the multitude sit down, and divide them
          unto companies, and take this bread and break it, and distribute
          it among them. They did not know but that it was the few loaves
          and fishes that fed the whole of them as they ate. The truth is,
          he called forth bread from the native elements. Is that mystery
          to you? Did you never think of it before? How do you suppose he
          fed them, he did not feed them upon nothing at all, but they ate
          bread and fish, substantial bread and fish! until they were
          satisfied. This the Saviour called from the surrounding elements;
          he was quite capable of doing it, because he had the keys and
          power of true riches, if any man possess which, he is rich in
          time, and in eternity both.
          270
          Again, the Saviour changed water into wine, in the same manner,
          by commanding the elements. Can that be done by a chemical
          process. I admit it can by the persons who understand the
          process; and that men can make bread also. As quick as I admit
          that the history Moses gives of himself is true, I cannot have
          any question in the world but what in ancient days they
          understood in a measure how to command the elements. The
          magicians of Egypt were instructed in things pertaining to true
          riches, and had obtained keys and powers enough to produce a
          bogus in opposition to the true coin, as it were, and thus they
          deceived the king and the people. They could cause frogs to come
          upon the land, as well as Moses could. They could turn the waters
          of Egypt into blood, and in many more things compete with Moses.
          There was one thing, however, they could not do, though they
          produced a very good bogus, but it was not quite the true coin.
          When they threw their staffs on the floor before the king, they
          could not swallow the staff of Moses, but the staff of Moses
          swallowed the staffs of the magicians. I have no doubt that men
          can perform many such wonders by the principles of natural
          philosophy.
          271
               Again, they can deceive the inhabitants of the earth, and
          make them believe that things were done, which in reality were
          not. If there were not a true coin in existence, how could there
          be a bogus produced? The true coin is what we are after, the true
          riches. We are seeking to be made rich in the power of God, so as
          to be able to control the elements, and say--"Let there be
          light," and there is light; "Let there be water," and there is
          water; "Let this or that come," and it cometh; by the power that
          is within us to command the elements; and they obey, just as they
          did the Saviour when he changed the water into wine, or made
          bread to feed the multitudes.
          271
          What shall we say? Do the things of this world, in their present
          state, offer unto us true riches? I say they are not riches, in
          the true sense of the word; there is no such thing as a man being
          truly rich until he has power over death, hell, the grave, and
          him that hath the power of death, which is the devil. For what
          are the riches, the wealth possessed by the inhabitants of the
          earth? Why, they are a phantom, a mere shadow, a bubble on the
          wave, that bursts with the least breath of air. Suppose I
          possessed millions on millions of wealth of every description I
          could think of or ask for, and I took a sudden pain in my head,
          which threw me entirely out of my mind, and baffled the skill of
          the most eminent physicians, what good would that money do me, in
          the absence of the power to say to that pain, "Depart?" But
          suppose I possessed power to say to the pain, "Go thou to the
          land from whence thou camest;" and say, "Come, health, and give
          strength to my body;" and when I want death, to say, "Come you,
          for I have claim upon you, a right, a guarantee deed, for this
          body must be dissolved;" says death, "I want it, to prey upon;"
          but again I can say to death, "Depart from me, you canst not
          touch me;" would I not be rich indeed. How is it now? Let the
          slightest accident come upon one of the human family, and they
          are no more. Do we then possess true riches in this state? We do
          not.
          271
          What shall we do to secure the true riches? "Seek first the
          kingdom of God, and its righteousness." Lay up for ourselves
          treasures in heaven, where moth cannot eat, rust corrode, nor
          thieves break through and steal them. If we find the pearl of
          great price, go and sell all we have to purchase it, and secure
          to ourselves the friendship of God, and our Elder Brother Jesus
          Christ, and walk humbly before God, and obey those whom He has
          told us to obey, all the days of our lives, and He will say,
          "These are my friends, and I will withhold nothing from them."
          272
          And is it indeed possible that we can come into that power, while
          we are in this mortality, to say to death, "Touch me not?" Were
          it possible, I for one do not want it, I would not accept it were
          it offered to me. If the Lord Almighty proffered to revoke the
          decree, "Dust thou art, and to dust thou shalt return," and say
          to me, "You can live for ever as you are;" I should say, "Father,
          I want to ask you a few questions upon this point. Shall I still
          be subject to the tooth-ache, to the head-ache, to the chills and
          fever, and to all the diseases incident to the mortal body?" "O
          yes, but you can live, and never die." "Then I would have you,
          Father, to let the old decree stand good; I find no fault with
          your offer, it may be a good one; but I have the promise of
          receiving my body again--of this body coming up in the morning of
          the resurrection, and being re-united with the spirit, and being
          filled with the principles of immortality and eternal life. Thank
          you, Father, I would rather take a new body, and then I shall get
          a good set of new teeth. My sight, too, is failing; if I want to
          read, I cannot do it without using glasses; and if I wish to walk
          a few miles, I cannot do it without making myself sick; if I wish
          to go out on a journey, I am under the necessity of taking the
          utmost care of myself for fear of injuring my health; but when I
          get a new body, this will not be so; I shall be out of the reach
          of him that hath the power of death in his hands, for Jesus
          Christ will conquer that foe, and I shall receive a new body,
          which will be filled with eternal life, health, and beauty."
          272
          What more? Why, to him that overcometh shall be glory,
          immortality, and eternal life. What more? Jesus says, as it was
          said yesterday, Except ye are one, ye are not mine. Again, he
          says, I pray thee, Father, to make these, my disciples, one, as
          thou, Father, art in me, and I in thee, that they also may be one
          in us, I in them, and thou in me, that they may be made perfect
          in one. This is a curiosity that ranks among the mysteries that
          the people do not understand. The Father and I are one, you
          disciples and I are one; it is quite a curiosity, but it is as
          true as it is curious. It is nothing more than a key-word to
          exaltation, glory, power, and excellency, by which
          principalities, kingdoms, dominions, and eternal lives will
          surround us.
          272
          That will give you true riches, and nothing else will. The only
          true riches in existence are for you and I to secure for
          ourselves a holy resurrection; then we have command of the gold
          and the silver, and can place it where we please, and in whose
          hands we please. We can place it here and there, where it can be
          found, and in abundance, when we say the word. We can say then to
          the flies, and to the grasshoppers, "Be ye extinct," and it will
          be so; and again say, "Go ye, and make a work of devastation,"
          and at our word clouds of them darken the sun, and cover the
          ground, the crops are destroyed in a day. We can then say to the
          hail-storm, "Stay thou thy rage, and hurt not the fields and
          fruit trees of the servants of God;" and we are obeyed. On the
          other hand, when they need a little chastisement, we can say to
          the rain, to the lightnings, and to the thunders, "Chasten ye the
          people;" and the elements are at once in a state of agitation,
          and they are chastened by the destruction of their crops, and
          cities are swallowed up in the yawning earthquake, when God can
          bear their wickedness no longer. He does not want to slay His
          children who love and serve him, He is not a hard master, nor a
          severe Father, but when He chastens, it is because He wishes to
          bring His children to understanding, that they may know where the
          true riches are, and what are the true riches of eternity, and
          rejoice with Him in His presence, being made equal with Him.
          273
          These are some of my reflections upon true riches. Why will the
          Latter-day Saints wander off after the things of this world? But
          are they not good? We cannot do very well without them, for we
          are of the world, we are in the world, we partake of the elements
          of which it is composed; it is our mother earth, we are composed
          of the same native material. It is all good, the air, the water,
          the gold and silver; the wheat, the fine flour, and the cattle
          upon a thousand hills are all good; but, why do men set their
          hearts upon them in their present organized state? Why not lay a
          sure foundation to control them hereafter? Why do we not keep it
          continually before us that all flesh is grass; it is to-day, and
          to-morrow it is not; it is like the flower of the grass when it
          is cut down, it withers, and is no more? Why do the children of
          men set their hearts upon earthly things? They are to be used,
          but not to the abusing of yourselves. They are to be used to make
          us comfortable. Suppose all the good things of this world should
          be given to us, the gold and the silver, the cattle and the
          horses, and all the flocks of a thousand hills; it would be for
          the express purpose of building mansions and temples, of feeding
          the poor that cannot feed themselves, of succoring the tried and
          the tempted, of sending Elders to preach the Gospel from nation
          to nation, from island to island, and of gathering Israel from
          the four quarters of the globe. But that moment that men seek to
          build up themselves, in preference to the kingdom of God, and
          seek to hoard up riches, while the widow and the fatherless, the
          sick and afflicted, around them, are in poverty and want, it
          proves that their hearts are weaned from their God; and their
          riches will perish in their fingers, and they with them.
          273
          Where are the true riches--the pearl of great price? They are
          here. How can we secure them? By being obedient, for the willing
          and obedient will eat the good of the land by and bye; but those
          who heap to themselves riches, and set their hearts upon them,
          where will they be by and bye? There are men in our midst who
          will quarrel for five dollars, and have their trials before
          Bishops and other tribunals if it costs all they possess. They
          say, "I will have my rights." They tell about their rights, when
          they know nothing about rights; in this they are governed solely
          by the influence of former traditions. Why do they not say, "I
          will satisfy my hellish will, if it destroys me for time and all
          eternity." If they would say that, they would say the truth. If a
          man says "It is my right to have this or that," he knows nothing
          about rights, so never say anything more about rights. But if you
          can find one individual who knows what right is, ask him, and
          then say, "That is right, and I will do it." Take that course,
          and rejoice that you have found somebody to tell you what right
          is. When my heart trembles with rage, and my nervous system
          becomes irritated to knock down and kill, it is for me to say,
          Brigham, hold on, you should not do this. Do you wish me to tell
          you what right is? I will point out the way if you will walk in
          it. If your neighbor or your brother should sue you at the law
          for your coat, give it to him, and your cloak also, and not turn
          round and say, "It is my right; are you going to rob me?" The
          instructions of the Saviour of the world, which I have quoted,
          are right; and I could prove it so by philosophical reasoning,
          and make you believe it, and you would be satisfied it is the
          best course you could pursue. I will give you the key to it,
          which is this--it gives you an influence you never can obtain by
          contending for your rights. You say, "Take it, it is no matter
          whether it is my right or not." If a man asks you to go with him
          one mile, go two, and then you can say, "You only asked me to go
          one mile, but I have gone two." That is the counsel Jesus Christ
          gave. If you sit down and calmly reason the case, you cannot but
          discover that it gives you an influence over that man, which you
          could not gain by contending with him in anger. All the power
          which is gained by contending with people is usurped power.
          273
          The power which belongs to the true riches is gained by pursuing
          a righteous course, by maintaining an upright deportment towards
          all men, and especially towards the household of faith, yielding
          to each other, giving freely of that which the Lord has given to
          you, thus you can secure to yourselves eternal riches; and gain
          influence and power over all your friends, as well as your
          enemies. "If you want anything I have, here, take it, and I will
          have influence and power over you;" this is a key word to gain
          the true riches; that is the amount of it.
          274
          I want to hint at the negative of the question again. I have,
          from time to time, said many things to you in this tabernacle,
          and so have my brethren, and the people are much inclined for the
          mysteries of the kingdom. I can tell you what they are, in some
          degree. The idea appears very foolish to me when we are talking
          about it, but we are obliged to use the English language as it
          is, which is scarcely a similitude of what we want. Again it is
          first rate to communicate our ideas, and good to enable us to
          talk one way, and mean another, when we have a disposition to do
          so. Brother Hyde preached us a good discourse on mystery
          yesterday.
          274
          What is a mystery? We do not know, it is beyond our
          comprehension. When we talk about mystery, we talk about eternal
          obscurity; for that which is known, ceases to be a mystery; and
          all that is known, we may know as we progress in the scale of
          intelligence. That which is eternally beyond the comprehension of
          all our intelligence is mystery, yet this word is used by the
          translators of the Bible. They write about mystery, and talk
          about mystery; what are they talking about? I do not know what
          they mean, nor what they wish to convey by that word, and they do
          not know themselves. This language is made use of in the Bible,
          because they have nothing better. Things transpire almost every
          day in our lives which we class under the term mystery, for want
          of a better term. What does it mean, in reality? Why, nothing at
          all. But for the accommodation of those who speak the English
          language, we will continue to use the term, and proceed to
          examine the negative of true riches.
          274
          Here are the earth and the inhabitants upon its face, organized
          for the express purpose of a glorious resurrection. The terra
          firma on which we walk, and from which we gain our bread, is
          looking forth for the morning of the resurrection, and will get a
          resurrection, and be cleansed from the filthiness that has gone
          forth out of her. This is Bible doctrine. What filthiness has
          gone forth out of her? You and I, and all the inhabitants of the
          earth; the human body, and all earthly bodies, both animal and
          vegetable; are composed of the native element that we breathe,
          that we drink, and that we walk upon; we till the earth for our
          bread, which is one of the materials of which your body is
          composed, it comes forth from the native elements into an
          organized state; what for? To be exalted, to get a glorious
          resurrection. We are of the earth, earthy, and not only will the
          portion of mother earth which composes these bodies get a
          resurrection, but the earth itself. It has already had a baptism.
          You who have read the Bible must know that that is Bible
          doctrine. What does it matter if it is not stated in the same
          words that I use, it is one the less true that it was baptized
          for the remission of sins. The Lord said, "I will deluge (or
          immerse) the earth in water for the remission of the sins of the
          people;" or if you will allow me to express myself in a familiar
          style, to kill all the vermin that were nitting and breeding, and
          polluting its body; it was cleansed of its filthiness; and soaked
          in the water, as long as some of our people ought to soak. The
          Lord baptized the earth for the remission of sins and it has been
          once cleansed from the filthiness that has gone out of it which
          was in the inhabitants who dwelt upon its face.
          275
          The earth is organized for a glorious resurrection, and life and
          death are set before the people, true riches and false riches;
          and the whole world are gone after the false riches; after that
          which is not life, after decomposition, after that which
          perishes, and passes away like the twilight of evening. The Lord
          has set before the inhabitants of the earth, true riches, from
          the days of Adam until now. In olden times, in the ages we call
          "the dark ages of the world," men could talk to the Lord face to
          face, and He looked like another man. When He had a mind to do
          so, He could walk into the assemblies of the people, and none of
          them would know him, only they knew He was a stranger that had
          visited their meeting. He understands the difference between true
          riches and the bogus which passed current in the days of Pharaoh
          in Egypt. We see the bogus power again exhibited in the days of
          Saul the king of Israel, by the witch of Endor, who, at the
          request of Saul, brought forth the spirit of Samuel, or some
          other spirit. They understood the principles of life, for the
          Lord had set life and death before them, true riches and false
          riches, or in other words, composition and decomposition, and the
          laws, principles, and powers of the eternal world; and the people
          of the early ages of this world understood them.
          275
          The people in this age, are like the old miser, whose latter end
          was drawing nigh; he had saved a good purse of gold, but he was
          blind and could not see it, so he requested the attendants to
          bring him the gold that he might put his hand on it; when he laid
          his hand upon it, he could go to sleep. He possessed the negative
          of true riches. Again, they are like the man who found a lump of
          gold which weighed 100 pounds, the last that was heard of him
          was, he was sitting upon it, offering a great price to the
          passers by for something to eat, and swearing that if he had to
          starve to death, he would stick by the gold, and die a rich man.
          If he had understood the principles of life--the principles of
          true riches, he could have commanded that gold in California, in
          England, or anywhere else; but he had no power over it, and died
          like a fool, no doubt. What good was his gold to him? He had not
          the power of endless life in him, particles which compose his
          body and spirit will return to their native element. I told you
          some time ago what would become of such men. But I will quote the
          Scriptures on this point, and you can make what you please of it.
          Jesus says, he will DESTROY death and him that hath the power of
          it. What can you make of this but decomposition, the returning of
          the organized particles to their native element, after suffering
          the wrath of God until the time appointed. That appears a
          mystery, but the principle has been in existence from all
          eternity, only it is something you have not known or thought of.
          When the elements in an organized form do not fill the end of
          their creation, they are thrown back again, like brother
          Kimball's old pottery ware, to be ground up, and made over again.
          All I have to say about it is what Jesus says--I will destroy
          Death, and him that hath the power of it, which is the devil. And
          if he ever makes "a full end of the wicked," what else can he do
          than entirely disorganize them, and reduce them to their native
          element? Here are some of the mysteries of the kingdom.
          276
          On the other hand, let us take the affirmative of the question;
          and inquire what is life and salvation? It is to take that course
          wherein we can abide for ever and ever, and be exalted to
          thrones, kingdoms, governments, dominions, and have full power to
          control the elements, according to our pleasure to all eternity;
          the one is life, and the other is death, which is nothing more or
          less than the decomposition of organized native element. There
          can be no such thing as power to annihilate element. There is one
          eternity of element, which can be organized or disorganized,
          composed or decomposed; it may be put into this shape or into
          that, according to the will of the intelligence that commands it,
          but there is no such thing as putting it entirely out of
          existence.
          276
          I never studied philosophy to any great extent, but on one
          occasion I had a kind of a confab with Professor Orson Pratt, who
          endeavoured to prove that there was empty space, I supposed there
          was no such thing. He thought he had proved it; but I thought he
          had not proved a word of it, and told him the idea was folly.
          After hearing a good many arguments from him, and other men, his
          colleagues in learning, I wished them to tell me where empty
          space was situated, that I might tell the wicked, who wish to
          hide themselves from the face of him that sitteth upon the
          throne, where to go, for they will then be where God is not, if
          they can find empty space. To argue such a question as that,
          would be, to confute my own arguments in favor of other truths I
          have advocated, and oppose my own system of faith. We believe
          that God is round about all things, above all things, in all
          things, and through all things. To tell about empty space is to
          tell of a space where God is not, and where the wicked might
          safely hide from His presence. There is no such thing as empty
          space.
          276
          Remember, that true riches--life, happiness, and salvation, is to
          secure for ourselves a part in the first resurrection, where we
          are out of the reach of death, and him that hath the power of it;
          then we are exalted to thrones, and have power to organize
          element. Yes, they that are faithful, and that overcome, shall be
          crowned with crowns of eternal glory. They shall see the time
          when their cities shall be paved with gold; for there is no end
          to the precious metals, they are in the native element, and there
          is an eternity of it. If you want a world of the most precious
          substance, you will have nothing to do but say the word, and it
          is done. You can macadamize streets with it, and beautify and
          make glorious the temples. We can then say to the elements,
          "Produce ye the best oranges, lemons, apples, figs, grapes, and
          every other good fruit." I presume we do not draw a single breath
          that there are not particles of these things mingled in it. But
          we have not the knowledge now to organize them at our pleasure.
          Until we have that power we are not fully in possession of the
          true riches, which is the affirmative of the question, and the
          negative of the question is no riches at all in reality.
          276
          Well, brethren, I think I have stood out first rate. When I rose
          I did not think I could speak over ten minutes. May the Lord God
          bless you, and have mercy upon the world, and upon this people,
          that we may be saved in His kingdom. Amen.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Brigham
          Young, February 14, 1853
                          Brigham Young, February 14, 1853
           
                                  BUILDING TEMPLES.
           An address delivered by President Brigham Young, on the Temple
                                       Block,
                      Great Salt Lake City, February 14, 1853.
          277
          If the congregation will give me their attention, I will detain
          them but a short time. Our history is too well known to render it
          necessary for me to enter into particulars on the subject this
          morning. Suffice it to say, to this congregation, that we shall
          attempt to build a temple to the name of our God. This has been
          attempted several times, but we have never yet had the privilege
          of completing and enjoying one. Perhaps we may in this place, but
          if, in the providence of God, we should not, it is all the same.
          It is for us to do those things which the Lord requires at our
          hands, and leave the result with Him. It is for us to labor with
          a cheerful good will; and if we build a temple that is worth a
          million of money, and it requires all our time and means, we
          should leave it with cheerful hearts, if the Lord in His
          providence tells us so to do. If the Lord permits our enemies to
          drive us from it, why we should abandon it with as much
          cheerfulness of heart as we ever enjoy a blessing. It is no
          matter to us what the Lord does, or how He disposes of the labor
          of His servants. But when He commands, it is for His people to
          obey. We should be as cheerful in building this temple, if we
          knew beforehand that we should never enter into it when it was
          finished, as we would though we knew we were to live here a
          thousand years to enjoy it.
          277
          If the inquiry is in the hearts of the people--"Does the Lord
          require the building of a temple at our hands?" I can say that He
          requires it just as much as ever He required one to be built
          elsewhere. If you should ask, "Brother Brigham, have you any
          knowledge concerning this? have you ever had a revelation from
          heaven upon it?" I can answer truly, it is before me all the
          time, not only to-day, but it was almost five years ago, when we
          were on this ground, looking for locations, sending our scouting
          parties through the country, to the right and to the left, to the
          north and the south; to the east and the west; before we had any
          returns from any of them, I knew, just as well as I now know,
          that this was the ground on which to erect a temple--it was
          before me.
          277
          The Lord wished us to gather to this place, He wished us to
          cultivate the earth, and make these valleys like the Garden of
          Eden, and make all the improvements in our power, and build a
          temple as soon as circumstances would permit. And further, if the
          people and the Lord required it, I would give a written
          revelation, but let the people do the things they know to be
          right. Permit me to ask the question--do you not know that it is
          your duty to accumulate your daily bread, to cease your
          wickedness? Are not these duties required at your hands? Do you
          not know this of yourselves? There is not an individual in this
          assembly that does not understand this, that is not as well
          convinced of it as I am.
          278
          Concerning revelations pertaining to building temples, I will
          give you the words of our beloved Prophet while he was yet living
          upon the earth. Many of us that are here to-day, were with him
          from the commencement of the church. He was frequently speaking
          upon the building of temples in Kirtland, Missouri, and Illinois.
          When the people refused in Kirtland to build a temple, unless by
          a special revelation, it grieved his heart that they should be so
          penurious in their feelings as to require the Lord to command
          them to build a house to His name. It was not only grievous to
          him, but to the Holy Spirit also. He frequently said, that if it
          were not for the covetousness of the people, the Lord would not
          give revelations concerning the building of temples, for we
          already knew all about them; the revelations giving us the order
          of the Priesthood make known to us what is wanting in that
          respect at our hands. If you should go to work to build a
          dwelling house, you know you would want a kitchen, a buttery,
          sitting rooms, bedrooms, halls, passages, and alleys. He said,
          you might as well ask the Lord to give revelation upon the
          dimensions and construction of the various apartments of your
          dwelling houses, as upon the erection of temples, for we know
          before hand what is necessary.
          278
          Concerning this house, I wish to say, if we are prospered we will
          soon show you the likeness of it, at least upon paper, and then
          if any man can make any improvement in it, or if he has faith
          enough to bring one of the old Nephites along, or an angel from
          heaven, and he can introduce improvements, he is at liberty so to
          do. But wait until I dictate, and construct it to the best of my
          ability, and according to the knowledge I possess, with the
          wisdom God shall give me, and with the assistance of my brethren;
          when these are exhausted, if any improvement can be made, all
          good men upon the earth are at liberty to introduce their
          improvements. But I trust this people do not require commanding,
          every day of their lives, to pray, to do unto others as they
          would that others should do unto them: I trust they do not want a
          special command for this; if not, upon the same principle, they
          will not want any commandment upon the subject of building a
          temple, more than what is before them.
          278
          A few words to this people, upon the principles which were laid
          before them yesterday, in the tabernacle. One thing is required
          at the hands of this people, and to understand which there is no
          necessity for receiving a commandment every year, viz.--to pay
          their tithing. I do not suppose for a moment, that there is a
          person in this Church, who is unacquainted with the duty of
          paying tithing, neither is it necessary to have a revelation
          every year upon the subject. There is the law--pay one tenth. I
          wish to say to you, and I wish you to tell your neighbors, if
          there is any man or woman who do not want to pay their tithing,
          we do not want they should. It is for your particular benefit,
          and that of every individual upon the face of the earth. To me,
          as an individual, it is no matter whether you build a temple or
          not; I and my brethren have received our endowments, keys,
          blessings--all the tokens, signs, and every preparatory
          ordinance, that can be given to man, for his entrance into the
          celestial gate.
          279
          The Prophet's feelings were often wounded because he was under
          the necessity of giving commandments concerning duties that were
          already before the people, until the temple was completed; but
          had he not done so, the temple would not have been built; had he
          waited until the minds of the people were opened, and they were
          led to see and do their duty, without commandment, he would have
          been slain before the keys of the Priesthood could have been
          committed to others, but the Lord put it into his heart to give
          this power to his brethren before his martyrdom.
          279
          If the people will pay their tithing, we have all the means we
          can ask or wish for. If the tithing is paid, we do not want the
          brethren and sisters to give up their surplus property, for there
          will be a great surplus in the storehouse of the Lord. This is
          what is required of this people, not to give all they have,
          though it should be constantly upon the altar, but to be ready,
          if required; but if the people will pay their tithing punctually,
          there will be an abundance, yes, and a surplus. For me to ask the
          people if they will give their surplus property, would be
          useless. I shall not ask any such question, but I shall now ask
          the people to pay their labor tithing, that we may excavate this
          foundation, and prepare for the stone work by the 1st of April. I
          expect to see a great turn out, no doubt we shall have all the
          help we can require.
          279
          While the brethren are before me, let me say, that we cannot
          commence to lay rock here without time, and we cannot get the
          stone for the foundation without the railroad from this place to
          the quarry is completed; these two items must be attended to.
          This is sufficient to say upon that matter.
          279
          Let us revert for a moment to the past, to the years we have
          spent in toil and labor, though very agreeably. Seven years ago
          to-morrow, about eleven o'clock, I crossed the Mississippi river,
          with my brethren, for this place, not knowing, at that time,
          whither we were going, but firmly believing that the Lord had in
          reserve for us a good place in the mountains, and that He would
          lead us directly to it. It is but seven years since we left
          Nauvoo, and we are now ready to build another temple. I look back
          upon our labors with pleasure. Here are hundreds and thousands of
          people that have not had the privileges that some of us have had.
          Do you ask, what privileges? Why, of running the gauntlet, of
          passing through the narrows. They have not had the privilege of
          being robbed and plundered of their property, of being in the
          midst of mobs and death, as many of us have.
          279
          Only be faithful, brethren and sisters, and I promise that you
          shall have all such privileges as shall be for your good. You
          need not be discouraged, or mourn, because you were not in
          Jackson County persecutions, or were not driven from Ohio,
          Missouri, and Illinois, and stripped, robbed, and plundered of
          all your property. Do not mourn and feel bad, because you were
          not in Nauvoo; have no fears, for if the word of the Lord is
          true, you shall yet be tried in all things, so rejoice, and pray
          without ceasing, and in every thing give thanks, even if it is in
          the spoiling of your goods, for it is the hand of God that leads
          us, and will continue so to do. Let every man and woman sanctify
          themselves before the Lord, and every providence of the Almighty
          shall be sanctified for good to them. I will now close my
          remarks.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Orson
          Pratt, July 25, 1852
                             Orson Pratt, July 25, 1852
                 A GENERAL FUNERAL SERMON OF ALL SAINTS AND SINNERS;
                         ALSO, OF THE HEAVENS AND THE EARTH.
                 Delivered by Elder Orson Pratt, at the Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, July 25, 1852.
          280
          I have been requested to preach the funeral sermon of the wife of
          brother Levi Savage, who died last December; and since coming to
          this place this morning, I have been requested to preach the
          funeral sermons of several of the Saints who have died in
          England; and I have concluded, instead of limiting my address to
          any one individual case, to preach what may be considered a
          general funeral sermon of all the Saints that have died in all
          past ages and generations, with all that shall die hereafter, and
          the funeral sermon of all those who are not Saints, and also the
          funeral sermon of the heavens and the earth; and for this purpose
          I will take a text, which you will find recorded in the 51st
          chapter of the prophecy of Isaiah, and the sixth verse--
          280
          "Lift up your eyes to the heavens, and look upon the earth
          beneath, for the heavens shall vanish away like smoke, and the
          earth shall wax old like a garment, and they that dwell therein
          shall die in like manner; but my salvation shall be forever, and
          my righteousness shall not be abolished."
          280
          All things with which we are acquainted, pertaining to this earth
          of ours, are subject to change; not only man, so far as his
          temporal body is concerned, but the beasts of the field, the
          fowls of the air, the fishes of the sea, and every living thing
          with which we are acquainted--all are subject to pain and
          distress, and finally die and pass away; death seems to have
          universal dominion in our creation. It certainly is a curious
          world; it certainly does not look like a world constructed in
          such a manner as to produce eternal happiness; and it would be
          very far from the truth, I think, for any being at the present
          time to pronounce it very good: everything seems to show us that
          goodness, in a great degree, has fled from this creation. If we
          partake of the elements, death is there in all its forms and
          varieties; and when we desire to rejoice, sorrow is there,
          mingling itself in every cup; and woe, and wretchedness, and
          misery, seem to be our present doom.
          281
          There is something, however, in man, that is constantly reaching
          forward after happiness, after life, after pleasure, after
          something to satisfy the longing desire that dwells within his
          bosom. Why is it that we have such a desire? And why is it that
          it is not satisfied? Why is it that this creation is so
          constructed? And why is it that death reigns universally over all
          living earthly beings? Did the great Author of creation construct
          this little globe of ours subject to all these changes, which are
          calculated to produce sorrow and death among the beings that
          inhabit it? Was this the original condition of our creation? I
          answer, no; it was not so constructed. But how was it made in the
          beginning? All things that were made pertaining to this earth
          were pronounced "very good." Where there is pain, where there is
          sickness, where there is sorrow, and where there is death, this
          saying can not be understood in its literal sense; things cannot
          be very good where something very evil reigns and has universal
          dominion.
          281
          We are, therefore, constrained to believe, that in the first
          formation of our globe, as far as the Mosaic history gives us
          information, everything was perfect in its formation; that there
          was nothing in the air, or in the waters, or in the solid
          elements, that was calculated to produce misery, wretchedness,
          unhappiness, or death, in the way that it was then organized; not
          but what the same elements, organized a little differently, would
          produce all these effects; but as it was then constructed, we
          must admit that every particle of air, of water, and of earth,
          was so organized as to be capable of diffusing life and
          immortality through all the varied species of animated
          existence--immortality reigned in every department of creation;
          hence it was pronounced very "good."
          281
          When the Lord made the fowls of the air, and the fishes of the
          sea, to people the atmospheric heavens, or the watery elements,
          these fowls and fishes were so constructed in their nature as to
          be capable of eternal existence. To imagine anything different
          from this, would be to suppose the Almighty to form that which
          was calculated to produce wretchedness and misery. What says the
          Psalmist David upon this subject? He says that all the works of
          the Lord shall endure for ever. Did not the Lord make the fish?
          Yes. Did He not make the fowls of the heavens? Yes. Did He not
          make the beasts of the field, and the creeping things, and the
          insects? Yes. Do they endure for ever? They apparently do not;
          and yet David says all His works are constructed upon that
          principle. Is this a contradiction? No. God has given some other
          particulars in relation to these works. He has permitted the
          destroyer to visit them, who has usurped a certain dominion and
          authority, carrying desolation and ruin on every hand; the
          perfections of the original organizations have ceased. But will
          the Lord for ever permit these destructions to reign? No. His
          power exists, and the power of the destroyer exists. His power
          exists, and the power of death exists; but His power exceeds all
          other powers; and consequently, wherever a usurper comes in and
          lays waste any of His works, He will repair those wastes, build
          up the old ruins, and make all things new: even the fish of the
          sea, and the fowls of the heavens, and the beasts of the earth,
          must yet, in order to carry out the designs of the Almighty, be
          so constructed as to be capable of eternal existence.
          281
          It would be interesting to know something about the situation of
          things when they were first formed, and how this destroyer
          happened to make inroads upon this fair creation; what the causes
          were, and why it was permitted.
          282
          Man, when he was first placed upon this earth, was an immortal
          being, capable of eternal endurance; his flesh and bones, as well
          as his spirit, were immortal and eternal in their nature; and it
          was just so with all the inferior creation--the lion, the
          leopard, the kid, and the cow; it was so with the feathered
          tribes of creation, as well as those that swim in the vast ocean
          of waters; all were immortal and eternal in their nature; and the
          earth itself, as a living being, was immortal and eternal in its
          nature. "What! is the earth alive too?" If it were not, how could
          the words of our text be fulfilled, where it speaks of the
          earth's dying? How can that die that has no life? "Lift up your
          eyes to the heavens above," says the Lord, "and look upon the
          earth beneath; the heavens shall vanish away like smoke, and the
          earth shall wax old like a garment, and they that dwell therein
          shall die in like manner." In like manner! What! the earth and
          the heavens to die? Yes, the material heavens and earth must all
          undergo this change which we call death; and if so, the earth
          must be alive as well as we. The earth was so constructed that it
          was capable of existing as a living being to all eternity, with
          all the swarms of animals, fowls, and fishes that were first
          placed upon the face thereof. But how can it be proved that man
          was an immortal being? We will refer you to what the Apostle Paul
          has written upon this subject; he says that by one man came
          death; and he tells us how it came: it was by the transgression
          of one individual that death was introduced here. But did
          transgression bring in all these diseases and this sorrow, this
          misery and wretchedness, over the whole face of this creation? Is
          it by the transgression of one person that the very heavens are
          to vanish away as smoke, and the earth is to wax old like a
          garment? Yes, it is by the transgression of one; and if it had
          not been for his transgression, the earth never would have been
          subject to death. Why? Because the works of the Lord are so
          constructed as to exist for ever; and if death had come in
          without a cause, and destroyed the earth, and laid waste the
          material heavens, and produced a general and utter overthrow and
          ruin in this fair creation, then the works of the Lord would have
          ceased to endure according to the promise, being imperfect in
          their construction, and consequently not very good.
          282
          But what was this sin, and what was the nature of it? I will tell
          you what it was; it was merely the partaking of a certain kind of
          fruit. But, says one, I should think there is no harm in eating
          fruit. There would not be unless God gave a command upon the
          subject. There are things in nature that would be evil without a
          commandment: if there were no commandment it would be evil for
          you to murder an innocent being, and your own conscience would
          tell you it was an evil thing. It is an evil for any individual
          to injure another, or to infringe upon the rights of another,
          independent of any revealed law; for the savage, or that being
          who has never heard of the written laws of heaven--who has never
          heard of the revealed laws of God with regard to these
          principles--as well as the Saint, knows that it is an evil to
          infringe upon the rights of another; the very nature of the thing
          shows that it is an evil; but not so in regard to many other
          things that are evil; which are only made evil by commandment.
          283
          For instance, here is the Sabbath day: a person that never heard
          the revealed law of God upon the subject, never could conceive
          that it was an evil to work on the Sabbath day; he would consider
          it just as right to work on the first day of the week, as on the
          seventh; he would perceive nothing in the nature of the thing by
          which he could distinguish it to be an evil. So with regard to
          eating certain fruits; there is no evil in it of itself, it was
          the commandment of the Great God that made it an evil. He said to
          Adam and Eve, "Here are all the fruits of the garden; you may eat
          of them freely except this one tree that stands in the midst of
          the garden; now beware, for in the day you eat thereof you shall
          surely die." Don't we perceive that the commandment made this an
          evil? Had it not been for this commandment, Adam would have
          walked forth and freely partaken of every tree, without any
          remorse of conscience; just as the savage, that never has heard
          the revealed will of God, would work on the Sabbath, the same as
          on any other day, and have no conscience about the matter. But
          when a man murders, he knows it to be an injury, and he has a
          conscience about it, though he never heard of God; and so with
          thousands of other evils. But why did the Lord place man under
          these peculiar circumstances? Why did He not withhold the
          commandment, if the partaking of the fruit, after the commandment
          was given, was sin? Why should there have been a commandment upon
          the subject at all, inasmuch as there was no evil in the nature
          of the thing to be perceived or understood? The Lord had a
          purpose in view; though He constructed this fair creation, as we
          have told you, subject to immortality, and capable of eternal
          endurance, and though He had constructed man capable of living
          for ever, yet He had an object in view in regard to that man, and
          the creation he inhabited. What was the object? And how shall
          this object be accomplished?
          283
          Why, the Lord wanted this intelligent being called man, to prove
          himself; inasmuch as he was an agent, He desired that he should
          show himself approved before his Creator.
          283
          How could this be done without a commandment? Can you devise any
          possible means? Is there any person in this congregation having
          wisdom sufficient to devise any means by which an intelligent
          being can show himself approved before a superior intelligence,
          unless it be by administering to that man certain laws to be
          kept? No. Without law, without commandment or rule, there would
          be no possible way of showing his integrity: it could not be said
          that he would keep all the laws that govern superior orders of
          beings, unless he had been placed in a position to be tried, and
          thus proven whether he would keep them or not. Then it was wisdom
          to try the man and the woman, so the Lord gave them this
          commandment; if He had not intended the man should be tried by
          this commandment, He never would have planted that tree, He never
          would have placed it in the midst of the garden. But the very
          fact that He planted it where the man could have easy access to
          it, shows that He intended man should be tried by it, and thus
          prove whether he would keep His commandments or not. The penalty
          of disobedience to this law was death.
          283
          But could He not give a commandment, without affixing a penalty?
          He could not: it would be folly, even worse than folly, for God
          to give a law to an intelligent being, without affixing a penalty
          to it if it were broken. Why? Because all intelligent beings
          would discard the very idea of a law being given, which might be
          broken at pleasure, without the individuals breaking it being
          punished for their transgression. They would say--"Where is the
          principle of justice in the giver of the law? It is not there: we
          do not reverence Him nor His law; justice does not have an
          existence in His bosom; He does not regard His own laws, for He
          suffers them to be broken with impunity, and trampled under foot,
          by those whom He has made; therefore we care not for Him or His
          laws, nor His pretended justice; we will rebel against it." Where
          would have been the use of it if there had been no penalty
          affixed?
          283
          But what was the nature of this penalty? It was wisely ordained
          to be of such a nature as to instruct man. Penalties inflicted
          upon human beings here, by governors, kings, or rulers, are
          generally of such a nature as to benefit them.
          284
          Adam was appointed lord of this creation; a great governor,
          swaying the sceptre of power over the whole earth. When the
          governor, the person who was placed to reign over this fair
          creation, had transgressed, all in his dominions had to feel the
          effects of it, the same as a father or a mother, who transgresses
          certain laws, frequently transmits the effects thereof to the
          latest generations.
          284
          How often do we see certain diseases becoming hereditary, being
          handed down from father to son for generations. Why? Because in
          the first instance there was a transgression, and the children
          partook of the effects of it.
          284
          And what was the fullest extent of the penalty of Adam's
          transgression? I will tell you--it was death. The death of what?
          The death of the immortal tabernacle--of that tabernacle where
          the seeds of death had not been, that was wisely framed, and
          pronounced very good: the seeds of death were introduced into it.
          How, and in what manner? Some say there was something in the
          nature of the fruit that introduced mortality. Be this as it may,
          one thing is certain, death entered into the system; it came
          there by some means, and sin was the main spring by which this
          monster was introduced. If there had been no sin, old father Adam
          would at this day have been in the garden of Eden, as bright and
          as blooming, as fresh and as fair, as ever, together with his
          lovely consort Eve, dwelling in all the beauty of youth.
          284
          By one man came death--the death of the body. What becomes of the
          spirit when the body dies? Will it be perfectly happy? Would old
          father Adam's spirit have gone back into the presence of God, and
          dwelt there eternally, enjoying all the felicities and glories of
          heaven, after his body had died? No; for the penalty of that
          transgression was not limited to the body alone. When he sinned,
          it was with both the body and the spirit that he sinned: it was
          not only the body that eat of the fruit, but the spirit gave the
          will to eat; the spirit sinned therefore as well as the body;
          they were agreed in partaking of that fruit. Was not the spirit
          to suffer then as well as the body? Yes. How long? To all ages of
          eternity, without any end; while the body was to return back to
          its mother earth, and there slumber to all eternity. That was the
          effect of the fall, leaving out the plan of redemption; so that,
          if there had been no plan of redemption prepared from before the
          foundation of the world, man would have been subjected to an
          eternal dissolution of the body and spirit--the one to lie
          mingling with its mother earth, to all ages of eternity, and the
          other to be subject, throughout all future duration, to the power
          that deceived him, and led them astray; to be completely
          miserable, or, as the Book of Mormon says, "dead as to things
          pertaining to righteousness;" and I defy any such beings to have
          any happiness when they are dead as to things pertaining to
          righteousness. To them, happiness is out of the question; they
          are completely and eternally miserable, and there is no help for
          them, laying aside the atonement. That was the penalty pronounced
          upon father Adam, and upon all the creation of which he was made
          lord and governor. This is what is termed original sin, and the
          effect of it.
          285
          But there is a very curious saying in the Book of Mormon, to
          which I now wish to refer your minds; it reads thus: "Adam fell
          that man might be, and men are that they might have joy." Says
          one, "If Adam had not fallen, then there could not have been any
          posterity." That is just what we believe; but how do you get
          along with that saying which was given previous to the fall,
          where he was commanded to multiply and replenish the earth? How
          could he have multiplied and fulfilled this commandment, if "Adam
          fell that man might be?" Let me appeal to another saying in the
          New Testament: "Adam was not deceived; but the woman, being
          deceived, was in the transgression," says the Apostle Paul. Well,
          after the woman was deceived, she became subject to the penalty;
          yes, after she had partaken of the forbidden fruit, the penalty
          was upon her, and not upon Adam; he had not partaken of the
          fruit, but his wife had. Now, what is to be done? Here are two
          beings in the garden of Eden, the woman and the man; she has
          transgressed, has broken the law, and incurred the penalty. And
          now, suppose the man had said, "I will not partake of this
          forbidden fruit;" the next word would have been, "Cast her out of
          the garden; but let Adam stay there, for he has not sinned, he
          has not broken the commandment, but his wife has; she was
          deceived, let her be banished from the garden, and from my
          presence, and from Adam's presence; let them be eternally
          separated." I ask, on these conditions could they fulfil the
          first great commandment? They could not. Adam saw this, that the
          woman was overcome by the devil speaking through the serpent; and
          when he saw it, he was satisfied that the woman would have to be
          banished from his presence: he saw, also, that unless he partook
          of the forbidden fruit, he could never raise up posterity;
          therefore the truth of that saying in the Book of Mormon is
          apparent, that "Adam fell that man might be." He saw that it was
          necessary that he should with her partake of sorrow and death,
          and the varied effects of the fall, that he and she might be
          redeemed from these effects, and be restored back again to the
          presence of God.
          285
          This tree, of which they both ate, was called the tree of
          knowledge of good and evil. Why was it thus termed? I will
          explain a mystery to you, brethren, why this was called so. Adam
          and Eve, while in the garden of Eden, had not the knowledge you
          and I have; it is true, they had a degree of intelligence, but
          they had not the experience, they had not the knowledge by
          experience, which you and I have: all they knew was barely what
          they knew when they came there; they knew a commandment had been
          given to them, and they had sufficient knowledge to name the
          beasts of the field as they came up before them; but as for the
          knowledge of good, they had not got it, because they never had
          anything contrary to good placed before them.
          286
          We will bring up an example. For instance, suppose you had never
          tasted anything that was sweet--never had the sensation of
          sweetness--could you have any correct idea of the term sweetness?
          No. On the other hand, how could you understand bitter if you
          never had tasted bitterness? Could you define the term to them
          who had experienced this sensation, or knew it? No. I will bring
          another example. Take a man who had been perfectly blind from his
          infancy, and never saw the least gleam of light--could you
          describe colors to him? No. Would he know anything about red,
          blue, violet, or yellow? No; you could not describe it to him by
          any way you might undertake. But by some process let his eyes be
          opened, and let him gaze upon the sun beams that reflect upon a
          watery cloud, producing the rainbow, where he would see a variety
          of colors, he could then appreciate them for himself; but tell
          him about colors when he is blind, he would not know them from a
          piece of earthenware. So with Adam previous to partaking of this
          fruit; good could not be described to him, because he never had
          experienced the opposite. As to undertaking to explain to him
          what evil was, you might as well have undertaken to explain, to a
          being that never had, for one moment, had his eyes closed to the
          light, what darkness is. The tree of knowledge of good and evil
          was placed there that man might gain certain information he never
          could have gained otherwise; by partaking of the forbidden fruit
          he experienced misery, then he knew that he was once happy,
          previously he could not comprehend what happiness meant, what
          good was; but now he knows it by contrast, now he is filled with
          sorrow and wretchedness, now he sees the difference between his
          former and present condition, and if by any means he could be
          restored to his first position, he would be prepared to realize
          it, like the man that never had seen the light. Let the man to
          whom all the beauties of light have been displayed, and who has
          never been in darkness, be in a moment, in the twinkling of an
          eye, deprived of his natural sight; what a change this would be
          to him; he never knew anything about darkness before, he never
          understood the principle at all; it never entered the catalogue
          of his ideas, until darkness came upon him, and his eye-sight was
          destroyed: now he can comprehend that the medium he once existed
          in was light. Now, says he, if I could only regain my sight, I
          could appreciate it, for I understand the contrast; restore me
          back again to my sight, and let me enjoy the light I once had;
          let me gaze upon the works of creation, let me look on the
          beauties thereof again, and I will be satisfied, and my joy will
          be full. It was so with Adam; let the way be prepared for his
          redemption, and the redemption of his posterity, and all creation
          that groans in pain to be delivered--let them be restored back
          again to what they lost through the fall, and they will be
          prepared to appreciate it.
          286
          In order to show you the dire effects of the fall, it is not only
          necessary to say that old father Adam has experienced that
          penalty, and laid down his body in the dust; but all generations
          since that time have experienced the same; and you, and I, and
          every man, and woman, and child, have got to undergo that
          penalty; it will be inflicted upon us, and thus will the law of
          God be magnified, His words fulfilled, and justice have its
          demands. It is not because of our sins, that we die; it is not
          because we have transgressed, that we die; it is not because we
          may commit murder, or steal, or plunder, or rob, or take the name
          of the Lord in vain; it is not these things that bring the death
          of the body; but it is Adam's sin that makes the little child
          die, that makes kings, princes, and potentates die, and that has
          made all generations die from his day down to the present time.
          Don't you think there ought to be some way to redeem us from this
          dreadful calamity? We had no hand in the transgression of Adam;
          you and I were not there to participate in it; but it was our
          great father who did it, and we are suffering the effects of it.
          287
          Cannot some of the wise medical men of the age--some of the great
          physicians and doctors of the day, who have studied medicine all
          their life--can they not imagine up something new, that will
          relieve the posterity of Adam from this awful calamity? They have
          not done it yet. Dr. Brandreth recommended his medicine for all
          kinds of diseases, and even it was said that steam-boats were
          propelled by its power; but it made no man immortal; it did not
          save one man; and it is doubtful in the extreme--it is certain,
          that no man in this mortality has ever discovered that medicine
          which will relieve us from these awful effects transmitted from
          father Adam to this present time. There is a remedy, but it is
          not to be found in the catalogue of the inventions of man; it is
          not to be found in the bowels of the earth, or dug out of any
          mines; it is not to be purchased by the gold of California, or
          the treasures of India. 66 What is it, and how was it discovered?
          It was the Being who made man, that made him immortal and
          eternal, that Being whose bosom is filled with mercy, as well as
          justice, that exercises both attributes, and shows to all
          creation that He is a merciful God, as well as a God of justice;
          it was He that discovered this wonderful remedy to preserve
          mankind from the effects of this eternal death. But when is it to
          be applied? Not immediately, for that would frustrate His
          designs: when the body has got back into the dust, and after man
          has suffered sufficiently long for the original sin, He then
          brings him forth to enjoy all the bloom of immortality; He tells
          Death to trouble him no more; He wipes away all tears from his
          eyes, for he is prepared to live for ever, and gaze upon His
          glory, and dwell in His presence.
          287
          This great Redeemer is stronger than Death, more powerful than
          that direful monster who has come into the world, and laid siege
          to all the inhabitants thereof; He will banish it out of this
          creation. How will He do it? If the penalty of the original sin
          be the eternal separation of body and spirit, how can justice
          have all its demands, and mercy be shown to the transgressor?
          There is a way, and how? It is by the introduction of His Only
          Begotten Son, the Son of His own bosom, the first-born of every
          creature, holding the birthright over every creation He has made,
          and holding the keys of salvation over millions of worlds like
          this; he has a right to come forth and suffer the penalty of
          death for the fallen sons and daughters of man. He offered his
          own life: says he, "Father, I will suffer death, though I have
          not merited it; let me suffer the demands of the law. Here I am
          innocent in thy presence; I have always kept thy laws from the
          day of my birth among thy creations, throughout ages past down to
          the present time; I have never been rebellious to thy
          commandments; and now I will suffer for my brethren and sisters:
          let thy justice be magnified and made honourable; here am I; let
          me suffer the ends of the law, and let death and the grave
          deliver up their victims, and let the posterity of Adam all be
          set free, every soul of them without an exception." This is the
          way that justice is magnified and made honourable, and none of
          the creations of the Almighty can complain of Him, that He has
          not answered the ends of justice; no intelligent being can say,
          "You have deviated from your words." Justice has had its demands
          in the penalties that were inflicted upon the Son of God, so far
          as Adam's transgression is concerned.
          288
          I will explain a little further. So far as that transgression is
          concerned, all the inhabitants of the earth will be saved. Now
          understand me correctly. If there are any strangers present, that
          have not understood the views of the Latter-day Saints, I wish
          you to understand that we have no reference in any way to our own
          personal sins; but so far as the original sin of father Adam is
          concerned, you and I will have to suffer death; and every man and
          woman that ever lived on this globe will be redeemed from that
          sin. On what condition? I answer, on no condition whatever on our
          part. "But," says one, "where I came from they tell me I ought to
          repent for the original sin." I care not what they tell you, you
          will be redeemed from the original sin, with no works on your
          part whatever. Jesus has died to redeem you from it, and you are
          as sure to be redeemed, as you live upon the face of this earth.
          This is the kind of universal redemption the "Mormons" believe
          in, though in one sense of the word, it is a different kind of
          universal redemption from that which the nations have been in the
          habit of hearing. We believe in the universal redemption of all
          the children of Adam into the presence of God, so far as the sins
          of Adam are concerned. They will obtain a universal redemption
          from the grave. It matters not how wicked you are; if you have
          murdered all the days of your life, and committed all the sins
          the devil would prompt you to commit, you will get a
          resurrection; your spirit will be restored to your body. If Jesus
          had not come, all of us would have slumbered in the grave; but
          now, wicked as we may be, if we go down to the grave blaspheming
          the name of the Lord, we shall as sure come up again as we go
          down there. This is free grace without works; all this comes to
          pass without works on the part of the creature.
          288
          Now let us pause upon another subject, as we pass along. Don't
          you know, my hearers, that there has been another law given since
          man has become a mortal being? Is it the Book of Mormon? No.
          After man became a mortal being, the Lord gave him another law.
          What was it? "You have now got into a condition that you know
          good and evil by experience, and I will give you a law adapted to
          your capacity," says the Lord, "and I now command you, that you
          shall not do evil."
          288
          What is the penalty? Second death, What is that? After you have
          been redeemed from the grave, and come into the presence of God,
          you will have to stand there to be judged; and if you have done
          evil, you will be banished everlastingly from His presence--body
          and spirit united together; this is what is called the second
          death. Why is it called the second death? Because the first is
          the dissolution of body and spirit, and the second is merely a
          banishment--a becoming dead to the things of righteousness; and
          as I have already remarked, wherever a being is placed in such a
          condition, there perfect misery reigns; I care not where you
          place them; you may take any of the celestial worlds, and place
          millions of beings there that are dead to righteousness, and how
          long will it be before they make a perfect hell of it? They would
          make a hell of any heaven the Lord ever made. It is the second
          death--the penalty attached to the commandment given to the
          posterity of Adam, viz., "You shall cease to do evil; for if you
          cease to do evil, you shall be redeemed from Adam's
          transgression, and brought back into my presence; and if you
          cease not to do evil, you shall be punished with everlasting
          destruction from my presence, and from the glory of my power,"
          saith the Lord.
          288
          "But," says one, "He is so merciful, that He would not inflict
          such a penalty upon us." Have you ever seen a man that has
          escaped from the first death? or who had any prospect of it? No;
          you cannot find a remedy to hinder him from going down to his
          grave. Has there been any escape for any individual for 6000
          years past? Now, if the Lord has been punctual to make every man,
          woman, and child, suffer the penalty of the first transgression,
          why should you suppose that you can stand in His presence, and
          behold the glory of His power, and have everlasting life and
          happiness, when He has told you that you should be banished
          therefrom, that the second death should be inflicted upon you?
          For the first provocation, He has fulfilled to the very letter
          the penalty of the law; so will He in the second, and there is no
          escape. Says one, "Is there no escape?" No; not so far as you are
          able to provide. But I will tell you that there is a redemption
          for man from this second death or penalty, and the Lord remains a
          perfect, just Being, His justice being magnified.
          289
          There is a way of escape from the effects of your own individual
          transgressions, but it is different from the redemption from the
          original sin of Adam. The redemption from that sin was universal
          without works, but the redemption from your own personal sins is
          universal with works on the part of the creature--universal in
          its nature, because it is free to all, but not received by all.
          The salvation, or redemption from your own sins, is not by free
          grace alone, it requires a little work. But what are the works?
          Jesus Christ, through his death and sufferings, has answered the
          penalty, on condition that you believe in him, and repent of your
          sins, and be baptized for the remission of them, and receive the
          Gift of the Holy Ghost, by the laying on of hands, and continue
          humble, and meek, and prayerful, until you go down to your
          graves; and on these conditions, Jesus will plead for you before
          the Father, and say, "Father, I not only died for Adam's sin, but
          for the sins of all the world, inasmuch as they believe in my
          Gospel; and now these individuals have repented, they have
          reformed their lives, and have become like little children in my
          sight, and have performed the works I have given them to do--and
          now, Father, may they be saved with an everlasting salvation in
          thy presence, and sit down with me on my throne, as I have
          overcome, and sit down with thee on thy throne; and may they be
          crowned, with all the sanctified, with immortality and eternal
          life, no more to be cast away."
          289
          Don't you think the Father would accept an appeal of this kind
          from His Only Begotten Son? Yes. He is our Mediator, to plead
          before the Father for those who will comply with his commands,
          and the laws of his Gospel. The way is simple, so simple and easy
          that many step over it and say, "O, that is of no consequence, it
          is of no avail, it will do no good to be baptized in water." But
          if the Lord had not constructed it upon a simple plan, adapted to
          the capacities of all men, they might have had some excuse; but
          as it is, they have none: all you have got to do is to believe
          that Jesus Christ is the Son of God, turn away from your sins,
          cease to do evil, saying, "Father, I will cease from this time
          henceforth to sin, and will work the works of righteousness; I
          will try to do good all the days of my life; and I witness this
          before thee by this day going down into the waters of baptism;
          and thus cast off the old man, with his deeds," and henceforth
          live in newness of life. If you will do this, you will just as
          sure be redeemed from your own sins, and the penalty thereof, and
          be lifted up to dwell in the presence of God, as you have been
          redeemed or lifted up from the waters of baptism. This is the
          Gospel, the first principles thereof, by which you can be
          redeemed from your own sins; and by and bye death will come, and
          it will be sweet to you, for Jesus has suffered the penalty of
          sin; the pangs of sin are gone, and you fall asleep in peace,
          having made sure your salvation, and having done your duty well,
          like those we are preaching the funeral sermon of this morning;
          and thus you will fall asleep, with a full assurance that you
          will come up, in the morning of the first resurrection, with an
          immortal body, like that which Adam had before he partook of the
          forbidden fruit. This is the promise to them that fall asleep in
          Jesus.
          290
          When our spirits leave these bodies, will they he happy? Not
          perfectly so. Why? Because the spirit is absent from the body; it
          cannot be perfectly happy while a part of the man is lying in the
          earth. How can the happiness be complete when only a part of the
          redemption is accomplished? You cannot be perfectly happy until
          you get a new house. You will be happy, you will be at ease in
          paradise; but still you will be looking for a house where your
          spirit can enter, and act as you did in former times, only more
          perfectly, having superior powers. Consequently, all the holy men
          that have lived in days of old, have looked forward to the
          resurrection of their bodies; for then their glory will be
          complete.
          290
          What did Paul say upon this subject? He said, "I have fought a
          good fight," "I have kept the faith; henceforth there is laid up
          for me a crown of righteousness, which the Lord, the righteous
          judge, shall give me at that day." Do you understand this
          passage? Remember that this crown that Paul speaks of, was not to
          be given in the day we die; but it is to be given in "that
          day"--the day of the Lord's appearing; it is to be given to all
          those that love his appearing; then is the time that Paul will
          get his crown; then is the time that the Saints who fall asleep
          in our day, will receive their crowns--crowns of
          rejoicing--kingly crowns. What good would a crown do a man who is
          miserable and wretched? Many persons have worn crowns in this
          life; tyrants have had crowns of diamonds and gold; but what
          benefit are they? None at all, except to a being who has made
          himself perfectly happy by his obedience. But what are we to
          understand by this crown of righteousness, which is to be given
          to the Saints? We understand that it is actually to be a crown of
          glory; that they are to be kings in reality. John speaks in the
          first chapter of his Revelations to the Churches in his day, and
          represents the Saints to be Kings and Priests; he says, Christ
          "hath made us kings and priests unto God and His Father;" and
          this too, while in this life.
          290
          In another place he speaks of those who are dead--about their
          singing a new song: "And they sung a new song, saying," Thou
          "hast redeemed us Oh God by thy blood, out of every kindred, and
          tongue, and people, and nation, and hast made us unto our God
          kings and priests." Here then we find, from the first chapter,
          that they were made Kings and Priests before they were dead; and
          in the next quotation, we find that they still retained their
          kingly office after death, and actually had made songs to express
          their happy condition--Thou "hast made us kings and priests." Now
          we see the reason why they are to wear crowns, for they will be
          made Kings and Priests on the earth: the Lord then, must have
          some way to give this kingly power.
          290
          Do you understand this, brethren and sisters? If you were to
          speak, I should hear innumerable voices respond, "Yes, we
          understand it; the Lord has revealed the ordinances; we know how
          the sons and daughters of God obtain this kingly office, while
          living here in this mortal tabernacle."
          291
          We will pass over that; suffice it to say, that death does not
          wrench it from them; for they are to be kings, not for a day, or
          for this short life, but they are to remain to all eternity
          kings; having their thrones, and acting in the duties belonging
          to their kingly office. Compared with this, what are all the
          little, petty kingdoms of this earth worth? They are not worth
          one snap of the finger. The kings of the world exercise a certain
          authority over the nations--over their subjects, issuing laws,
          and framing governments, and controlling them; and do you suppose
          that the Saints will be kings in the eternal world, and sit down
          upon thrones in silence not exercising the functions of their
          office? No. That is not the way the Lord has organized His
          creations; if there are kings, you may depend upon it they will
          have kingdoms under their control; they will have authority and
          dominion, they will give laws to those subjects over whom they
          bear rule; they will control them by the priestly office, for it
          is combined with the kingly office, and neither can be separated
          and contraced in His feelings, in His views and disposition, that
          He would limit the authority of the priestly office to this
          little globe we inhabit? No. God has more expansive views; His
          works are without beginning, and without end; they are one
          eternal round. What kind of works are they? They are to make
          creations, and people them with living beings, and place them in
          a condition to prove themselves; and to exercise the kingly and
          priestly office to redeem them after they have suffered pain, and
          sorrow, and distress; and to bring them up into the presence of
          God; that they, in their turn, may become kings and priests for
          other creations that shall be made, and that shall be governed
          and ruled over by those possessing the proper authority.
          291
          We do not believe that everything has got to be limited to this
          little space of time in this world; but the Saints will be doing
          a work that will be adapted to beings that are the sons of God in
          the fullest sense of the word, that are precisely like their
          Father; and if so, they will be like Gods, and will hold dominion
          under that Being who is the Lord of lords; and they will hold it
          to all eternity.
          291
          We will come back to our text. We have been talking about the
          funeral sermon of the earth; the earth is to wax old like a
          garment and pass away. I have already proved to you the
          redemption of man, and how he will become immortal and eternal;
          now let us look after his inheritance; we will see if he is to be
          lifted up in space, without any inheritance to stand upon,
          without any land upon which to raise manna for eating, or flax
          for the spinning and making of fine robes and other wearing
          apparel. Let us see if it is to be a shadowy existence, like the
          God that is served by Christendom, "without body, parts, and
          passions," and located "beyond the bounds of time and space."
          291
          The earth is to die; it has already received certain ordinances,
          and will have to receive other ordinances for its recovery from
          the fall.
          291
          We will go back to the creation. The first account we have of the
          earth, it was enveloped in a mass of waters; it was called forth
          from the womb of liquid elements. Here was the first birth of our
          creation--the water rolled back, and the dry land appeared, and
          was soon clothed upon with vegetable and animal existence. This
          was similar to all other births; being first encompassed in a
          flood of mighty waters, it burst forth from them, and was soon
          clothed with all the beauties of the vegetable kingdom. By and
          bye it became polluted by Adam's transgression, and was thus
          brought under the sentence of death, with all things connected
          with it; and as our text says, it must wax old and die, in like
          manner as the inhabitants upon the face thereof.
          292
          The heavens and the earth were thus polluted, that is, the
          material heavens, and everything connected with our globe; all
          fell when man fell, and became subject to death when man became
          subject to it. Both man and the earth are redeemed from the
          original sin without ordinances; but soon we find new sins
          committed by the fallen sons of Adam, and the earth became
          corrupted before the Lord by their transgressions. It needs
          redeeming ordinances for these second transgressions. The Lord
          ordained baptism, or immersion of the earth in water, as a
          justifying ordinance. Said he to Noah, "Build an ark for the
          saving of thyself and house, for I will immerse the earth in
          water, that the sins which have corrupted it may be washed away
          from its face." The fountains of the great deep, and the windows
          on high, were opened, and the rains came and overwhelmed the
          earth, and the dry land disappeared in the womb of the mighty
          waters, even as in the beginning. The waters were assuaged; the
          earth came forth clothed with innocence, like the new-born child,
          having been baptized or born again from the ocean flood; and thus
          the old earth was buried with all its deeds, and arose to newness
          of life, its sins being washed away, even as man has to be
          immersed in water to wash away his own personal sins.
          292
          By and by the earth becomes corrupted again, and the nations make
          themselves drunken with the wine of the wrath of great Babylon;
          but the Lord has reserved the same earth for fire; hence He says
          by the prophet Malachi, "Behold, the day cometh that shall burn
          as an oven, &c." A complete purification is again to come upon
          the earth, and that too, by the more powerful element of fire;
          and the wicked will be burned as stubble. When is this to be? Is
          it to be before the earth dies? This is a representation of the
          baptism that is received by man after he has been baptized in
          water; for he is then to be baptized with fire and the Holy
          Ghost, and all his sins entirely done away: so the earth will be
          baptized with fire, and wickedness swept away from its face, so
          that the glory of God shall cover it. As the waters cover the
          great deep, so will the earth be overwhelmed and immersed in the
          glory of God, and His Spirit be poured out upon all flesh, before
          the earth dies. After this purifying ordinance, there will be a
          thousand years of rest, during which righteousness shall abound
          upon the face of the earth; and soon after the thousand years
          have ended, the words of the text shall be fulfilled--"The
          heavens shall vanish away like smoke, and the earth shall wax old
          like a garment," &c. When the earth waxes old, and has filled the
          measure of its creation, and all things have been done according
          to the mind and will of God, He will say to the earth, "Die."
          What will be its death? Will it be drowned? No: it is to die
          through the agency of fire; it is to suffer a death similar to
          many of the martyrs; the very elements themselves are to melt
          with fervent heat, and the hills are to be made like wax before
          the Lord. Will the earth be annihilated? No, there is no such a
          word in all His revelations; such a thing was never known in the
          bosom of the Almighty, or any other being, except in the
          imaginations of some of the moderns, who have declared that the
          globe was to become like the "baseless fabric of a vision." It is
          one of the sectarian follies, that the elements and every thing
          else are to be completely struck out of existence. The Lord never
          revealed, or thought of, or even hinted at such a thing.
          292
          The earth will not be annihilated, any more than our bodies are
          after being burned. Every chemist knows that the weight of a
          thing is not diminished by burning it. The present order of
          things must be done away, and, as the apostle John says, all
          things must become new; and he tells us the time when: it is to
          be after the millennium. The passing away is equivalent to death,
          and all things being made new is equivalent to the resurrection.
          Is the new earth to be made precisely like this earth? No; but as
          this earth was, before sin entered into it; and we shall inherit
          it.
          292
          This is our heaven, and we have the title to it by promise, and
          it will be redeemed through the faith and prayers of the Saints,
          and we shall get a title from God to a portion of it as our
          inheritance.
          293
          O ye farmers, when you sleep in the grave, don't be afraid that
          your agricultural pursuits are forever at an end; don't be
          fearful that you will never get any more landed property; but if
          you be Saints, be of good cheer, for when you come up in the
          morning of the resurrection, behold! there is a new earth made,
          wherein dwells righteousness, and blessed are ye, for ye shall
          inhabit it. "Blessed are the meek," says our Saviour, "for they
          shall inherit the earth," though they have died without a foot of
          land. The Latter-day Saints were driven from one possession to
          another, until they were driven beyond the pale of civilization
          into the deserts, where it was supposed they would die, and that
          would be the last of them; but behold, they have a firm hold upon
          the promise that the meek shall inherit the earth, when they come
          here with immortal bodies capable of enjoying the earth. True, we
          can have plenty of the things of this life in their cursed
          condition; but what are all these things? They are nothing. We
          are looking for things in their immortal state, and farmers will
          have great farms upon the earth when it is so changed. "But don't
          be so fast," says one, "don't you know that there are only about
          197,000,000 of square miles, or about 126,000,000,000 of acres,
          upon the surface of the globe? Will this accommodate all the
          inhabitants after the resurrection?" Yes; for if the earth should
          stand 8,000 years, or eighty centuries, and the population should
          be a thousand millions in every century, that would be eighty
          thousand millions of inhabitants; and we know that many centuries
          have passed that would not give the tenth part of this; but
          supposing this to be the number, there would then be over an acre
          and a half for each person upon the face of the globe.
          293
          But there is another thing to be considered. Are the wicked to
          receive the earth as an inheritance? No; for Jesus did not say,
          Blessed are the wicked, for they shall inherit the earth; this
          promise was made only to the meek. Who are the meek? None but
          those who receive the ordinances of the Gospel, and live
          according to them; they must receive the same ordinances the
          earth has received, and be baptized with fire and with the Holy
          Ghost, as this earth will be when Jesus comes to reign upon it a
          thousand years; and be clothed upon with the glory of God, as
          this earth will be; and after they have died as the earth will
          die, they will have to be resurrected, as this earth will be
          resurrected, and then receive their inheritance upon it.
          293
          Look at the seventeen centuries that have passed away on the
          eastern hemisphere, during which time the sound of the Gospel has
          never been heard from the mouth of an authorized servant of God.
          Suppose now that out of the vast amount of the population of this
          earth, one in a hundred should receive the law of meekness, and
          be entitled to receive an inheritance upon the new earth; how
          much land would they receive? We answer, they would receive over
          150 acres, which would be quite enough to raise manna, and to
          build some habitations upon, and some splendid mansions; it would
          be large enough to raise flax to make robes of, and to have
          beautiful orchards of fruit trees; it would be large enough to
          have our flower gardens, and everything the agriculturalist and
          the botanist want, and some to spare.
          294
          What would be done with the spare portions? Let me tell you of
          one thing which perhaps some of you have never thought of. Do you
          suppose that we shall get up out of the grave, male and female,
          and that we shall not have the same kind of affections, and
          endearments, and enjoyments that we have here? The same pure
          feelings of love that exist in the bosoms of the male and female
          in this world, will exist with seven-fold intensity in the next
          world, governed by the law of God; there will be no corruptions
          nor infringements upon one another's rights. Will not a man have
          his own family? Yes; he will also have his own mansion and farm,
          his own sons and daughters. And what else? Why, the fact is, man
          will continue to multiply and fill up this creation, inasmuch as
          it is not filled up by the resurrected Saints after it is made
          new.
          294
          And what will he do when this is filled up? Why, he will make
          more worlds, and swarm out like bees from the old hive, and
          prepare new locations. And when a farmer has cultivated his farm,
          and raised numerous children, so that the space is beginning to
          be too strait for them, he will say, "My sons, yonder is plenty
          of matter, go and organize a world, and people it; and you shall
          have laws to govern you, and you shall understand and comprehend
          through your experience the same things that we know." And thus
          it will be one eternal round, and one continual increase; and the
          government will be placed under those that are crowned as kings
          and Priests in the presence of God.
          294
          Much more might be said, for we have only just touched upon these
          things, only turned the key that you may look through the door
          and discern a little of the glories that await the Saints. Let me
          tell you, it has not entered into the heart of man to conceive
          the things which God has hid up for them that love Him, unless he
          is filled with the Holy Ghost, and by vision gazes upon the
          thrones and the dominions, the principalities and powers, that
          are placed under His control and dominion; and He shall sway a
          righteous sceptre over the whole.
          294
          This we will consider a kind of resurrection sermon for this
          creation, and all the righteous that shall inhabit it. We have
          not time in this discourse to preach the resurrection of the
          wicked, nor point out the place of their location.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Heber
          C. Kimball, October 7th, 1852
                         Heber C. Kimball, October 7th, 1852
                    GOING SOUTH--BUILDING THE TEMPLE--MURMURERS.
             A discourse delivered by President Heber C. Kimball, in the
                                     Tabernacle,
               Great Salt Lake City, October 7th, 1852, at the General
                                     Conference.
          295
          The brethren have heard considerable about going south; and I
          know there is considerable feeling manifested upon this matter.
          There are a great many persons in this valley, who are working
          against this operation; I mean fathers and mothers, brothers and
          sisters, and other relations. Nearly all of these persons have
          city lots, and they propose to divide them with the emigrants,
          rather than that they should leave the city; and at the same time
          take one hundred and fifty or two hundred dollars out of their
          brethren's pockets for that which cost them little or nothing; so
          they have a certain object in view in persuading people to stay
          in the city. These things have a strong tendency to bind the
          brethren here. There are also many other things that have the
          same tendency. They reason among themselves, saying, "If we go to
          Iron County, or to Millard County, we shall perhaps lose our
          blessings, our sealings, and our endowments, and many other
          privileges;" and conclude to stay here for the purpose of
          obtaining these things. I will tell you, that stay here for this
          purpose, you will not get your blessings as soon as those will
          who go and settle where they are counselled. For none of you can
          have these blessings until you prove yourselves worthy, by
          cultivating the earth, and then rendering to the Lord the first
          fruits thereof, the first fruits of your cattle, of your sheep,
          and of all your increase. This is how I understand it. Now go and
          get farms for yourselves while you can.
          .    Those brethren in Iron County, and those that are still at
          Coal Creek, pretty much all of them, are ironmongers; they were
          the first to go into the iron and coal business and leave their
          farms. There are somewhere in the neighbourhood of two hundred
          acres of land under cultivation in those valleys, that you can
          have the privilege of purchasing, or of cultivating for the time
          being, until you can make farms for yourselves. In the city of
          Manti, half of the houses are vacant; there are houses enough
          empty there to accommodate fifty or a hundred families. In Iron
          County also there are similar advantages.
          295
          Fillmore City, in Millard County, is situated in a very extensive
          valley. I think we travel, as we are going to Iron County,
          somewhere in the neighbourhood of fifty or sixty miles, and then
          it extends west far beyond the power of the eyes to see; the fact
          is, we can see no distant mountains at all in some directions;
          and there are numerous rich valleys that are connected or which
          communicate with this, on to Iron County. Millard County we wish
          to make strong and powerful, for there is the centre or the
          government of the State of Deseret, and where the governor and
          his associates, some time in the future, will dwell part of the
          year. There will be a building erected there for the use of the
          general government of this State and for the general government
          of the Church and kingdom of God. Then why need you be afraid of
          the result of anything that is best for you to do? Let
          grandfather, grandmother, brother or sister, have no influence
          over you to turn you aside from your duty.
          295
          If brother Brigham is not of more consequence to you than your
          brother or sister, or father or mother, or anything else that
          pertains to this life, I would not give much for your religion.
          If you will reflect for a moment, and let the Spirit of the
          Lord--the spirit of revelation, have place in your bosoms, so
          that you can foresee the future events which we are approaching,
          and let your minds expand by the power of the Holy Ghost, you
          will not hesitate one moment to go to these valleys.
          295
          We have no wish to get rid of the Saints, but the counsel that is
          given them to go and settle those places, is for their best
          interest, and for the upbuilding of the kingdom of God.
          296
          You have arrived safely in this valley, by the providence of God,
          from Old England, where it rains almost every day, and where they
          have to keep the lamps lit, sometimes, in order to pass through
          the streets safely in the day time. Often, when I was there, I
          had to sit and read in the day time by candle light; and we very
          seldom durst go out without an umbrella, for if we did, we were
          sure to get soaked to the skin before we returned. It is not so
          in this country; and the further you go south, the higher the
          valleys are, until you go over the rim of the Great Basin, about
          sixty miles, down to the Rio Virgin. As soon as you get there,
          you are where it is summer all the year round; but we do not wish
          you to go there until you are appointed to go. We want you to go
          where you are sent, for you cannot get your endowments until you
          have proved yourselves--that is what we intend; it is the mind of
          brother Brigham, the President of the Church of Jesus Christ of
          Latter-day Saints, and the Prophet of God, who holds the keys of
          life and salvation pertaining to you, and me, and all the
          world--not a soul is excepted, neither man, woman, nor child;
          they all belong to him; for he is the Prophet, he is our Priest,
          our Governor, even the Governor of the State of Deseret.
          296
          I think more of the things that pertain to the Church of Jesus
          Christ of Latter-day Saints, or the kingdom of God, than I do of
          these little petty territorial matters. I presume if the brethren
          in this Conference will go into these valleys, and grow wheat,
          raise cattle, and other products of the earth, and then give
          one-tenth of all their increase into the Lord's storehouse, and
          one-tenth of all they have got now, we shall be able to set to
          immediately, and build a temple, and finish it forthwith, and
          abandon the idea of the Church building houses for individuals,
          to get a few dollars here and there to carry on the public works.
          Let us attend to the Church matters, and rear that wall round the
          Temple block as soon as possible, and apply the Church funds to
          this purpose, instead of putting them in to the hands of a few
          individuals, that would perhaps pay one hundred dollars, or turn
          in a yoke of cattle, and say, "Build me a house, and then let the
          Church pay the difference." They will pay so much, and perhaps
          the rest of it is sucked out of the vitals of the Church. This is
          afflicting the Church; it cannot carry this burthen, but must and
          will throw it off, and use the tithing in building a temple, a
          baptismal font, store houses, and such things the Church has need
          of. I do not know whether you have any desire to have a temple
          built or not. Have you reflected upon it, that we may go to with
          our might, our means, our substance, and with all we have to
          build a house to the Lord, to build fonts, that we can attend to
          the ordinances of salvation for ourselves, our children, our
          fathers, and mothers, both living and dead? What do you say? If
          you say we shall do so, raise your right hands. (All hands were
          up.) It is clear that they will have a temple, brother Brigham.
          296
          Now if you will take hold together, and do as you have been told,
          and go and people those rich valleys, except those who have been
          counselled to stay here, for if they are wanted here, it is
          necessary they should stay here; you shall be blessed. Gather up
          your substance, and go and make farms for yourselves, that you
          can raise from two hundred to three thousand bushels of wheat
          next summer. We have been in those valleys two or three times on
          exploring expeditions, and we are going again next fall, over the
          mountains, down into the lower world, if the Lord will. We shall
          thus travel back and forth, and live about as much in one place
          as in another; for the future we shall keep on the move, going to
          and fro, and shall never be easy; we never want to be, nor that
          you should, until the kingdom of God prevails over this earth. We
          will fill up these mountains, take up the land, and, as they used
          to say in the States, "become squatters," and we will become
          thicker on the mountains than the crickets ever were.
          297
          If you can once break up the ranks of the crickets, it breaks up
          their calculations, and under such circumstances they never will
          undertake a war upon your crops. In like manner we have to become
          one, and build a Temple, that we may learn the principles of
          oneness more fully, to prepare for all things to come, that when
          we become fixed for war, we may whip out all the enemies of
          truth, and never yield the point, neither man, woman, nor child
          that is in Israel.
          297
          As for murmurers and complainers and fault-finders, we want to
          give them some employment, and we shall attend to that part of
          the business before long. After meeting we will lay the thing
          before them, and all the murmurers, and complainers, and
          fault-finders, &c., we want they should raise their right hand to
          do some good. If they want to vote, we will appoint a meeting at
          the Council House directly after Conference, and organize them
          into companies, and appoint a building committee to build brother
          Brigham a house, and the person who murmurs the worst shall be
          the President. We will give him the same right which we gave to
          Father Sherwood; but it was a tie between him and Zebedee Coltrin
          which should preside; but Father Sherwood's tongue being more
          limber, he whipped out Coltrin, and got the Presidency. We will
          organize a company of males and females, for we calculate to give
          females an office in that company, and they shall be upon an
          equal footing with the men. Now there's a chance for you women
          who seek to be equal with your husbands. This is sticking to the
          text brother Brigham gave yesterday. But I believe I will stop
          speaking for the present.
          Journal of Discourses / Journal of Discourses, Volume 1 / Parley
          P. Pratt, July 10, 1853
                           Parley P. Pratt, July 10, 1853
                                    "MORMONISM."
            A discourse delivered by Parley P. Pratt, in the Tabernacle,
                        Great Salt Lake City, July 10, 1853.
          297
          I hope the congregation will lend us their undivided attention,
          and exercise their faith and prayers for those that speak, that
          the truth may be drawn out to the edification of all.
          297
          I always feel diffident to address the assemblies of the people
          of God, at the seat of the government of the Church, knowing that
          there are many that can edify and enlighten our minds better than
          I can. I always feel that I would sooner hear than speak. But
          nevertheless, I feel it my duty to impart my testimony, and
          exercise my gift among my brethren, according to my calling; I
          therefore shall address you for a while this morning.
          297
          There may be many strangers assembled with us as at this season
          of the year; many are passing through this city from different
          parts of the world. The members of the Church need not complain,
          if I should address myself to the people as if they were all
          strangers, on the principles that are sometimes designated
          "MORMONISM;" and confine myself to some of the plain, simple,
          introductory principles of that system. It will refresh the minds
          of those acquainted with them, and perhaps edify them, and at the
          same time edify others.
          298
          Suppose I were to ask a question this morning, as a stranger.
          "What is "Mormonism?" I suppose it is known to most men at all
          conversant with principles classed under that name, that it is a
          nickname, or a name applied by the public, and not used
          officially by the Church so called. Mormon was a man, a Prophet,
          an author, a compiler, and a writer of a book. Mormon was a
          teacher of righteousness, holding certain doctrines. The Church
          of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints are agreed with Mormon, as
          well as with many other ancient writers, and hold to the same
          principles; therefore their neighbours have seen fit to call
          those principles they hold, "MORMONISM." They might as well have
          called them, Abrahamism, Enochism, or Isaiahism; because the
          ancient Prophets, Patriarchs, and Apostles, held to the same
          truths in general terms, only differing in circumstances, in
          distant countries and ages of the world, and acted upon the same
          general principles, according to the particular circumstances
          that surrounded them. But the world, out of all the ancients,
          have selected one called Mormon, and all the principles held by
          all good, inspired men of all ages and countries they have seen
          fit to sum up, and call "Mormonism." Well, it is as well as
          anything else, for aught I know; the name does not affect the
          principles.
          298
          The word of God, as written in the good old Book, designates the
          people of God by the name of Saints; which name is almost or
          quite as ancient, as any writings extant. Saint was spoken of by
          Enoch long before the flood. The same term was applied to the
          people of God by the Prophets, the Psalmist, and by the writers
          of the New Testament.
          298
          Not only was this term applied to Saints in ancient days, but the
          Patriarchs, Prophets, and Apostles applied it prophetically,
          speaking of the people of God in the latter days, when the
          kingdom should be given to the people of God, and the principles
          of God should bear rule over all the earth. Daniel and the other
          Prophets, in speaking of this subject, always call them the
          Saints of the Most High. They do not call them "Mormonites,"
          Methodists, Presbyterians, Congregationalists, Jews, Pagans, or
          Mohammedans, nor yet Catholics; but the language of the Apostles
          and Prophets is, that the SAINTS of the Most High shall
          prevail--prevail over the world, establish a true order of
          government, and, in short, rule the lower world, and that all the
          nations shall bow to him who is at their head, and to the
          principles held by them.
          298
          Why not this be continued and sustained, O ye people of
          Christendom, and, letting these party names go by the board, and
          be classed among the things that were in the darker ages, come to
          the proper and correct Scripture language, and when we speak of
          the people of God, call them SAINTS OF THE MOST HIGH?
          299
          Well, then, such is the name that the Church which I represent,
          do their business in. As such, they are known on their own
          records, and on the records of heaven, inasmuch as they are
          recognized there. But we know what the world means when they say
          "Mormonism," and "Mormon." What are the principles called
          "Mormonism?" You may ask those who profess to be instructors of
          the people abroad in the States, and elsewhere--and very few of
          them will give you one correct idea in regard to the doctrines of
          the Latter-day Saints. Indeed they have not informed themselves,
          but remain in ignorance on the subject; and when they would show
          others, of course they cannot inform them correctly on that
          subject. But you will generally be informed, that "Mormonism" is
          a new religion, that it is something new under the sun, and of
          course is an innovation--a kind of trespass on Christianity, on
          the Bible, or on the good old way. "O," say some of the editors
          that ought to be the most enlightened, and that profess to be,
          "if Mormonism prevails, Christianity will come down."
          299
          Now suppose that we examine, principle by principle, some of the
          fundamental principles of "Mormonism," and see whether there is
          one item that is new, or that is in any way an innovation on
          Christianity.
          299
          What is the first start towards an introduction of these
          principles in this age, and the organization of a people? What is
          it that first disturbed the world, or any part of it, or called
          the attention of the people towards it, giving rise to the system
          now called "Mormonism?" It was the ministration of angels to
          certain individuals; or in other words, certain individuals in
          this age enjoyed open visions.
          299
          Now we will stop, right at this point; it is called "Mormonism."
          Let us dwell on it. Is that a new principle? Is it adding
          something to Christianity, or taking something from it? Do not
          let our modern notions weigh anything, but come right to the fact
          of the matter. If Peter the Apostle were here to-day, and a
          person were to relate to him a vision wherein an angel appeared
          to him and said something to him, would Peter call together the
          rest of the Apostles, and sit in council on that man's head for
          error? Would they say to that man, "Sir, you have introduced
          something here in your experience that is derogatory to
          Christianity, and contrary to the system of religion we have
          taught, and introduced into the world?" I need not answer this
          question, neither need I bring Scripture to show what were the
          teachings and experience of Peter and the rest of the Apostles on
          this subject. The Bible is too common a book, too widely
          circulated in the world, and the people of the United States,
          especially, are too well read in its contents to suppose, for a
          moment, that Peter or the rest of the Apostles would condemn a
          man because he believed in the ministration of angels, because he
          related an experience wherein he had had a vision of an angel.
          299
          Now that was the principle that disturbed this generation, in the
          commencement of the introduction of that which is now called
          "Mormonism"--a principle as common in the ancient Church as the
          doctrine of repentance. I will say more--it is a principle that
          has been common in all dispensations; it is a principle which was
          had before the flood, and fully enjoyed by the ancient Saints, or
          at least held to by them; a principle that was common among them;
          not that every man attained to it.
          299
          But where can we read, under the government of the Patriarchs,
          before the flood or after it; before Moses or after him; before
          Christ or after Christ--where can we read in sacred history of a
          people of God by whom the doctrine of visions and ministering of
          angels would be discarded, or be considered erroneous? It was
          common to all dispensations, it was enjoyed by the Patriarchs and
          Prophets under the law of Moses, before it and after it, and by
          the people of God among the Ten Tribes, and among the Jews. We
          will call it still further. It was enjoyed among the Gentiles,
          before there was a people of God fully organized among them in
          the days of Christ. Cornelius had the ministering of angels
          before he became a member of the Christian Church, or understood
          there was a crucified and risen Redeemer. He prayed to the living
          God, and gave alms of such things as he had. He was a good man,
          and an angel came to him and told him his prayers were heard, and
          his alms had come up as a memorial before God.
          300
          It is astonishing then, to me, that the modern Christian world
          consider this a new doctrine, an innovation--a trespass on
          Christianity. No! it is as old as the world, and as common among
          the true people of God, as His every day dealings with man. We
          will leave that point, and say, it is the Christian world, and
          not the Latter-day Saints, that have a new doctrine, provided
          they discard that principle.
          300
          What next? Why, that man, by vision, the ministering of angels,
          and by revelation, should be called with a high and holy
          calling--commissioned with a holy mission to preach, and teach,
          and warn, and prophesy, and call men to repentance. That was one
          of the first principles introductory to what is now called
          "Mormonism" in this age.
          300
          Is there anything new about that, anything strange, anything that
          differs from the Patriarchal ages, from the Jewish economy, the
          Mosaic dispensation, or from the dispensation called Christian?
          Similar things happened before Moses, in his day, and after his
          day; and among the Prophets, and in different ages. Were not such
          things common in the days of Jesus Christ, and after that in the
          days of the Apostles? Was not John the Baptist thus commissioned?
          Was not Jesus thus commissioned. And were not His Apostles,
          Elders, and Seventies? After his resurrection, and ascension into
          heaven, were not others called, and ordained under the hands of
          those who were thus commissioned, and called sometimes by visions
          and revelations directing them to those who were thus
          commissioned in order to be ordained? That was no new doctrine,
          no innovation on Christianity, no perversion of the Scriptural
          system, nor was it anything new, unless you call the old
          principle new.
          300
          Well, then, that the man thus commissioned should call upon
          others to turn from their sins; and that an individual, a
          government, a house, a city, a nation, or a world of people
          should perish unless they did turn from their sins--is that
          anything new? No. Every one conversant with the Bible will say,
          that such things took place frequently under all the different
          dispensations. The heathen were warned in this way. Individuals,
          households, cities, nations, and the world have to be warned in
          this way, and especially under the Christian dispensation. So
          there was a special commission given to the servants of God, to
          go to all the world, and call upon everybody to repent, or whole
          nations should become disfranchised, scattered, and millions be
          destroyed, as for instance the Jews at Jerusalem, because they
          would not hearken to it. It is nothing new, to cry to all men to
          repent, and warn different cities and nations of wars coming upon
          them, or that they will be damned if they do not repent. This is
          one of the early principles called "Mormonism." Is there anything
          new in this? Is there anything strange or unscriptural? No; no
          sensible professing Christian will maintain such a point for a
          moment.
          301
          Suppose that some people should hearken, when the ministering of
          angels takes place. Among many men one certain man is
          commissioned by revelation to preach the Gospel, and cry
          repentance. Suppose that some persons hearken and repent, and he
          should take them and walk down to the water, and bury them in the
          water in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy
          Ghost, and raise them again out of the water, to represent the
          death and burial of Jesus Christ, and his resurrection from the
          dead; and to represent the faith of the individual thus
          ministered to, that he does believe in Jesus Christ, that he
          died, and that he did rise from the dead, and that he, the
          individual, does put his trust and confidence in him for the
          remission of sins and eternal life--is that anything new? Would
          that be new to Peter? Suppose some person was to relate before
          Peter and Paul to-day, and the Christians with them, that lived
          when they lived--suppose they were all present, and this person
          told them that a man came along preaching repentance, and he
          called upon us to believe in Jesus Christ, and we did so,
          believing their testimony, and they took us and buried us in
          water, and raised us again out of the water unto newness of
          life--would Peter or John blame him? Would Paul say, "It is
          something new?" Or would he say, "Brother, thousands of us
          received the very same thing in ancient days?"
          301
          The Catholic Church profess to be the true Church--the ground and
          pillar of the truth, handed down by regular succession from the
          ancient Church, of which they are still members; and their
          priesthood and apostles are now of the very same Church which the
          New Testament calls the true Church at Rome. These Roman
          Catholics of modern times profess to be members of the very same
          Church that Paul wrote that epistle to. If they are, I will show
          you to demonstration, if the Scriptures be true, that this
          doctrine called "Mormonism" is not a new doctrine. Paul, writing
          to that Church, of which they profess to be members, says, Know
          ye not, brethren, ye Romans, that as many of you as have been
          baptized into Christ have been baptized into his death, being
          buried with him by baptism into death, that like as Christ rose
          from the dead, even so ye may walk in newness of life? Now this
          epistle containing this doctrine was written by Paul to the
          Church at Rome, and which these modern people called Roman
          Catholics profess to be members of. If they are what they profess
          to be, every one of them have been buried with Christ in baptism,
          and have risen again to newness of life. We will, however, leave
          them to describe whether that is really the case, or whether they
          are contented to sprinkle a few drops of water on an infant's
          face and call that a burial! Paul said that was a principle of
          the true Church of Rome that had been buried with Christ by
          baptism into death, and had risen to newness of life. Have these
          modern Roman Catholics gone forward repenting of their sins, and
          been buried in water, in the likeness of the death of Jesus
          Christ according to this pattern? If they have not, they are a
          spurious Church of Rome, and not real. Therefore, if they be the
          real Church of Rome, it will be no new thing to them when the
          Latter-day Saints inform them upon being buried with Christ in
          the likeness of his death, &c. If this is a new doctrine to them,
          they had better be looking about them to see if they have not got
          up a counterfeit Church of Rome, for Paul knew of only one, and
          the members of it were all buried with Christ in baptism.
          301
          If 500 persons here were to say they came repenting of their
          sins, and went down and were buried in the waters of baptism, and
          had risen again to walk in newness of life, Paul would say, if he
          were here, "It is just what we used to do in ancient times; and